Professional Documents
Culture Documents
Handbook of Ethological Methods
Handbook of Ethological Methods
Handbook of Ethological Methods
SECOND EDITION
PHILIP. N. LEHNER
Depdrtmenl of Biology, Colorado Stote Universiry
h-eol
F,.
J,uu
Psigtilw,tZ
-(z
-;)
C.m,rnnrDGE
UNIVERSITY PRESS
-__/,l'
Contents
pagexw
Prefoce
'l
lt
IT
r,,'l
INTRODUCTION
l.l What
is ethology?
1.2
1.3
What to study?
l.j.l
1.j.2
l.j.j
l*vels
oJ behovior
Areasofstudy
Categorics
of
4
questiore
l0
t.s
ll
Ethological approach
l3
GETTING STARTED
t7
19
l9
z.z
20
2.2.1
2.2.2
Anotomyond physiology
21
a behavioral act
24
2.3.1
The
2.3.2
Stimuli
24
2.3.3
2.3.1
Behavior
26
26
2.i.5
28
2.3.6
2.3.7
Feedbock
37
Feedlorword
37
mimol
24
38
2,1,t
2,11
Focuhgrutorch
Dowhpht an .xpanM ot mon locutd
38
39
39
nobl
4t
ltchst h otlmb
I'
CONTENTS
CONTENTS
2.5 Summary
3 CHOICE OF SUBJECTS
6.5.2
6.5,3
xi
Experimmtal designs
129
t4
47
147
47
6.7 Determination of
t48
50
3-2.1
5l
3.2.2
53
sample size
7 EXPERIMENTAL RESEARCH
z.l Thevaryingvariables
7.1.1 Noturol variation
4 RECONNAISSANCE OBSERVATION
4.1 How to observe
4.1.
4.1.2
4.1.3
4.1.4
4.2.1
4.2.2
54
58
Fieldnotes
6t
Equipment
65
describe behavior
Empirical versuslunctionoldescriplions
Cotalog, repertoire md elhogrom
4.3 Information
4.3.1
4.3.2
4.3.3
54
An exercbe in obserting
-- 4.2 How to
'
54
resources
7.
z.r
8l
86-
Otherresearchers
97
98
5 DELINEATION OF RESEARCH
5.1 Conceptualizingtheproblem
100
100
5.L2
Statingobjectives
102
5.1.3
Research hypotheses
t02
t57
167
177
of measurement
-8.3.1
8.3.2
8,3.3
t00
5.1.1
8.2
155
167
93
l5l
7.2.1 In thefield
7.2.2 In the laborotory
II
8l
94
Artificial manipulation
8.
Literature
1,2
150
Adlibit':um sampling
Continuow recording sampling methods
E,5.2
Intro-obrner
183
183
tc{
197
206
2lo
8.5 Reliability
183
201
8.4 Observereffects
E,5.
l8l
r89
t03
174
212
or sef-reliability
Inter-observer reliability
219
214
DESIGN OF RESEARCH
105
221
6.1
,105
E.6.1 Noturolmarks
221
6.2
Variables
107
8.6.2
6.3
Behavior units
109
E.6.3 Assigunent of
6.3.1
6.3.2
6.3.3
6.3.4
il0
6.3.5
l14
il5
t23
t24
Volidity
6.4 Rescarchcr-statistician
IN
t26 _
126
t,6
9
9,1
9,2
223
210
DATA.COLLECTION EQUIPMENT
233
235
Drb hnnr
236
236
11,1 Cohtmtai,ovt
217
tl *q
)Al lrilrnlrlry*r,' '
238
238
CONTENTS
CONTENTS
250
253
254
9.8 Microcomputers
256
Datacollection
Dala storage and manipulution
9.9 Audio-taperecorders
I
2
9.9 3
9.lo
266
267
267
9.9
269
Playback of sounds
2'13
347
348
Hypothesis testing
282
I1
283
276
Still photogruphy
285
293
Filmanalysis
296
9.14 Metronomes
308
307
309
l5.l
9 l5 2
3t0
Biotelemetry
313
AND DESCRIPTION
319
Individualbehavior
319
l0 I
l0
l0
Disploys
358
7.1
7.2
Sample disttibutions
358
358
7.3
Skevness
359
7.4
Location
359
7.5
7.6
I I 7.7
I I 7.8
284
299
275
Motion-picture photogruphy
352
Variubilily
361
Standard deviation
361
362
CoeJfcient
of voriation
12 SELECTION OF A
I
353
276
l.l
2
3
351
Equipment
349
lo.l
366
STATISTICAL TEST
tests
369
377
379
369
369
II
347
Statisticalhypotheses
Photography
345
Statistical principles
9 l0
9.ll
9.ll
l5
I l.l
ll 2
ll 3
Ultrasonic delectors
II
I
I
II
II
II
9.4
I0.l
2
9. l0 j
9.1
257
9.9.
250
9.6 Stenograph
9.7 Computer-compatible data loggers
981
9.8 2
III
247
xlll
381
381
38t
384
measures design
386
386
319
32t
t2t
2.2
Dominant-suhordinate relutionships
326
2.3
So<.iol orguni:ation
138
l.l
ll I I
14 l)
l\t,nriililtt
(hx,vrriuhlr
l.l
,t Rlrttkrlizctl block,
l1) I l)tr wrthlt
391
39t
391
4t2
nurtchcd pairs
421
421
;"
CONTENTS
CONTENTS
xlv
15 RATES OF BEHAVIOR
l5.l
SEQUENCES
440
Ratesofbehavior
5.2.2
444
sequences
47
Inter-individual sequences
456
MULTIVARIATE ANALYSES
16
AND PRESENTATION OF
18 INTERPRETATION
AND ANALYSIS OF
RESULTS
l8.l
522
522
522
523
465
527
530
531
536
16.l Matrics
465
539
468
18,4 Re-evaluation
539
469
474
476
479
479
scaling
482
16.7 Summary
16.8 Software packages for statistical analyses
539
APPENDICES
539
AL Factorials.
Values
541
oft!
541
lor n* I to
482
483
542
199
543
test
lor
homogeneily of tariance
544
545
7. 1.
17.1.2 Rayleigh
17.1.3 Y test
485
487
test
489
49t
17.2 Difference between sample mean direction (or time period) and specified
direction (or specified time period)
493
494
l7.j.l
17.3.2 llatsorlhlliams
1 7.
3.3
llatson-lAiilhms
coelficient
r,
551
for
of r for
Crilicol
values
of
the Mann-Whilney
nall samples
for
lw4ailed
bnot two-sample,,
wo- lo iled
rcsr
lor
es I
lor
5U
values
values
Table
AlE. Criticul
volues
Tobte
Al9. Critical
volues
coelficient
-plogrp
tttt
567
569
lbbLA2l,Crltl(g,lwlwtofttlorthtY
555
test
variance
Tabte
Mlt
samples
500
5t0
lot
560
tesl
556
496
502
554
555
small samples
502
tests
test
Thble
values
552
553
Al0. Critical
large
495
tesl
ollJ for
Alpha=0.05
Table
7.4.
s49
AI5. Crilical
Table Al6, Critical
494
495
56
Tbble
485
test
570
571
57f
574
576
time
578
5E9
a'
t Introduction
One does not meet oneself until one catches the reflection from an eye
IEiseley, 1964:24]
ln choosing to study the behavior of animals you are setting off on a voyage across
wuters that are often rough and, in some areag poorly charted. This book is basictlly a compilation of practical information that is intended to help smooth the
wutcrs and assist you in charting your course. I have taken the liberty of infusing it
with personal and borrowed philosophy. These philosophical interludes are meant
lo $ment together concrete blocks of facts and invite you to stop and ponder what
you have learned and what it means.
clhologist can face is: 'So what?'You can be confronted with that question at technicrl meetings or cocktail partieq and answers vary from informative discourses to
ohlcene threats. I hope that some of the discussions found in this book help you to
wrcctle with that question.
IAlexander, 1975:77]
Onc of the greatest challenges you face is to keep your own studies of animal
hchrvior in perspective. Why did you choose that particular species or concept to
rludy (lcctions 1.4, 2.1, 2.2)?What is the focus of your study? Three dimensions of
lhrr
qucstions are discussed in section 1.3, below. What is already known about the
tubjcct (roction 4.3)? Are you replicating someone else's research, testing someone
rll0l hypothcsig, or ar you answering your own questions? Will your results be
llmltod to tho individuals you are observing or will you consider them a representallw rrmplo of a lrrgor population?
hr
Errllcr I uld thrt tho rtudy of animal behavior is a fascinating voyage; rememto oontlotully mru whotu you arg wherc you havc bcen, and where you are
tolnl,
WHAT TO STUDY?
INTRODUCTION
ilACRO
ogy makes interesting history and reading (Schaffner 1955l'77-78). Eisner and
ltttolYloae I
leBoReT0Rr
(highly controlled)
However, for our purposes, let us focus on Lorenz's ( 1960a) definition: 'Ethology
can be briefly defined as the application of orthodox biological methods to the
problems of behavior'. As a basis for this definition, Lorenz (op. cit.) described the
8p60
geneologyofethologyasfollows: '...biology...isitsmother.'.whereas...fora
father, a very plain zoologist Charles Darwin'. Ethology's heritage should be kept
firmly in mind.
Ethology is a nearly limitless discipline which operates basically along the three
dimensions illustrated in Figure l.l. These are continuous dimensions along which
studies can be focused.
arc
(cellular)
l:ig. I
Reasons for studying animal behavior might emphasize either obtaining or applying knowledge. Drickamer and Vessey (1992) listed some of the reasons we study
animal behavior:
Three dimensions
I3 WHAT TO STUDY?
I trr some researchers this question is seemingly
rnost
ol their
tiul answer to the question: 'What to study?'Others want to emulate the media's
l)()rtriryals of Dian Fossey, Jane Coodall, Konrad Lorenz, and Niko Tinbergen.
I lrcy do not really care what they study as long as it is adventurous. However, what
pru
u\silrg ol' thc positivc impact ol' television on the environmental movement,
ol
WHAT TO STUDY?
INTRODUCTION
'nature films are like the highlight clips they show on the evening
sportscasts, all rim-bending slam dunks and home runs and kneecrumpling knockout punches.'As for diversity, there are about 1.4
a minuscule
CANADA GEESE
LEVELS
Species
The serious student of ethology must be prepared to observe inactive animals for
many uncomfortable hours under adverse conditions, when even the most avid
Population
ethologist would admit to dreariness and physical misery. Ethology has often been
glamorized, but it is not always glamorous (See Lott's, 1975,'Protestations of a field
FamiryGrouprss-
person'). Even determining exactly what it is you want to study can sometimes be
tedious, but this initial step is exceedingly important in the overall process. You can
Dyad
first define your research interests within the levels of behavior, areas of study and
categories of questions, discussed below.
t.3.t
",,,,,,]f,f,*
tndividual
Levels of behavior
if
BehavioralType
s)1
BehavioralAct "'-JJr'''Y'
Body
of behavior
can approach a real understanding of behavior
1969) to and from the aspect
point in his
Parts
Muscles
will concentrate on methods applicable to the study of whole organisms at the individual or group level under fleld conditions.
'
ftutt'!itn
lion. rlr whut llintlc ( 1975) hnr cullctl lhc'wcnk rncunirrg'rrrrrl 'llrorrg
ffiff,l","
watktng to food
Patch
leedlng
Bl1lg"n'*
bs
gastrocnemius
It
(Figure 1.3).
Ethologists must decide at what level they will be conducting research and how
their study will integrate with what is already known at the other levels. This book
_f
#/
asontstc
encounter
,*)L,,
behavior, using the tvkey (Meleagris gallopavo), is provided in Lehner (1987). The
concept of levels of organization is important to ethologists, and they should be
able
W
@
.J*N*n,..,,
Neurons
Irg l2
#/-+
tlblal nerve
Levels of behavior in Canada geese. At the upper levels there can be interspecific
and intraspecific interactions with other groups and individuals (drawing by Lori
Miyasato).
WHAT TO STUDY?
INTRODUCTION
'
Levels of
Causation- What are the mechanisms that underly the behavior? What
are the contexts in which it occurs, and what are the external (exogenous)
and internal (endogenous) stimuli that elicit the behavior? (See Figure
Anolysis
2.2)
'
Ontogeny - How does the behavior develop in the individual? What maturational and learning processes are important in the development of the
behavior?
'
specles
Evolution
( I 99 I )
of behavior in an evolutionary
context by the development and refinement of molecular techniques.
They describe several comparative methods to test different models of the
evolution of behavioral traits.
been brought to comparative studies
'finbergen's four areas of study can be grouped into two sets which address ques-
rlirlcd, questions
orgonismol
two sets can be divided into the study of causes and origins.
ln addition, Marler and Hamilton (1966) suggested the following five broad
,rrcus ol investigation of animal behavior that overlap those of Tinbergen: motivalr()rr. ccology social communication, phylogeny and ontogeny.
peripherol
slruclures
physiologicol
rg I
.l
in dewlap color, whereas populations to the north and south, which are sympatic
wilh A. litticltus. have unilorm dewlap colors. At the organismal level, aggresive
posturing bctwcen male A. rurolinensr.r (on the top branch) involves erected
nuchul und dorsal crcst, lateral compression of body black spot behind eye,
cngorgctl throlt, lnd latcral orientation, whereas during the courtship display
(bottom hrnnch), thc nralc has a rclaxed body posture and extended dewlap, and
lhc crcst unrl cyc spot urc abscnt. Thc physiological lcvcl shows some of the
prineipul intrinrie untl cxtrinsic lirctors rncdiutirrg rcproductivc cvcnts in
vcrlchrulcr unrl thcir l'ccdbnck rclntionnhipn. (Atluptctl l'ronr ('rcws. 1977).
WHAT TO STUDY?
INTRODUCTION
l.
Table l.
The relationships
of
Tinbergen's
'
dimensional.
'
Type of question:
Research directed at:
How -This includes the motor patterns used to accomplish a goal-oriented behavior (e.g. flying from one tree to another) as well as the under-
(Wilson, 1975)
(Wilson, 1975)
'How questions'
(Alcock, 1989)
Level of individual
'Why questions'
(Alcock, 1989)
Level of individual or
population
Ontogeny
Phylogeny (evolution)
Control (causation)
Function
ior are also studied to answer ftow questions. For example: How did flight
evolve in birds?
'
Why -Two basic concepts underlie the study of the why o[ behavior.
These are motivation and ecological adaptation. These separate, but
t33
Categories of questions
placement behavior).
The focus of research designed to answer a w&y question depends on
includes the study of when, how and why, and I would add the study of where and
who.
of the question.
McFarland (1985) illlustrated this with the question: Why do birds sit on
'
'
eoos?
'
Wht,t't' l'his
is thc
tt
o[ the research
is
discussion).
l'lrc
rry'ral
question is the starting point for all research; that is, we must determine
nlrirl thc animal does belore we can address any of the other questions. The who
rlreslion is often addressed next, i[ we can determine sex, age, etc. The spatial and
lr'rrf)orirl irspects (tvhcrc aru) uy'rcr questions) are usually relatively easy to measure
,ur(l rrrc lddrcsscd next. Thc ftr.,r, is more difficult to answer, and why questions are
I lrt' rrrost dillicult.
l ltc discussion above should give you a general idea
of the various
aspects
of
,rnrrrurl hchnviol that you might study. The lollowing sections provide an initial
ETHOLOGICAL APPROACH
INTRODUCTION
Perceive that a
l)rocesses,.,,hile studying animals in their natural habitat. I would especially recomnrcnd readr,lg Tinbergen ( 1958), Schaller ( 1973) and the compilation of autobiogra-
qu6tion exist3
I
Y
plries by Dewsbury (1985). Dethier (1962) also gives an illustrative and entertaining
tlcscription of the development of his laboratory research on blowflies. Ethologists
.lrould be more than collectors and analyzers of data; they should seek to 'underrt rr nd' their animal subjects at a level higher than quantitative analysis can provide.
lo the question
.9
tr
B
o
c
o
.;o
o
o
!o
4 Coll
o
o
o
!
F
(al
IE
(b)
Oata fail to
supPort
hypothesis
I)arling (1937) believed that in order to gain insight into behavior, the observer
become'intimate'with the animals under observation. Lorenz (1960b) sug1,t'stod that an even higher level ol empathy with the animals under study is neces',,r r y lbr a true understanding of their behavior.
stalement of PrinciPle
Fig. 1.4 Flow diagram
ol
the process.
Ethology is a science (McFarland, 1976), and as such, serious studies should adhere
to established guidelines. The 'orthodox biological methods'mentioned in Lorenz's
definition of ethology include the scientific method. The scientific method (Figure
1.4) is a logical, stepwise approach to research in all sciences including ethology
(Tinbergen, 1963; however,seeBaueq lgg2andHailman, 1975,1977 forotherviewpoints). This book is organized around the scientific method adapted for use in
5 Fl'IHOLOGICAL APPROACH
Irthology . . . is characterized by an observable phenomenon (behavior,
and by a type of approach, a method of study (the
hiologicirl nrcthod). . . . The biological method is characterized by the
g,cnclirl scicrrt ilic rrctlrocl.
ITinbergen, 1963 41 I J
()r' nl()vcurcnt).
Now that I have focused in on the mechanistic approach that will serve as the
foundation for this book, let me state that this does not exclude the pleasure. cxcitcment and artistry inherent in ethological studies. I also want to chanrpion thc
researchers who get to 'know'and cnrpathizc with thcir anintitls. atrtl wlto rccogltizc
and appreciate tlrc hurrnony thut hls cvrrlvc(l bctwccn tlrc itttitttitls bcirtg stutlictl irrttl
t lrc cnvironnrctr I . Scvcttl rcscit rcltct's ltrtvc tlcsclihctl t lrcir st rrtc ol' rttitttl it tttl t ltorrgltt
l hc ethologists quoted above were not encouraging rampant anthropomor(see Chapter 4; at the expense of objectivity (Carthy, 1966). Rather, they were
'lrrsrn
,,r,rting that genuine interest in the animalper se
I
ILehrman, ]9551
rnrrsl
situation.
rl
l hc ctlrokrgicirl irpploirch ( lrigurc 1.5) is thc rcsult of titting the scientific method
r,111.;l,r*r. ll c()nsisls ol'ir cirlclirl stcpwisc procctlurc by which clata are gathered
,lr(l lulltly/c(l
INTRODUCTION
Levels
PERCEIVE A OUESTION
Chaptors
(1,2,51
that we had an ill-defined hypothesis about the animal's behavioral repertoire. Most people's approach to life is
through constant hypothesis testing. For example, the very first time we go to work
(3)
ecssful trips our hypothesis that our office is located in Room 300 in the building at
CHOICE OF SUBJECTS
will get
us there.
After
a series
of suc-
llrc corner of Oak and Center Streets gains considerable support. However, should
,,ur boss move our office to another building while we are on vacation we will have
o reject our hypothesis and either revise it or formulate a new one.
(4,s)
More particularly, ethologists often perceive questions which arise from the
rt'ycction of our long-standing theories about the way animals should behave.
to study events that seem to contradict what we
of our knowledge of non-living
things. It is this discrepancy between what an animal 'ought to do'and
. . . biologists are drawn
(2,6\
DESIGN RESEARCH
tn
UJ
lr
uJ
=
z
rU
lrJ
F
()
EXPERIMENTAL
MANIPULATION
UJ
r\
at
[Tinbergen,1972:20J
NATURALISTIC
OBSERVATION
I'hat is, we constantly seek the order which we believe exists in the universe
(t lrrros theorists notwithstanding), and when events occur which seem to upset
=
z
UJ
ul
(8.9,10)
DATA COLLECTION
lt
our
rr
;
econceived ideas of the ways things should be, we either ignore the situation or as
,,t
llJ
o
UJ
N
A-.n
<q
uJi
q=
(11,12-17)
I
lre
sc
,rt tlrrs
=o
INTERPRETATION
sl ctl i t ion of this book they were designated as naturalistic observation and experrrnt'ntirl manipulation following a traditional distinction (e.g. Schneirla, 1950;
\rt'vcr', 1968) which reflected a field versus laboratory dichotomy. Both descriptive
I r r
(18)
Fig. 1.5 The ethological approach. The numbers in parentheses indicate the chapters in
this book which discuss the respective steps in the ethological approach'
Even during descriptive rescarch and thc citrlicst stagcs ol'cxPcrimcntal rcscarch
(i.e. rccrlnnaisslncc obscrvitiion). thc cthrllogicul lrpprottch gcttcrltlly inclutlcs illtlclincd hypothcsis tcsting. Whcn wc lirut hcgitt ohscrvirtB utt ltttittlltl. lhc lire t thul wc
cxpcrimental studies are conducted all along the continuum that connects the
l,rl)olilt()ry and fielcl ( Figure l. I ; Chapter 7).
'ur(l
"
IcIittlcnllrl lcncitlch.
Wlrcrr llrc clticks irt'c ir l'cw hours oltl thcy hcgin to crawl ahout uncler the
l)nlcnl, crtttsing it lo shil'l rrttrl utl,irrsl cvcry so ollcn. Sonrctirncs thc
t4
INTRODUCTION
parent stands up and looks down into the nest, and then we may see
time in
itre first begging behaviour of the young. They do not lose
for the first
see
they
head
parent,
whose
contemplating or studying the
quick'
repeated'
with
away,
right
time, but begin to peck at its bill-tip
remarkable
Their
bills'
tiny
and relatively well-aimed darts of their
(Kolata, 1985; Konishi, 1989; Nottebohm, 1989), barn owls capturing mice
alone
obviously released by very special stimuli which the parent bird
billparent's
the
distinguish
to
chick
.un p.orid., and which enable the
world'
its
in
tip from anything else it may encounter
seemed
. . . In the literature we had found some observations which
few 'sign
very
only
on
dependent
to show that here again was a reaction
had
chicks
Gull
Herring
his
(1928)
that
stimuli.' . . . Heinroth . ' . wrote
kept
were
they
when
especially
the habit of pecking at all red objects,
to
low, so that they could peck downwards' ' ' ' The special sensitivity
elicit
could
Goethe
that
fact
the
red was further demonstrated by
by red objects of various kinds, and of an appearance that
'grportunity
(l igure
It
,\
r
ll irreas, sub-disciplines and levels of study within ethology are important to a full
n rt
tendencyhadtobeexplained.Asregardsopportunityforexperimental
work, the reactions to cherries and bathing shoes showed that it should
Further' the
be easy to design dummies capable of eliciting responses'
veryfactthatreactionstocrudedummieswerenotrare'showedthatthe
would
chick's sensory world must be very different from ours, for we
food'
regurgitate
never expect a bathing shoe to
prevented
Therefore, when in the summer of 1946 no war conditions
students
out
zoology
my
I
took
field,
in
the
us any longer from working
Dutch
the
on
colonies
Gull
Herring
the
of
for a iortnight,s work in one
Frisian Isles. we carried with us an odd collection of Herring Gull
us
dummies and thus started a study which was to occuPy and fascinate
1
is
',,',, l,orenz expressed his suspicion that experimental psychologists were being
without observing the behavior of animals
asthebillwithoutreddidalsoelicitsomeresponse,theremustbemore
in a parent bird's bill that stimulated the chick' Also, the downward
78'
rrrt'rrtation, using skilled observation in both, better to define and test his hypothe-
Thatthechickswererespondingtotheredpatchwasobvious;however,
of
Itseemedtousworthwhiletogointothisproblemalittledeeper.
1960h'
and
was rather different from a Herring Gull,s bill: such as cherries,
the red soles of bathing shoes!
ITinbergen,
for
1.2).
responses
seasons.
'know-how,'notdependentonexperienceofanykindneverfailsto
It
impress one as an instance of the adaptedness of an inborn response'
it
watches
one
longer
the
but
sight,
seems so trivial and common at first
themoreremarkableitappearstobe....Thereactionisinnate,anditis
l5
84
186
ILorenz,1960a'72]
I ,,rr'n,,'s comment somewhat overstated the case, but is probably still valid in many
two' (description and experimentation) is
"r
11r,,''.
)lrscrvitl i()tt
ltttl t;ulntilicittion.
lrr l()6.1, whilc tliscrrssing thc history ol'cthology. Tinbcrgcn expressed concern
rlr,rt
llrt lrulrrrrccwrrsshil'tingloolirrlowru'tlscxgrclintcntatiort.
l'l6
INTRODUCTION
in high gear.
one discipline or the other (Hutt and Hutt, 1970; Willems and Raush, 1969).
Ethologists and psychologists no longer work in their private vacuum$ but rather
they are united with strong subdisciplines in the quest for knowledge about behavior. See Burghardt (1973) for an extensive account of the development of ethological and psychological concepts and methods into a more holistic approach.
t Getting started
A conceptual model of
animal behavior
I lrc
model for a behavioral act I develop and discuss below is an extension of the
I presented in the first edition of this book. I have found the model to be
rrrodel
sirnple enough to be a useful research tool, yet complex enough to accomodate most
It
of animal behavior
lr
rough this book. However, the model is not presented as a 'general law of behav-
r,rr'' nor is
Itt;
research, and
important to their study (see section 2.4.4). Also, one should examine other
with varying degrees of similarity that have been offered by several etholo-
rrrotlcls
l98l).
PREDISPOSITION TO BEHAVE
time can be considered a behavioral act (see Chapter 6). The modeldeveloped below
rr
for a point in time (behavioral act), but a series of models can be strung together
to analyze a segment of the continuous stream of behavior.
is
An animal's predisposition to
,rrrtl ttntogeny.
lior those species in which the environment (experience) plays a relatively large
" 'lt' in the lif-e history of a species (e.g. birds and mammals), the relative contribu-
below.
)+
(AB+PB)
rr()rr
Eo
t)
uttcttomy.
' r
I
,
r"
l:arly in life, in addition to the effect of it's prenatal experience, an animal's pre,l)()sition to respond to 'releasers' and 'unconditioned stimuli' (see section 2.3.5a)
I'ritnarily genetically determined. Also, as the animal matures its predisposition
l('itl'n more readily in response to certain stimuli and reinforcers may be geneti-
' r ll', controlled; this has been called 'preparedness' (Seligman, 1970).
,
Using a computer analogy, (GB+E'B+18) can be thought of as creating, modiflying, and containing the so.fix'are that consists of 'closed' and 'open' programs
).2.ta Genotype
(Mayr, 1974). Closed programs are primarily a result of the genotrpe and do not
\rr :tliom at the roots of ethology is that there is a genetic basis lor variation in
r" lr,t'n'ior between individuals (e.g. Partridge. 1983). The entire field of behavioral
"' rr\'{ics is based on this axiom. Behaviors that result from genetically fixed, closed
l,r,'r'r'lrns are called innate (e.g.egg laying in a snail, Scheller and Axel, lgga);
formula used by population geneticists (e.g. Futuyama, 1986) to exprcss thc total
phenotypic variation in a population (V,) as the sum of thc vuriatiort tlrrc lo genotype ( 2,,), environment ( Zn), and the interaction ( [',) ol'gcnotype irntlcrrvirrrrrrrcnt:
Vr:V,+Vt+l/l
Altttost ltllctltolopists(e.1'. l|;tlcsott. l()tl);uttl Psytltolol,isls(r'.,'. llttlrl', l()S.)llutvt'
t'ottt'lttrlt'rl lllrl ;ur ;urnr;rl's lrr'lrrt r()r r', llrt' tr':ttll ol lrollr rl', y'r.'11,r1\ |t' ;rrrtl llrt't'rrvr
1,,
\rtyone familiar with breeds of dogs selectively bred for various tasks, such as
r' tr teviltg game and hercling livestock, recognizes that an animal's genotype contrrlrttlcs to its bcltavior. It is also evident that to realize its full potential, that pre'lr,lrositiotr to rctt'icvc or lterd must be shaped in the proper environment. The
" ttt)/t'1,('itlso Provitlcs thc bltrcprint for the development of the onutomy and phys,i,,.ti1,.
lil,lll:l'
l,:;
"j)':,1
;';,i'1,:lll:::.i
lll'll, lllll,l:lili,::l:l',i':j'::llilll;',,,
PREDISPOSITION TO BEHAVE
23
type and environment interact. Gould and Marler (1987) referred to'innately
guided learning'. This interaction is reflected in: 1. Hailman's (1969) title, 'How an
instinct is learned', for the report on his study of food begging in laughing gull
clricks; and 2. Ewert's (1987:331) conclusion that prey-catching in toads is 'mediltcd by innate releasing mechanisms (IRMs) with recognition properties partly
rrrodifiable by experience'.
"o
Lr
Also, the genotype, along with the animal's anatomy and physiology place'bio-
tr
o
(J
Itrgical constraints
q)
.lJ
cl
6J
&
Stevenson-Hinde,
19"73;
rrrts readily associate taste (internal cue) with illness and exteroceptive cues
rlrsht/sound) with painful electric shock, but they don't readily associate taste with
Oo/o
fre-natal
,"6@8
In summary, behavior that is initially programmed in the genome can be devel,,1rcd and expressed only in the proper environment and can be modified by experi,
.r
Individual's lifetime
Fig.2.1 The relative contribution of the genotype and environment during an animal's
\ rrrloffi! and Physiology both enable and constrain behaviors. Wings (along with
'
As described above, the environment (biotic and abiotic) provides lor the proper
development and expression of innate behaviors and predispositions. This is also
true lor behaviors that are primarily learned. That is, the environment also provides
experience and the proper context for expression' For example, squirrels have to
learn through experience how to efficiently crack open and eat a hazelnut (EiblEibesfeldt, 1963); they can develop and later express this behavior only in the presence of hazelnuts, or similar nuts. Experience results from the various associtttions
of stimuli, behavior and consequences which are the bases for learning and modif ying future behavior (Davey, 1989; also see section 2.3.5). The envirt])nmcnt itlstr
aflects the anatomy and physiology through factors such as injury, cliscitsc. clittiittc.
and nutrition.
2.2.1t' Intcrat'tion
o.l'
'lt'lttttt'rl
Althorrglt wc trttriltrrlr. 'irrrr;rlt" llclr;rVit)ts l)ilnlilltlV to lltt' l't'lttrlylx' iltlrl
lltt'1't'ttrr
lrt'lutviots l)illniiltlV lo llrt.r.rrYrr()liln('ltl (t'r1rt'ttt'tttt'). rt't';tl:.,r Ltl()\\'llt;tl
rrr,rlrility to fly. From the earlier analogy, an animal's anatomy and physiology is the
i,,rr,ltrut'c necessary to perform behavior and store feedback from the environment
rl,,' results ol'Hubel and Wiesel's extensive research in the 1960s and 1970s on the
tl,'t l ol'scnsory deprivation on the development of the visual system of cats and
rrr, rn kcyS hy stuting: 'at the cellular level, there is a critical period, during which ade-
,1rr,rlr'
r, ,
see
at all, even
if
Itt'st';rrclrcrs lrrrvc rtlcntilicd thc brain centers and neural pathways necessary for
rlr,'tlt'r't'loprrrcnl. nrcn)()r'y lrttrl pcrlirt'rnunce of bird song (e.g. Nottebohm, 1989).
I lr.' lrr;rin ('('nt('r's lirr birtl song tlcvclopmcnt arise in part from a genetic blueprint
,rr(l ur l);ul lrorn t'rrtltil'('n()us lrrrrl cxtlgctttlrrs stit-t-tttlatit.ln. The hormones (endoger, ,u'. 'rlrnrrrlr) n('(('\sirrV lirr slirttulrrtinp', tlcvclrll'llncttl itrc thcmselves triggered by
, .('1,('n()lt\ \lrnrrrlr (('I l)lr()lo;lr'rrrltl rrtttl lt'ril1lt't':tlttt'e ). ltt s0tttc spccics thtlsc brain
111
Exogenous
template'.
stimuli
Positive feedback
t't
e--"--
'-?-->
For example, the genotype provides the 'innate template' in the young Swamp
sparrow's brain that allows it to filter out all but swamp sparrow syllables from the
(G+E+D+(A+P)
irr
Behavior
Behavior
-+
,,\,
-a
't-a-
it hears in the environment (Marler and Peters,l9lT). The adult male swamp
sparrow songs it hears provide the syllables to create the 'acquired template'which
will be the basis for comparison when the young swamp sparrow begins singing its
subsong, listening to itself, and improving it vocal output to create its crystallized
songs
-s
-'
------
\\\r.
-)
Consequences
'-)
Feedforward
, (Contingencies)
,ttstl
Negative feedback
I ig.
a behavioral act.
primary song.
2.3.2a Endogenous stimuli
2.3
rron. Th&t is, we operationally define behavior as that which an animal does as the
perform specific behaviors under a given set of environmental conditions are provided by Gu, EB. IB, A,and P. Also incorporated into the animal portion of the
model are endogenous stimuli (discussed below). Other parts of the model (Figure
2.2) are e-\ogenous stintuli, hehavior, ('onsequen('es, contingencies, feedbac'k and./bedforward, all of which are discussed below
rr'srrlt
1,,'lravior is elicited. Like Kuo, the Model assumes that'there is no such thing as
,lrorrtaneous behavior'(behavior thut is not stimulated) (quoted
in Marler
and
I;rntilton, 1966:605). However, there are behaviors that occur for which we cannot
,t('rcrmine the source of stimulation, and these are often called'spontaneous'
I
Although behavior does not occur spontaneously, it may be elicited by endogerr.rrs Stirnuli that arise spontaneously.
. . . every cell in the nervous system is not just sitting there waiting to be
told what to do. It's doing it the whole darn time. If there's input to the
nervous system, fine. It will react to it. But the nervous system is
2.3.2 Stimuli
L)r ('xiu.nple, Bekoff (1978a) found neural pattern generators in embryonic chicks
rlr.rl slintulatc coordinateci limb movements and develop in the absence of any pat-
and external) is appropriate. Stimuli that are effective in one context may be filtered
(centrally or peripherally) in another context. For example, cat lirocl kibblcs will
normally stimulate feeding only when the cat is hungry (interrral cttvirot.ttt'tcttt ) itrttl
not involved in a higher priority activity (e.g. chasing a r.nousc extct'ttitl ctlvittrtl-
r)(,r
ment).
olirll lrr'llrviot'rlit't't'lly,
'lltltl
llrcrc rrrc llso bchirviors that occur in the absence of the exogenous stimuli that
nrirlly clicit llrcnr (c.g. hirrls'nest building'without materials, cats'prey catching'
lrttl
Releaser(s)
Key
Positive feedback
stimuli
Animal
lnnate
releasing
mechanism
--?-+
Behavior
Modal action
pattern
F,...-
-)
.r'
t-'-----
'...
,r,
Consequences
(Contingencies)
-)
Feedforward
ootat'/-
Negative feedback
or motivational force that leads an animal or person to behave in a certain way'. The
i\r
e--tt------isr\
I ig.
2.3 Where the ethologists' model of innate behavior fits into the model lor
of how you choose to perceive and label the basis for those stimuli.
behavioral act.
stimuli
l,
as
rllttws'
Exogenous Stimuli come from the external environment (biotic and abiotic), take
many forms (e.g. light, sound, odor) and arrive via the animal's various sensory
receptors (e.g. eyes, ears, nose). The animal's anatomy and physiology are responsi-
ble lor receiving, processing and responding to exogenous stimuli, as well as gener-
ating behaviors which produce exogenous stimuli. Several terms have been applied
to exogenous stimuli depending on the role they play in different behavioral para-
rilr'r)r irs .fi.rcd uction potterns. However. it is now recognized that experience also
t,l;rvs un important role. For example, Gerard Baerends, who began his ethological
2.3.3 Behavior
if
they cannot occur at the same time (e.g. sitting and walking). A behavior may also
of food.
r,.r'iu'ch six decades ago. recently concluded from his many years of studying
1,, ring gulls that'The infbrmation encoded in the lP.Mlinnate releasing mecha,,irrf iulrl the acquired inlormationfleurning]were found to work in combination.'
r rt,rlrcs tninc, I9u5:37).
llistoricirlly, cthologists and psychologists have been branded as having diametrr,;rlly o1-r1-rosctl vicwpoints on the relative contribution of the genotype and learnrrrj' lo bclurvior'. llowcvet. cthologists and psychologists are increasingly borrowing
UCS/CS or SD
Positive feedback
k-"Animal
learning in animals (Staddon, 1983), but each type of learning incurs selective
costs (in terms of fitness), as well as selective benefits (Johnston, 1981). Also, the
--?--> Behavior
(G+E+D+(A+P)
elicits
UCS
ta,
l'ig.
act.
The paradigm begins with a behavior being emitted and does not consider
,trrtruli that might elicit that behavior. However, the paradigm does include tliscrirurtrtrtit,c
stimuli. Figure 2.4 illustrates how both classical and instrumental condition-
ethologists'MAP(FAP).
) conditioning
The instrumental conditioning paradigm (below) states that a behuvirtr is emitted ancl
Discriminative stimuli
15t), ttr SI)
Ilcltlrvior'
(r'rrriltt'tl)
st
imu
elicits
Feedforward
2.4 Where classical and instrumental conditioning fit into the model for a behavioral
D is c r iminat
UCR
UCR
--)
UCR
CS--.--..----.------*CR
Consequences
(Contingencies)
---------t'
elicits
NS+UCS
\\
'..
Negative feedback
rrrs
.---.------------------.-*
-\trs
The classicul conditioning paradigm (below) describes how neutral stimuli become
conditioned through association, thus gaining the ability to elicit specific behaviors.
IJCR
\/
Behavior
( tlnsetlrtcrtt't's
it
is
SDs) to predict the consebcltrvior is a marjor benefit of learning. Tarpy presents a psychologist's
t','rspcclivc without using the term discriminative stimuli.
,lu('nce s ol'
I tkr'ttlrt'. I r)l('tll l)l('s('ttls lttt r.'lltolollist's ltcrsPective rlrt prctlictirrg tlrc tltttcrllt.tc ol'
rr rllrorrl rrrrrrll lltt'l('lln (lt\( tlnlnt;tltrr.slirnttlt.
Reinforcing stimuli
Presented
Omitted
Positive (So*)
Positive reinforcement
Extinction
(Tarpy, 1982); that is, they possess a sub.jective quality of a positive affective state
(Toates, 1988). Whether this is pleasure as we know it, or what Lorenz calls 'feeling
Aversive (So*)
Punishment
N egative
Table 2.1. During or immediately.follow,ing the behavior the rein/brcing stimulus is:
reinforcement
. . . a bird that 'wants'to carry out the beautiful motor pattern of nest
building . . . learns to recognize the situation in which performing the
good'and'satisfaction'(Nisbett, 1977:138, 289), does not affect the operant conditioning paradigm or the model. Even reinforcers that meet basic physiological needs
might be considered hedonistic.
I have
see
it.
ILorenz, 1981.291]
'
Consequences
'
Aversive reinforcing
s.
behavior. Positive reinfrtrcing stimuli (So*) are often called rewards. They are reinforcing stimuli which the animal perceives as'good'. That is, in the appropriate contexts, the animal will perform the behaviors necessary to receive those SR*s. The
SR*s are received by the animal under different contingencres of behavior called
'
Extinction ( omission ) can only occur after an animal has been positively
reinforced for a behavior.
animal receiving the SR+, omission is the consequence and the probability
An SR* may be a single stimulus (e.g. food item) or the opportunity to perform a
chain of behaviors (e.g. search, stalk, capture, kill, consume). Lorenz (1965) considered the consummatory act in a chain of behaviors as a reinforcer for antecedent
'
of performing
a behavior is
'
preferred behavior.
of
Negutive reinfbrcement can only occur after an animal has been punished
a behavior. Ii under the same conditions in which the original behavior resulted in punishment, a different behavior results in avoiding the
lor
Anin-rals nt:ry pcrlrlrrn belrirviors llurl rrt'c pt'irttrtt'ily irttt;rtt' (r'1,, t'otttlsltip lttttl
rrrirtirrg) ltccirrrsc tlrcy tc('('iv('rttlrt'tcttt. sttlrir't'tivr'tt'wttttls. lirr t'x;ttttplt'. irt
Si1'rrrrrnrl's 1lt)t)1..)0i',i ) r'it.rr'. '1ll;rV rs tls ou'n t('\\'intl' (',rlllts (l()(r.)1 tlott'tl llt:tt
[Bolles, |9BS.450J
seen that rats drink more of stuff that tastes good. And I do not
anything bad in thinking of this hedonistically; they like it, they do
llrcse lirur proxinrutc consequences probably rarely operate alone, but rather in
',r,nrr cr)r))birrirtion. ['or cxample, Balph ( 1968) found that individual Uinta ground
,(lun rcls (,\1x'rntttpltiltt.t ttrnrtttrr,r) diffbred in the probability their being retrapped
,)n('()r rrrorc lirrtcs. llirsctl ort ltis obscrvations. he concluded that each individual
,tlur rcl rlrlli'rcrrti;rllv we iglrctl tlrc 1'rositivc rcinlirrccrnent of the bait versus the punol lrt'rrr1'lrrrppr'tl l.rkr'rvisc. lrittirrg yorrr hlrking rlog with a newspaper
r',lrrrrt'rrl
(Sl'
) rs
rl'. lr.tt lrlilf'. lltr'tt lltt' ttt'r'tttll ntl(',ttt ltt)u t\ Pr'lr'r'ttt'rl lrf' llrt'rl()l'. rts ll,lsitivt' rcirtlilt'ec-
ment. That is, the dog's interaction with you (SR*) outweighs the aversive aspects of
being hit with the newspaper (SR ).
if it
(e.g.
Cherfas, 1980). Garcia et al. (1913) argued that since natural selection'has favored'
animals that seek and incorporate information, we should think in terms of animals
tSk
,,1'
ing stimuli for the respective behaviors. The reinforcing stimuli all provide information, but they can also be perceived as positive (e.g.smells'good':positive
ttf tttt t,ttlttt Sontc llclurviors irl)l)elr l() r('sull irr t'orts,.'tlrt'nt'r's llt:rt
It:tvc tto t'cittlirt'cing vrrluc (i.c. tlrev rrrt'sr'r'nrirrl'ly pt'rt'r'ivt'tl ;rs rrt'illrt'r l)()srli\'('n()r
rn'r'tsivt'). ( )ttt' t'rlrtnplt' ts llrc lttrltrtttttltt,tt o l unt ottrltltonr'.1 (llr nn;rttl\' ttttr;rlt')
t)Nn
).
'l'lris concept
of 'Se/e ction by Con,sequences' (Skinner, 1981) has been developed
l,r scvcral theorists, including Campbell (1956), Ghiselin (1973), Pringle (1951),
Sl'irutcr (1953. l98l) and Simon (1966). Also, Lorenz (1965) discussed the relation'lrr1r bctween reinfcrrcement and natural selection, and Pulliam and Dunford (1980)
,lt'siuttctl it modcl to demonstrate how it would operate in a hypothetical predator.
l'ullirrttt ancl l)untt>rd ( 1980) developed their mathematical model based on conse,
.rlrl1'1., clirssily ncurirl input I'rom eating red ants (toxic:punishment) and black
rnls (;rleirslrrrl lrrslc prositivc rcinforcement), store the information and recall it
'r lrt'n it rtcrtcttcotttttct's lttt lutt.
l',,,1 tll',,1(l
llll"
if
patches)
Table 2.2. Contingencies e.ffective in protlucing the four basic consequences o/'
behavior
Consequences
Effective contingencres
Extinction
SR* does
Punishment
l:ant
palatable)
Pulliam and Dunford assume that a lizard that has'a genetic program producing
this neural architecture . . . is favored by natural selection, because it leads to the
development of lizards that avoid poisoning themselves' (Pulliam and Dunford,
1980:
SR
egative reinforcement
of the behavior
Positive reinforcement
SR*
l3)
Fired rutio
As Maynard Smith ( 1982) and Sigmund (1993) have pointed out, it is difficult to
Fixed interval
imagine how an animal can translate proximate consequences into fitness. In fact,
Vuriable ratio
Variable interval
rrr
There are potential pitfalls to avoid when using the rnodel to conceptualize selec-
lllrnad,
is
selected. not the behavior which leads to the consequences (e.g. Dawkins,
r
r',rrrtingencies are the ways in which behavior and reinlorcing stimuli are paired
i\trrrltlorr,
|
in modilying behavior
l lrcsc lirr.rr basic contingencies for positive reinforcement produce different rates
,,1 lrt'lurvior'.
a behav-
t,tr lrttt't't,u/contingenciesarebasedontheamountoftimethathaspassedsincethe
l.r
r
,l rentlirrcctl occurrcnce
rrrr('
o1-
ol
llrt'st' lirtrr corrturgcrrcics are combined (in the laboratory and, perhaps, in
e84).
lcction of a repertoire ol'operant behavior patterns, but the mechanisms are only
,rrpcrlicially similar and pressing the analogy this lar will confuse students'.
of
',e
vidual) are adaptive and have been selected fbr (Adaptionist F'allacy';
u It is the genotype
1984). Finally, I will pass along a caveat sent to me by Dale Lott after he
lbod) and punishment (predator risk) will leave more offspring. Of course, there
of the concept of selec'tion by con.sequence.r (e.g. Catania and
, lr,',lrrlr's
ol
, rr11l1'rl:.
lr,',lrrlcr;rrt'llrc
lr;rsis
ol
tt'tttlt)t( ('ltl('lll
2.3.6 Feedback
I agree that 'the world of animals is not a gigantic "Skinner Box" in which they
gradually learn, by trial and error, whai to do and what not to do' (Dawkins,
1986:60). Trial and error learning(operant conditioning\ and classical conditioning
are only part of the animal's capacity to deal with its world. Other learning related
phenomena, such as insight, latent learning, discrimination learning, habituation
and sensitrzatron, also occur and can be encompassed by the model. Also, the
Model is not subsumed within general process theory (e.g. Skinner), rather its flexibility concurs with Roper's ( 1983) statement that,
. . . observations of natural learning tend to encourage the view that
learning consists, not of a unitary general capacity, but of a collection
of specialized abilities which have evolved independently in particular
species
to do specific jobs
I Roper, 1983:205 J
The model does not assume that the types of learning involved can always be
clearly distinguished. For example, Davey (1989) argued that in a typical classical
Feedback makes the model a closed-loop system (Pringle, 1951; Manning and
Dawkins, 1992; McFarland, l97l;Toales" 1980) which is necessary for any comprehensive behavior model.
1989;Rajecki, 1973).
rrvoiding punishment, respectively. Expectancies come into play when the animal is
Also, the model does not assume that classical and instrumental conditioning
are mutually exclusive and work independently. In fact, the model encourages the
researcher to consider both in behavioral analysis, as the lollowing illustrates:
conditioning study
[irrnurt iorr.
re
tlier,'lrl ol
Positive and negative feedback lorm two basic types of expectancy which direct
or readily
2.3.7 Feedforward
I lrc nroclel recognizes that the next behavioral act in the continuous stream of
lrclurvior citn be elicited by the consequence of the behavior that precedes it (i.e.
l"ectllirrwirrtl irlso occurs in a chain of behaviors (e.g. search, capture, consumpIrt,n ol'ptey)ls tlcsct'ibcrl by Ilinclinc (1988) in his commentary on Gardner and
t irrrrlrrt'r' ( l()l"iS):
As rlt'st trlrt'rl llry ( i;rttlttr't ltntl ( lltt'tlttct' i9tilll. 'll'etllirrwlrrtl'concerns
Itt'llrt t,,t ('n\ lrotttttr'ttl tr'lltliotts itt tr lrit'lr ()nr' sittt;tliott cvrtkcs lut
38
Causation
Exogenous
ltchqvioral act
Positive feedback
stimuli
l-----
Function
--?--) Behavior
(G+E+D+(A+P)
+
-
\a-
Evolution
Fig.
Behavior
OntogenY
-----___
Consequences
-)
Areas of study
liunction
('ausation
Feedforward
(Contingenctes)
(
)ntogeny
-at'
----'
Negative feedback
Irvolution
2.5 Where Tinbergen's areas of study fit into the Model for a behzrvioral act.
organized pattern of action resulting in a new situation that evokes a
different pattern of action resulting in yet another situation, and so on.
This type of behavior-environment relation has long been described as
applying to behavioral chains based on positive reinforcement.
When/Where
Exogenous
stimuli
Positive feedback
IHineline, l9BB:457]
k-'-'---
of the term feedlorward is somewhat different. but not exclusive of its use by
Toates (1980) and McFarland (1971:102) as a'phenomenon which enables an
animal to anticipate the long-term consequences of behaviour and to take appropriate action to forestall such consequences'. That is, an animal that is not thirsty
My
use
(G+E+D+(A+P)
+
_
fr'
'...
't--
Who/How
2.4
Behavior
What
---------- -.a'
-)
,'
whv
Consequences'-)
Feedforward
(Contingencies)
Negativefeedback
behavioral act.
Below are examples of how the model can be used as a basis for: l. conceptualizing
the areas of study (Chapter 1);2. organizing the types of question (Chapter I ); 3.
locusing research; 4. developing an expanded or more focused model; and 5. diagnosing and treating behavior problems. Chapter 5. on delineation of research,
describes how the model can assist in defining questions, objectives and l-rypotheses.
of question
,rltvrtys 'What docs the animal do?'. The model demonstrates that all the other quesrr()rts iu'c
(Figure 2.5, Table 2.3). This assists the rescarcher in sccing how ltis 1'ritt'licttlitt
research intercst fits into lhc'big picturc': thal is. how il irttcgnttcs willt otltct :ttt'rts
2..1..1
lirrcusing rcscarclr
ol'stucly.
llxltnrplt's ol tt'st'lrtt'lt tlr;rt lirr'rrst's otr ltrltliolts ol lltt'lttorlt'l tt'lt'rltttl lo t':tt.lt :ttt'lt
sl
ol ltrlV itt(' l)tovlrlt'rl lrt'l, rrv
rCllrtC
behavioral ac't
Exogenous stimuli:
Types of question
What?
Nicoletto (1993) studied the effect of male ornamentation and display rate on the sexual response of female guppies.
Behavior
foregut of a blowfly sends a messoge via the recurrent nerve to the brain,
territorial display)
Who?
Where?
When?
How?
sequencing
to breed, dominant,
great tits (Parus maior) in two lood patches with different densities of
reproductive 'drive')
Anatomy and physiology
Feedback: Brown and Gass ( 1993) demonstrated that rufous hummingbirds (Se/a sphorus rufus) learn spatial associations between cues and
rewarding feeders.
of
Feedfrtrw,ard: Lawhon and Hafner ( 198 I ) led seeds (millet) and seed
mimics (glass beads) to kangaroo rats (Dipodomys) and pocket mice
'booming' displays)
whv?
of l6 c'ourtship
(Gromp hador
months of age.
Artulonn,'. Chouclhury and Illack ( l99.ll sttrtlicrl ttutlc sclct'tion in ('ill)lt\'('
rt'lrrlionship bctwr:e n ontogenetic and causal factors and consequences (Figure 2.7).
sive interactions strongly influenced the outcomcs lirr.juve nilcs lcss lhirrr
(r
lrrrrlc's rnorlcl incorporatcs a route of action for ontogenetic factors that I have not
in
section
' I I . I lintlc lrrs rrlso inclrrrlerl (but not labeled) f-eedback (from functions to ontoger('lr('lir('tors):rrrtl li'ctllirrwirrtl(ll'orn gouls ttl cliciting factors).
42
Coneequences
SUB-SYSTEMS
BEHAVIOR
SYSTEM
1a"n"r,"i,,
r____;
___
MODULES
OR
EXTERNAL
RELEASERS
FI"ED ACTION
_____-_.ff:-r
ll
Predisposing
factors
]ueutrat
-|Harmful
gITE-KILL
ANOGENITAL.S}iIFF
FEEOING
BEHAVIOR
SYSTEM
l.
The model can incorporate the 'behavior systems' approach (e.g. Timberlake,
FOEAGING
iii. exogenous stimuli (Davey, 1989). For example, Davey's (1989:158) organization
of leeding behavior in the rat (Figure 2.8) is incorporated by recognizing that the
behavior system and subsytems are stored, modified. processed and activated (via
GNAW.BITE OFF
endogenous stimuli) within the animal's anatomy and physiology. The model can
then, lor instance, assist in visualizing the proximate and ultimate consequences of
each
of the behaviors.
SWALLOW
f soL,o I
Davey's model is similar in structure to Baerends' (1976) classic model of interruptive behavior during incubation in herring gulls (see Davey, 1989:320).
2. Alcock
l--1""*J
3. It
fr---r,
I
onel cues
-'l
L-)
liir. -).I'i 'llrr'lirtcliotutl orgltttizlrlion ol-a putativc ltc'cling behavior system for the rat
(
ll orrr I )ltve
()li()
).
SUMMARY
OBSERVED
RHYTHMS
ENTRAINMENT
PATHWAY
lenvironmental cues
6D
I - | receptors f- (_/
ORIENTATION
RESPONSE
CLOCK
MECHANISM
Fig.
ENVIRONMENTAL
CONSEOUENCES
OF BEHAVIOUR
2.9 A master clock may, in some species, act as a pacemaker to regulate the many
circadian rhythms of an individual (from Alcock, 1993, after Johnson and
lnfluenced by
DECISION
PROCESS 2
Hasting, 1986).
Escape or
immobility?
location of
stimulus etc.
Sensory input
switched off
'hormonal state,
Sensory input
no longer impinges
on animal
The model can be used by applied animal behaviorists as the basis for determining
the etiology of a behavior problem, what is maintaining it, and what manipulations
lnfluenced by
size of discrepency,
hormone levels,
past experience
in fights etc.
trig.
EXTERNAL STIMULI
(
isol ate,
liminate,
de
sensitize)
SURGERY
2,5 SUMMARY
kaslralbn)
CONSEQUENCES
(maintain, modify)
which ethological research could be designed and conducted. I have lound it uselirl
in assisting graduate students in designing research by getting them to recognizc thc
various factors, past and present, which contribute to behavirtr.
For the behavior (what) of interest, you can'plr"rg into'the rnotlcl whirt yotr h:rvc
learned from the literature about the variables tliat allcct that bchavior'. I,or llre
NEUTRALORSUBMISSTVE
-z)
AGGRESSION
t,/
lllltckltoltl'tl ;tlttl ltt:tiltslot ttt u'tllt t'ollr';11,11r's lo itlt'rrlill lrrlrltlt()lrill r;rr r;rlrlr.s 1t. 1'
t'\o|1'11,rttsslttttttlt)ttlttrlrrltottlrllrt't,,trit,lr'rt'rl;rttrlPo11'gllr;rlrrrt'llr,,rl,,,,l
trr,rrrrIrr
l,rl ttr1,. nr('.t'.ulnl, or r'lllnt,tl ntl, l lro,,r' r,u r,rlrl...,
talts I
2t
REINIr)RCEMENT
NEG RETNFORCEMENT
(type?) ./
\.
types of question (e.g. where'l whcn'/)y()r.r arc rttcr)rplirrg lo illlswcr. y()u cln bclin lrr
identify the variablcs (c.g. gcnotypc. cntlogcnorrs slirrrrrli)tlurt;rrc lrkelv lo lr;rrt.rr
l-llit.itlr cll'cct ()lt y()ul't'csttlls. Vrrr clrrr prrl (lre lllrrlitrlly r'onrplt'lt'tl rrtotlr.l orr llrr.
pos.
'l'
--1)
"
rulvrsrtMENr
EXTIN('T'ION
I rt' ' I I \,1111 1'l llrr'l,tt lol .,ttt.tIIl1r'rl t'llt,rl,'l,r',1 ttttl,lrl t,n,,t(l(.t tn,lltl'tt,rstttl,lttttl
llr.llllrl,,tlt.t),1'tr'..trrn
lrtillrlr'ilr til,t rlill,lrlr,trrrrrl,l'1 lll, trrl,t Ktt.t;r1r)
46
In tirne, as most of the terms in the model become replaced with real variables,
you begin to have more confidence in your grasp of the complexity of the research
you are proposing. You can pose more clearly defined questions, lormulate rnore
3 Choice
of subjects
exacting hypotheses, and begin the task of detennining how you will answer those
questions and test those hypotheses. That is what the rest of this book is about.
Ethologists corre to study particular species for various reasons, but all generally
l. their special interest in a particular ,species; or 2. using a
species that is suitable for investigating a particular rcncept. These two routes inter-
twine so that a researcher may become interested in pursuing a concept after having
studied various aspects of a species'behavior. Likewise, a researcher may initially
study a species in pursuit of answers to a conceptual problem and become fascinated with other aspects of the species'behavior.
;\s I
CHOICE OF SUBJECTS
turned out was a milestone in my life. For several years to come I was to
spend my summers with these wasps . . .
[Tinbergen, 1958.5 8J
Dethier, who spent many years pursuing the behavioral biology of the blowfly,
in the following
and then become interested in a limited type of behavior which lltcy hirvc ge ttct'itlized to other species. For example, Allee recoLlnts how lte bcgittt st trtlying ll'cslrivrttct
isopods and then became interestcd in sociul bclritviot'itt gcrtct-rtl.
tr gnrtlrurtc
in their reaction. . . .
Rather cockily I reported after a time to my instructor that I had
gained control of the reaction of these animals to a water current. By
the judicious use of oxygen in the water, I could send the indifferent
pond isopods hauling themselves upstream, or I could induce the stream
isopods to going with the current. I had not reckoned with another
factor that presently caught up with me.
After a winter in the laboratory it seemed wise as well as pleasant to
take my pan out to a comlortable streamside one sunny April day and
there check the behavior of freshly collected isopods in water dipped
from the brook in which they had been living. To my surprise, the
stream isopods, whose lellows all winter had gone against the current,
now went steadily downstream or cut across it at any angle to reach
another near-by isopod. When I used five or ten individuals at a time,
as I had done in the laboratory, they piled together in small close
clusters that rolled over and over in the gentle current. Only by testing
them singly could I get away from this grolrp behavior and obtain a
response to the curretrt; and even this reaction was disconcertingly
erratic.
It took another year of hard work to get this contradictory behavior
even approximately untangled; to find under what conditions the
attraction of the group is automatically more impelling than keeping
looting in the stream; and that was only the beginning of the road that
I have followed from that April day to this time, continuing to be
increasingly absorbed in the problems of group behavior and other
mass reactions, not only of isopods, but of all kinds of animals, man
be indifferent
included.
As the years have gone on, aided by students and other collaborators
and by the work of independent investigators, I have tried to explore
cxperinrcntllly the implications of group actions of animals.
IAllee, 1938.5
7J
Allcc pursuctl lris irttcrcst in the social behavior of animals and became an early
;rrtrl inllttcnti:rl ctlrologist. Thc unusualevents that led to E.O. Wilson's selection of
of study are recounted in his revealing autobiInsight into how severul other noted ethologists selected
,,1it'ltpltl'(Wils,rtt.
lltr'it tt'sr'rttt'lt
,,;,I;t;rlIlt's
199-+).
sP1'1'1q'5
CONCEPT-OR
CHOICE OF SL]BJECTS
50
behavior. The cliche that 'research generally provides more questions than it
ENTED RESEARCH
5l
answers'keeps some ethologists studying one, or a few, species for their entire career.
This is olten efficient in that they can build on past experience with the species and
are able to make ellective use
ol their time.
The indigo bunting was selected by Carey and Nolan (1975) to tesr the
'Verner-Willson C)rians hypothesis' that polygyny would evolve in avian species
where critical resources are distributed ir-r widespread patches, if the advantages of
one male mating with several lemales offset the disadvantages of reduced parental
attention and possibly increased attraction of predators arnd depletion of food
resources. Preliminary study of an indigo bunting population in Indiana had led
However his interest in an animal may have arisen in the first place - and
this may in part have been by the interplay of change and curiosity - his
chosen subjects did in lact lorm a coherent and rational array. The
different species lell into several groups. First, there were those wliich
were in their own right the central objects of his study; initially the
jackdaws, then the herons, and now the geese. Second, were the closely
related species: ravens lor comparison with jackdaws. or mallard ducks
to watch out of the oorner of an eye wl-rile looking at geese. These
showed not only what the ducks had in common with their geese cousins
but also what they had developed diff.erently: he could ask himself
'why?' Heron society was markedly dilferent from that of jackdaws or
geese; again 'wliy'l'Then there were the species unrelated to jackdaws or
geese. but which liad similar elements of behaviour. This allowed him to
look for patterns of behaviour to which evolution came indepenclently in
It
different species.
was invoked when the rat was selected for the early psychology studies.
INi.sbett, 1977:44J
In some cases, researchers discover concepts that can be tested on their f avorite
species.
In other
cases,
previous research on
ar
of its behavior
which make it suitable lor testing a concept: this is illustrated by Alcock's 1lt)73)
use ol red-winged blackbirds to test L. Tinbergen's (1960)'searcl-r imagc hypothcsis'. Ettrlier work with the species had suggested that thcy might selectivcly seitt'clt
in patches where they had lound lood previously, but more importitntly lix' Alcock
they were omnivorous ancl available. Therefore, he used this spccics in rttt cxpctimental tbod maze to elnswer the questions'do bircls lertrrr wltct'c llrcy rrrc likcll lo
find lood and come to use locational cues to clirect thcir scarcltittg ruttl/ot'tlo bittls
learn what lood they are likely to fincl itncl cor.t.tc to scurclt 1.rt'clL't'cttlirrllv lir llrrrt
item on the basis ol'visual cucs irss()ciatctl witlr tlrc lirotl'l"l'ltc birtl irr tlris (irs('\\'ir\
thc rcrl-r.vingcrl blirckbirrl. ()llrcr lcse;uc'lre r':; llrr,'c lr'slr'tl 1.. I rllrt'llt'tt'r lt\'po1l11'11''
()ll (':il litrn t'to$S (( .,, lt/\ ( (,t(,ilt'. ('l()./('. l()70). (l()lll('\ltt r'lttt k 1(,,tlltrt t',tlltrt.
"
l()/())
l)rrrrktn:. l()/l);rtt,l 1'tt',rl ltl', ll'rttu\tttttlt,r.l(o\;ttltlt
Carey and Nolan to predict that the poptrlation would be polygynous erncl therefore
provide a good opportLrnity to test the hypothesis.
as
itmount rather than kind. These species are being used as biological models in essentially the same way that the drug industry uses rats and mice to test drugs designed
It was probrrbly cottvenience that initiated and maintained the momentum that established the
nrt as the psychologist's choice subject (Beach, 1950).
Several yeitrs ago while cooling olf in a local pub (after a hot afternoon observing yellow-hcttclecl blackbirds in a nrosqnito-infested marsh), Dr. Gordon Orians
crplttitled to.l. R. Watsort ancl n-ryself that he had become very interested in the slugs
tlrirt lttragccl irt his hackyarcl garden in Seattle. His interest was more in testing ecologicirl lhcory thitn irr sitving his vegetables. Later Cates and Orians reported on
tltcir lcsl ol'lltc ltypothcsis lhal 'early successionalplant species make a lesser comrrritrncrr( ol'rcsorrrccs to (lcl'cllrl agitinst herbivores, ancl should then proviie better
lirotl resorrrt'es lor gcrrcnrlizctl lte rbivorcs than later successional and climarx plants,
pr
lr
whicli to
Table 3.1. Credit-debit sheet of some characteristics to be considered when selecting a subject species
Questions
Suirtthilitt'
Is the species suitable for the concept being studied (August Krogh principle)?
Can you recognize individuals by natural marks or can they be easily marked?
Does it engage in interesting behavior which you can observe repeatedly?
Can you make the necessary manipulations on this species?
1;
tiluhilitv
Debit
Credit
Characteristic
Is the species found locally or will you have to travel to study it in the field?
If it is found in a foreign country, what are the political ramifications?
If you want to observe the species in the wild, is it accessible in its habitat?
Can observations be easily made without altering its behaviour?
Is it nocturnal or diurnal?
If you want to bring
uhilitt
,''
-.,tr, tttfitl
riliLl'tit.)n
-\'.,i'r;_,.'i',
\our subject.
\\-iil 1ou be able to lollow the guidelines for animal welfare and ethics in research?
as
D)
-=,=-,--==7:/!
ii ;i=__ri?
. . =,? = - i_i
lil:
;1 *=E A i 3
7i=ltr,;?Z!
=Zn
tEi=e={ tElI:; ''r
,Z-V==-;iE
-e71=iEE[E*sigiIE
[i '-[?
=a r={ t #?cf
st] =a"a g
E:;z*
iAt Id
'ix;:
I q==
36
=
="8;x'serAEE
=Ec7'=l--==
=;ei*==P+1I-iigiLiEiz i
=:q
?ie;u[1:+,gI1Ef;
lEl
?==. =-..: i,.= ?.-;
,?i ?E:il?lgie:*f+s=a
+a=a
a.Nee6:7i
9,
3En
=i=!1,-i"
6{zA
ie:=c7.iivs==3:=:
!I
u. cv
L:-='o:s
;:AgaH
jTfr !=EB
3-;
$
=
E3f3'
i,1{;g?o
6P;
iIEgE
i;E
sqaqg=
ri=2
]eEg
!&iE
=.,
a'fisB
3.:o-=
EE+ei+as$irtBxsE,
;Fe:
j
.-=(z- = c
E-=-7
2.3++
=;
f ='-iZ i:Yin
==E 3i*q
f E!
i"!
Exi
=f
*s*}
FaTa==3iiirEE5;Ei
i:g
+== : =1;=.iE,i=in&=2i
I
43Zi
5$V
-.'-*.
oo
(D
-l
o
+
(D
Fl
.D
ja
Llr
'O
P
^:
(D
pD
()
+
CD
o'a
r=
U
o
a
lrl
V
4
a^)
-m
t
:(,
A
(D
o
P
(J
A/r
+
)+
:1
Lrl
P
()
I
o-
=i*
=irE=E3ili;EFg??i
*F3E
a? EadiBi=i?iFil=p=sr
=lr=6e=_xli1s
\
? BFp
332
tfr17
kfi[ q=?f;=itfrrEt,?$lFE[
?zi; \
rxi
=EEg=$:Ear;Zia,EE;
993=
*
+Y Ec
6;H
JA
p2
1
-t)
o-
r|
='
r_1
J.
+ Y ie
qi=
a.
3+;
=lPA2
;: = x s7*=
??'1!:A=
o-d)
=s'!T Tg,gF3{r
=;E*:;EE
\o
iiir
(A
(D
F0
o
UJ
HOW TO OBSERVE
55
while watching they may develop interest in a particular species, behaviors and
4 Reconnaissance
observation
squirrel olf a log using the talons of its left foot. It was a chance occurrence which
was exciting to watch and raised some questions, such as: Do goshawks usually
employ only one set of talons when capturing red squirrels'/ If so, are individual
goshawks primarily left-footed or right-footed? Answers to initial questions, such as
these, usually lead to additionalquestions.
Most visitors to zoos occasionally stop and watch animals. When they leave they
can tell you about many of the animals they saw and some that they watched; lew
reconnaissance
see
species
to their
lists.
observation. This may occur befbre you have decided what aspect of behavior to
study and probably befbre you have lormulated any hypothesis (Lorenz, 1935). This
'is the most
early stage in which you become f,amiliar with the animal's behavior
arduous ancl demanding aspect of behavioral study'(Marler, 1915:2).lt is extremely
Observers take the time to study the behavior of the birds, describing in their note-
Observers must be more than a visual recorder; they must also be aware of input
hooks the intricate details of individual and social behaviors and perhaps recording
the birds' vocalizations lor later relerence and enjoyment. Intense observation is
generally more rewarding than superficialwatching. It is also necessary in the study
to their other senses and must think. One must be disciplined enough to know when
Besicles
to rapiclly occurring behavior is not consistent with theorizing, hence priorities must
lrc established.
t
:
Tinbergen (above) talks about 'exploratory watching', 'more sophisticatctl wrttclting', ancl 'observed' behavior. The terms watching and observitrg ttrc ctltllttrottly
interchanged (see quote from Huxley on p. 113), but I belicvc cthologists slrotrltl
ITinhcrgL'tr,
I 95 I : vi
('hcck ccluipment to make sure it is working properly and repair it if neccssir ry.
.l.l.l
Baby-sittcr-s rvtttlt clriltl pcn: tlcvcloprrrcrrtrrl psyt'ltolop,ists rtlr.tr', t'r' lllt'ltt. ll rrlr ltrttt', t:
('lll()\' lrttllt tr,tlt lttttl'
lr c:tstltl cp(l(.lt\,()t': ttlr.st,t yitt,t: ls ;t tir,,)t()1s l)t(rt't'ss. l'lltolof ir,t\
;ilttl rrltsr.t Vitt1, ;,ttrnt;rls I lrr'l' t('( ('t\(' l)tll(' {'lll()\'lll('lll I l(rlll ll rtlr lttttt' ;lllllll,ll.' ,ttttl
((
lr:rptt'r
HOW TO OBSERVE
Satisfy basic bodily needs. Plan your sampling periods so that your basic
Once you have the above priorities firmly established in your research protocol,
remember that periods spent in the field are likely to be some of the most treasured
times of your existence. They should be both productive and enjoyable, but they
won't be constant fun. Lott (197 5) reflected the feelings of many ethologists when he
wrote'Protestations of a field person':
'Welcome back! Have a good vacation?''I wasn't on vacation. I was in
the field.'Well that's not what I mean. Being in the field isn't a vacation;
it's hard work, a hard life, and besides . . . But hold your tongue. People
who spend months at a time noting the behavior of animals in odd
corners of the world are usually greeted that way. We're happy with our
work, of course, but for several reasons it doesn't qualify as a vacation.
Sometimes just living there is a problem. If you can't find or afford
a convenient house, camping out becomes living in a tent by the second
week. And the kind of stick-to-your-ribs food that stores well in a
burlap bag or metal box soon starts to stick in your throat. Some
colleagues and I went to visit Patti Moehlman's burro study in Death
Valley a couple of years ago, and brought along some steak. Patti had
been without refrigeration for weeks. Her response was succinct and
eloquent: 'GOLL-EE REDMEAT.' . . . So welcome was the steak that it
hardly mattered that the water from a desert cloudburst streamed intcr
our plates as we ate crouching under a picnic table.
But food and housing are lar from the worst of it. Your can get used
to eating almost anything and sleeping almost anywhere. The worst ol'
it is that you get to be a little bit batty.
To be more specific, you get to be sort of matnic-deprcssivc. Vrrr
experience mood swings that increase as a direct iunction ol'thc nrrnrbcr'
of seven-day weeks you've spent on the project. . . . Thc rnosl sirlicnt
symptom is that yourevaluattion ol'thc stutly gcls l() bc wiltllv rrrrrcrrlistrt'.
High noon rlay fincl your pulsc rircirtg irs y()ur rrrirrtl lot'rns llrc krrrtl
of- modest. corttitincrl. bul 1'tcttclrirling rcrrrrrks tllrt 1rt'r'surrrlt' llrt'
Nitlitlltitl Acittlctttv ol' St'ie rtt'r.'s l)l('niu v st'ssiort llrlrt llrt' Nolrt'l
('()nlniltt't'tltrl intlcctl knorv tvllrl tl rr';rs tlr)urlr 11 1,r.',, ll ( rl('(l \'oul
in support of your
first sobered, then entranced. When you release them Irom your
spell, they will sprint to their typewriters and set their two forefingers to
banging out near poetry in praise of basic research and (blush) you.
That evening you rnay be so sunk in shame that you want to change
not only your study but your name. How could you have committed
yourself to a study so barren and one for which you are so ill prepared?
are
What will you say to that granting agency when they ask what became
of more than $ I,750 intended to support significant basic research'l If
you take the entire blame you'll never get another chance. Besides it
wasn't all your fault; but how do you make them understand that fate
has thwarted you at every turn, that your field glasses fogged up during
nearly three goose gatherings, that the rnicrophone salesman was lying,
lying when he told you how far away it would pick up bison bellows'l
Yes, who will bear witness that your failure was not really your fault
now that God has turned his lace lrom you?
And so yoLl go on, ever more sublimely happy, ever nearer suicide.
During your more lucid moments you realize, of course, that you're
getting to be a little bit batty, and you come to crave some stabilizing
influence to dampen your oscillations. Contact with an old friend
becomes so welcome that you hold your tongue even if he says
something stupid like, 'Welcome back! Have a good vacation?'
ISee ulso Huilnnn's ( 1973
) discussion oJ.fieltli,sm]
The following quotation carries a hidden message: '. . . as the vtork [italics mine]
by Cain and Sheppard has shown . . . '(Tinbergen. 1958). Whether intended or not,
the word work is indicative of what ethological studies can, at times, become. Even
though the overall experience is enjoyable and the results rewarding, it can become
tircsomc. ancl you are often confronted with having to convince yourself that the
cnrl.jrrstilics thc means. Chenev and Seylarth describe the 'syndrome'this way:
Anyonc who has ever studied animals in the natural habitat recognizes
tlurl cvcn tlrc nrost stirlLrlatirrg proiect includes moments of unrelieved
lc'tlitutt.
[ ('hcnc.r' und Sciurth. 1990;31 3 J
l'or crlrrrrplt'. l
rrlr)n(',
58
ECON
NA
HOW TO OBSERVE,
me from the rather tediou.v .joh oJ recorcling gnu ut'tivit,r, putterns [italics mine].'
Schaller's description of part of his study on the Serengeti lion is also illustrative:
and
to admit that, like Hofitadter (1919:246) '['m not sure I know what Zen is'. But. lor
our purposes, that doesn't matter; Franck's technique of teaching drawing through
seeing is what is irnportant.
than ideal conditions, with inclement weather making you physically unconrlbrtable and your view of the animals poor, and the inactivity of the animals
becomes frustrating. Your binoculars get beaterr about and rained and snowed
Lrpon, and the pages of your field notes become limp and stuck together. Field
research can be trying at times, but you can make the best of it by being physically
and mentally prepared. Expect Murphy's Law. 'If anything can go wrong it will', to
take elfect from time to time. Allow fbr some slack in your schedule to absorb days
when you cannot collect data because of poor weather or equiprnent breakdowns.
Often, you can release much frustration merely by recording the disasters in your
field notes, realizing that in years to come you will remember even those days londly
as you reflect on the data-rich days with pride.
less
IFrant'k, 1973.125J
Although Franck developed lris techrrique for teaching drawing through seeing,
I lound it equally effective in teaching seeing/observing through drawing. Based on
Franck's description of his seeing/drawing procedure, I developed the following
cxercise:
'
.
'
designed system lor recording your field notes; and 5. knowing when your data arc
sufficierrt. The observations we are discussing here are either utl lihitunt saruplcs
(Chapter 8) or initial reconnaissance observations on which ar luture wcll-clcsignerl
study will be based. Regardless. the skills used are the same: only thc rclative crnplt:rsis on the data collected is
likely to be dillerent.
59
'
'
'
Ste
I)nrccrlu rc:
p: l. l'ind a conrlirrtable place to sit and conduct yourself as an indivitlturl rrlonc u'ith thc i.rnimal. Pay no attention to anything else around
vorr. hcsitlcs tlrc uttinritl.
'
l'ir seveltl
l,r'rrts
Ilrlrrl strrrlllt'tl lo
;rl
1111.1
;ur t'llr'r'lrrr
.1. SPr'1111
l'('lr('r
'.ltttlr'ltl',
,t lt,ttt,l
ir
lltt':tttitttrtlrrillr\'()tlt('\'('s
HOW TO OBSERVE
RECONNAISSANCE OBSERVATION
60
closed; that is, trace the outline of the mental image. It's not important
whether your drawing looks like the animal. Forcing yourself to draw
hold the image strongly and long enough to draw it while focusing on the
image in space.
Treat your mental image of the animal as the object that Franck is refer-
ring to below:
Allow the image on your retina to set off the reflex arc that goes directly
from your eye, through your body, to the fingers that hold the pencil. . . .
There is no thinking, judging, labeling in this reflex arc: it goes from the
eye to the hand and skips the thinking, judging, discriminating brain:
just allow the reflex to work, to take over! . . . Don't be surprised: in the
beginning your concentration span will be short. When your attention
flags, stop for a moment.
'
5.
IFrunck, 1979:35,38J
After you have become reasonably good at Step 4, begin to observe the
part of your research, you should use standards, such as Smithe's ( 1972) 86 standard
colors which are based on Ridgway (1912) and Palmer (1962). After learning to
observe through seeing postures, movements and colors, you can learn to 'observe'
sounds through hearing in a similar manner; sounds should then be incorporated
I iclrl notes are often the best, and sometimes the only, record you have of your
,rt'tivities and observations in the field. The method of taking field notes described
lrt'low is primarily applicable to inlormal field trips and reconnaissance observa-
It
for some studies, data can be collected in a field note format which
I r(
r(
l,
'
)r)s. However,
is most important that you strive to draw in Steps 3 and 4. Just as recopying
class notes helps you retain the information, drawing the animal compels you to
focus your energy into observing and retaining the mental image. This is reflectccl irr
I draw animals not to compete with Leonardo da Vinci but to make surc
that I have seen them correctly. As one of my anatomy teachcrs plrnrsccl
it: you have only seen something when you have made a skctch ol'it.
Drawing the animal locuses your attention on its nrorphology. Movcrrrcnls :rntl
rrror
phology. Observing the details ol'thc posturcs. rrrrrl thcn llre rrrovcrrrerrts. g.rrtlrr:rllv
becomeseasier. At lirst, yorr will pnrllrrbly ol'rscrvc prinurrrly irr lrlrrt'k lrrrtl w'lrrlt', lrrrt
littcr ytltt will obsct'vc luttl renl('nrl)er t'olor. ('olors ;rntl llrt'rr t'lr;url,('\ ('rn lrt' ;111
itttlloltltttt ttl('irllsol totttnttnu(lrlr()n nr ilntttltls ll tr'tt,trlrtl'tololr
r\iln rnl)orl,llrl
of fundamentals.
I lr(' svslcnr ol' taking notes that you decide upon will determine their value to
,,u ,rrrrl olltcr rcscarchers in the future. Most ethologists with whom I have spoken
,r ,{ ',()nr(' vrrt'ilrlion ol'thc system developed by Dr Joseph Grinnell of the Museum
, .pr'r t('\, nr t'orttr.;rst ttt thc.iorrrnal. where yilur observations are recorded by date
rrr,lrrrrrr. Ilrt.r'rrtlrlorr,sccliorrisusctl torccordspecimenscollectedinthefield.The
Io lollorv is lr:rsetl rr1'rorr (irinncll's systcm, but will be concerned only
Irrrt'rl prrpr'r slrorrltl lrt'rrsetl.
lt
62
HOW TO OBSERVE
RECONNAISSANCE OBSERVATION
l6 centimeters by 2l
ring binder. An irnportant reason for a ring binder notebook is that many fielclworkers preler to use two notebooks. One is taken into the field fbr the day's records, and
the other contains past records lor the year and is kept safely in camp or at home.
Some field ethologists prefer
outdoor
72" notebooks with 80 lined pages and polyethx7") and relatively 'water-
Box
4.1
63
(cont.)
yp71v
thermometer with you into the lield. For most str.rdies it will be
sufficient, anc'l worthwhile (e.g. Mrosovsky and Shettleworth. 1915),
to estimate measLlres of the other weather variables. tn 1805.
Commander Francis Beaufbrt of the British Navy devised a scale of
Box
4.1
Name
in tlie field:
Butu.fbrt',t ,stult'.f or vind ,speed
Locality
Date
Beginning mileage
Mileage at stop points
(.ultrt
Other observers
Weather
Habitat type
Time into field
l,ichr
uir
l.i,qltt
ltn,c:t,
4 7 n-riles (6.4
3 miles
begin to rustle.
(it'tttlt'
ltn,t:t,
lo hrclrk.
T'itnc otrl ol'licltl
I
:tttlirty' ntt
lt'1r1,1'
lrtrlt't'tttt'l,tt't'.,'
ll"i
lrr :rrrr'lrr's
R ECON NA I SSANCE
Box
4.1
HOW TO OBSERVE
OBSERVATION
Route of travel
(cont.')
Hours of
Fresh hreeze
Strong breeze
observation
Weather
Species observed
trees
65
motion.
Strong gale
impressions are the most accurate and that in recopying you are prone to edit them,
therebymakingthemlessaccurate.
Regardless of how you choose to take and store your field notes, remember that
they are a record of your fieldwork - be c'omplete. They are a source of data and
hypotheses and can be the basis for future research be accurate. They may be used
overhanging crests.
Whole gale
l0
1973; Remsen, 1977; P. Johnsgard, pers. commun.). Others believe that your first
Fresh gale
l1
Storm
12
Hurricane
per hour.
4.t.4 Equipment
'l-his
section will deal with the three basic tools used in field ethology. More sophisti-
if
possible.
unknown lacts about the crested grebe, but also had one of the
pleasantest of holidays. . . . Some of the watching was done concealed in
the boat-houses, and some from a screened punt, but the major part
ll'orn the bank. This in many ways the most useful . . . every action can
bc casily krllowed, the birds are not scared, the field of view is
rrrrirrte rruptccl, and it is far easier to follow the actions of the same pair
ol'bircls lirr':r long pcriod of time.
so
on('e
Time oul o/'liekl: It is clcsirablc to rccorrl tirnc rrt wlrrclr yorr lr';rvt'llrr'
.t.
t..tu lllinls
llrt'prnposcol
sturly sitc. lrs wcll irs whcrr yrrtr rcirclr Ir0rrre ()r'r'iuill).
fortnight in the spring - with these I not only managed to discover many
ts
;r lrlrrrtl 1or
lrrtlc)islo:rllorvobscrvlrlionol'itttitnitlswithaslittledis-
(' ;t\ Possrlrlt' (t' ,' Sr)r('nsott. l()().1) I lr:rl is. y,ltt ltrlpc yrltt :tt'c obsct'viltg
Irt'lt.trlot \\ll( lr l:. ult.rllt't lr'tl l11 yottt l)r('\('n(('. t'\r'tl tl V()tlt l)t('s('tt('r'ts Pett't'ivctl lry
lrrr lrlut(
66
HOW TO OBSERVE
67
of
submergence.
Illinds are of two general types natural and
[Haut-Moon, l99l;-]67J
artificial
of
the
animal's reactions to novel objects at various places in their environrnent is necessary lor selecting the proper blincJ. For example. sitting in a tree will sulficiently hide
yc.ru
from many species that are not prone to be look vigilantly tzrr above ground
level(e.g. deer).
Artificial blincls are generally designed to blend in with the habitat as closely as
An unobtrusive blind is less likely to disturb the animals and attract
possible.
curious humans. However, rarther than selecting a natural blind (or constructing an
artificial blind) with as little disturbance as possible, you might be able to use an
obviours structure (e.g. vehicle, tent) and allow the animals time to habituate to it.
For example. since coyotes in the National Eik Refuge were accustomed to seeing
dirt roads. Ryden (1975) rented a bright yellow van to use as a
blind lor her observations. The same ploy was used by Kucera ( 1978) in his study of
mule deer in Big Bend National Park. by Walther ( 1978) in his observations of oryx
in Serengeti National Park. by Renouf (1989) in his str.rdy of harbor seals. ancl by
Laurenson and Caro (1994) in their study of cheetahs. Even with domestic animals,
similar procedures are often necessary to ensure that the animals under observatiorr
are not clisturbecl by the researcher's presence. For exermple. Baldock ct ul. (1988)
described their use of the same technique in their stucly of domestic sheep:
All
1970).
a uatural
Nylon or canvas tents clfien make goocl urtificial blinds. Snrirll. liglrtw'ciplrt tt'rrts
can easily be movecl between obscrvatiott sitcs. irntl lirrgcr tcrrls clrrr lre stlrketl intrr
the grottncl to prtlviclc ir ntorc pcnniurcnl blirrrl. Il'yort rlct'rtlc to lrrrrltl rr lrlirrtl. llrcrt'
itrc scvct'ltl soutccs ol'irtsttur'liolts lir lrrriltlinl r"rriorrs l\ l)('\. ir\ rrt'll .rs rrlt';rs lor t rl
rtlilt! votil ()\\'rl rlt'sit'n. l ot r'rlrrrt;llt'. \\oorlur (l()S \) rlt",t rllrt'r t,rtr'.lrut lron ,rl ,l
Potl;rlrlr'rrtttlrtr'll;r lrlrtrrl ;rtttl l{,,.1r'nlrou',('iut(l llt'.,l 1lt)li \)rlt',,t llrt'r on',lut( lrrrrl ol
,r l)()tl,rlrlt'lr'\\r'r lrl||r(l l tt,ttt, l l rllrr',lt,rl, , lltr'rlr".r1'rr rrl lrr| 11|r",,,1 lrlrtrrl
llclrlrvior-ol'irttintitl
ir.
lr
'
rlrsr't vr'
( )lr.,r'r
,r
II
lt(
r'
HOW TO OBSERVE
a. Can
sharply.
Should the blind be temporary and portable (e.g. Winkler, 1994)? How
+ Alignment.The
see a
There are two numbers engraved on all binoculars. These are commonly used to
designate the'type'of binoculars, such as'7 by 35':
7x35
magnification diameter of objective lens (mm)
Further descriptions and discussions of blinds and their use can be found in
Hanenkrat (1977), Roth (1982) and outdoor photography literature, such as Baufle
and Varin (1972). Ettlinger (1914), and Marchington and Clay (1914).
of distance
olten and how rapid will the moves be? A camouflage suit can be considered the most easily and rapidly moved artificial blind.
Climatic conditions
c. Comlort
of
Binoc'ulars
One of the most important pieces of equipment to the ethologist is a good pair of
heavily on what they see. A very large percentage (probably over 95'Yu) of what we
record as observations are what we see. Equipment that will provide us with better
vision or in other ways make the animals more visible, such as a strategically located
blind, will pay off immensely. Always consider the species to be studied and the dis-
-Ihe
of the binoculars.
tlris rvill result in higher-priced binoculars. For most field studies,6 to 8x magnifica-
Bergman (1981) has listed several criteria for evaluating the optical qLrality ol'
binoculars, including the fbllowing:
l,rt'lrcs ll\ttlicrlt,s rri,stulus\, even though the optics at that time were not nearly as
lootl irs thcy arc toclay. Flegg (1972) can be consulted for recommendations on the
rr1'rprirri-
('(
)ll\ ('\
in
1914
great crested
r'pt' ol. binoculars (mag. x clbjective lens diameter) to be used for observing birds in
tlrllt're rrt light lcvcls ancl lrabitat types, and over different distances.
()ltjt't tir'<'
\\
lt'rr.s'
.t ulirr
lt'rrs (lillrl
passes
through the
.15:Ei:gir
Iu
ii?r3i:
r-i_-==Ea;:
t=ir+,;
fr , ;-ia;"lE,-+!
=+
=?lt+i*ei;s
-=;!
=-=Z'iliniSrs+ig1 iii; Eaiie: i
122;EIir#;=
':i ?=iZ
z=V":
a -a
.7ao J!
"q1
Bli;A
'a
2..?ae =z
-.r
.i
=,aa:rr3r- F +Ei+EF-* 6 E
,zztr grEiE; Aitizii*Ei a ,Ziti F-"i?u
!-'==i;1if:Ea
-z777ii*i'Fi -: aEi ;i;gl cr :eA[aE
*
tAci;s- [''q
E* ii:
s=ae.E: x=
s,gE
s iE i
e;E:r-sqQE,E"
EE
i,Zi?i;
E e aE
i
oq!.7
-.:
;E;EfE
=Zl=,
=?if
-=22 :i:;"ad E+ i=i egrE=A:a =d;
Aia =='
E3
g1
ia
t=.1t=
Ii?gt1;1=i
aiE
-==
gg 4=7.;l
7Zr;sz-="
sr-i. s3
:;1=7
=: aiZl'tE =
;; o
i
1*g{;
''- . :
d ?. * a..E
a
=;g+gg
=
= =.= =
i7=z=,="
;i='-!z i- ia;El
=7i=_
==:1.
=-12.=
Aig+i
===a
ii ?'=iii,
i".i7;Zi
:-2'.;i;
Ea geaEE.
i:
i=i
-=
xi
==
EZi
?',
EEa ;i
\E;
fng EE
-=H
lEA
;S:
331
i=?
4
+
oe
E^
V
-,'
Diameter
\l . ;el
..r1,/i
^,
1-{
_.U
'
Relative
(mtn
brightness
Percentage of coating
)0"/,,
80"1,
6.8
8.7
1001,
Field (at
Field
(angular
Relative
1000 Yds)
degrees)
fleld (lt)
.tttttttlunl ltc'll
2.5
5
6.2
25
21
35
31.5
370
450
8.5
2700
325
6.2
2275
7.3
2660
2220
ls
2.6
-:5
25
26.5
35
37.5
380
7.1
50
55
70
75
380
7.3
2660
3.15
14
15.5
20
330
6.3
2640
- jrt
. lr)
3
eut pupil
,,
6.8
1.5
9.5
- ' -1,i
: . -1tt
i .:30
S'rl0
4t6
4.2
525
3.15
3.15
525
3.9
l5
25
-,1+
n , l-i
< 15
I rt ..r _50
\,,111'1'r':
636
t2
3816
26.2
511
1l
3462
t0
3675
22
11.5
21.5
35
31.5
525
t4
15.5
20
1.4
3 120
15,5
20
2l
2t
390
t4
450
8.5
3600
27.5
21.5
35
31.5
315
7.2
3000
2t
23
390
1.4
3510
35
37.5
310
3700
an
a
z
z
a
a
a
an
a
rn
Iz
HOW TO OBSERVE
yards (900 meters); that is, the width of the scene you can see at 1000 yards (900
meters). The field of view is controlled primarily by the field lens. The normal field of
birutcular,s
view can be increased (semi-wide or wide field) by the manufacturer by using a differ-
ent ocular system, especially a larger field lens. This. of course, also increases the
price of binoculars. The following formula converts field of view in degrees (Table
4. I ) to an
Features
Advantages
Disadvantages
1. Greater
magnification
closely
Generally, the greater the magnification the smaller the field of view. Reichert
and Reichert (1961) provide a formula to calculate the relative field for diflerent
Greater weight
types of binoculars.
2. Larger objective
Binocular locusing systems are of two types. With individual eyepiece focus the
If
you
focus them while viewing a distant object, your binoculars will be in focus at all dis-
tances beyond about 30 feet (9.1 meters). You must refocus for closer objects.
Binoculars constructed with individual eyepiece focus are generally better sealed
against moisture and dirt than are center focusing binoculars.
When adjusting center focus binoculars the observer uses the center focus wheel
to focus the left eyepiece while the right eye is closed, and then the right eyepiece is
focused while the lelt eye is closed. Now the observer can focus the binoculars fbr
varying distances by using the center focus alone. This is an advantage over individ-
lncreased price
Increased price
Individual focus of
6. Center focus
7. Rubber'armored'
eyepiece focus
Less reflection
of light
be clear
eyepieces at close
distance
It should
Heavier
lens
The larger the relative field, the closer the binocular approaches the ideal (i.e. high
magnification and large field of view).
observer locuses each eyepiece separately while keeping the other eye closed.
of
binoculars
Relative
Field (at
Field
1000 yds)
(Angular Relative
degrees field (ft(mm))
Diameter exit
pupil (mm)
brightness (ft(m))
6x l8
-1
420 (128)
2s20 (768)
7x2l
372 (tt3)
7.6
2604 (7e4)
366
2e28 (892)
Model
lix24
(l I l)
lrtt's. brrl
\ ('r'sus
llittot'ttlrt t's tlurt clcct r ort icirlly zoonr (c.g. Copitrtr z-ooll frr>rn 7 X to l 5 X ) are avail,tlrlt' ltottt rt lt'tt' rlistrtbrrlot's, lrowcvcr', tlrcsc birrocrrllrrs prrlbirbly hirve pottrcr optical
tllttrttlt'ttsltcsllt;ttttttosl
r'lltolo;'j51suill litrtllrt't't';lt:rlllt'lilrlotrt-lcrnrrlltsct'vilti()lls.
.lilt 11,';,1ttilrl't,rrrlr,'1,)utr(lttlllr't1,nl,ilt(l'))il),trrrll(trllilt.,(ril(l()fi())
rtsr.
T.rble
1.1.
Weight
Field
Field
(at 1000
(oz.(g))
(dee.)
Yds)
Eye
Near
Exit
relief
(mm)
focus
pupil
brightness
(ft(m))
(mm)
index
(t3e)
Relative
4 (113.4)
8.7
4s6
9.8
6.2
32s (99)
l0
l5 (4.s)
6 (l.8)
3.1
6(170.1)
3.1
14.0
2.5 (70.8)
1.5
393 (120)
ll
l 1 (3.3)
2.8
1.7 (48.2)
6.9
362
6(170.1)
9 (2ss.l )
7.0
368
l5
l0
6.6 (2.0)
13 (3.9)
J.J
(l l0)
(l l2)
2.6
5.5
289 (88)
l s (4.s)
2.5
6.3
l0 (280.3)
8.7
451 (t3e)
l5 (4.s)
3.1
9.8
-.1-<B Zeiss
6.9
.4 (209.8)
1.5
394 (120)
t2
8 (2.4)
2.9
8.2
.4 (209.8)
6.2
326 (99)
8 (2.4)
2.2
4.9
7.5 (212.6\
6.3
331
e (2.1)
2.5
6.3
6.0
315 (e6)
t2
l0
l5
l3
t4
l8 (5.s)
2.6
6.9
l0l
(l0s)
(2ts.s)
6.6
346
1.5 (212.6)
5.4
284 (86)
1.6
\lini
8.2
ll.l
t4 (396.9)
- C'elestrr)n \\'aterproof
.,.1 ,B 5qi.i1'lrrski Habicht
13 (3.9)
2.5
6.3
l8 (5.s)
2.5
6.3
<J
1E
. = _,-t;=i?.
I.?E !
-18 7
_.;
=;
r
i
3E==e g; -;
F
1_?'r-i=>Eti3f
=;?
47;=+=5
=-a
-=-1 ;2'ivi*Ai=i-?iii
L =;
i_
U
E
=ia
i;7
5
=7;_7i=X2j;3
=E 1 e'=l
3,a:;=qaEE
=2.===??:1
g
4 e i I E 7 r lE i :
1 Va n
=_:zZit
=
==
:i JEZ iiVE 4r :f :]E
?a
F ii
'.=?;Ftniff:iE;i=-ii.E=
rif
;
1=-i;q?5!
?'ii
t=l
(D
: ?ii=
!
0a
V)
.D
^.-JJiia='O!
=3Li',Iii=7i
7i qr r=7 F
=:ilao:
=?.=5I=d
--27t2=
tqeiq
A;.Ev..aJ!
T g2 a7 qi
+;
==7:u
'=21{ef3
=6
74
'-=E??=Z t'iiE;;+i
j'7L=gV
i?
'+=
i
i5
;!
i
?;?
i
==
=,
:1;alil
??
={E
3=;
,Ja:
;s
7=
2=
=ciiie;
;EsItEi EE
=:1=-;?i
iLiGZ,1: e=
=-=1*aEi i::S1=1
=i
=;1?=t;t Ev=:EIu P+
7Z *r,
7?;
31ift?i3=?i+=.E?
:=;L* == 1;
aa;:?
a
=t
+?
i Xia: a; r{
=EiiG
t,
\+
n?
=E
?i
E-
an
=__!
tl
a-1
.D=
op
+X
cD3
IC
o=
CDFj
vtX
.D3
OE
o
-a'
5
+o:
o7.
(-(D
rn
o-
ou)
c,h
O
d(:D
e{
(D5
o?
oa5
.) )c.
rDx
qe
tJ
Or>=
NJ)
ooa
o
oa
(DD
U)
()
ia
\)
SurN)
XXX
7
oq
o
d
Ss
Rii'
an
?a9
S.D
l,
z
z
tn
a
(n
rt;
4
<\
o
.J
Fl
a
.is
-r
N) t.J
NJO@
(D
a:
\:.
a:
ras
oc
%%
-\
(\
a-
.D
:1
Diameter
\\l {
t -'
-:,
,-1,
_-
,-<rt
_ ' j',
.-t'fr
- br
:
'ftt
h(
Relative
(ntml
brightness
3.1
9.6
2.5
6.2
l6
- ,. 6{)
erit pupil
Percentage
of coating
20,,/"
80u/',
4.5
5.6
100"/,
6
14.5
Field
1000 yds)
(angular
Relative
ltttm))
degrees)
field (ft(m))
tjt
(32.6)
2.1
2140 (6s2.2)
200 (60.9)
3.8
3200 (97s.3)
l 18 (3s.9)
2.3
2360 (719.3)
n.5
22.5
24
150 (4s.1)
22s0 (685.8)
l0
12.5
13.5
n2
(34.1)
2.1
2240 (682.1)
13.5
170 (s1.8)
J. -'
3400 (1036.3)
80 (24.3)
1.5
2400
6l
1.2
2440 (743.7)
8.8
9.4
-1
4.5
5.6
1.5
2.2
2.4
3.1
11
J.
Field (at
_1
(18.5)
(73t.s)
-l
78
ECON N AISSAN
HOW TO OBSERVE
E OBSERVATION
19
Night vision monoculars and binoculars are sold commercially by numerous outdoors sporting equipment dealers.
Night vision scopes were developed along with binoculars. They photomultiply
by 20 000-50 000 x and have proved uselul for nocturnal observations (e.g. Clapperton, 1989; Waser, 1975a). Bausch and Lomb's Night
Ranger 150 (developed by ITT; can be fitted with a 3-in- I rnagnification lens which
extends the normal 2.2x magnification to 6 x . Additional specifications and ordering
the environmentalillumination
infbrmation can be obtained from the sources listed above. Also. Noctron Electronics
and Javelin Electronics (6357 Arizona Circle, Los Angeles, Calilornia 90045)manulacture starlight scopes which are relatively small and practical lor ethological observations (e.g. Randall, 1994). They are available in dilferent models which vary ilr
physicaldimensions. light arnplification, and magnification and have options for use
with stilland motion-picture cameras.
Fig.
as
gunstock.
iln area with infrared light, and an infrared sensitive scope is used to view the area
itnd observe the animals'behavior (Figure 4.3)
L/ i e
lr
ns t r ul
nu
tt
.fil
n o t'
t ttr ttu
tl
b st, rl, u
i ( )11
Night vision equiprnent can olten be obtained on loan from the US Army and
Navy. Inquiries should be directed to:
levels.
and decreasecl
light source. to Generation II, with improverJ photo-intensifiercapacity
I I I. which uses a sLlpersize. Generation II is available tbr civilian use. but Generation
MN
such as Damark (7101 winnetka Ave. N., PO Box 299(X). Mittttcitl'rolis"
Nielrt
l'l"l"s
arc
55429 0900). The prirnary American technology binocttlars
rvctt'
Mari,er ancl Bausch ancl Lomb's Night Ranger 250: both thesc hittoctttrt|s
I i.t t c I I t t t t t'
I I
rtt
t,:
tt
r' t t
Ii
ttt ttt
Ic
yi
t L'.t
Sr'rcr lrl tyPcs ol'sPccilrl rttiscclllrncous obscl'vittiortal tlcvices ltave been developed by
(l r(l(l( orl\
h'rlr(,'l
Itl,,'t ,r;rltr',',\',lr'tttlt,t
agencies'
selsitive photocathode, is only available to military and government
30(xx)x'
approximately
These binoculars photomultiply the available light by
tccl.tnology
but they magnify the image only approximately 2.5x. The Russian
antl clistrihrt(ol's'
binoculars are available commercially from a lew manufacturers
prtttcetirtl
lL
,1r,
,rlr',t't\illl,illltt'r'(,t\tlt(",
l)t",till)ltrrtt',trl
t,ilttr11'..1.'tl(('\iil('
lltr'lr'r ltttt,.tl.tttrl
80
needs than in searching for something suitable in the literature. Also, you can prob-
cussed below) can contain narnes for behaviors which carry implicit descriptions.
well as dest'riptions which, by themselves, serve as terms lor those specific behaviors. As you shape your catalog of behaviors into an ethogram (discussed below)
as
you will probably apply ternts to the behaviors you have named and described, priease of data collection. For further ease of data collection. you may
replace the terms with code letters and nurrbers (Chapter 8). For experimental
marily lor
studies. especially, you will further sharpen the descriptions into operational defin-
*mxru
of behavior
engaged in, the contexts in which they appear, and the movements and
postures that are involved (Marler, 1975). Familiarity with an animal's behavior and
insight into its function are continuing processes that generally lead to revision of
both hypotheses and terminology.
Fig.4.3
Thcrc irrc two birsic typcs o(' behuvioral description (see Tables 4.7 and 4.8):
Illilill'i,l;,:lllll
:::ll J 'ill:,1,i'i:'::.]ill'rr
i
': '1e.':rs
'lrr
bodv pa*s
' l:tttt, lrttttttl rlr'\r t tIlirtil. ltl( ()t l)()l;tlt()t) ()l tt'lt'tt'tlt't'lo lltt'llt'lt:tViot's littlt'Itiltr I1tr\ilil,tllr rrt trllrtrr,rlt'l\ (t'l' lr,rtr'tl lr'r'llt llttt';tl)
82
83
o./'
ternts ) ./br
really know
if
that was the true function of the flight or if, for example, it had fin-
greater safety.
Behavior description
Type of descriPtion
This example illustrates that the same behavior may be used in severalcontexts.
a. Behavior X
Emp
r icu
de s c' r iP t i o
ns
of
t' t i o
no
de
s c
r iP t i o
tt,;
1915) and lead to changes in terminology as the study progresses (Tinbergen, 1959).
The type of behavior, as well as the type of data being collected, often force the
d. Flying
e. Escape flight
use
(1970):
These types are nearly synonymous with the two types used by Hinde
l'
useful to examine the list and identify those terms that are borderline, as well as
tl-rose
tions is not always clear-cut, so that the problern is generally resolved in terms of the
observer's intent. For example, does 'sniffing' imply searching lor olfactory stimuli
or merely wiggling the nose and vibrissae. This type of confusion over the observer's
from
the 'kit-ter' call by the eastern kingbircl (T)'rannus t)'runnu's) and concluded
indecision
data that it provides information relative to the caller's
lield'
t.
llvittl'\\('r'('l
lllolt\;tltorr
tttttlr'tl\ tttt'
lll;rl lllt' tl.,t(' 1'\'1"
;tsstttllitll';ltttllttttt':tllottl
ltit.trrre ,l'tltr'llt.lurvior lrrrtlslrll;rtr'ttol
section
tto ittlirl'Describing (i.e. naming) the behavior as'behavior X'provicles trs witlt
l(ilPitl
ttsctl.
bcing
mation unless we have access to a definition of the ethogratn coclc
trs sotttclltitllr
alternate contraction and relaxation of the pectoralis rttusclc tclls
r', rtlt tttttt'lt
cthologist
thc
provicle
not
does
but
about the mechanics of the behavior
ctltrilrtf isl.
ol'tlrc
tttitttl
thc
in
imagc
useful information. Wingflappingcreates an
(Pt'tlt;t1rs:ttt
rviltps
its
but we d. n.t kn.w il-thc devc wus stunrling unrl lllrpl-rirrg
tlrc lrt'ltrtViol lts
in
the motivation and goal of the behavior appears obvious. Fbr example, the terms
'nest building'and'egg retrieval'are accepted in ethological parlance, but they still
ancl
(discussed
Some descriptive terms are clearly f unctional, but they are readily accepted since
flying versLls
about flying versus staying put, flying towards versus flying away' or
vocalization''
hesitance
landing. Hence, he labelecl the call the'locomotory
a wheat stubble
of behavior units
(r.3.3 ).
observational
elct,.e
use
J.
Eisenberg (1961) provided a list of behaviors lor rodents (Table 4.8) that
included both empirical and functionarl terms lor convenience of presentation. It is
be thought
animal's behavior an<] type of study you wish to pursue' Descriptions can
addiconveying
stage,
At
some
to lie along a continuum of inlormation conveyed.
function'
tional information generally entails <lrawing conclusions fiom data about
threat and courtship behavior in birds involves both relatively stereotyped motor
patterns and an orientation with respect to the environment, both description by
operation (empirical) and consequence (functional) are necessary.
llow t'rrrr ue t'rrleg,orizc ils virrious lirr"nrs ol'usagc'l Is it a fatal flaw when used in
rt'st';rrclr'.' ('rrrr il. in lrrct. lrc rrsclirl to ctlrologists'l Antltroprorlorphism. as I'vc
tlt'lint'rl rl .rlrott'. ts otrl\ ont'ol tlrrct'lirtttts tlcscl'iltr'tl ltv'lir1toll'(l9ll7)rtntl is in tltc
( :rl('t'()r\ 'nrl('ll)r('lr\(' iurllr()l)()nr()rl)ln\nr ir('('(rtrltttl' lo I'isltr'r''s ( l()()0) scltctttc
(l t',1t,'t',lt,rttl,ll,,',,,tt',ttll,',ll,,1,1l,lttl,,',,,1,1t,'t',lt('t',1)('(lt\('()tlrtttllttr)l)()lllotlllttsttl).
.functional terms
Sleeping ancl resting
Care
t'omJbrt movement,\
Curled
Stretched
On ventrum
On back
Sitting
Locottttttitttt
On plane surface
Swimming
Care
ol
m)vemenls
Washing
Urination
Marking
Jerking
Rigid upright
Freeze (on all fours)
Holding
Perineal drag
Escape leap
Ventral rub
Combing
Side rub
Molding
Whiskering
Depositing
we
Dragging, carrYing
Pickittg uP
Forepaws
I will readily admit that observation has one great drawback; it is hard
to convey to others. Experimental conditions oan be reproduced, pure
observation unfortunately cannot. Therefore it does not have the same
objective character. The observer who studies and records behavior
patterns of higher animals is up against a great difficulty. He is himself a
subject. so like the object he is observing that he cannot be truly
objective. The most 'objective'observer cannot escape drawing analogies
with his own psychological processes. Language itsell forces us to use
terms borrowed lrom our own experience.
I Loren:, 1935:92 J
Digging
Placing
Scratching
Sneezing
Cough
Covering
I tl'cnZ (1914) has also sr-rggested that in some instances the use of terms like'falling
rrr krve,' 'l-r'icndship'or''.jcak>usy'is not anthropomorphic, but rather refers to iunc-
Push
Sandbathing
Ventrttm rub
Pat
Diggirtg
ForePaw m()vemcllts
Ytwtr
Kick hirck
Tttrtl lttttl lltrslr (lill'cllltw's ;ttttl lrtt'lrsl
'l'ttrtt lttttl lltrslr (ttosc)
Slr:r kc
Stretch
cannot have knowledge of anything which we have not ourselves experienced either
Sifting
Licking
Side rub
very diflficult,
and c'ac'hing
Nibble
l,
Regardless
lr
Swallowing
Mouth
Hauling in
Upright
Testing the air
QuadruPedal saltation
BiPedal walk
Diagonal coordination
Fore and hind limb alteration
Elongate, investigatory
Biting
Climbing
Gathering
Defecation
Diagonal
JumPing
Stripping
Ingestiort
Bipedal saltation
Nest building
oltlittl'
86
species
to species
as
One decision that you must make during reconnaissance observations is when to
precise hypotheses, and design a sound research project'l At what point do you have
Beach(1978,197g)haswarnedbothofthedangeroftakingwordsfrom
Commonusageandapplyingspecializec]meaningtothemwithout
(taking a worcl from
detrnition. ancl of resorting to Hurr-rpty-Durnptyism
commonusageandreclefiningittclmeanonlywhatyouwantitto
mean).Bothoftheseproblemsexistinthecurrentapplicationofthe
termrapetotron-hutnanbehavior.(E'stcpundBrttt,<',19s1..127))
species that we know as rape in
What should we call behavior in nonhuman
humans?E,stepandBruce(1981)suggesttheterm'resisteclmating'asapurely
time to the asymptote will generally be shortened. Fagen and Goldman (1977:268)
concluded that 'familiarity with an animal's behavior will tend to require years of
experience
if
if
the
+Humantermsfreelyusedwithalltheunderlyingimplications.
at what point along the graclient
You shoul<l give consi<lerable thought to choosing
you will report your observa(ions'
rl
stop. When do you have sulficient inlormation to ask incisive questions, lormulate
lollows:
ol
ence.
Descriptiol]Sareoftenquantifiedtoclelineatemoreaccuratelyarrclctlrtlplctcly
the berravior. Surne cxa^plcs
deli'eate what the animal does when it performs
thesequatltitativedescriptiorlsareillustratedinChapterl0.
courtship), sex or age group we are interested in studying. The catalog is only a
portion of an anirnal's rapertoire - all the behaviors that tlie animal is capable of
perfbrming. We call the catalog tn ethogruri when we believe that it closely approxi-
wiley
t
:
I
81
if the entire
repertoire
t()ts ttt:tl);ttltttt;tl': t('l)r't lr,it,'.;t lrl,rl ol t'tttrtttlrtlt\('l)('l('('ttl:ll,r's ol'lol;11 litttc sPr'ttl itt
lltt't.rttott,lrt'lt;ttt,rt'.iil,,lttt',1
88
E-=10
oo=
:e !
2"31
o
'5
20
10
40
30
50
60
70
80
90
100
-o
o
o
Fig.4.5
=
o
o
.o
E
l
c
,2
a
f
E
C)
c
o
o
acts observed
Hours of observation or number of behavior
1oo
&eo
ioo
o
j40
3so
o
o
i20
o
b
;s
o
o
)
z
'a
--t--t:?
--r-1'c. -nftT{-.a
10
.z
o
f
E
=--c''-'-
(J
C)
lOO 2OO
5OO 1OOO
m'00
5OOO 10000120000
Fig.4.6 Plot of cat behavior data with fitted regression line Y:4.\lyr':c 1solid line) and
MoSt
frequenl
of occurrence
Rank order of behaviors by frequency
951Xr
confidence bounds for regression line (dashed lines) (from Fagen and
Goldman, 1977).
plottcd
Fig.4.4 A hypothetical example of cumulative number of different behaviors
b
asymptotc'
approximate
the
denotes
against hours of observation. The arrow
plotted
ats a cumulativc
repertoire
animal's
an
of
Conceptual representation
from Hutt lttrcl
percentage of the time spent in the various behaviors (adapted
Huu, 1970).
Since the regression line has no finite asymptote, it does not allow the observer to
predict repertoire size. However, this procedure did encourage Fagen and Goldman
(1971:263) to recommend the following rule: A ten fold increase in the total number
ol
will, on the average, double the number of behaviour types in the catalog'.
probability that the
(Fagen
rrcxt bchuvioral act will be a new type
and Goldman, lgll). If 0 approaches
l. thc pnrblrbilily ol'obscrvirlg u new behavioral act is low.
acts
bcltrtviots
a curve which reaches an asymptote at the less frequently occurritlg
(Figure 4.4b).
llcltltviotrtl t'rtlrt
Fagen and Golclman (1977) rescarchccl mcthotls ol' ttrtitlyzittg
ol rtt'ts
ttct/ittttttlrt't
(ty1-rcs
ol'bclrltviot'itl
I.gs anclc..clurlcrl tSirt nros( rlistribtrtiorrs
tll-rscr.vctl
(t'1' liil'ttlt"l
(')
.t/
0I'
A', ts llrt'ttttntlrt't
ol
lrt
ol lrr'lt;tviot
rr snr;rll
totirl nrrnrhcr
[)
90
Altmann
approaches 1, the more complete the sample coverage. For example, S'
(1965) observed 5507 acts in rhesus monkeys and saw 32 behavioraltypes only once'
^3?
t- '-
tt--
:0.9942
Behavioral
s507
Fagen and
This indicates that Altmann's sample coverage was essentially complete'
behavrare
of
significance
the
emphasizes
method
Goldman (1917)caution that this
fracrepertory
the
lor
estimating
ioral acts. They provicle a more complex procedure
Approach
Antennate
types'
tion which properly weighs the frequency of occurrence of different behavioral
Of primary importance to any ethological study and particularly to a considerasize of
tion of catalogs and repertoires is a determination of a behavioral unit. The
been
have
units
behavioral
the catalog will vary according to the way in which
such as
dcfined. The more inclusive (i.e. lumping several dilferent behavioral acts,
yet mututhreat and submission, into a single behavioral unit - agonistic behavior),
Hiss
will
catalog
ally exclusive (e.g., agonistic versus ingestive; see below), the smaller the
the objecto
according
vary
will
be. The selection and definition of behavior units
tives an<l logistics of the individual study (Chapter 6)'
behavior
ethogram is a set of comprehensive descriptions of the characteristic
behavpatterns of a species ( Brown, lg7 5).lt is the result of refining your catalog of
descripand
recording)
audio
(in
cases
some
iors after many hours of observation
tion. and it should be the starting point lor any ethological research' especially
species-oriented research. Schleidt
et
ul.
Mount and
palpate
Posture
ethograms by ethologists.
Cross-over
Copulation
attempt
Description
One animal (either male or female) moves lorward and
makes contact with the other animal
Two behaviors can be distinguished: mutual antennation by
both male and female where contact is antennae*antennae;
and solo male or lemale antennation of the other animal's
dorsal surface. The latter form of antennation can take the
copulation
Stanci
unit
4.2.2h Ethogram
A,
9t
Movc irwiry
Nrtlt'.'
Figure 4.7 shows how Enqr,rtst et al. (1985) used line drawings to supplement the
written descriptions
in tlieir ethogram of
behaviors performed
by
lulmars
Schleidt et a\.11984) pointed out the large variation in description, format and
completeness of published ethograms. They designed a 'standard ethogram'which
they hoped would serve as a prototype for future ethograms of birds and, perhaps,
other taxa. The ethogram, which consists of the 60 most commonly observed visual
behavior patterns, was tested and refined in a study of the bluebreasted quail
(C
tur nix
h ine n s is).
The discussion above dealt with ethograms for descriptive studies or experimen-
4.2.2c
with their
breasts touching' Breast-to-breast is nearly
always preceded with rushing behavior performed
by one, or both, bir<Js.
Fig'
4'7
Tindall.
Mutr-rally exclusive behaviors are those that cannot occur simultaneously, either
because the anirnal cannot perform them simultaneously or we have defined them so
sured in an experimental study are almost always defined scl that thcy:rrc nrrrtuirlly
exclusive, so that the animal is recorded as responding with only onc o('scvcrrl possible behaviors (see Chapter 6).
The behaviors in your ethogrtv:n .slttttrld hc nrutually cxclrrsivc il' yorr lr rc rrrrlrlllc
lr
rccorcl ltccttrittcly Inttrc tltittt tlttc l'lelurv'iol'lrt orrcc. eillrcr l'reclrrrsc ril'.\,orrr l;rt'k ol
cx1'rct'icttcC rlt'hcclttlst. y()tl :ll('ttrirtl'tt tlltt;t lrl1.,1't't (()l s()ll1'lttt')llr;rl trrll ttttl ttll,*
lrtr tlrt'tr't'otrlittl',rl sintttlt;tlt('(rus ltt'ltrrr tols (( 'lurPlt'r ()l
may provide a high enough level of resolution to answer some research questions,
but it is unrealistic to believe that it will
accurately reflect the animal's true behavior.
Probably all animals are capable
of,
t'.llt't'l
(llt'\()lll(('\
94
95
When you reach the level of experience and stature clf a Nobel laureate, your
research will be the 'cutting edge'; perhaps then your mind will generate sufficient
The
How much time shoul<l you devote to reading and reviewing the literature'l
literthe
a review of
Answer depends on several factors. First. for clescriptive studies'
There are lour classes of literature which can be read and reviewed (Fenner and
Armstrong, 1981):
the behavior'
ature might provide you witli biases and a restricted, myopic view of
spend too
can
researchers
beginning
and prejudice your observations. Secondly,
a Nobel
Medawar'
P'B'
fielcl'
much time acquiring a breaclth of knowleclge in their
prize winnilg experintental pathologist, offers the following in his Advice to a Ytung
or
. . . considerations apply to a novice's inclination to spend weeks
crab
may
learning
book
months'mastering the literature.'Too much
of
and confine the imagination, and endless poring over the research
.
.
.The
strbstitute.
others is sometimes psychologically a research
Few
beginner must read, but intently and choosily and not too much.
seen
to
be
always
worker
slghts are sadder than that of a young research
to
become
way
best
the
hunched over journals in the library; by far
I hlt'tlavur, 1979: 16,l7
enon.
+ Tertiary
if
the
only because of the simple fact that so much is published' even in
still
and
it
all
read
both
cannot
one
that
.post narrowly defined fielcls.
1984:18-t ]
have time to add one's own peerless contribtrtions. ITlutnr';ort,
on the btltly
However, for experimental studies it is generally advisable to be current
will hclp
This
yoLl
strrclyilg'
are
species
or
cgucept
of knowledge available about the
clsc's
you to generate new hypotheses and avoid unknowingly duplicating sotl-tcottc
prclcl'
wotrltl
yo1t
research. Even this approach may consume much of the time
on your own research. For example, S.E. Luria (1984). it Nrtbcl l)rizc
spenclilg
'iln cttgcr scckcr ol' iltlirl'lttltwinning microbiologist, acknowledges that he is not
tion'.
I like to operate with rtnly a ll'irctiorr tll'tltc cll()t'lll()tls ltccttlltttlltliott ol
kl6wlctlgc. Wltcrr I rrl)cn il t)cw issrrt'ol'lt st'ir.'ttlilit'iorrrtrlrl I tlo t)ol st'ltlt
tlle t:rllle ol't'otltr.'llts lookittl' lot t'rt'ilitll' tlo'"t'll1' ott lltt't'oltlt;ttt' I
r I tttr't' lt)'\'l I l'
Ittrlrt.ll.;rl tltr'tt't',tll lrt'ttt,llttttl'ttt tl tllltl I tttrtsl tt';ttl
Priniary literatr,rre includes all tlie prof-essionaljournals in animal behavior or related disciplines. Journal articles will be the best written source ol
St'ienti,st'.
Access
First,
to a recent article on the topic. You can find one by looking in a recent
secondetry source (see below),in Current ('ontents La/b S<'ient'e.t. by searching one
of
ref-er
asking a researcher in that area. Look at the articles relerenced by the author.
of interest to yor-r. By reading these articles and using
their ref-erence lists. you can go back many years, sometimes to the original paper
trn the subject.
Second. you can r-rse the secondary literature (indexing and abstracting tools)
which provide references to journal articles by subject. Since most of these tools are
now prodr.rced by computer. they can be searched in three ways: through the printecl
issues. online through commercial vendors such as
ItOM in libraries
to thc inlirt'nrittion 'sLrperltighway'. Some are now available as part of online cataIogs ol' librirries. Onlinc ancl CD-ROM versions generally do not cover the entire
nurgc ol'vcru's llrrl lrirvc l-rccn pLrblishcd. For example. the online version of
llirtlrt,tlit trl .llt,:ttttt lr (lliosis) c()vcts l9(r9 lo thc prcscnt: the CD-ROM versiorr
('()\'('ts l()fi : lo lltr' Prr's('nl. llrt' pr irtl re rsiorr c()vcrs l()l(r trl thc prcscnt. Dittes ot'
t'lt't'ltrllll( \('l\lr)ll\. ('\l)('( titllt lrt llrr'( l ) l{( )N,l lir1 111',1. ;rrt' likelV lp CltiltgC irt thC
Ittltttr',1'.rr()tt'()l111'1 1rt trlt'tl t',\lt(",,l|('lr,ilr',trtlrr'tl l();l (()llll)il1('l tt'tttlltllle l0tttItt.
using printed
Several steps are involved in conducting a literature search, either
sources or electronic formats:
+Undereachconceptlabel,writeappropriateterms(keywords).
to
Decide on appropriate abstracting and indexing services or databases
search.
The United States government is the world's largest publisher. Many important
(title
Review instructions on access points in each service or database
words, assigned subject headings, subject codes, etc')'
(and, or,
For electronic formats, select appropriate Boolean operators
laborious and time consuming 'manual' searching. Today, the same indexes and
abstracts can be searched (with the results printed) in a few minutes. Tomorrow,
they will be readily and widely available through the electronic networks or online
library catalogs using your office and home computer. A reference librarian at a university or public library will be able to tell you the current status of availability of
Do the search.
or
Look at your results and go through steps 1-8 again with new words
terms suggested in articles identified'
Your success will
There are usually several ways of conducting any literature search'
the researchers that are
often depend on how well you know the area of research and
publishing.
journals where you
Third, you can scan the yearly indexes in the professional
published' These, if they exist'
suspect articles on your specific topic may have been
volume' Also' search the
can usually be found at the back of the last issue in each
behavior'
animal
on
(textbooks)
subject indexes in the tertiary literature
you can find out who
subject,
Fourth, if you know a classic or original paper on a
St'ienc'e Citotion Index
is currently citing it by using the citation index portions of
same
(SCI) and Soc'ial Sc'ience Citation Inclex (SSCI). SCI and SSCI work on the
SSCI
and
SCI
what'
is
citing
you
who
principle as the first method above, by telling
indexes'
also have author (name) indexes and key-word-in-title subject
published
Other sources of information about current research are programs'
Addresses of presenters
abstracts, and published proceedings of scientific meetings'
more inlornratit'rn t-rr
for
directly
author
the
are usually provided, an<l you can write
a copy
est. Online catalogs allow you to access single words in titles, plus subject headings
and authors.
tWriteashortSentenceorparagraphstatingyourneed'
z Decide if you want a lew relevant articles or'everything'.
phrase Animals, habits and behavior of'lollowing the name of the species of inter-
The world of information is changing almost daily. Indexes and abstract journals were once available only through the printed format which required tedious,
these services.
Once you have a growing list of citations of references you should consider using
o[ the manuscriPt.
otr itrlitllitl
Monographs and books are aiso important sources of informatit)tl
in this ftr,r,t. .lir.c
behavior. It is not unusual for long-term studies to be published
irt lllc
Goodall, for example, first published her observations on thc chitnpltttzccs
scl'ies.
Mttttogt'lt1'rlt
Bt'hut'iortr
Gombe Stream Reserve as one volume in the Aninurl
Lltttr. Ptrblislrctl irt l()7 I '
but her most well-kn.wn work is thc book Itr rltt, ,\lttrrltnr of
B.oks cul hc lilulrl hy searclrirrg strbiccts itt ottlittc cltlitlogs ot tltt'ttlttliliottrrl
ltt cltttl t'lttltlol''s' t'llit'it'rtt il('t'ess is lrt'sl olrl;tittt'tl lrv lirsl
cirt-tl cltlltlttp.s
ol'lillrlrrit's'
'orrtlct othcr rcscarchers who are working (or have worked) on concepts or species
rrr wlriclr you ru'c intcrcstccl. Discr-rss your proposed research relative to your own
itlerrs. l)o rrol prrrirsilizc irntl irsk clucstiotrs that imply'Tellme everything you know
rlrorrt . . .'. Mosl rt'seru't'lrcrs;rrc gllrtl lo tliscuss ongrling proiects, but are unwilling
Ioprorirlcrrrirri lr't'lrrrt'slor pt'o1llr'wltolt;tvr'rtrll rtlt'citrlyittlcntptetl tolcarnasmuch
,rr lltt'\ r';ttt lltt()ul'll olltt'l sr)tlt(('s
98
How
ro
DESCRIBE BEHAVIoR
99
Audio VisualServices
4.3.2a Pro.fessional meetings
professional meetings, such as the Annual Meeting of the Animal Behavior Society.
are excellent opportunities not only to expand your knowledge about the various
behaviors of a wide variety of species, but also to meet and talk with other
Boxl2
1230
York Avenue
realize and respect the fact that most prolessionals are cautious about divulging the
crucial details of their research until it is nearing completion, has been presented at
attend, present papers, and join in the discussions at every prof'essionalmeeting pos-
sible.
4.3.2h Telecommunications
to quickly contact many researchers through electronic mail (Email). Some researchers are willing to carry on extended discussions about research
questions, designs. proceclures, results, and numerous other topics over E-mail'
It
is now possible
Hall No.
incorporation into programs are another potential source fbr ethologists. Three of
these companies are:
Keep in mincl the caveat given above that most prolessionals are cautiotts about discussing crucial aspects of their own research during its early stages.
There are also several electronic bulletin boards and newsletters devoted to
animal behavior. For example, you can subscribe to ABSnet by contacting -lim Ha
via E-mail:jcha(a)milton.u.washington.edu. See Appendix B for further discussion
of telecommunications.
l9 Mercer St.
Toronto. Ontario M5V 1H2
Canada
Another source of films and videotapes is film librarics. whe rc trrtcilitctl lirotitgc
or polished pro<luctions can be rented for a nominal t'ee. Ftlttr tll'thcsc sottt'ccs ill'c
listed below:
vcrsi(rcs.
Inc..
83-5 Penobscot
CONCEPTUALIZI NG TH E PROBLEM
Delineation of research
The real problem arises when we attempt to isolate and define a question, or a
group of related questions. A clear statement of the question (problem) in scientific
research is perhaps one of the most dilficult steps in a continuing process (see
Bronowski, 1973).
5I
It
below because of
separate chapter has been devoted to the concepts discussed
is
the cornerstone
research
of
their relatively great importance. Proper clelineation
is their
researchers
of any successful study. A commotr f ault among many beginning
objecthe
clearly the questions they are attempting to answer and
inability to state
Before the actual
tives they are striving to meet (see also Barnard et al., 1993)'
As menaccomplish'
to
trying
are
research can begin you must decide what yott
with
concerned
be
will
tioned in Chapter l, most of our activities in ethology
defined'
(discussed later)' Broadly
hypotheses-testing in a broad or specific manner
hypotheses arise from a process
of
observation-question-hypothesis' Questions
of our thought
listening
animals. or
turned off and on. Therefore, while we are reading, observing
to other researchers, we are constantly generating questions and formulating
method' stated his
hypotheses. Medawar ( 1960:73), in a discussion of the scientific
ent concepts:
l.
of learning there are two types of question which reflect differof animals, such as 'Can
ecologically oriented. such as 'Does species Xlearn behavior I'by higher-order classical conditioning?'Examples of clear and concise ethological research questions
are quoted in section 5.2 from Crump's ( 1988) study
convinced, based on your own observations, that you would get the same results if
you replit'atecl their study. There are two types of replication studies (Martin and
Bateson, 1986):
l. Literal
using the same methods and species under the same conditions;this would provide a
test of the internal validity of the other researcher's results; 2. Con,\tltc'tive replic'a-
s.l.l
is imperative that your research question clearly addresses the knowledge you
are attempting to obtain (see also Barnard et a|.,1993). For example, Miller (1985)
tion involves the use of other measures, similar conditions, or other species to determine whether the same (or similar) results provide external validity for the other
in Chapter 6).
Although replicating someone else's research may seem mundane to an established
researcher, it can be a valuable experience lor a beginning scientist. as described by
researcher's results (internal and external validity are discussed
Medawar (1979:17):
ctlnstrttttly gcncrlrlirlg
Ethologists are never really at a loss for questions. We ttre
otll'owtt t'cscrtt'cll'
questions as we observe animals (Lorenz, l99l) ancl prtrsttc
(l(xrolr:rrr)
Reflecting on his many years ol'rescarch on hcrring gtrlls.-l'irtbcrgert
statecl:
.ttt'
Srl.tt ltl'lr..r'stlttlittl,stt('ll ll sltttlV.l ll s.t'i:rl lltttl's t'.tttttlttlttlt' ltlt"
(;ll('llll
ltYt'tt ;ltt lt,,ttl",
11r.1,11'r lo tt.;rlrzt.lt,rtt lttllt.,rtrt'Inil\\\
be
is.
if
yOu are
('()nl('lrl lrr 1111'1r'lf lirrrl (///;ttrs\\'('r to lltc lt'st'ltt'clt t;trcstiott. t-lttltcr thltn //tc iutswer.
\'()u ntit\ ,tllrrrr \otlst'll lo t ontlttr'l tttr;tltrl tt'st';ttt'lt
DILENEATION OF RESEARCH
102
103
the group.
IHuntilron, 1966:64J
(as
I am aware).
Unlike the thinking that went into Hamilton's hypothesis (above), the transition
ll'om a question to a research hypothesis can sometimes be rather sudden, with the
researcher not fully aware that they are fbrmulating in their mind a probable answer
(research hypothesis) to a question they have been pondering. In fact, Medawar
( 1960) has suggested that this sudden leap of insight is the normal mechanism lor
f'ar as
generating hypotheses.
sizes in
thefrequency of agonistic acts in flocks of diff-erent
domestic chickens'
5.2 USING
is to
experimental stu{ies. such as that just mentioned'
test'rttt lt
hypothcsis:
'I llt't'ttt tt'ttt t'r1ll;tttltlitttl ol V lirt ttl;tlioits irt llirtl llot l'r ts lll;tl lltt'r
,'sl:rlrlt:lt l;trt't;tlrlt'illl ( lll lt'ttl" lt'rlttt trrt' lltt'lrt ('ll('ll'\ l('(lllll('lll('lll"
'\ll
('osta Rica, Crump: l. lbund that individual fiogs were abundant along a stream
throughout the year; 2. observed site fidelity and aggression in both males and
lcn'rales, 3. observed that after intrasexualaggression the loser left the area resulting
intersexual
aggression. Therelore, this population of l-rarlequin frogs provided Crump with the
o1-rportunity to address several questions about the function and causation of their
lggression that cor"rld be compared to other anuran species and other animal
s11)Lrps; tlrat is. this population met both the .suitubilit-v and avuilubility criteria
(('hapter3).
The numbers ol the statement and questions below correspond to the numbers
in Iiigurc 5.1 showing where they Iit into the model. The only type of question not
rrtlrlrcsscd in this reseurch was a 'How'question.
('r'rrnr1-r
I
DILENEATION OF RESEARCH
6 Design
(2) (4)
When/Where
Exogenous
strmull
Positive feedback
(6,8)
_-r-\i\
l ---t--
(3)
'-i-->
(G+E+D+(A+P)
Endogenous
whv
Behavior "'.
Consequences'-)
Behavior
What
-)
:I
I
Negative feedback
(4) (7)
5.
Feedforward
(Contingencies)
t5 -_-_!,]_ - __-.,,/'
Who/How
Fig.
of research
or
research project.
( l98B) study of
The application of the model for a behavioral act to Crump's
to questions
reler
parentheses
in
numbers
The
aggression in harlequin liogs.
(see
explanation)'
for
text
Crump
addressecl by
objectives, but also in determining what aspects of behavior can be measured, what
manipulations are leasible, and the degree of variability that is to be expected. These
initial observations occur at Level C in the Ethological Approach (Fig. 1.6); they
nlay occur before, or simultaneously with, delineation of research (Chapter 5). Once
z Are subaclult
8
(less
Her
research
questions'
Crump's research objectives were to answer these research
questions) were based
the
to
answers
the
be
woulcl
hypotheses (i.e. what she believed
(Chapter 4)' Her
literature
the
on her reconnaissance observations and review of
hypotheses (chapter 1l),
research questions and hypotheses then lecl to statistical
which factors to measure
the research clesign (Chapter 6), and a consideration of
sampling arthropod
and manipulate (see Chapters 6 and 7). These factors inclucled
'intruder'
frogs near resiplacing
populations, observing natural aggression, ancl
activity)'
previc'rt-ts
their
dent frogs (called 'originals'because she couldn't document
the research has been delineated, it must be designed (Level D), and an approach
(description or experimentation) selected (Level E).
Descriptive studies usually involve observations under natural conditions since
we want to describe normal behavior; therefore, in the first edition
of this book I
referred to descriptive studies as naturalistic observation (see Chapter I ), and I contrasted those with experimental manipulation; this is the same dichotomy used by
Martin and Bateson (1986). [n contrast, I am now convinced that the clearest and
rrrost uselul primary dichotomy should be between describing behavior (de,sc'riptive
rc,seurt'h) and testing one or more hypotheses (experintental reseort'lt). Experiments
rrre
urther divided into Mensurutive and Manipulutive, which are the observational
1986).
My defi-
lll'l
iil;:l:HIill,,
DESIGN OF RESEARCH
106
VARIABLES
101
the
it occurs naturally with as little human intrusion as possible. Naturalistic observation does not have to be conducted in the wild. Often an environment can be
created in the laboratory (e.g. for insects or fish) or captivity which closely approxiuse
naturalliabitat of the animal. Gibbons et ul. (1992) discuss the design and
research; they
include a timely and relevant discussion about concerns for animal wellare and regulations (also see Appendices C and D;.
Description was the approach used by Tinbergen in his initial scientific study of
herring gulls (Zaru$ urgcntotrr^i), building on informal observations made throughout the earlier years of his life.
T itrltt,rga
n,
I 960b :.r
iii
[ )ltcn:cl t969;78 J
social beliavior and social organization of herring gulls living in a colony. Later, his
ol
variables and
(I.] VARIABI-ES
Tinbergen's initial objective could be stated as: To describe the indivirlual behavior.
of fbecling
see cliscus-
asked:
as
rnates the
cfrcct.
IKt,rringer 1g64.-]9J
lltcttrcitsrtrccl
r ,rt
108
BEHAVIOR UNITS
DESIGN OF RESEARCH
109
that in turn alfect behavior; Kerlinger (1967:434) czrlls intervening variables 'in-the-head'variables. All potential sources ol undesired variation are nuisance variables (e.g. previous experience, perceptual ability). Nuisance variables can
be controlled in lbur ways:
However, it can be an
Behavior will most often be treaterj as the dependent variable'
on another's)'
behavior
animal's
one
of
independent variable, as well (e.g. the effect
varidependent
the
and
X
variable is generally designated as
processes
The independent
the two such that changes
able as Y. Some relationship is presumed to exist between
more complex
in Ycan be predicted from changes in x. Correlations are often much
is beyond the
correlations
those
of
than these linear correlations, but discussion
t
:
r
The type of
require a nominal scale'
surement you can use. For example, qualitative variables
can be used with quantiwhereas ordinal, interval, and ratio scales of measurement
is important in selecting
tative variables (Chapter 8). The scale of ffIeasurenlent
intrusions do not aflect all samples equally, they will increase the experimental
error.
Examples of independent, clependent, and nuisance variables to be considered in
givel behavior pattern, those that are the most stereotyped are the
of dependent varimost useful in characterizing that behavior pattern. Selection
be measured in a
'
(see discussion
dent variable and not some other extraneous variable(s)
later in this chaPter)'
of showing an
Sensitivil.t'- the variable should have a high probability
eflectduetoachangeintheindependentvariable(s).
Retiabilily , the variable chosen should provide the most consistent
rrn
rrrt'itt species X. or tcst tlte hvpotltcsis that increasing temperature decreases the fre-
in
species
must clearly
,lcscribe. and in experinrents define. the units of reproductive behavior that you will
birth).
'[-hc
l;rlcr in tlris chaptcr. this can be crucial to the validity of your research. The choice of
'Practic'alit1'_ ilseveraldependentvariablesemergeascancliclatcsrtfier
,rrrtl irtlrritiott.
'l'ltcsc
ltte ttrttlt'sitt'tl
All experirnents itre alst'r atltctetl by tttti's'tttt<'<' t'ttt'ittltl<"r''
tt't'rr1'ttizt'tl tltt'tt
sorlrccs al'vitri.tion which cirn bilrs llre rcsrrlts. I'sycltolopists
trttrrtltlr'
ittlt'tt'.'ttitt.ti
tr't
ttt
tltt'
t'oirrctl
irrirl.lility ltl c.rrlnrl rrll llrt. r,lrrirrlrlcs lrrrtl
('lirlttuttt. l()\X) ttt ltt't ottlll lot llll('lllitl
lrc selected firr measurement. For example. you coulcl de.;t'rihe reproductive behav-
tl
lltrt.
1977 I .\,\
BEHAVIOR UN ITS
DESIGN OF RESEARCH
ior.
is to
General types of
adaptive
behavior
Deflnition
Ingestive
Investigative*
Shelter-seeking*
of the environment
Sexual
Epimeleticx
Et-epimeletic*
Allelomimetic*
Agonistic
Eliminative
stimulation
thisbooklwillbeusingthelollowinghierarchyofcategories:
.Generalcategory:Thisisthebroadestlevelofclassification;Scottcalls
Note:
.Behaviortype:AtypeofbehaviorwithinageneralCategory(e.g.uggression)
behavioral acts
Behavior pattern: This refers to the linking of several
pattern; it cointogether into a reasonably predictable ancl stereotyped
cideswithpartofDelgacloandDelgado'sscheme(belowle.g.
threat chase)
.Behavioralact.Thisiseitheranelementofabehaviorpattern(e.g.tltcttt)
Note that these are functional terms which must be supported by data before they
are applied in any particular study.
Behavior types can be lurther classified according to complexity and soc'ial inter-
ttt'tion by following a scheme prepared by Delgado and Delgado (1962). this scheme
was an outgrowth of their studies of modifications in the social behavior of
rnonkeys. Their classification of behavior units'evolved from a system of definition'
rtnd was used within the framework of an explanatory model of behavior which
they also developed. Briefly, their classification scheme is as follows:
A
t
Individual
He suggested that,
case certain typcs [gcrtcrlrl clttcbehavior in a new species, but in any particular
goriesl may be absent'(Scott, 1963:23)'
The generulc,ute96ricsancl /-)pt^r
of
tt'st':ttt'lt
ing alone)
(ii)
wall)
lrl ltx'uli:ul involving only part of the system (e.g. moving legs)
tb) .qrttrrulitl involvirrg a change of position of the whole system
in rcltrtiorr lo its cnvinrrtntcnt (c.g. walking on ground)
'Sot'ilrl
(tl '\'lrrtrr (,'l' ttt,rltkt'Vs slt't'llittt'. t'tttllt;tt'ittl't'ltt'lt rllltCt')
( rr) /)t uruntr (r'l' ;t nto11l11'1 t lt;r',ttry, :rrrollrr'r )
DESIGN OF RESEARCH
112
BEHAVIOR UNITS
Static or
Individual
L Dynamic
Sirnple
postural
or
gcstural
bchavioral
units
sociar
_t
lt3
5 Localized
-l
L Gcncralizcd
il,ll:.,.
9OC tAL TNTERACTION
Simultaneous
Sequential
Complcx
behavioral
units
Fig.
Syntactic
Active
Roles
Passivc
(1962) scheme
BEHAVIORAL ACT
COMPONENT PART
(i) At'tive
(ii) Pc.s.rruc
rl
Delgado and Delgado's (1962) scheme of classification of behavior units is illustrated diagrammatically in Figure 6.1.
At the next level in the hierarchy, specific bcltuvior puttern,\ can be isolated. For
example, a duck can move (locornotion) from one place to another by using one of
lour behavior patterns: walking. swimming. diving, or flying. These patterns could
be broken down further according to social, spatial and temporal variables such as
flocking and height and speed ol flight.
The next level specifies hehuviorul ut't,t within a given behavior pattern. Firr
example, flying can be broken dowrr into the acts of taking ol1. flight ancl lancling.
Acts can be f urther classified rnto utrrtpt)nent purts. Taking olf can bc clividetl
into rnovements of various parts of the body (e.g. head. wings. lcgs), anatortricirl
structures (e.g. muscles and bones). and neurological activity. Str-rtly ol'thc intcr.nrrl.
however. several excellent ref'erences are available (c.g. ('anrhi. l9li-l: l:rvcrt. l()l'i0.
1977).
[.,thologists slrtlrrlrl rto( corrccnltlrtc otrll'ott ltclurr,'iot rrrtils;rl llte p;rrlit trl;rt lt'rt'l
sclcclr'tl
Fig
'l{}t rl',tlll' tll ;lll(l 'l,,, rl'\lll,' (rttl ltr)llt \(,. lttl tlll('lil(
l)l{}r'r'sr 0l
ll()ll', l(r
()llll)()ll('lll
' ' ' t|rttt ltitt.q ttl t ltttt' tlrrrrrlt'r.r ntust be adopted in order to
work out the
t'xrrt'( nrerrrrirrl ol'caclt sc1-111r.atc bit of behaviour.
Only when the general
('()tll'\('.l cl'eltls ltlts llcctt ltltrgllly trirccd
arrcl srlrtte hypothesis. h,r*ever
\:lJ'll(" lt;ttttt'tl t'rtttt't'l'ltitt! it irr tlrc w'rrlclrcr''s rrrintl.
ciur thc ftnc shacles of
lrt'lt;ttlrrttl l,',t',';lll\ lll(';rttinl lil lrirrr ll is irrrpossihlc
trl nrlricc rlr rccrlrcl
,rl,l)t(.{ t;tl{.{l
ll r: ()tl lln\
t,ltirtetlclttt lltc
it(.(.(}ttnl
llflfl
l4
DESIGN OF RESEARCH
BEHAVIOR UNITS
would
Temporal questions:
Tinbergen:
(e.g.
Some of these movements and postures are not dilficult even for the
human observer to appreciate, though the detection of most of them
requires careful study. There are a multitude of very slight movements,
most. if not all, of them characteristic of a special state of the bird. The
student of behavior is to a high degree dependent on his ability to see
and interpret such movements. [r'r the beginning, he will notice them
unconsciously. For instance. he will know very well on a particular'
occasion that a certain gull is alarmed. without realizing exactly that he
knows it. Upon more conscious analysis of his owll perception (an
important element in beliaviour study), he will notice that the alarmed
gull has a long neck. Still later, he will see another sign, the flattening of
the whole plurnage. which makes the bird look thinner. Upon stillcloser
study, he will see tliat tl-re eye of an alarmed bird has avery special
expression. due to the fact that it opens its eyes extremely wicle.
ITinbergen, 1960h.7
ll5
s
o
with season
migration)/
bouts
behavior)?
of
It can be seen that the spatial and temporal questions nrerged together
in
Questions 6 and 7. These two dimensions are interrelated ancl separated
by the
ethologist either because of the emphasis of the research question(s),
or lor convenience and efficiency. Spatial aspects are an integral part
of Drummond,s Domains
of Regularity (described below).
In Chapters I and 2 we discussed the what, wlten, where, who, how and why questiorrs of beliavior. In this section. we are dealing specifically with the when and x'lrcre
questions. These two dimensions are inherent in all behaviors (Chapter 2: Figure
2.6); howeveq they may either be an important aspect of our research question. or
they may be ignored relative to other aspects (e.g. who, how). Exarnples of the study
of spatial and temporal patterns will be provided in Chapter 10.
Spatial and temporal parameters of behavior are usually relutit't' tlitncti.:'iort.:'.
This will become clearer as we consider the questions below, which focus l'rom the
general to specific spatial and ternporal dimensions.
Spatial questions:
I
2
3
4
5
(r
) lr
rc loclrIcrl'.)
of behavior units
occurring.
Behavior units rtsed in experimental sludies are generally
operatittrrutt,r; deftncd
(c'g' Giles itnd Hr-rtttinglord. 1984; see
below) in order to increasc reliability (both
ilttrit- ancl itrtcr-obscrver). For example, we can say that
when behavioral acts x
'rrttl l'occLlr togctltct. lvc will rec6rd an occurrence of behavior pattern
Z;thatis,
r'cAS()ns:
l.
we consicler them
the.most important,
ill
BEHAVIOR UNITS
r
117
DESIGN OF RESEARCH
l6
apparent that the identity of each one resides in certain regularities, in those proper-
tests ttntl
ties which are common to all instances, and that the regularities lie
unti-pretltttorbeltttt,iorinstic,klebttcks(Gasterosteusaculeatus)
t
z
Definition
Behavior
Position in tunk
* At surface
* At bottom
* In weed
Plry.sic'ul topogruphy
s
of the animal
(see
section 10.2.
1,
on displays)
Plt.vsit'ul
e./l'act.s
Locontotittn 4'Pa
* Sneaky swimming
using caudal
Smooth swimming usually along the bottom
lowered
spines
ventral
anil pectoral fins with dorsttl anrJ
by
typified
hns
swin-rming using pectoral
Determining the exact duration of a behavior is often very difficult, not because the
instrumentation is not available, but rather we olten do not have the necessary skill
and observational experience; tliat is, it is often difficult to detenline when a behav-
Fast agitated
Jerky swimming
ior begins and ends. Nevertheless, alter observing animals lor only a short period of
time it becomes obvious that most behaviors can be divided into two categories
based on their relative duration (Altmann, 1914):
stopPages
experimental tank
Remaining stationary in any part of the
lor more than 0.5 s
with little or no fin
Slow vertical ascent to water surface
expansion
bladder
movements, facilitated by swim
* still
Barrage
than 0'5 s
Remaining at tl-re water surface tilr more
fore more than 0'5
Laying upon the substrate, usually still'
provided in
Remaining within artificial weecl clump
experinlental tank, tbr more than 0'5 s
water surlace'
Remaining at least I cm away from the
0'5 s
substrate or weed clump for more than
* Open water
within a limited
balloon
fin causing
A rapid bocly flexure and stroke of the caudal
'leap'through the water usually to a place of cover
* Jump awaY
behavior (e.9. a robin flying); a behavior you can time with a stopwatch;
' Event
fast
* Behaviors
inclr"rded
For example, in Table 6.2 'sneaky swimming'would be a state, but Jump away'
could be considered an event. Likewise. 'normzrl swimming' (state) can be interrupted with fiequent'pauses' (events).
Throughout an animal's lile it is constantly cycling through states and events. In
l6)'
in principal component analyses (see chapter
Tindall'
Bailliere
( 1984)' Copyrighted by
It
It
is eqtrally
truethattlrei,vaywe<lefineandrecorclbelravioralelementsrvillbc
affecteclbythetypesofmeasurementwewishtosrtbsecllrcrrtlyirpl.llyttl
/l<)70
f Httt t ttnd
them.
tlutt'
stuclying etrtirnal behavior we are merely sampling selected states and events. either
lrs they
'l'j
Asanexanrple.Table6.2listssonreofthetlperatitlritrltlc(irrititltrsttsctlllv(iilcsks
hcr*vi-r'.r'srickrcb:re
Huntinglbrd (1gg4) i. their str.rdy.f tlie a,ti-prcclut.r
ancl
r)r.rrrrrrrrr.tr.s ( r()ri
\\'('('\ltlllttlt'lllt'rt't\
Evetrts itntl slitlcs can be measured in various ways. The most frequent measure-
r\
r)tt,trtitt.:,
tt't':tttlt'tl;ts
lrt'ltltrllrl
|illlt'ttt"
tl t"
in'lhblc
(r.3.
h.t.th Iiltrtt.t
Iltr'lr't
l()t;tl;t( l(r'1,
;t lro1ll
118
BEHAVIOR UNITS
DESIGN OF RESEARCH
t9
Type of measure
Definition
Usual apPlication
Total frequencY
Events, states
Partial frequencY
Rate
Duration
Events, states
Fig.
Events
States
bouts: l. a change in the level (intensity) of motor output; and2. change in orienta-
tion. A bout criterion interval should only be designated alter the observer
ior:
could elapse between behavioral acts of the same rat in order to consider them part
of the same sequence (bout). Dane and Van der Kloot (1964) studied inter-individ-
After becoming familiar with the social behaviors of laboratory rats. Grant and
Mackintosh (1963) selected three seconds as the maximum amount of time that
a
more than one behaviour is being observed' then
type of behaviour
bout of'one behaviour is said to end when a different
exatnple:
For
begins' (Machlis 191 1
Clrunge in heltavior'.
'If
"9)'
of
A more objective method of defining the BCI is to examine the fiequency hislogram of intervals between behaviors, or the log survivorship curve (Figure 6.4).
I hc log survivorship curve describes the probability of an behavioral act occurring
rclative to the time elapsed since the last act. When behaviors occur in bouts, the
slopre ol the curve is steep initially and then becomes gradual as the intervals
lesstliiinl6seconcls.tlreyareconsideredtobea.bor.rt'.
of
X, is chosen to sep2lrate
Itttert,uls bettt,een ()(cLtrrence.y. A criterion interval
than x ,are classigreater
to or
one bout from anotl-rer. Al1 intervals equal
than x, as within btlut
fied as between bout intervals aucl all those less
If
neverthelessconformstoaparticularsongtype.IMulligun'1963..2761
has
l. a steep
'.t'ction of'short within-bourt intervals and 2. a gradual section of longer betweenlrorrt intcrvals. Thc break point between the steep and gradual sections of the curve
,;rrr trsrrally bc approxin-rated by visually inspecting the curve (Slater 1974) (Figure
{r 5).
Ilrc grirrlual portion of' the'curve can usually be fitted with a straight
rrrrrkirrg,
it
rrrr
line,
rrrrrrr'llrc rrrlrrirnrrrrr nurrrbcr rll'long intervatls which cnn be incorporated into the
t;rrl"
ol llrt'('ur\e
lit
rr,n'
r.rl
l lris lrror irlr's ir \e rv objcctivc pnrccrlur-c lirr dclrning the bout criterion inter\\/lrr'rr \()ur l)lur:u v irtlr'tt'sl is irr tlrc ltcltrtvirlt'which ()ccurs itt thc stitrt ttl bt.lttts.
',l,rlr't ;llrrl I t':lt'r (1')i-i 'l r('('()nril('n(l st'lt't'l rrr1' lr linrr' inltt'r.:rl sliglrlly lrtngct'tltitn
tlr,rl ,rl rrlrr, lr llr,',,1,)|t'r lr;url'(", nr()\l r;rlrr(ll\ W'lrr'rr \()ut l)nnllrY int('r('\l rs irt llte
oS
100
80
Ea
t2l
BEHAVIOR UNITS
DESIGN OF RESEARCH
120
l.uro
60
=C
CG)
L-
5r;
a
3
o)
10o
o
^oro.\.
0)
_o
E
f
50
o
LL
30
200 400
600
.Z-1
E-
=C
tro)
LJ
a*
(J6
time allocated to dilferent behaviors (i.e. time budget), Slater and Lester (1982) rec()mmend selecting the time interval at which the slope changes most rapidly in order
to recluce the number of within and between bout intervals being assigned to the
\\'r()ng category.
When long-terrn records of behavior are examined, bouts may be for"rnd clustcrccl into 'super-bouts' (Machlis. l97l). The log survivorship curve may then be a
of three types of bout intervals: L the initial steep portion of withinlrout intervals; 2. the intermediate slope reflecting between-bollt intervals; and 3.
tlrc very gradr-ral slope representing between-cluster intervals (Figure 6.6). The
strper-bouts' may reflect diurnal rhythms, such as morning and evening feeding
pt'r'iotls. Wc tltcn have a hierarchy of behavior units as in Figure 6.7.
Sibly cl ul. (1990) rccommencl using log frequency rather than log survivorship
( ur\cs lirr splitting bchavioral ifcts into bor"rts. The data points in log frequency
, orr.rposite
s
(J
q)
U
o)
LL
r'l (tl ll(y)ll) .lrorrltl l)e c()nsullctl lir'1hc rrpplicablc nrcthocls. as well zts how to
,r;rplr lr';rsl \(lu;rrt'st'slinlrlr'slollte lortnul:r ptrrvttlcrl bySlltcrttrtd Lcslct'(1982).
"rlrlv
1
l,)// lll,ltr./)
\ cS lr rc
1,,';rpPlrcrl rrrrtl ;rrrrrlysis ol'variance tests can be used to determine whetlier the
I ,,'lr;n ior ;rl ;rt'ls ir e
l)r()l)crly split into bouts. Since tliis is a more complex procedure,
Ur
llroottt (l()/())r';rrr lri't'ortsttllt'tl l()r nr('lltorls l() iulirlVzt'sct'ics ol':t ltltltvirlr ttt
rrlrrr lr l)r'rrorltr rlt r',',rr',lrt'r'lt',1 (t,' rlttllrrrr',) Ilrt",r'tnt'lltorls tnt'ltttlr'rtttlo-t'onel:t-
BEHAVIOR UN ITS
DESIGN OF RESEARCH
()
o)
Fanother
Moves to
mea<
O"rr-ffi
o)
-nt ntm
.z
o
l
bites
()f
Frg.
a portic'rn
lnterval length
tion (e.g. Roberts, 1994) and Fourier-type spectral analysis. The analysis of bouts of
group of different behaviors is discussed in detail in Haccou and Meelis (1992).
o
6.3.4 Number of behavioral units to measure
o)
o
o)
Selection
o)
be alfected by several
llrctors. The ntitrintarr number will be dictated by a determination of what units are
.z
(o
)
)
(J
inrportant in answering the research question; that is, what is necessary for a valid
tcst of the hypothesis. The ntaxintunt number will be determined by the experimentrrl design, sampling method. data collection procedure (i.e. equipment), the
lnterval length
rrnd experience
.rn observer is unable to cope reliably with more than 15 separate behaviors.
llowever, many examples can be lound in the literature where more than 15 behavror'5 ]1sys been recorclecl; nevertheless, reliability (Chapter 8) rnay decrease as the
C
Between-cluster
intervals
Within-bout
intervals
(State l)
r-1
llll ilil
il
i;::":i;
(State
r-l
lll
rrrrrnber
lll)
ilillllll
increases.
Logistics may restrict the number of behaviors that a single observer can
rncirslrre. Behaviors of'interest may be distributed throughout a24h period such
ililll
Bout cluster
Fig.6.6
ability
of the observer, and logistics. Hutt and Hutt (1970) concluded that
Model for the log survivorship curve based on the assumptitlrt tltitt tltc ittlct'vrrls
ar-r
efficient,
if
rrot impossible proposition if extended over several days. In these situations, several
of the 24h
lrr'riorl. l.ikeu,isc. thc bchaviors ol interest might be spread out spatiallysucli that no
',rrrglc obscr''u'cr crn rcc()r'(l all the data. For example, Krebs (1974) used three
r'\'crs in lris sltrrly ol'colottiitl nesting and social feeding in great blue herons in
,,rrlr'r lolrrllrcr t'orrrplclclrrrtl irccurirtctlataot-tl'eedingflightscluringthepeakof the
1t'rl11, lrt'l iorl
{)l)\,t.
)nt'olrst'rr('r \\;rs slrrtiont'tl irr tlre ohsr.'r.r,';rtitlrr lritlc in thc colotty rtntl
\\,r', rr t:rrll,, r',rttl;tr'l tt tllt rt \('('()tt(l ollrt't \'('t ()tt lltr'sltol'r' littr'r'ltlsr'l<l
i+Ei !&i.ii,=
N)
=Eii[tgu-i?=i?
i{1il
,
ail?iii
?lillEi
-ei=a::i li3i iEgBE
ur:
an
z
'i,1
zril1i,
?i;;ei
i|Z*'*ii
;ii*
ue;ii*Ei-gi
+i;;aI
iiE:ai
lrg
=ziz;
t=7_, ilglgtf
tfiai
ziia
;5
i i;e::ra?3
,=1;
e
lie:E
Eig?Eig
?
ii
ii3Eii
\nr
\ni
il ..:.':",
processes
l. Generality
across
subjects
::, i, i,,,,
n t ar i o
n i:*,l:i:.:::1ffi','L:1,iil1l';he
measuring
:i {rissir)n
Selection
ll.1sL's
- \rtrition
:.
DrtTusion
treatment
settings
3. Generality across
response measures
St.it istical
of
tcr
other situations
The extent to which the results extend to
behaviors not included in the
experiment
4. Generality across
times
5. Generality across
behavior change
agents
6. Pretest sensitization
lollows
7.
Multiple-treatment
interference
Sourcc: Adapted and abridged from Kazdin (1982). Coyrighted by 1982 Oxford University Press. Inc. Reprinted by permission.
rn
rn
DESIGN OF RESEARCH
126
out to
before setting
designs (below) and statistical proceclures (Chapters ll-17)
choices of experimental
collect data. However, il-you are uncomfbrtable with ygur
An
with a statistician'
clesign and statistical tests, you shoulcl review therr-r
The independent variable in Table 6.5 is the natural time o.f day, and two values of
time of day were selected for determining their ellects on house rnice activity: noon
(l I ) and midnight (A2).Table 6.5 illustrates a mensurative experiment in which the
both in planning
technical advice and assistance on quantitative aspects
good
designs only
produce
and in interpretation . . . the statistician can
ifheunderstandssomethingoftheparticrrlarfieldofresearch,andthe
general principles
experimenter will receive better help if he knows the
can be combined
roles
two
of design and statistical analysis. Indeed. the
ables, the manipulations are called trcotment,e. For example, il' the experiment in
Table 6.5 had been conducted in the laboratory and the photoperiod had been
manipulated to create artificial noon and midnight, those two values of time of day
is prepared
when an experimenter with a little mathematical knowledge
experiments.
I FinneY' 1960'
-]
continuous values; we study the effect that different values of one, or more, independent variables (1,8...)have on one, or more, dependent vuriables (behavior units).
as though they
. . . to write of the 'experimenter'and the 'statistician'
with
is
concerned
are separate persons is often convenient; the one
yet with
accurately
and
undertaking a piece of research comprehensively
provide
is
to
other
the
reasonable economy of tirne and materials,
tolearnenoughtheoryofdesigntobeabletodesignhisown
the
As Finney has stated above, just as the researcher relies on the statistician'
data.
statistician relies on the researcher to provide the proper
in this book are
The discussions of experimental designs and sttttistical analysis
to be the minimum
introductory and cLlrsory. The material represents what I believe
with insight and
research
their
cou<luct
to
in
order
knowledge ethologists should have
a biometrician'
with
consultation
for,
logic. [t is meant to supplement, not substitute
^sumple
is a set of measurements
. . .)
of the dependent
studying, is indicated by a nun-rber ( 1,2 . . . tl).For example. in Table 6.5, one sample
(,t,,) is taken at Noon (Al), and one sample (Sr2) is taken at midnight (A2). Each
ple contains eight
ln experimental
S,, Sr,
number of individuals. Each value of the independent variable, whose effects we are
Srr rrr
nte u sur
nle n t,\
127
of
samples,
discussing
ol'
to be tested; 3. feasibility of gathering various types of data; 4' types
Block(s)
(Br...
B,)
llltrcks irt'c lrscd in a rondotni:cd hlock design to control lor the eflects of a nuisance
r;rrirrhlc; tlte l'at'iouslevclsorczttegoriesof thatvariablearedenotedbyB,., .,,. In
l:rlrlc (r..5. thc inrlivirlual nrice are blocked by sex: lemales (8,) and males Br).
mcasurcmcnts
6.5.1 variables, samples, treatments, blocks, individuals and
1o lltriltl lll)l)r()l)liirte
There are six terms that are necessalry to understancl in orclcr
tle lirritiotts I
ttotrttiott:ttttl
Tlrc
tcsts.
experimental clesigns ancl apply valicl statistical
lt'rts Iltt'
titItt't
ll.ttt
tlil'li'r
cirsy t6 updcrstuntl unrl rcnrcnrbcr'. btrt tlrcy rrrlry
Llse
^re
Ic'.rs
irr.e
to
lnliriluult
(l | . . .
1,,\
\\ lrt'rr llrr' r'llt't l ol t';rt'lr rlrlrtr' (or lrerrtttte nt) ol' lltc intlel-rcrtclcnt vitriablc is
rrl(',t\ltlt'tl rtll lltt' :;tttt(' lll(ll\l(lttttls ( tt'lt('(tl.'tl tttt'(t\lttt'.\ rl<'.:i,qtt'. tliSCttSsCtl llftCt' itl
tlrr', , lr,rIlt't ) llt,' rtr,ltr t,lrt,rl', ,rt,' ttttltt,tlr'tl lrl /,
,, lrr llrt' tt'1lr':ttr'tl ttt('itsut.cs
DESIGN OF RESEARCH
Table 6.5. A ltypothetical exuntple o/'a rt'peated meu.vure)^ experimentul cle.sign u,secl
Measurernent(s) (x,,)
to detarntine the e/fect o./'time o/-day on activity o.f'ltouse mic'e. Fotu'mule antl.firur
/bmole house mic'e n'cre rantlomly .selet'ted urul placed outtloors in t'uges vith running
wheels in order to measure the ntmtber o.f ntiruttes eac'h individual ntouse ,\pent using
tlrcir running wheel tlurirtg one hour ut ruton (1200 -1300) and one ltour at ntidnight
(24004100).
(
Noon (A1)2
Midnight (A\2
individuals
Individuals
S,,,.
Sr,-'
Females (8,)
Il
I I .3 (.r, ,)
I)
8.6 (-r,r)
Blocks by sex of
Males (8,)
52.2
(r.,)
49.4 (.r",.)
I3
10.5
50.5
I4
9.3
51.7
I1
9.6
50.0
IZ
10.3
5t.1
I3
r0.9
52.6
I4
9.1
s0.3
.
'
Notes:
'
Independent variable.
design illustrated in Table 6.5, there are four female mice (1,
mice (1,
,)
.
'
o).
) (Y)
The dependent variable is the behavior unit on which nteusLtratn('nl,r urc nratlc. l'htrt
behavior unit will have one or more properties in which observations will dil'lcr irr
'l'lrc rlcpcttsome measureable way (e.g. occurrence, fieqr.rency. duration. Iirtcncy).
dent variable in Table 6.5 is total tinie sperlt whccl rurrrrtirtg rlrtritrg caclt ortc-ltotn
l'ltr';trrls'
lgti-5).
l('\rln\. eorrsrrll
sample period.
l'irt'gootl
K r.;rtoclrwill (
tr
t.ltlltl,'
l','tt(l('nl
t rrI
t,rlrlt's
tll'.ne or two
inde-
DESIGN OF RESEARCH
130
Table 6.6. Polyergus queen tukeot'er o/'unreluterl F. gnava c'olonie'; uncl o./'
l3r
that Vives conducted; however, most of the data, and some of the experiments, are
hypothetical.
F. occulata colonies
Successful
Takeover time
Successful
Takeover titne
Colony
takeover?
(min.)
takeover'?
(min.)
l5
70
-1
+
+
60
4
5
F. ot'culata colony
20
NA
NA
+
2 days
NA
+
3 days
Notes:
This is one of the simplest designs, but it can be used to compare any nurnber of
samples (or treatments) of a single independent variable. The samples are the
qualitative or quantitative diflerences in the independent variable which you have
hypothesized have a measlrrable effect on the behavior you are studying. [f the
experiment is ntensurutive, the measurements taken in each sample are from individr-rals rartdomly selected lrom tlte population; the experiment may consist of a
single sample.
984).
One suntplc
S,,
rtt
Latin square
'
-r
of al6.litre
)
,ttc .l' lu,() (.()l)(liliorrs: L irr llrt' l)rr'\('n( (' ol prt'rlrrl()l\ ()l l11. ttt llol ltt llrt' 1rlt"'
(.ll(.(. (rl lltt.tl;tlrlts trl ll \ S()||l(. trl lllt. (.\;lllll)l('.. lrltr\ ltl...l .rtt. :lt llt.rl ..r1)(.1 llll(.1|1..
t:
,rt:
experiment, there
'zero' treatment in which everything is the same except that the experimental
variable has not been imposed. However, a control can also be: l. a'procedural'
treatment (e.g. mice injectecl only with saline versus saline plus drug treatment);
or 2. any treatment against which other treatments are compared (Hurlbert,
l
'
must be a minimum of two treatments (or treatment plus control), and individual
animals are randomly assigned to each treatment. A t'ontolis often considered a
.ri,,
Sirmple Mean:i,
\ ,, :
ir
rr birr'()vcr ir
total inrlicutes the mean lor that total. The dot in the subscript
tlcnoles lltc vrrrirrblc ovcr-which the surnmation occurred; in this case. this is
tlrt'nrr'rrrr lirr llre srrrrr ol'thc ulcasLrrenrcnts in this one sample.
ti
I32
DESICN OT.RESEARCH
parent)
Table 6.1. An exumple o/'dutu in a c'ontpletel'; rantlotni:etl clesign tt,ith ttro sumples
(see tert frtr e.rplunution)
S,,,
S,,
123 (.r, ,)
305 (,r,,)
207 (.r,,)
215 (,r.,,)
186 (.r,.,)
3l I (-r,.,)
42 1 (,r,
Ttro sttntple,v
Tabulcrr Fornr
356 (.r,,*)
,,)
S,,
S,,,
-rtt
.Y:
.Y
t:
_r
t:
Tubulur.fbrnt
,Y:z
l-1
sr,
S,'
Sample means:
l3l
l" :-Yl.
"'
Y:r
Y::
T.
Y:r
Y.
.Y:.
Grand mean:.r
-r
Sample nreans:-r,
,yr:a bar over a total indicates the mean for that total. The dot in the subscript denotes the variable over which the summation occurred; in this
this is the mean for the sum of the measurements in Sample
2.
found that the length of time until a choice was ntatclc ( rcttction time:latency to choice) tended to be shorter for young lrom brtltlcls rcirrccl itt
the presence of predators of yollng versus those raised with no pretlittors ol' yottttg
E.turnple
Vives
( 19S8 )
"Y" ... -r
i.,. ... .\,
Grand mearn:,r
samPle 2.
case,
.Y,
,S
'
.S.,,
-rr,:
.I'r
:a
bar over a total indicates the mean lor that total. The clot in the subscript
dentltes the variable over which the summation occurred; in this case, this is the
mean ftrr the surn ol the measurements in Sample l.
liturtrplt A thirtl
Itt lltts ltl'Potllt'lrt'rrl erlttttplc rvc lutvc trscrl 2l ipcliviclguls 1[rm brgods raisecl i.
lllr' pt('\('n( (' ol p11'11;1[1ls ol ;rtlrrlt gigltlirls (S;rrrrltlc A1;. 'f[c lirst i,rliviclt*rl tlc,_
rtttt'tl lr llrt.,,,tlltl) ( r ,, ) lr:trl:r tt';tr.li,rtt ltttrt.ol l.) I s(,(.()lt(ls.
DESIGN OF RESEARCH
t34
rf'a
135
Raised with
Raised without
Raised with
predators of young
predators of young
predators of adults
S,,
s.,,
sr,
123 ("r,,)
305 (-r,,)
216 (.v,,)
215
215 (.r.,)
186 ("r,,)
3l I (.r,.,)
195
356 ("v.,,*)
323 (.r.,,,)
421 (-r,,.,)
207 (x,r)
(.r.,.,,)
(.r,,)
Tuhulurjbrm
Siintples of indepentlent variable
Blocks
Linettr ntodel A simple equation can be used to show all the sources of variation
Bl
that affect the indiviclual measurements in the three completely randomized block
B,
S, Sr, Sr,... s,
'Ytt -Y:r -Y3r .'. -\,r
8,,
Sample
The rnodel (equation) states that each individual measurement (.v,,) is equal to
the population mean (p) plus the sample (or treatment) elfect (a,) plus an error
e,,
&:,t
(estimates p)
e,,:(x,,- I ,) (estirnates
e,r)
The error elfect is the summed elfect of all the uncontrolled rnrisurtt't, turiultl<,.s.
that is. all of the elfects not attributable to a particular sarmple (or trcatnrent). Wc
can rearrange the linear model to show that the error el-fect (e,,) is whll r'crnrrins ol'
ari individual measurement (.r,,) alter the sample (or treatnrent)cll'cct atrrl 1'lo1'rulirtion mean are substracted from it.
?,r:'v,r-(&,*P)
-r
rt
means:
Grand mean:i
As in most experiments, population paretmeters are not known. but the samples
Block
means
-r.l
ittttttittr'
(t
,,) ttlts
(t'50
to
rl
ri
I
,p that tot.l
',1
DESIGN OF RESE,ARCH
136
Table 6.10. An e.runtple of'u repeutatl nteu,sure,s des'ign n'itlt twu ,santple,s
illustratetl
with hypothetical cluta.front larval t'ichlicls (.see te-rt
fbr explanation)
Table 6.9. A runclomi:ecl block design illustruted with ltypctthetit'ul duta.fbr tha tinrc
it took larval cic'hlitls o/ dif/brent ages to c'hoose to stu1, near one d'their parents
Age
Raised with
Raised without
predators of young
predators of young
No Odor of predator
Odor of predator
predators of young
So,
Sn,
(days free-swimming)
S.,,
S,,,
650 (-r,,)
1235 (-r,,)
Il
203 (-r, ,)
587 (,r,,)
1307 (-rrr)
I2
185
1
J
673 (-r,.,)
1214
706 (,r,,,)
1292 (x.^)
(xr,)
te
d nrc us ure s
175 (.r.,)
(r,,)
168
(r,,)
'I,u
226 (.r,,,,)
r37
des i gn
213 (.r,,,,)
it took
odor was
present.
The repeuted measures cle,sign is the same as the randonizetl block design except that:
Individuals (e.g. 1,) are the biocks (Table 8.4)or subsets of blocks (Table
6.s)
u A measurement
'fubulur
Tuhulur fbrnt
sr
Il
I2
r
-Y::
-rr,,
-Y:
-Y-r
Bl
_\'
-\-n:.
-rr,,
,Y
If
S.r,
!:1
Srrntple ntcllns:
S.r,
'Ytt -Y:l
-Yt: .r::
B.
.\=,
tr
Grand mean: ,r
Grand mean:-t
E.rumple
fitrntut
individuals
s.r,
-r::
Individuals
as mcttchecl
ments)are used.
ol being
young was shown by young at age 2 days free-swinrtling. wc ntigltt Iltctt cltoosc lo
use ten individuals from that age groLlp to test lirr thc clll'ct ol'1'rt'ctlrttor rttlrtl itt tlrr'
test aquariLlnt on their time to nrakc it chrlicc. Wc rvottltl I'ltntlotnlv sr'lr'r'l lirt'itttlt
viduals to be testccl in (hc pl'cscncc rll'tltc otlor lit'sl. tlte otlrr'r'lir('\\('\\'oltltl lt'sl lttrl
turtlcr 1lrc crltttlilirltts ttl' tto 1'rt'ctlltlot otlttl
l lrt'lrrlltrlltr'lrt';rl rl;rl;r rrr l;rlrlr'(r lO rlrorr', llr;tl ltl(lt\ t(lrlrl /, lool' t0 l', lr, ttt,tl\(',t
l"'\(tt)tl)l( Sirlcc both ol'the extp-rples lor the randomized block design and the
r('l)crllc(l lllcilstrl'cs tlcsign (above) have only two samples, they
are also considered
tt
I tttt',tt tnrtrl<'l
Iltt' t'r;ttltlt.11 lot 11,..' tlttttl,rttttzt'rl lrlot'k. lr'l)t'lrlr'rl ltrclrsrn'cs lrntl ntirlcltctl
,1,",t1'1s', ul( lu(l(.,. /i tlrr't.llr.t I trlIr rl,ul;rlrlt.lrr Ilrt.Tllr lrlrrr.[ (or
nttlrr itltlrl):
pitirs
DESIGN OF RESEARCH
138
-Y,,:
P*u * F,*r,,
variability out of the error effect. We can show this by rearranging the litrear model:
i,,: x,,-
in groups
F,:tB ,-
and
(i, --\'
), respectively.
) (estimatet B/
u.yecr
in Kinsey's (r976)
139
All Male
AII Female
Mixed
912
t4
X
X
the block effect (F,) Ir appreciable then we will have beeu successful in reducing
the error eflect (e,,) by blocking. The relative power of the statistical analysis we use
as much as possible.
This design is applicable when the number of subjects available lor study is not
large enough to measure each sample (or treatment) effect lor each block; that is,
you cannot complete a normal randomized block design.
Block
Bt
B2
B1
low density
(24)
and high
Tahulur /itrm
Blocks
-Y::
..,
clesign,?
u.s
means
\lt
J.r
r-r2
t,
Lineur tnodel
The equation lbr the incomplete block clesign is
the same as that fbr the randomized
block clesign:
-Y.
'Y::
tr.
j'r
.t',r:it-t,* tt,1- p,
Grand mean:.t
This design is balanced. which means that each block contuins thc sittnc ttuttthct.
of subjects. each sample (or treatment) occurs thc satnc rrutnbct'ol'titttcs. lttitl sttbjects are assigned to the samples (or trcatt-r-rcrtts)so tlutt cltclt possiblc;t;til ol lte;tl
nrent lcvcls occurs within circlr block lur c(ltutl nrttttbcr ol titttr's. Itt p;trtrlrlll
hltlittlcctl tlcsip,tts s()lllt'l)llils ol'ltt';tllttt'ttl lt'rt'l: t't't'tll ltrl'1'1ltt'l ntlltttt lltt'lllt't'ks
nl(rt(' (rllt'tt Ilt;ttt rl.I ()Iltt't 1r;tttI
ef
It'tt'ls,l'lltt'luortttis;tttce tltt'iltblcslrrclrssigrrcdtotherowsandcolunrnsof
aLatin
'-(lll;llt' \irtt tttttsl lt;tVt'lltr.'s;ttttr'nttnrber ol's:unplcs
rll'circh pf the three variables
(lltr'rrrrl('l)(.lt(l(.nl rlrrlrlrlt.rvlr,,st.t.l]t.t.l
\.()u ilrt.strrrlVirtt,ltttrl tltc lwtl ttttisiutcc vitri,rltlt'ttlt,t',,','1lt't
1.,
\ilU;il(.
DESIGN OF RESEARCH
Lineur ntodel
The equation for this design inclr-rdes the zl variable effect (a,). the B variable
Tabulu".fbrnt
Independent variable
A,
A
1
Bl
B,
A1
cl
cr
"rttt
'Yt
(-,
Cl
'r
C]
'rl:-,
2:
cr cr
B.
.r 1..,-, -Y:r
-Yl:
c,
'Y3-,:
inclependent
(raising regime):
raised without
the presence
ol predators
':
in the presence of predators of young
lr:raisecl
1.,: raised in the presence of preclators of adults
Nuisance variable B (color morPh):
B,:gold
N uisance
a4x4x4
ancl a
1x4x4
6X6X6
I
123456
l2 3,1
1234
2 3 4 |
3 4t2
4t23
of
of
nuisance
Variable A
B
l
2
3
4
Variable
B
l
2
3
4
5
123456
231-561
3 4 s 612
4 5 6 | 2
561234
612 3 4
This design is usecl to measure the effects of two independent variables. It can be
extended to three or more v'ariables by continued blocking of the variables so that
blocks are split into addititlnal bkrcks of another vzrriable. Each measurement (.v,,)is
taken on it clill'ercnt incli','idr"ral. The indivit'luals are randomly assigned to the combinatiorts ol' vu riablcs.
(
)rtc ,strntplt
ut
Thltrrlur f ot
^\
.Br: green
B-,:wilcl
- ( a + B +ir, + 0)
of variables'
E.rumPlc
variable I
:,l,rr,
tt
Inclependent
By partitioning out the two nuisarnce variables, we have reduced the error ellect.
This carn make the Latin square a more powerf ul design than either the completely
randomized or randomized block designs, although it is rarelv used in ethological
of each
randotlly
.rilr:F*
e,,r-
lect
research.
Nuisance
variable
ef
,,
\.,1
ancl B
^\,,,
\l,t
tYPe
'1'
):
:
('t
I tlltr ltt't'-:tritttttlittl'
('
I,l,rt"IIr'r''\\lllllllllll'
DESIGN OF RESEARCH
(see
illustrtecl with hypotheticul tlata./br lorval c'ic:hlids
t
t'.t t .f i t r t'.t' P I u t tu
ti
tt
morphs and raised under two conditions chose to stay in close proximity to one
of their parents
Independent variable
predators
Predator odor
Raised with
sil
S,,
(N:40)
(N:40)
S,,
S,,
2l 3 (-r,,,)
187 (.r,,,)
162 (-r,,r)
219 (-v,,,)
Color morph
Totals
Gold
174 ("rr,,,)
235 (-r,,,,,)
S,
l6 (,r,,)
4 (.Y.r)
20
l7 (.r,,)
l0 (xrr)
2l
JJ
t1
47
(N:40)
Wild type Su,
(N:40)
to test the effect of
Example In the study of choice by larvalcichlids, we might want
versus being raised where the
being raised in the presence of the odor of a predator
cichlids (time to mztke a choice)'
pre<lator can only be seen on the reaction time of the
under these two conditions and then
We would rundomly select inclividuals to be raised
Totals
being raisecJ with predators of young on whetlier age two day free-swimrning larval
of predators, and 27 were ol the wild type. Seventeen had both features; that
type raised in the presence of predators.
parents.
'
in
tl a p e ntle n t w r i u b I e s
Tcthulur lbrm
of indePendent variable
Samples of
Samples
variable B
S,,
Variable
means:
Samples
S,,
s.r,
means
t
rt:
'r:t
-\-
J::
,tl
'Yr
S,,
Samples
Variable B
independent
of independent variable
of
Variable B
inclependent
Sr, "'
variable B
s,,
S,,,
,t,,
,r:t .Y-rt
'Yj. 'Y::
-Y:: 'Yr
.r.2
,\',,,
rn
\ r:
Iri
,\,,,,
t,,,
t,,,
,sr-,
Sr,,
means
Y.r
\'l
.\'.
\'
( it':tlttl lll(':111.
Vrrrilrlrlt' .l
',,,
is,
wild
DE,SIGN OF'RESEARCH
Table 6.14. Exuntple q/'u t'onrpletell' runclonti:ctl twt-firt'tor tlasign vith tltree
strntples illustrutacl y,ith h!,potheticul clutu.lbr v'hether lurvul cichlicls of'three c'olor
morph,s ttncl raisetl uncler thrae t'onditions cho,se
to
sttt.v
in
t'lo,se
prorimity
lheir purents
baboons and found that the researchers tended to select the largest group available
to them as their study group; they point out that this will likely introduce significant
biases in analyses whenever group size is an important independent variable.
When selecting individuals for a randomized design or selecting random samples
145
r a n do
'
is
op p o r t u n is t
Raised with
Raised without
Raised with
predators of
predators
predators of
ment taken from an individual, in such a way that all possible samples
adults
(N:60)
larvae
(
1/:60)
1/:60)
S,,
Color Morph
sfl
Gold S,
l6 (.t,,)
4 (,r,,)
l2 (,r,,)
l7 (.r,,)
l0 (,r,,)
l4 (,r.,)
Runclont suntp[e'.
of being
population, or a measure-
s.r,
'
Hupha:urd suntple: A sample taken on some arbitrary basis, generally convenience. For example, we might take measurements on the individuals in a
(r/:60)
type S,
(l/:60)
Green So,
( I/:60)
Wild
3 (,r,,)
7 (-r,,)
group that are closest to us, or we might take measurements belore lunch
and after dinner, or when we think the animals are likely to be most active.
'
l0 (,r,.)
As an example of this design we will add to the example given above (see
Table 6.14).We will add an adclitional color morph (green) and atn additional condition under which the young are raised (with predators of adults).
Exuntplc
Linettr
ntsdcl With the completely randomized design with two indeperrdent vari-
This study is based on facts gleaned for the most part from random
observations.
t,,:F*u+B+l,ilr,i
In
1935;90J
;rl'rout cxpcrinrcntal clesigns. For example. Tinbergen admitted that in his earlier
In the experimental
[Loran;,
(ol'
difficult(ifnotimpossible)toaccomplishthiswlrcrlctltttlttctitlgcllttlltlqic:tlt...s..lttt'lt
in the field. Instead. we atternpt to suntplc a lul'gc ntrrnbcr ol'intlir,itlttltls ttttrl st'lt't l
indivicltrals in a wity tllitt wc llclicvc t'csttlts ill:l ,r'rr'rt,,11111t11'111t1t1tt\ittrttlrrtrr ttl il
t.itttrltltt.t sitptltlc.'l'ltc resclrt'r'lte t rnrrst lrltr'ntpt ltl rtvotrl ;t lltltst'tl r:ttltPlt' ll()lll ;l l)()l)tl
.,ltttltt"'
))
'rl
llttitltl. l'ol t'r;ttttPlt" '\'ltltt tttltll illl(l I )ttttlrlrl ( lt)fi t'\;lttltttt'tl 'l ltt'ltl
strrtlics with grayling butterflies. they had presented their models in a haphazard
r
146
DESIGN OF RESEARCH
behaviour was sampled during the morning, midday, and evening. This
was not always possible.
I Yoerg, 1 994. 579 J
ior, or
sequence
of
selectecl
sampling
attacked during a one-hour observation period, if the attacks were randomly distributed throughout the redshank population.
A respectable attempt at random sampling diflerent individuals can sometitrtes
be nrade by stratifying your sample by sex or body size and attempting to sample
ranclomly within those groups. If you are observing a large group of individuals'
such as geese feeding in a field, you can divide the group spatially using an imaginary grid or marker stakes placed in the field before the geese arrive. You can then
sample from different and distant portions of the grid assuming that an individLral
goose is unlikely to move that distance during your samplipg period.
When individuals can be recognized, it may still be dilficult to follow a ratldottt
equalizing samples:
also have sarnpled a reasonably large number of individuals. Even if we could recognize individuals and randomly select a sample of individuals for observatit-rn, the
an
chances of observing the behavior of interest would be remote without spending
ar-rd
/"'',\
(-) t++)
and
might obtain l0 one-hour samples of t-eeding behavior lhrnr citclt intlivitlrral tlttt'rltg
each of three sample periods (early morning, noon. lltc ul'tct'noott) ovct' llte Pctiotl
of a month;however, this type of sampling protocol is ol'lcrr tlillicrrlt lo rtt't'otrtPlislt.
f!.rr\
\-= / \ar',+:/
cllicicncy:-
l rtrrtnbcr rll'srrl-l.iccts
r t'ost ol'tllrtlr collcctiott pcr sub-iect
rll ('\l)('nln('ntrrl e r rrrt'tlcgrccs ol'll'cctlotn
rr lrt'r'r'
r'ttot tll
I48
DETERMINATION OF SAMPLE
DESIGN OF RESEARCH
where:
totaldf:n- I
df: ntunber of sart"rples- I
finc1
5.2 s
6.1
4.3
tt
3.1
7.2
mean:5.4
6.7
greater thau
The subscripts clesigpate the two experimental designs. If the ratio is
the liniited
ol
Because
secolid.
the
one. then the lirst design is more efficient than
necessary'
usually
controlethologists generally have i1field stuclies. compromises are
or using
ity of the data. This ca1be cletermined by gathering some preliminary data'
then
and
researchers.
other
by
or
clata gathered during recclnnaissance observatious
I
l
(see
sectitln
'7'6)' The
the stanclarcl deviation of the measurements
calculating
following lbrmula lor cletermining required sample size lSnedecor' 1946) tbr a test
of two means can then be used.
,rl /l
samPles
r.r'here.r--standard deviation:
required:-;
tl-,-rt
/r,,,
ttt_ |
1:tabular'l'value
tlttt;tltptts
For cxlttt't1'rlc. lcl trs sitv \\,C lvlrrrt tp rlctcr rliltr' tltt'tlrllt'tt'ttt't' itt tllt';ttt
()lll ltt'ltl rl()l(""lll(l
rll' crlvrltr.' ltow ls !'irt'tt ttot'ltttllltllt ;rrrtl ,litrrrrlrllt Wt'tt'lt't l(|
(6-l)
of accuracy, then:
(2.51t)2 (2.2s)(6.6t)'_1tl
"- (5y'x01)5): -
ri:number of
149
follows:
samples
fI
SIZE
I
((x)?) -- -
Thereflore, we must obtain 212 samples ol nocturnal coyote howls in order to have a
reasonable estimate
of the true
lbre, the larger the san-rple size, the better the probability that the sarnple statistics
will closely approximate the population values.
You can also determine the necessary sample size by solving lor
nrulas
lbr
l/ in power
fbr-
specific statistical tests. Power lormulas lor two t-tests are described in
Cliapter I I ; otl-rers can be lbund in various texts (e.g. Cohen, 1988, Zar, 1984).
You should not attempt to increase the sample size by increasing the number of
observations on individuals already in the sample and then pooling those 'k'observations on'rr'individuals to create a larger sample size consisting of 'ni'observations; this is 'pseudoreplication'(Hurlbert, 1984) or the 'pooling fallacy'(Machlis er
rrl.. 1985) which increases the probability of committing a Type I error.
Increasing sample size is not the only way to increase the power of your experinrcnt (sec cliscr"rssion of power in Chapter I l). For example, Still (1982) has proposcrl scvcral ultcrnatives to consider including: I. selecting a better experimental
-3.
secluential rnetliods.
in the field in order to be valid. This sometimes becomes evident when the same
experiments are conducted in both the field and the laboratory. As an example,
McPherson (1988) tested fruit prelerences of cedar waxwings (Bomhyc,ilta
cedrorum) (categorized by species, color and size) in both the field and laboratory;
the diflerences
As a general rule, all ethological studies should be conducted in the field when
feasible; this is especially true lor descriptive studies and mensurative
experiments.
Changing the emphasis of your research from description in the field to experimen-
(behavior units). We can either allow the independent variables to change naturally.
tions (i.e. usually the field), and experimental manipulations can best be controlled
under laboratory conditions. Nevertheless, it is sometimes difficult with certain
researcher
should then consider whether natural behavior of the species can be expected, and
unobtrusive observations can be made, in a laboratory environment.
Even though we might want to shift our field studies into the more controllecl
captive or laboratory setting, some species cannot be easily and properly maintained in captivity. For example, Tinbergen, after reflecting on some of the shortcomings of his field studies on gulls, concluded:
ggg:961).
species
[Tinbe
It would
Not only is it sometimes difficult to move fleld stuclics inlo thc lirborirtory. btrl
conditions in the field often make manipr"rlations vcry dillicrrlt. Al'ter rcviewirrl,
ethological and behavioral ecology stuclics ol'All'icun trngtrlirtcs. l.ctrllroltl
(lt)l'/l
concluded that.
Ilxperirncnts htrvc rlrrcly bccrt t'rrt't'ictl orrt so llrt. Plrtllv lrt't rrusr' tnttt'lr
tlcscl'iPtivc wot'k wirs t('(lttitctl rtl lirst. rrntl P;ttllv lrt't'ltust'ol lltt'Plttrtt;rl
rlillit'rrllit's ol rn:uriprrllrlinl, srlrl urt1111 ,1,'r nl ('\l)('run('nl;rl .'tlu.rlt()n'f
of the relIttive advantages and disadvantages of field and laboratory studies in animal
behavior' Also. Mertz and McCauley (1980) present a similar discussion for ecological
stLrclics which can alsc-r be applicd to ethorogicalresearch.
EXPERIMENTAL RESEARCH
152
r53
temporal activity patterns, such as circadian rhythn-rs and seasonal cycles. That is,
temperature, humidity, wind and light levels may all be important in determining
the activity patterns shown by an animal or group of animals.
tions. The phenotype includes the action and interaction of the genotype and environment (including experience) and the animal's anatomy and physiology. The
organism can exert forces on both the biotic environment (e.g. intra- and interspecific social behavior) and the abiotic environment (e.g. a badger burrowing into a
hillside).
Since all the f'actors in Figure
J.l
are variables
behavior, the researcher must be judicious when selecting the one (or f'ew) variable
to study at any one time. The complexity of the interactions that can result from
two, or more, variables must be recognized and dealt with as skillfully as possible
within the limits available to the researcher (e.g. experimental designs in Chapter 6).
For example, Prinz and Wiltschko ( 1992) studied the eflf'ect of the interaction of
stellar and magnetic inlormation during ontogeny on the migratory orientation of
pied flycatchers (FicecluIu hypoIeut'u).
The first step is to list all the variables that are known to affect the behavior in
question or are suspected of having some effect. Some examples of the dillerent
types of variable are listed below:
Environmental Variables
Biotic
7.1 Interactions
netic history. Figure 7.1 is a simplified diagram of'the relittiottship bctwcctl rttt
organism and the environment (also see Moclel. Chaptcr 2). T'hc cttvit'olttttcttl ltrts
both biotic (biological)and abiotic (physical) lclturcs. s()nrc ol'rvlriclr u'ill rrl'li't't tlrc
clrganism. Ascxlrlplcs. biotic lL.irtrrrcs rrlry inclrrtlc vcg,r'llrtion lyPe itt lr;rlrrl;tl st'lt't'
titll. iltclspccilic pretllrtor r.lli't'ts ()n l)rev lr,.'lltviot irtl(l ttlttltslrt't llit ('()tlll\llll)
sit,tlltls ott nurlt.st.lr,r'lion Alrroltt lt';rlttt(':r lllil\ lrr'ttttI,rt l;tttl ttt tt'1'rtl:tlllll' :l "l)('( l('\'
Temperature
2 Wind
3 Humidity
4 Cloud cover
-5 Topography
ll
)r-grrnisntirl variubles
A ( icrrolyl-rc
Scr
.) l'lrtr'rtl slrlck
ll l'ltt'ltol1'pt'
I llt'lr;rr tot:tl t lt tt;tt lt't t',ltt',
EXPERIMENTAL RESEARCH
a Description of behavior
behavioral acts)
Frequency
c Rate
d Duration
f
2
Spatial characteristics
Physical attributes
a Morphological characteristics;
e.g. shapes,
color patterns
Physiological characteristics
Alter identifying the variable of interest, the usual procedure is either to manipulate that variable systematically, as von Frisch did with light polarization, or to
lollow it through natural changes, measuring both the variable and the behavior of
interest. The other variables you have identified as potentially having an effect must
This procedure of attempting to list all the important variables is useful not only
when you are thinking about the potential causation of a particular behavior in
anticipation of designing a study, but also when you have already decided on the
variable(s) you want to measure or manipulate and want to account for other poten-
tial sources of variation (e.g. eliminate or measure them). The number of variables
that could potentially affect a behavior is extremely large; therefore, the researcher
should be willing to spend time compiling the list. Important variables that you
overlook can olten be identified by other ethologists, therelore, you should enlist the
help of your colleagues in identifying other variables, as well as concurring on the
variables of most concern for measurement, manipulation or control. The impor-
remain constant or vary randomly, so that they can be considered to have no systematic elfect on the behavior being studied. The variable being manipulated is the
independent variable (e.g. light polarization), and the behavior being measured is
the dependent variable (e.g. orientation of the bee's waggle dance; see Chapter 6 lor
a
to determine both individual effects and interactions. Selected analyses of this type
are discussed under multivariate analyses in Chapter 16.
When planning your experiments, always keep in mind how the various results
will (could be) interpreted.
as a celestial compass.
Bourbon on the rocks, scotch on the rocks, vodka on the rocks, gin on
the rocks all can make you drunk must be the ice cubes.
llrt'l'1tr.'11
"
l)t'|;ltltllt'ttl
N1
t't'lttt1"'
ll'\NS
cxpcrinrcnts.
IlXPER I M ENTA L
156
ESEARCH
cycle. Sunrise and sunset apparently trigger the onset and cessation
of activity in
unrarit'urtu.s)
(Mech et u1.,1966).
,?i::{kr
Some enviroumental lactors fluctuate within seasonal ranges but vary somewhat
irregularly from day to day. For example, decreasing light levels near sunset apparently trigger the initial departure towards the roost of loraging starlings (Sturnu.s'
20.6
vulgaris; Davis und Lussenhop 1970). Nisbet and Drury ( 1968) compared nleasure-
\h
8.3.
0.5
--21
t-11
The age and experience of the animals under investigation can be allowed to
3.5
Percentage of total
number (2589)
of seconds of
observation
breeds from birth to maturity and were able to divide their development into fbur
Fig'
7'2
5.0
\\\
-1.2
t",'*)
trl\
/.",'
advance naturally and their behavior observed at various stages. Scott and Fuller
(1943). Drori and Folntan(1967) showed a marked elfect of experience on tlre coplr-
3.8
in each zone. He lbund that the five species distributed themselves on the trees such
that utilized dilferent microhabitat variables (FigLrre 7.2).
/.il
li/
'/ /
with high and rising temperature. low and f alling pressLlre, lclw but rising hurmidity,
and the onshore component of wind velocity.
The response of animals to simultaneous variations in the environrnent can also
be studied. For example, Heinrich (l9l I ) examined the leeding pattern of the caterpillar (Munclu<'tt.sr,,r/rr) ancl fbund that it was consistent for given leaf shapes and
sizes. Simultaneous variation has also been the basis for many field studies of
habitat selectiort. MacArthur (1958), for example, studied the distribution of five
congeneric species of warblers while they fed on individual white-sprllce trees. He
clivided the trees into l6 zones ancl measured the percentage of the total number of
seconds of observation and the percentage of the total observations for each species
in behavior ol
3.8
151
3.7
Percentage of total
number (80)
of
observation
Cape May warbler lecding positions. At least 50'2, ol'the actrvity is in the
stipplerJ
zones. Each branch was divided into threc zones: B bare of lichen-covered
base.
M. olcl ttcedles; and T. Itew (less than L5 years old) needles and bucls. (fro1t
MacArthur. l95tl).
latory behavior of male rats, and Carlier anci Noirot ( 1965) demonstruted that experience improvecl pup retrieval in female rats. Stefanski ( 1967) slir>wed that the
average
r,'ariecl cluring
six stages of the breeding season: prenesting, nest building, egg ltrying. incubation,
nestling. and fledgling.
ITinbargcn, 1955;259J
The use of natural variation has limitations which are both clualitativc arrrl cprirrr-
titative. Waiting lor the proper conditions to arise' ancl atternpting to gltlre r ir sulii-
cient number
of
thc cthologist to
rrrtilicirrl
manipulation:
t;ttt lrt'ltltllrtsl
lltt'
arrcl etlect
o{'behavior is to
.\lllt()ttl'lt llrr'rrrlilill)ltlitltr)lt t\;illtlt(.t;tl. t.rcrY lrllt.nrgrl slrorrlrl lte rrrlrtlc t() lll)l)t.()xittt;tlr'lltt'rr,tr ttrtrl.,lrtrttrlt;tttrl llrt,n,tlut,tl, 1r,rrr1,,..,,r., t 1o,.1.11 :rr
Por:iltlt,.
EXPERIMENTAL RESEARCH
t58
159
Since the pigeons homed successfully, you might harve concluded that they don't use
the sun as a compass and therelore hypothesized that they use the earth's magnetic
field. If you then attached bar magnets to their backs (to tli.srupt the magnetic field
around them), but tested them on a sunny day, they would still have homed, but this
tirne they would have been using the sun as a compass. Further, unless you recognized that you should have been controlling more than one of the variables at a time,
you might conclude that the pigeons use neither the sun nor geomagnetic field as
cornpass cues. Even if you recognized your design error and proceeded to disrupt
their orientation by applying magnets and testing the pigeons on overcast days. you
would not have as conclusive results as you could have obtained by monipulatirzg the
variables and predicting the changes in orientation (see experiments clescribed in
section 7.3).
When you eliminate or disrupt an animal's sensory system you also run the risk
systems which could be important
for the behavior(s) you are measuring. The lollowing story illustrates how attempts
to eliminate a sensory system can have additional elfects on the animal's behavior
and the researcher's ability to interpret results:
statistical power (Chapter ll). With elimination ancl disruption you are only
attempting to eliminate or disrupt the behavior being studied (often in an unpredictable manner). For example, in attempting to locate the circaclian pacemaker it
was known that surgical ablation (elimination) of the suprachiasmatic nucleus
(SCN) in the brains of mammals eliminated overt behavioral rhythmicity; those
experiments provided sorne evidence lor the SCN being the pacemaker. However,
conclusive evidence was provided when Ralph et al. (1990) conducted transplanta-
tion experiments with normal hamsters and a mutant strain with a short circadian
period. They demonstrated that srnall neural grafts fl'om the SCN of donor hamsters restored circadian rhythms to arhythmic hamsters whose own SCN had been
ablated; the restored rhythms always exhibited the period of the donor genotype,
normal or mutant (short).
If you eliminate or disrupt stimuli in order to determine their role in a eliciting or
orienting a behavior, the behavior may come under the control of other stintuli anrl
sensory systems. Thus, when the behavior does not disappear, or is not clisruptccl.
you could draw incorrect conclusions. Indeed. this is what occurrecl in c:rrly cxpcriments designed to determine the environmental cues used for oricrrlulion by liu'rrg-
ing bees and migrating birds (Gould, 1982). For exarnple, if you wcrc an ctlrologrst
in the early part of the century and were interestecl in thc cnvironn.rcrrlirl errcs llt;rt
homing pigeons use to orient back to the hornc lol't. you rrrighl lr:rvc rlcsiltn('(l('\lx'l
iments to elimirtatc rlr rlisrrrgrt polcrrlilrl crrcs. ll'yott ltypolltr'sizr'rl tlrtl pi1't'ons usr'
thc strn its:l c()n)l)ltss rilttl tesletl llrt'nr ott rl!'r'rt'lrsl tl:rVs (ltt t'littttttrtlr'lltt'srilr ;rs rr
r'ttc). tltt'lli,'t'otrs rvrlrrlrl slrll lrlrvt'll()nr('(l ltstttl'lltt't'lttllr': ttt;r1'trr'ltr ltr'lrl:tr llrr't ttt'
rrlt'lo obllrin vllitl rcsults'/ If so,2. Was this severe a manipulation necessary to
iurs\\'('r llre tescrrtclr tlrrcslirln'l Il'so.3. Wts the answer to the research question
rrorllr tturkinl llris s('verc lt tnlutipttllttiort'l Sincc thc rttrswcr tt> questions I and 2 is
'No', lrllr
(':ur t ottt lrrrlt' tlr;rl llrt'slrttlt'ttl u'lrs t'illtcr rr rtlrivc or sittlistic rescarcher. If
\\r';'11t' llrr'rlrrrlr'nl llrt'ltt'ttt'ltl ,rl ,r',.,unutr1' lltt'1 \\('r('{rnlV tt:rivt'tttttl ittscttsillvc. wc
160
l6l
should recommend that they answer those questions befbre making any manipula-
skins
t,ircllinu,t), and by Lack ( 1943) in his study of aggression in robins (Eritltucu.s rubeczrla: also see Table 8.3). Models and dummies have the advanta-ee
of allowing the
ditferences.
Tinbergen was an early and exemplary proponent of the use of models (Dawkins cl
u1.,1992).
Moller (1987) stuclied the role of badge size (extent of dark coloratiou on the
throat and breast) on status signaling in house sparrows (Pusscr tlonrcstit'u,s) by
placing stulfed male house sparrows (dummies) near nests. Stout ancl Brass (1969)
placed pairs of dummies, or wooden-block models witli tiltable boclies and
adjustable stuffed heads (Figure 7.4).
demonstrated that the head and neck are the parts of the bocly that relcusc territol'ial aggression displays in this species.
Some researchers have incorporated movement ztnd/ot' ttclors lttttl stlttrttl irtto
their models and dummies. For example. Esch (1967) used et wootlcn. tt.totot'-tlt'ivctt
model in his research on communication ol'firod source locittion in ltortcybces. I lte
rnodelwas the approximate size ot'the honcybccs bcing sturlicrl. btrt it rlitln't t lost'll
resemble them physically: this probablv ltirtl littlc cl'll'ct sirtcc lltc cxlrerittt('lrls \\'('r('
carrieclttut in a tlark lrivc.-l-lrc rttorlcltlirl Ilrr,c tltc itle lrtit'rtl.,tlot rtl lltt'lttrr"s tltlrtlr
ititnls itnrl ltcrlirnut'(l ;t 'n()nltitl'n'lr1'1'1r.' rl;rrrt',.'. lrttl no lrt't's lt'll llrc lttrt'l,r:t';lr'lt lol
litotl itr llrc tltrr'( ll()n ptrrl l;lttttt'rl lrt lltt'ntotlr'l r tlrtttt t' l ',,1t ,,,tt, ltl,l,',1 llr,rl ',r)lll('
lir
71
EXPERIMENTAL RESEARCH
(Chocton aurign)
validity of his
use
the
to-inspect ratio, and approach behavior of the host fish to both live cleaners and his
models.
Lrse
the
aspect
model's bill to its forehead. The ohicks delivered significantly n"rore pecks to the
model with the spot on the bill than they did to the model with the spot on the forehead. They concluded that it was the position
phenomenon by placing the rnodels at different distances from the pivot point of the
rod holding the model. Further, he adjusted the height of the chick so that it was
always at eye levelwith the red spot. He had created three models: a 'normal model'
with the spot on the bill, a model with the spot on the forehead and the pivot point
the same ('slow model'), and a model with the spot as on the bill-spot model ('fast
model'). The fast forehead-spot model received more pecks than the slow lorehead
Fig.
in their study ol
glaucous-winged gulls. la, upright, threat-postured body 1b, trumpetingpostured body; lc, choking-postured body; 2a, basic wooden model;2b, upright
threat posture; 2c, model without wings: 2d, dummy showing upright threat
posture with wings.
thing more than the dance was necessary to elicit foraging. More recent research
used a motor-driven model bee which not only danced, but also vibrated artificial
wings and exLlded sugar-water samples; this dummy bee was much more successful
variation in the breast stripe. Their dummies could be turned 360'. by radio cont rol.
to keep them always oriented in the direction from which tlre livc hirrls irpprolclrctl.
Models shor-rld contain the important f-eatures ol-thc livc irnirrurl. irntl tlrev
should be used in a normal context (see Cr,rrio 197.5 lirr an cxccllcrrt cxlrrrple ol
extensive and proper use ol'modcls). Irt olltcr wortls.';rrr rrrrtlerlying rrssrrrrrptiorr ol
the ntcthrttl is thlrt rcsll()ltsc to
1l19
llrrs;rssrrrrrP
model, although f-ewer than the 'normal model,'revealing the elfect of speed of the
red spot on the chicks'responses. Therefore, Tinbergen and Perdeck (1950) were
correct in concluding that position of the spot is important; but I{ailman demonstrated that speed of the spot is also a contributing factor.
Models and dummies shor.rld be used with appropriate caution. They may be
either too simple with the inrportant stirnuli absent, or too complex with extrarleous
stirnuli confounding the experiment. As with any tool, however, in the hands of a
skilled researcher. models and dummies can be an important means of manipula-
'lrrrw' rr spccics tliscrirninirtcs bctween varic'rus stimuli. For example, May et al.
( f ()lili ) strrtlit'rl lrorv .lrrprrrrcsc lnirca(l ucs ( lllttcuut.f ir.st'ulu) discriminate between diflr.'tt'rr( ( ()() \ot;rliz;tliotts ltv ttsutp, itt.ttt tttttt'ttlttl t'otttliliottitt,q lct trairr inclividr"ral
lnir( ir(lu('s lo tlrst rrrnrr;rlt' \nroollt t';tr lr'' l;;1'11' ;trttl 'slt)orltlr llrtc ltiglt'ctlo sttttnds.
Ilrt'rrrrrt rr,lu('\ \\'('rt'lrrrrrt'rl lo nr;rk,'lt,rtt,lt
o111:tr'l
164
F.X
t'hlL l M
NTA L
ESE,ARCH
r65
to one type of vocalization and release contact in response to the other vocalization.
the moths, but their ability was allected by the background upon which the motl-t
was placed and the moth's body orientation. In a later study, Pietrewicz and Kamil
(1919) used the same in.slrruncntul cotrtlitioning procedure to stucly search irnage formation in blue jays.
cr-res
begins with
studies of what a species'can'perceive (Miller 1985); that is, what stimuli they are
capable of perceiving and responding to. For example. Lehner ancl Dennis (1971)
hypothesized that waterfowlrnight use atmospheric pressure changes as a cue lor orientation during migration. They used instrumcntul t'onditiortirtg to train mallarcl
Fig.
ducks. in a barometric pressure chamber, to peck one microswitch when the pressure
increased and another microswitch when the pressure decrensed. They then exposed
7.5 Coyote in tcst chambcr uscd by Horn and Lehner (1975) to dctermine the
coyote's scotopic (clirrk aclaptcd) light scnsitivity. A stinrulus patch is at the
coyote's eye level at the ccnter ol the right wall; it is not illuminated in this photo.
Two loot treadles Are on the floor, separated by a plexiglas partition.
the ducks to sequentially smaller changes in pressure and demonstrated that the
ducks could perceive atmospheric pressure changes as small as 0.4 psi. Kreithen and
at the coyote's eye level. They were then instrumentally conditioned to step on a foot
Keeton (l9l4a) used r'lrr.r'.ricul t'ontlitioninglt-t test the capabilities ol- homing pigeons
to detect atmospheric pressure changes. The procedure was to place the pigeons indi-
treadle to their right when the light was on. and a treadle to their leli wlien it was ofl.
Once they consistently perlbrn-red this discriminzrtion task, then intensity of tl"re
light stirnulus rvas pr"rt under the control of'tl-re coyotes. When they stepped on the
right lbot treadle (indicating they could perceive the light stimulus), the light auto-
shock (r,rnconclitionecl stimulurs) to the pigeon. causing the heart rate to incrcusc
(unconditioned response). After a f-ew presentations, the pressure change becullc it
conditioned stirnulus that caused the heart rzlte to increase (conditionctl t'cspottsc)
without the electrical shock being adrninistered. Then, the pigcons'pcrccption ol'rlil-
irtterrsity ol-the light stin-rr.rlus was continuously recclrded resulting in a graph of the
coyotcs'psychophysicaI threshold lbr vision at nigl"rt.
ferent amounts of pressure change was determinecl by observitrg chungcs irt tltcir'
heart rate. They determined that the homing pigeon is ahle to tlclcct ltttttospltct'it'
pressure changes of l0 mm of H,O. or lower. Kreithcn iurcl Kccton ( 197-lh) ttsctl lltt'
rrg
bc-en an irnportant technique in studies of foragnrtcgics. As ittt cxanrple. Har ct a/. ( 1990) irt.strLunentully t'ontlitioneclcaged gray
As part of thcir rcscarch oll coyotc 1'rrctlrrliort. llont lrrtl l t'lrtt't (lt)i.l)rr;tttlr'tl
t1r clctcnlinc tltc lrlu'csl ctt'u ilontnt'rtl,rl lilltt lt'rt'ls llt;tl t'ovolt's. tt lrtt lt lttttrl ;)ttnt:ll
1;tf
: t'l)psr'ttl lilt'ltt]c
1t;ClcpClfliif
lly
ill
EXAMPLES OF EXPERIMENTAL MN NII'IIT-ATION
EXPERIMENTAL RESEARCH
166
161
MANIPULATION
7.2.1 In the field
Many experiments arise from descriptive studies in the field and progress through
mensurative experiments to artificial manipulation of the animal and/or its environment.
Manipulation of the animal involves altering the anatomy and/or physiology of the
animal (A and P in the model in Chapter 2). For example, the role of sensory receptors and physiological state can be studied by manipulation of the animal per se.
Layne (1961) studied the role of vision in diurnal orientation of bats (Myotis' uus'troriparius) by releasing normal, earplugged, and blinded bats (two types of sensory
elimination) at various distances from the home cave. None of the eye-covered bats
homed, suggesting that vision is an important in homing behavior. Ehrenfeld and
Carr ( 1967) measured the role of vision in the sea-finding behavior of lemale green
turtles (Chelonia m1,das) by blindfolding them or fitting them with spectacles containing dillerent filters (elimination and disruption of the visual sense). Blindfolded
jay
the instrumental conditioning apparatus used to study gray
to
perches
attached
two
of
consisted
each
patches
loraging strategies. The two
and an
were
reached'
pellets
clispensed
which
through
hole
a
microswitches,
operated
automatic pellet dispenser. A microcomputer recorcled perch hops and
7.6 Diagram of
turtles and those wearing red, blue, and 0.4 neutral density filters had significantly
reduced orientation scores.
ai''
the feeclers. as well as controlling lights ancl backgound noise (from Ha et
Press'
1990). Copyrighted by Academic
Morphological changes are occasionally made on animals in the field, and the
effect on the animal's ability to obtain and/or retain a mate, social status or a terri-
tory is then measured. In these studies, it is the change in behavior of other individLrals that engage in interactions with the altered individual which is usually being
rneasured; but an ellect can also often be found by observing the altered individual.
the herd. Harris sparrows (Zonotrichia quereula) signal their dominance status by
variations in the amount of black leathering on their crowns and throat. Rohwer
(l9l1l rankecl individuals into 14 'studliness' categories (Figure 7.7) and then
169
The role of the red epaulets of male red-winged blackbirds (Agcluius phoeniceus)
was studied by D. G. Smith (1912) by dying the epaulets black on selected
rr-
o.
against rival males, but they had little eff-ect on the males'ability to obtain mates. N.
0.)
f-
territorial
of territories
G. Smith (1967) changed the eye-ring color of one member of mated pairs of sympatric glaucous gulls(Lurus hyperborea^r), Kumlien's gulls (L. gluuc'oirlc.r) and herring
o
E
gulls. In all cases where the female's eye-ring color had been changed the pair broke
&
up. but alterir-rg the male's eye-ring appeared to have rro ef-fect on the pair's behavior.
o
It
o.
(o
(f)
L
L
()
important in all research where animals are manipulated and the elfects are
studied in interactions with other individuals to observe the ellects on the manipulated animal, as well as on others responding to it. This is true in both intra- and
interspecific studies, such as the effects of altered rnales on selection by females and
is
1o
s
!
Altering the biotic or abiotic environment (see section 2.3.2b) in order to study its
resultant eftect on behavior ranges from gross-perturbation experin-rents to subtle
-o
O
()
!
ro
()
'a
c
L
aJ)
E
A)
a)
O)
a
r-l)
a)
,|)
t:
'-)
.,
'i
l-.
Stewart and Aldrich ( l9-51 ) were able to get an indication of the extent of the
surplus'floating'population of unmated rnale birds the spruce fir tbrests by drastically reducing (by shooting) a large number of territorial holders on a 4O-acre tract.
During nine days in June. they removed 148 territorial males, reducing the population to 19"/,, ctl the original. They continued to shoot birds as they moved into the
area. and by July 8 they had collected a total of 455 individuals. This is a rather
drastic perturbation experinrent, and as they adrnit 'the breedin-u territories were
completely disrupted durring the period when the original occupants were being
rernoved and at the serme time new adult males were constantly invading the area'.
On a smaller scale, Krebs ( 197 I ) shot six pairs of great tits occupying territories and
observed thitt residents expandecl their territories ancl fbur new pairs took up occupancy. In contrasl to these major manipulations. Tinbergen was prone to concen-
EXPERIMENTAL RESEARCH
66606@
r:1
.3
r:1
.5
r:2.3
r:1
.3
@666@@
r:1
F-ig.
X>:8
.3
r:1.3
X: <1O
r:1.7
r:1.3
unchanged'
IIa. IIc. and IIf show that the position pref-erence has remained
and succeeding tests'
Test IIb and IId indicate, in combination with the preceding
reference size
l0
0f
the
8
and
models
of
those
that the value of x is between
Tests
series
Baerends and Kruijt's results (Figure 7.9) show how the releasing value
tttrttlt'l t'1'1"'
l)lttt'tl
of
rnodelegg with respect to size is affected by the other manipulated variables, such as
changing the egg shapes into a round-edged block, omitting the speckling on brown
rnodels. ancl adding speckling to green models. Baerends and Kruijt caution that the
ior'. Also n()lc lhrrt thcy conclucted over 10000 tests in theirexperiment.
Mruriptrlrrtiorr ol' cggs. irltlrough consiclcrecl here as an intraspecific manipulaIron. rnrl'lrl lrr'lrrl'11gi1 lohcrttlrrtilrrrllrtiortol'tlrcbioticcnvironment.Theanswerlies
tn
lrt'ttt
t'trr"ll ptoh:tbly
ttcvcr bc sttre.
trX
172
l'trlt
I M EN
TAL
ESEARCH
t73
R series
A
,,fi
ffi
Model
ffi
value
-*
bto*n
l:l
El grccn
Fig.7.l{) Digger wasps memorize the landmarks around their burrows in order to find
them when they return from hunting. To test this, Tinbergen (1972) arranged a
circle of pine cones around a burrow (A), and the wasp memorized it. When the
circle of pine cones was rnoved a foot or two, the wasp looked for its burrow
within the pine cone ring (B). When the pine cones were arranged in a triangle.
and rocks were arranged in a circle, the wasp looked for its burrow in the circle of
rocks, demonstrating that it was the geometric configuration (circle) it was
remenrbering, not the objects (pine cones) (drawing by Brenda Knapp, based on
Tinbergen, 1972).
green.unspecklecl,egg-shapecl(c):green'speckled'egg-shaped(d)'eachin
Figurc
dilllrenl sizes. was tleterminecl with tlre rnethocl clescribed irl the legend ol'
linear
thc
of
l618
to
4/B
respectively'
fbr
7.8. The cocle numbers 4 to l6 stand
prolectiorl sltrfaccs of
dimensions of the lrormal egg size 1$ = 8/8). Thc Irarintal
(egg centcrs) alclng the
thc. eggs of the rel'crencc series have bec'n plottcd
poittts ou this
logarit|mic scale (cmr)ol the abscissa' Equal distances bctweetl
scaleimplycqttalratiovalttes(lrclmBaererrdsandKruiit'1973t.
Tinbergen and Kruyt ( 1938) investigated the role of landmarks in the ability of
tlf
['sttrdttltltrvtrt
study of acoustic interactiot-t between tw'o syrnpatric species
rllatitlg cttll ol'
,scrrtirturrntrtrutu and C'riniu Iit'lorittnrt. They played a tape-recortlctl
1'r'og.
l'. .st'rttirtt(tt'tttor(tl(t'
C. t,it,trrittrru ancTsynthetic signals to individual calling rnalcs ttl'
sigrtitls rt'itlt;t
pulsctl
synthetic
ancl
t1B.
The call ot'Cl yir'10 riuttu.if played above 80
/i
carrier t'requency of 1500 to 2500 Hz. were all efl'ective in inhibiting
,t't'tttitttrrt'
lated the type and geometric arrangement of objects around or near the burrow and
recorclecl thc response of the returning wasp (Figure 7.10). This is typical of the
simple, yet cogent. type of experimentation lor which Tinbergen is famous.
Iternarking on Tinbergen's methods, Lorenz (1960b:xii) stated, 'He knows exactly
how to irsk cprcstions of natlrre in such a way that she is bound to give clear answers.'
'
oftenusecl: l.changetheenvinrr-rrnentinwhichthcartirtrtl is1'rt'cscrttlvlot':ttt'tl'.t
l"
tt:t'tl
s
ltlt'
l't'ttt't;tllV
t9 1161lrcr clvirtlrrrrrcrrt. l'lrcsc 1'lt'ttcctlttte
nrcirsurc tlrcir rrbility to nuvigate to their normal winter areas. He captured adult and
a,i'tirl
clll'ct tll' tlrc trl'liotic lttttl/ot lliotit' (t'.1'. r('l'('l;lll()ll) ('ll\ ll()lllll('lll
thc
clctcr,ti,c
tll( llll('l:l( ll()ll" ill( ()ll('ll
Ittlrvcvt,l.. tltr't.ottlotttttltttl t.llt'tls ol ittlt;t inr(l rrll('tr;rt't
relt.,catc the
tlittit'trlt lo i'ltttttlt:tlr'
Pe
1 n,rtlltrvt'sl ol lltr'rt'lr'rtst'sitt's itr lltt'tt notttt;rl u'ittlcl'lll'clts itlong thc crlrtst ot'
Wt'rlt'ttt I ttt,,1rt' I lrt' lrrrt'tttlr'., lt(r\\('\('t \\('l(' r('( ()\('tt'tl u't'st ol' lltt' t'e le;tse sttCs.
t'tr',
EXPERIMENTAL RESEARCH
decreased significantly'
sion rate increased. but their ability to locate the platform
the platform as
located
When the ear plugs were replaced with hollow tubes, they
studies'
hormones on behavior have been investigated in numerous
llycrrttirrgllre
rt.(.ur.r.(.llt n(.r\'(.
llr,'r"lt''rl
Itr ir1,t.sI rrrrtrl rl lrrrrrlr lllrl;rlr;r t r'l rtl ( l()l-iS)',lttrltt'tl
lrt'tllt tlt'rt'l"Illl('lll
Fl
Fischer's lovebirds (A. personata.fischeri), which carry nest material in their bills.
The hybrids initially tried tucking nest material in their plumage as well as carrying
it in their bills.
it
took two years belore feather tucking diminished to any great extent and carrying in
the bill was almost exclusive (Dilger 1962). This demonstrated the interaction
between genotype and experience.
that injections of proFor example, R.J.F. Smith and Hoar (1961) demonstrated
(Gasterosteus uculeulactin failed to induce fanning behavior in male sticklebacks
tlie
use
The effects of
7.2.2b Manipulation
of
the environment
ratory can consist of altering intraspecific factors, interspecific factors, other biotic
lactors and physical-environment variables. For example, providing domestic hens
with expe ricnce in an intraspecific'flock can change the dominant-subordinate relationships sccn in later paired encounters (King, 1965). Marsden (1968) artificially
irrduccrl changcs in rank in young rhesus monkeys by introducing a 'strange'adult
rrrirlc al ir tirnc whcn the second-ranking female was in estrus or by removing and
re
1ttt11111
r("-
nr\t'rl
lirttt Itt:tlt'
lttlttsc
EXPERIMENTAL RESEARCH
III - four
female
that wild
caught adults and hand-reared isolated adults prelerred
the pine, but that handreared individuals, which had been previously
exposed to oak, pref-erred the oak.
Emlen et al' (1976) tested the orienting capabilities
of indigo buntings (pu,s.serina
cyaneu) in cages with minimalexposure to visual
cues but with an artificial geomagnetic field provided by Hemlholtz coils surrounding
the cage. when the horizontal
component of the magnetic field was deflected clockwise
by 120", the orientation of
the buntings shifted accordingly (clockwise to geographic
east_southeast).
The effect of different types of feedback (see model,
chapter 2) provided by diflerently treated seeds was testecl in black-capped chickadees
experiment).
Turner (1964) investigated social leeding in house sparrows and chaffinches
(Fringilla coelebs) by allowing a caged 'reactor' (either species) to observe simultaneously two individually caged 'actors'(both of the same species, either chalfinch or
sparrow), one which was leeding and the other not l-eeding. He found that individuals of each species were attracted to feeding and nonfeeding conspecifics. Also,
chalfinches were attracted more by leeding than nonl'eeding sparrows, but this was
(puru.s tttric,trpillu.s)by
af
rabbit by manipulating the sensory stimuli available to them. Visual, auditory and
olfactory stimuli were eliminated, respectively, by testing the coyotes in the dark,
7.3
with dead rabbits and with an intense masking odor of rabbit feces and urine. Also.
Metzgar (1967) exposed pairs of mice to a screech owl (Ola.s asio) in a laboratory
test area), and the other was a 'transient mouse' (had no prior experience in the
ol
l in his study of
the
coturnixjuportica). He lound that ambient noise increased the frequency of separation crowing and the number of crows per bout, both of which should increase the
detectibility
system
Bradbury and
test area for 2-30 minutes. One was a 'resident moLlse' (had spent several days in the
rrr jM
- four
female finches and three f-emale sparrows (one female sparrow died prior to the
experiments in
the field and the highly manipulative studies in the
laborarory. The middle of the
ctlntinuum is illustratecl by studies conducted in enclosures
in the field. For
cxanrple' wecker (1961) set up an instrumented
enclosure that was half in an
oitk hickor-y wootllot ancl half in a field, in order to investigate
habitat selection in
l.
I trior lr't
trlr.lt
:r
rrrorlr.rlrlt,rlt.p.r.ec.l'cx,ct.il,c,1ltlcantrol
iil
l
,,1
178
EXPERIMENTAL RESEARCH
Kramer(|952)whoplaceclstarlingsinacirculalrcagewithsixwindowsgivinga
(Zugunruhe)' flutview of the sky only. The starlings showed migratory restlessness
in random direcbut
clear
was
sky
the
tering in the proper migratory direction when
of the sun with
position
tions when it was overcast. Kramer altered the apparent
to show that
instrumental conditioning, discrimination tests in tl-re laboratt>ry
'/hour'
movement of l5
pigeons could indeed detect
wcrc tcstctl
Night-migrating warblers (Sytvia atricupillu, s. futrin and s. r'urrrrtttl
Ittltliotl'
ot'ie
itt
crtcs
stcllar
use
irr a planetarium by Sauer (1g57)and were shown to
buntings.
Both field and laboratory studies have provided convincing evidence that geomagnetic fields are an orientation cue sometimes used by birds. Moore (l9ll)
showed that nocturnal free-flying passerine migrants responded to natural fluctuations in the earth's magnetic field. Electromagnetic fields produced by large antennas were shown to alter the path of free-flying migrants (Larkin and Sutherland.
1977) and gulls held
in an orientation
become disoriented when released under an overcast sky with a bar magnet attached
to their backs (Keeton, l9l4) or with Helmholz coils on their heads (Walcott and
Green, 1914). In carefully controlled laboratory investigations with a cage surrounded by Hehnholz coils. use ol the inclination of the axial direction of the magnetic field (increased downward dip as the magnetic north pole is approached) fbr
orientation was demonstrated in the European robin (Erithacus rubet'ulu)
(Wiltschko and Wiltschko 1912) and indigo bunting (Emlen er ul.1976).
The research described above is a very lew examples of the multitude of studies
that have been conducted in the field and laboratory using botlr mensurative experiments and various degrees of manipulation. Literature reviews of species, concepts
and behavior types will generally provide studies representing all approaches from
behavior. Above all, astute researchers recognize the value of both description and
d
d
-c
{-)
C)
*{r-1
f)
o0
?1
F{
ofi
{-)
()
C)
F(
F{
U
lrl
l-t
B Data
collection methods
We are now at the point where: l. the research question has been asked; 2. the subjects chosen; 3. reconnaissance observations made; 4. the objectives formulated; 5. a
descriptive
the
of the type
and
amount of data that can be collected will partially dictate the research design to be
used. Research design and data collection are in harness together, and the pushing
and pulling that each does to the other will depend on the individual study and the
experience
use a knowledge
of
the
animal's behavior and types of data that they can expect to collect to push for the
best research design. On the other hand, neophyte researchers may allow a research
design, selected for statistical attributes, to pull them around in the field, attempting
to be efficient and the results valid. Even seemingly well-planned research can sometimes benefit from redesign and additional (or modified) data collection. Do not be
afraid to evaluate carefully your research design and data collection methods while
you are conducting your study. However, do not redesign your reseorch until you have
curc.filll.t'
IJ
r/.r.r'r,^r,!(,r/.1,(tur
Si(.A I,E,S
I)ltir collcclion
OF MEASUREMENT
of
of measurement.
Ilrc lr)ur \(;rlr's (Slt'rr'rrs. l()-l(r). r('l)r'('s('nl lloirtls lrlottg ir cotttintttttl ol'rcsoltttion.
I lt;rt t:,. \()nr('lvlx'\ ol rl;rl;r rt'rll rrIIr';u lr' l;rll lrt'l\\'('('n l\\'():ir'itlcs lttttl rtrtry hc rlilli( llll ll) t,tlt','ilIl/t'
ii
EIrAsie=r
iii[
l=
J:83
i=i7-i=sEESEiEiAggTil *i
=i;gEn=v.;;:14=:AtAifi
==;?3slulaiEsl_?i
=7. iI i a+
qfi
?=
.lzdg5'X
i[l
'
* ll
,+a
2ll
i.,
5'll
-tllE:.=
ll
il
ll
=;
'- : i.G
==#,*
Z
zeZ
G=
q =i;;ai
c"'=2''t'i
il5=
Ei
=??Eg?n;Zi;e
o 'J 6
5
5
=Ii+E
.3,
? *a a 5
f,oo
o 6I
i'5 E
tr p
aH
; \ E 4
z==
{E;
=;=-
=_
=
ig=;:=
= =
=a ia a
n?, E
7=.
=i=.=='3rDi.;
ll
ll
il::
ll
il
ll ..
ll
"-\ocotrr
i x
cc=- ell
a lt i=
*ilxT
Oq
(I0 llll
3ilil: =i
-'ll
ll
!-==
F;; E
=l11\q,,=* ;td.tE
-'_== ;==
7r=>1
z=7
==?*';1
a-':9
eP
.- = - c. +
:i
a T =
=F
=
=.=
a3
5
ii==
ieri;
,?-=
SiiEEB
::? =i== E?i?;3 i.-feid
;? ll-ooc
i.iEi$;
e;ii=
=1,= =1= v,i=-3F 3"iqa+
;=-?
===
ll
il-
ll
ll
ll
rl
L''!
ll
tt
Sleeping
tS u-19.9
Itt -i- 1 7.,
Lying alert
Sitting
Standing
Walking (slow pace)
Walking
>
-1r t.
10..1
_r.7-6.
-)
2.2 3.6
1.-3-2.1
o. ,1-l .2
0..1-0.6
0.2-0.3
<0.2
ill
Ell
iil
Vocal response
Dlstance
rt-ttrdell
llilT s
il=
+ll
ll
ir..nr
- ::
il\
ll
il
=.
:"
ilr
il:
ll
S-
-: .-i.
=.=
a
ll i-,.
3ll
ll
Score
Score
level3
None
Intruder antennated
Few. intermittent
Few, close
2
-)
4
5
(steady pace)
Gentle play
(mouthing. etc.)
Excited pacing
Chase-play (rough-
and-tumble)
Many, intermittent
Many, close
Full or continuous
Aggressionlevela
(as
in 2), but
if
stinging
Lnmediate lunge. grab and stinging
.\-olss.'
1 ''
From Studd and Robertson ( 1985).
I From Bekoff and Corcoran(1975).
I Examples lor ants, from Obin and Vander Meer (1988).
Sourc'e: Copyrighted by Bailliere Tindall.
90
ll =5
ll !s
llll sx
ll -=
='.
:I
llilsa
il {.f
ll
llili::=
llll '+
:k
!ii-3
ii
.-=
3_f rIa+*z'ieEArUZz Ir
1=='= ?*v.ii37i;v?'rZzirz i: i ll
?=;
-E-Fi*r ?i
3 s, i
+
Z=7 7+i'1i*:itl:i3*
=7=-do
,*2rD:
Ell 8g
-..t
--
an
z
?
r,1
-l
'Tl
SCALES OF MEASUREMENT
encounters in
movement of yellow warblers; Riechert (1984) scored agonistic
the examples in
spiders on a scale of I to 35. Note that the number of intervals in
Table 8.2vary from 6 to 9.
variThese have all been examples of using an ordinal scale on the dependent
indethe
of
values
rank
to
able (behavror units), but ordinal scales can also be used
I to 5 to
pendent variable. For example, Moller (1987) used an ordinal scale of
and
the variation in badge size (amount of black coloration on the breast
rank
size
throat) in house sparrows; Rohwer (1977) used 14 intervals to rank badge
(1990)'
in
ul'
et
(Figure
Alatalo
1'1)'
('studliness'categories) in Harris'sparrows
grey
and/or
their study of female preference, ranked the percentage of brown
using an
feathers on the backs of male pied flycatchers (Ficedula hypoleuca)
24 fish
in
dichromatism
sexual
(1983)
measured
ordinal scale of I to 7. Ward
and
head.
the
areas:
three
on
species using a four-point ordinal scale of skin color
as
the
used
was
the dorsal and ventral surfaces; the sum of the three ranks
scale of meameasure of sexual dichromatism. Another example of an ordinal
velocity meawind
of
Scale
Beaufort
is
the
surement for an independent variable
surement described in ChaPter 4.
to
Measurements (scores) based on an ordinal scale are sometimes weighted
occasionally
reflect relative differences in the intensity of behaviors, and they are
of both of
Example
score'
a
compttsite
create
to
combined with other measurements
choice
lemale
of
(1987)
study
these are provided by Lightbody and Weatherhead's
xantfio(Xunthocephalus
versus male competition in yellow-headed blackbirds
to l0 and l3' In
cephulu,s)(Table 8.3); note that the ranks jump lrom 6 to 8, then
and then
addition, the ranks were multiplied by the durations of the male's behavior
summed lor a comPosite score'
behaviors
Also, all the behaviors do not have to have different scores. [f several
As an example'
reflect the same intensity, they can be assigned the same rank'
by recordbimugulatus
Octopus
in
use
den
and
Cigliano (1993) studied dominance
were
behaviors
These
behaviors.
ing the occurrence of eight attack and withdrawl
behavattack
the
weighted on an 'intensity of response scale'of 0 to 4, but four of
the ell-cct
iors were all given the score of 2. Likewise, Barki et ul. (1992) deterrrlinecl
by
of size and morphotype on dominance in prawns (Mat'rttbrttt'hittttt ftt'st'nlt(rciil
ttr
ol'
J
scitlc
ordinttl
an
on
scored
were
recording l8 agonistic behavior acts which
+ 3. with some behavioral acts receiving the samc score'
Inlervul scale..This scale is the silnrc irs thc ortlittitl scalc cxccPl
tltill
tlre ;llll()tlllt
)wll. tlt
of the clifl-erenccs bctwccu rcspcct ivc clr(cgorics is I lre slr rrrc lr rttl is k l)(
t (r; lltt' zt'trr
(st't'
l'lrlrlc
tttlrltltvliv
pettttils
sitirtcs ir trrril rll'rrrclrsrrrcrrrcnl wlriclr
ltt(';t\tll('lll('lll'.trllilllllll('lr;tlrr'ltlt'
,,i.t isll()l kn()wn.()l tslrrlrrlt;rtilvrlt'littt'rl.lot
,\ r()llll||r,tt,'t,ttrrlrl,.l., lr.illl]('t,tliltt'trrt'.t',ltt('ttt('llt lltt' r,'tt] lr('llll r",rtlrttt'tl\ lt'
ts ttt't't's
of
Behavior
Distant, agitation
Distant, agitation and vocalization
Close, agitation
l0
l3
Direct attack/mount
of temperature; likewise,
80
scales. In neither
"F is not twice as
warm as 40'F. Compass directions and time divisions (e.g. time of day, weeks,
years) are also divisions on an interval scale (Zar,l984). The length of time it takes
individual birds to fly alter an alarm call is given (latencies) would generally be considered to be on an interval scale of measurement. These time-to-fly latencies can be
compared to each otheq but the zero point for flight is not really known, although
we would probably use olrr hearing of the alarm call as an arbitrary zero point.
Interval scales of measurement are uncommon in ethological studies except
when measuring spatial or temporal characteristics. However, Maxim (1976) constructed an interval scale of l7 behavior categories, including'attack', 'stare', 'lipsmack' and 'grimace'. fbr use in studies of social relations in pairs of rhesus
monkcys. The scale was based on observations of 120 pairs of monkeys; a scale
verlue lirr each behavior category was then established by the relative frequency distribution ol' responses between categories. The theory behind Maxim's interval
scalc wirs 'J'hc Law of Categorical Judgement', that 'is a set of equations which,
rrsing l'r'ct;rrcrrcy tlistributions
of
responses
rncle
lrvo
SAMPLING METHODS
Time (s)
Dark
nominal and ordinal data, whereas either parametric or nonparametric tests can be
used on interval and ratio data (Chapter l2). These restrictions are based on the
323
24r
operations which are permissible on data from the different scales of measurement
2
J
37
216
118
57
Individual
1
Light
(Table 8.6). For additional information on scales of measurement consult one of the
many, enlightening discussions available (e.g. Drew and Hardman, 1985; Ghent
1979;Walker, 1985).
8.3
Data rec'orded
of
Behavior code
Scale
Behavior
for measurement
measurement
,4 occurred
A2
Nominal
Ordinal
A2l1300
Interval
and/or events); 4. the scale of measurement; and 5. a multitude of practical considerations, such as observability, experience, and availability of equipment.
might want to review section 6.5, on random, haphazard and opportunistic samples.
at 1:00 pm
,4 occurred at intensitY level 2, at
l:00 pm, at a distance of 8 m
SAMPLING METHODS
A2l1300-8
Ratio
In the discussion to follow, an example of how each method is used will be based
(Odocoileus
hemionus) showing only two events (standing-up and lying-down) and one state
(feeding). In order to be sure that you understand the diagram, confirm the following statements:
reqLrired
hermit crab species; one measure of their use of vision was the time
(Table
8'4)'
locate a shell in light and in dark
thc clatt rr'r rl
To determine the scale of measurement used in a study, examine
tcr
A2 ll'otrr
from those with higher resolution (e.g. ordinal trom intcrvitl or rittio.
with ll()lll)rlt'rtrtte lA2l1300 or A2l1300 g). This is sometimcs ckrnc lirr rlata unalysis
lrig.lr:t tr.'solttliott
lrs
ric tests (Chapter l3). IIowcvcr. it is best to collcct tlirtir witlr
s:tt'tilit't'lltt'tt'solttti.tt l;tlt't
sculc tll-alclrsur-cn.lcnl lrs is ll.lrsihlc rrrrrl vrrlitl.lrrrtl llrctt
(i.t. t..ttvt.tl ;rlto lo ottlirlrl tl;rtlr) tl v()u llr(' n()l ('()tlVtllt t'rl ll u'lts t ollt't'lt'tl :tt t tt
.'l'tlt"ltt'tl
I,lt,llll('lttt
llrlt.lvlrrrrl/.t \()1 11t(lllt,rt llrt.rl;rt;trlorlol tttr't'l lltt'tlllt'tt.tl,'t
t
:
None of the individuals fed between the events of lying down and standing up.
+
t..t.I
lntlivirlual IV was the only one that did not feed every time it was standing.
liocal-:urirnal (pair, group) versus all-animal sampling
;r srnrplirrl,,
x$iiLiPSS
fErilifrneil
: I e ? x.t 2':
Ilaa
ll
it is a i i
ll
7'?"
ll
iry.i3
? iai
? n?:o=13
*
5 ro PD ^o-a
I)E
dw. l)
w:
5e=*
OPd-rP-iroaii
i
s
si
Es=eR
:aas
6g=^ a
3;
=fi
?;'
i;i.
rD;O-I^X=i.S
* ll';;r
ao
+
ll
,Ea
--'ll
.'
e*
:-C)
=6
ll
? ='
8ll
Bll
v l.
oiY
lls
ll 3.
ll s
a-
llll *]
ilR
ll s
llll iF
r ll i
I.llt
ll
il
Fl
S
l"rll
lo ll s
lE ll t
ll
ll
ll
ll
o
Fl
\EI$
X
"
il
llls
f-
oro
-o
?Lr
a
(D
ll
BB
c'
d,
(D
zo
B=
xh
?I
(t
ll
ll
ll
tsoN) a.
:-dll
C'
ll
{all
9P
iiE
(,
dc
s lq
E llr=rT*=-ix ;ai;,=6
:2'a?; ? = E3
B *G X:ag I
3a ilf?;, e?iB
T6n
'-) =
i*
ie i atseD
i
S
o-
!.
olro
a-o
cf ,, a-o
?v
?VI
Time scale
-o
(min.)
Focal-animals/All-occurrences
All-animals/All-occurrences
Sequences
IITTTTTTTTI
One Zero
Focal-animals/lnstantaneous
All-animals/Scan
Fig.
1rilililil
iltiltilil
III'NT'IT]-I'I
I-I'I'ITTTTTTTI
ililililil
1ilil1ilil
il1ililil1
llllltltil
Iilltrtlil
lltlttlltl
8.1 Hypothetical record of occurrence of three behaviors in six penned adult mule deer: O:standing up (event);C:lying down (event);
l:feeding (state). The time period recorded by each sampling technique is shown in the lower part of the figure.
o
o
-o
:
rn
z
?
rn
-t
(,
SAMPLING METHODS
Primary Interest in
FEI'l BEHAVIoRS
If samPle intervals
are short relative
to behavior or bout
and/or
SEVERAL INDIVIDUALS
duration
(e.g. synchrony of
feeding in grouP)
lf number o
individuals
bly have been feasible to also record those behaviors for other individuals (e.g. the
other males).
Although a specific individual receives highest priority when local-animal sampling, this method does not necessarily restrict us to only that individual. For
example, when social behavior is recorded, a focal-animal sample on an individual
provides a record of all acts in which that animal is either the actor or receiver
Ethogram oeveloPment
Altmann, 1974). Some research requires that observations be made on two individuals simultaneously (e.g. mating. aggression/submission). For example, Huxley
(1968) made his observations on onefoc'ul-pair at a time in his study of courtship in
SEQUENC E
SOC IOMETR
(J.
IC
MATR 1 X
great crested grebes. Accurately recording the behavior of two individuals simultaneously can often be difficult so Smuts used two observers in her study of the formation of relationships in olive baboons (Papio t't'urtot'ephalus); one observer fbcused
Primary lnterest in
SEVERAL BEHAVIORS
FOCAL-AN
(Pair,
IML
Group)
If
sample
i nterval s
are short
relative to
behavior or
Fig.
duration
The dashed
8.2 Flow chart for selecting animal behavior sampling methods'
lines
a..t.t
pairetl with one of the other samto be paired with only some
pling methods discussed below, and each is best sLlited
of those other methods (Figure 8'2)
Focal-animal and all-animal sampling
are (tlwu)'s
b Out-of-sight time
Focal-animals in the field and captivity oflen disappear from view of the observer.
Therefore, it is necessary to record the time intervals in each sample period that the
individual being observed is out ol.sight; the result is 'missing data'for those time
intervals. The sampling protocol/data problem created by an animal under observa-
see
section 8.4)
has not been successfully resolved. That is, there is no truly valid procedure for
Focal'aninrul samPling
occurred, the duration of behaviors most commonly observed, and the time the
animal is out of sight. Four rnethods for dealing with this problem are discussed
below relative to the duration of behaviors and time out of sight. Although none of'
tlte,;c tncthods i,v trul.y valid, the hazards in using them can be reduced by following
these guidelines:
Fur out-ol'-sight periods of long duration and when the durations of common
behtviors are short (relative to the out-of-sight periods) do one of the following:
I)clctc thc limc or"rt-of'-sight from the sample;duration of the sample
pct'iotl is rctltrcctl irccortliltgly.
I )r'lt'te lltc tirrrc orrt-ol-sigltl lhrttt llrc sitrttplc, but ittcreuse observation
lirrrt'turlil tlre tirrrr'tlrc;rnrrrr:rl rvrrs:rr'lultlly obsct'vctlcrltrals thc time
l('(IilIt'rl l.,t Iltr' 1ttt'tlt'lr't ilrilr('(I s;rtrrllt' Pt't iotl
DATA-COLLECTION
M ETHODS
SAMPLING METHODS
These two methods are valid only when the observer believes that the probability
of perlorming any of the behaviors while the animal is in view is the same as when it
is out of sight.
For out-ofl-sight periods of short duration and when the durations of common
behaviors are long (relative to the out-of-sight periods) do one of the following:
Assign the behavior seen when the animal goes out-of-sight to the out-of-
sight period.
z Assign
the behavior seen when the animal comes back into view to the
out-of-sight period.
to be valid.
Behaviors occupying the largest percentage of the animal's time budget are those
that are most likely to be interrupted. Two factors which should, perhaps. override
or dictate use ol the above methods are experience and common sense. Probably no
one knows the animal better than you do; therefore, lollow the course of action
which you consider to be the most appropriate. Also, it is often wise to deal with
data using two or more methods fbr comparison.
12"/u,
specific behaviors introduce biases. as well as their attempts to compensate for these biases (see
observer bias in section 8.4).
Focal-animal sampling may strain the observer's ability to record data accurately. especially in dense aggregations or highly social species (e.g. monkeys).
However, focal-animal all-occurrences sampling does provide lor a rigorous exami-
nation of the behavior of individuals, and it is this type of sampling which will
provide the most accurate and valid data to test hypotheses. For this reirsort. .1.
Altmann (1974) concluded tliat with the proper choice of behavior units. sarnplc
periods and local individuals this rnethod will generally be the bcst to usc.
rllr.
Itr'ttl ol l)t()n,'lr()ln lullt'lo[t' lo tlr'lt'tnutl('ll', ltt't1ttt'ttt \' :rl tltllt'tt'ttl lttttt"' ol rl,r\ ( )t
What is generally recorded are the behaviors of those individuals (or groups)
that
are most easily observed.
llsllll'
\(
rlttt' lonn ol
l ll
llrlottt ( )t ..\.\l(.1t;tl tr
s;t
t1plttt1,,
SAMPLING METHODS
During periods in the field when you are not involved in collecting data lor your
experimental research, ad libitum field notes can often yield insights. The value of
these unplanned, ad libitum field notes was heralded by Tinbergen:
Scientific examination naturally requires concentration, a narrowing
of interest, and the knowledge we gained through this has meant a
great deal to us. But it has become increasingly clear to me how
equally valuable have been the long periods of relaxed, unspecified,
uncommitted interest . . . an extremely valuable store of lactual
knowledge is picked up by a young naturalist during his seemingly
aimless wanderings in the fields. Nor are the preliminary, unplanned
observations one does while relaxed and uncommitted without value
ITinbergen, I95B:2B7J
Since ad libitum sampling is most often used when ethologists are recording as
much as they can during an unplanned encounter with a species, during reconnaissance observations. or when they are developing an ethogram, the value of those
field notes as data for hypothesis testing is very limited. When the observations are
8. J.
I o "A
if
treated as data and quantitative comparisons made, the lollowing assumption generally must also be made: the true probability of observing the dilferent sexes, age
I
z
The behaviors do not occur more often (or more rapidly) than the
observer can record them.
randomly.
For example, we might encounter the six deer represented in Figure 8.1 and
observe them for the 32 minutes indicated in the lower part of the figure. During
that period we would record that: l. all but f'emale I fed; 2. all individuals laid
of the six
s.
itbottt lt stltlc (ll'ctlirtg) by recording all occurrences of two events (initiation and tertttiltrtl iorr ol' lcctlirrg).
SAMPLING METHODS
198
MALE BEHAYIOR
FEMALE EEHAVIOR
oPPeors
'-3
2
-3-.
lies
olights on herboge
6)
lolds wings
hoirpencils
while hovering
olights loterolly
ocguresces
Fig.
w_.
tFI'
showing the
copuloles
Posl-nupliol
Kacher itr
Bridling is a postcopulatory display' (Drawing by Hermann
Kacher')
Hermann
by
granted
collaboration with Konrad Lorenz;permission
llight
pcrlirrtnctl
These rnay bc
In sequence sampling the focus is on a chain of behaviors'
ducks; Figurc 8'3) or thcy rtrity
by a single individual (e.g. courtship displays in male
individuals (c.g' cottt'tshiP in tlrc
be behaviors alternating between two (or more)
Iiig
-l
('ourtship bchavior of the queen butterfly. Note that the female permits
coptrllrliorr to occllr only alier the male completes a series of courtship actions,
rrrrlrrtlirrg crtrurling thc hairpencils and releasing pheromones (from Brower c/
rrl . l()(r5).
SAMPLING METHODS
200
of
individual
If...theobserveralwaysbeginssamplingattheonsetofasequence
among sequence
and chooses the next sequence to sample at random
each length in
of
onsets or in any other way that samples sequences
data will be
resulting
proportion to their /i'e quen('y rt.f' oc'currence, the
with
spent
time
total
unbiased with respect to sequence length: the
where /,
d,times.f,,.
to
Sequences of, say' duration d,, will be proportional
isthefrequencyofsequencesoflengthd,.Thenthetimespentwith
..q,.n.., of different lengths, not the probability of choosing such
taken up by sequences
sequences, will be in proportion to the total time
ofthatlength.[J.Altntann,1974..250]
Sequence sampling
of certain individuals, when standing up, stimulates others to stand up, so we construct the sociometric matrix below. We record the initiator and follower. if the follower stands up in less than 60 seconds alter the initiator has stood up. The data in
the matrix below are from the 60 minute sample period in Figure 8.1.
problems'
Follower
III
IV
VI
II
Initiator
III
IV
mental design.
tionstointeractionsbetweentwoindividualcrabs(dyads).
trritre
irr
Ilrt'rl\ tlt't'l
VI
The above data sugge.sl that individual IV is more of a leader than a follower; but
we would,
a large number
of
uses a
tions as possiblc without regard to random or systematic sampling. Hence, the data
cannot be comparecl between cells, and the matrix cannot be treated as a true contingcncy tlrblc. but nrore as a lorm lor tabulating data.
n.
l.{
'l'irtrc s:utr;lliltg
SAMPLING METHODS
state or event
pling; point sampling, Dunbar 1976); or 2' whether a behavior
points in time (one-zero sampling)'
occurred during a sample interval delineated by
conditions:
These methods are often used under the following
simultaneously sampling
We want to gather data on a few behaviors while
(e'g. studies of behavioral syna relatively large group of individuals
of l0 sample
sPecific interest).
a few
individ-
uals(e.g.juvenilefemales),thanwecanwithcontinuoussampling
mutually exclusive
methods (e.g. time budgets for an exhaustive list of
behaviors).
the frequency of behaviorbut is the frequency of intervals that included any amount
of time spent in that behavior'. However, the data from one-zero samples are sometimes presented as Hansen.fiequent'ies (the number of sample periods in which the
behavior occurred/total number of sample periods, based on Hansen,1966). when
the sample periods are short in duration but large in number. S. Altmann and
occurs (one)' or
With one-zero sampling, the observer scores whether a behavior
It is suitable for recordnot (zero), during a short interval of time (sample period)'
'time-sampling'(Hutt
to as
ing states and/or events. This method has been referred
This method has the lo1lg12)'
(Fienberg,
and Hutt, lg74)or the 'Hansen system'
lowing features:
t
z
:
+
(not frequency
In each sample period the occurrence or non-occurrence
of occurrence) is scored'
in each sample
Behaviors of one or more individuals can be recorded
Wagner ( 1970) described a method for using Hansen frequencies to estimate the
mean rate of occurrence of events when the events approximate a Poisson distribution (Chapter I 1); that is, ' that the behavior occurs randomly at a constant rate, that
the chance of two or more simultaneous occurrences of the behavior is negligible,
and that the chance that a particular behavior will occur during an interval is independent of the time that has elapsed since the last occurrence of that behavior'
of behavior.
period.
at some point
occurrence refers to either an event or a state (ongoing
time spent in a behavior (Simpson and Simpson 1977). This would be accurate only
if the behavior lasted for the complete sample periods in which it was scored. If
researchers desire to use one-zero data for 'time-spent'estimates, they must deter-
of the
to record data using this method; it is not as demanding
tlbservirlonger
use
often
observer,s total concentration, hence you can
It
is easy
tion Periods.
witlr 1 lcvcl
O lnexperienced observers can quickly learn to use this n-retftocl
rcliilbility (scc
of accuracy that results in high measures of intcr-obscrvcr
below).
As
periods would all contain '0' scores, the second set two
chrony;dailyactivitypatterns;percentageoftimespentinbehaviorsof
We want to gather data on a larger number
event of standing up (for any individual in the group), then the first set
silllll)lt's ol l0
lr, cx:r.rplc. ip liigtu'c fi.l.lltcrc;rrc lirrrt'!t()tll)s ol ollt' /('l()
lltt'r'
sitttt,le ,et.i.tlselrt.lt. lltr.slrntlllt'pt.ri,rtlsilr('()l .nt'nrlrrtllt'tlttt:tll()ll.;lllllt'ttl'lt
.|(
()t
l,l
lltt'
(l||1.
|||,'
/t.|()
tIl
rr'.,ttltl ll()| lllillIl lrt. tlttt.'lt ..||rrt lt'I ll trt. ltl(' llll(.It...1t.,1
DATA COLLECTION
SAMPLING METHODS
M ETHODS
centageoftimeindividualsspendtogetherandtheiractualfrequencyof
interaction.
:
:
one-zero samPling'
+Toavoidarbitrarydefinitionsofabehavior'sstartandendtimes'
done in different
probability of scoring events with this method is remote. This method can
be used to obtain data on the time distribution of behavioral states lor an individ-
ual. For example, Dunbar (1916) fbund that sampling intervals of 5, 10, 15,30 and
60 seconds all gave reliable estimates of time use for states that varied in mean dura-
tion from
14.0
to
124.6 s. Likewise, Tyler (1979) found that the same sampling inter-
of time
that ranged in mean duration fiom 40 to 50 s. Poysa (1991) cautions that, although
from several individuals may provide reliable estimates of time use. data
from individual instantaneous samples may differ greatly fiom true time use; this
can be a serious problem if you try to relate this individualvariation in time use data
averages
to an independent variable.
As an example, suppose we wanted to record the time distribution of feeding in
III in Figure 8.1 . We set or-rr sampling points in the middle of the periods we
areseentooccurclearlyinterpretableintermsoftlrecharacteristicsof
f-emale
r"rsed lbr one zero sampling. Occurrences of leeding would be recorded at sample
points 2 thnrugh 9 in the first set,4 through l0 in the second set, I through 4 in the
thircl set. itncl at no sample points in the fourth set. The frequency of occurrence
inbehaviorbyanunfortunatechoiceofsamplinginterval,metlrtlds
other than One-zero sampling are
preferred
IKruurrt'r' 1979"24'] I
Themajordisadvantageofthissanrplingmethodisthataccttratcitllilrttrittitltl
rccorulcd clccrcasccl as oLrr sample periods progressed; you can see how closely this
lr1-rproxinrlrtcs thc rcal situation in the diagram.
,\'
r' t t t
t,s'
ttttt
Iit
t,q
lirrttt ol'ittstirtttilncous sanrpling in which several individ1rt'etlclet'rttinetl poirrls irr lirrrc lrnd thcir bchavioral states are
\('()r('(1. tlr;rl rs. rrrsl;rnllult'olrs r:rrnPlcs;rrr'ltrl\('ll on scvcr';rl irrrlivitlrurls itt tltc srrtnc
,\'(trn.\(unplur,q is sirrrply lr
tt;tls;u("\('irttttt'tl'lrl
SAMPLING METHODS
Sampling method
sampling
Recommended uses
l.
Either
Ad lihitum
significant events
2.
Sociometric matrix
Event
Either
completion
-)^
Focal-animal
1985).
neighbor relationships
4. All
of instantaneous and
spend
in
occurrences
of
Usually event
Synchrony; rates
Either
Sequential constraints
selected behaviors
5. Sequence
6. One zero
7. Instantaneous
and
Usually state
None
State
scan
subgroups
trigure 8.2 provides a flow chart that will assist in deciding which sampling
method is appropriate for your study. J. Altmann (1914) has also provided a table to
assist in the selection of the proper sampling method (Table 8.7).
Dilferent sampling methods produce diflerent types of data, including different
of measurement. Hence, the validity of the research and the statistical tests
that can be used will be affected by the sampling method employed.
Dunbar (1976) presented an excellent demonstration that the use of various
scales
behavioral parameters and sampling methods to answer the same question can lead
to different conclusions. His demonstration challenged the internal validity of
several methodologies. He estimated'social relationships' among individual gelada
bttboons (Tlrcrutpitltecus gelada) divided into I I age-sex classes, using three different
be Iritvirrrttl trnits that showed the extent to which individuals l. interactedwitheach
otltcr'; 1. ,qrrtotnL'tlcach other; and 3. were in a particular spatialrelationship.
I)ittlt wct'c collcclccl in the following seven combinations of behavioral units and
8.3.5 SummarY
s:r
of
ol tltt' otllt't
tttt'lltotls'
;t
I lre tttttttlre
Ittnt'slltt'l'ittlt'ltt'tt'tl.int'spt't'livt'ol llrt'rrrrnrl'rcrol'sociirlirctscxchangccl
ttl ('it( lr tttlr't;rt'llott) (lor';rl ;rrrrrn;rl;rrt,l:tll
,,1'1'111 11'11t'r's
slttttltliDp,).
-z
ii?AFi
tJ
co
iE aE;{iE3#
-1
-t
iai
'i:!LeEli=gggaEE
:=ii sE9 ig
'gi?q?aaiE
ieEe a?i+H
.i?=ti+78
ii= E*eui*i'I
zt,:Zlt* i[
Bia
E:i[iiiEg
:i
aE=IE
qi $a; :EE;aiegg Ei : g E i i
?lz,ilr"
,i z;l="*t ia,, fi ;E-tieral i EE : Eg + l
F t
i
*i*lix
E:
*
Ei
11=i'11'=7
i
*
ii
1?7
3iiesi
gE
+
7
i
i:i,;t
;
ii
i
s
=;
+
s+
=
=ii1='r+?,
i
:-;-=
EX ;lc?iI
T::.: :.:. F/i,1ildrck ' rirh vltidt subjects iteraLted' vith the yurious agt-sex classes os determined in different wal,s ( all subjects
":' ti.,! dt1d. bused ott these data rclative strength of relationship with each qge-sex class as detemified by the dffirent estimators giren
Age-sex class of interactee
1,,.;tttnt.r' oI ittteructitttt
. \unrber of contacts
I
:
:
:
-
\umber of
One-zero
interacting
interacting
Gr..trming bouts
P.rint grooming
Spatial measure
Pornt
.
l.
acts
3y
male
female
2y
male
2y
lernale Yearling
Inlant
Total
t47
|
I
305
ll
l0
l9
l0
47
34
l5
t7
34
-1J
t7
99
49
ll
39
l0
15
15
44
19
1
J
38
l8
l6
l5
16
l5
l5
44
t7
16
45
1n
)t
l9
lll
51
l7
40
2t
67
0.021
0.043 0.170
0.041 0.278
0.0s6 0.32s
0.056 0.349
0.044 0.333
0.057 0.361
0.046 0.267
0.234
0.210
0.161
0.151
0.064
0.064
0.089
0.043
0.213
0.021
0.047
0.041
0.101
0.006
0.036
0.
128
0.030
0.033
0.003
0.024
0.127
0.132
0.040
0.008
0.000
0.061
0.018
0.026
0.000
0.025
0.13
0.041
0.096
One-zero interacting
1. Point interacting
-<. Grooming bouts
6. Pornt grooming
Spatial measure
0.11I
0.064
0.059
0.
108
l9
0.018
0.01 0
0.008
0.1 19
0.1
0.140
0.079
0.009
0.t23
0.r23
0.008
0.108
0.089
0.010
0.
158
0.139
0.123
t14
122
0.033
0.000
0.000
0.051
0.161
0.007
These date werc pooled and treated as though they came from the same individual or sex-age class for the purpose
merhodologies. No conclusions about gelada-baboon behavior should be drawn from the data.
Soroce. From Dunbar (1976).
169
126
h of relationship
-1.
-.
4y Adult
male female
3y
male
rrl
,_?
5y
--
z
z
Adult 6y
male male
of comparing
415
rn
-1
OBSERVER EFFECTS
of
211
Error of
Apprehending
them being used in a zoo is provided by the videotape program created by Steven
Hage and Jill Mellen: Researc'h Methods .for Studying Animal Behavior in o Zoo
Setting (available from the Minnesota Zoological Garden, Apple Valley, MN
Observer Error
Oberver Bias
ssr24).
84 OBSERVER EFFECTS
As methods have biases, so do observers, but bias is only one factor that contributes
Error of Recording
(Kazdin, 1982).
Good data mean that tl-rey are an uc'c'urate measurement of the true situation.
Observers may be precise; that is, their data will not vary greatly, but because of
biases they might not be accurate. For example, consider two riflemen firing at separate targets at a rifle range. Rifleman A groups his five shots closely (good precision)
Computational Error
and in the bull's-eye (good accuracy). Riflernan B groups his five shots closely (good
precision) but to the right of the bull's-eye (poor accuracy). Rifleman B's accuracy is
biased by his habit of pulling his rifle slightly to the right while squeezing the trigger.
To carry the analogy to completion, we may say that each man's shots were mea-
(Anatysis)
Fig'
8'5
Types
->
Results
Thonrpson).
of error of
hending as follows:
appre-
surements of the location of the bull's-eye. Rifleman lt's measurements (shot holes
in target) were both reliable (precise) and valid (accurate). Rifleman B's measurements were reliable. but inaccurate.
Several potential observer erro[s, which may have severe effects on the results
ethological studies, have been discussed by Rosenthal (1976) and are depicted in
Figure 8.5. Observer ef/bct is due to the visual presence of the observer, or other
stimuli (e.g. odor) lrom the observeq and results in a change in the animal's behavior. In psychology and sociology, this change in the subject's behavior is known as
the How,thorn e.f.fect (Martin and Bateson, 1986). An indirect observer eflect was
measured by Gotmark and Ahlund (1984). They determined wlrether observers
attracted predators (crows and gulls) to the nests of common eic'lers (a result that
would affect both the reproduction and behavior of the eiders); they tbund that
human disturbance did increase loraging ef-fort and suscess lor gr-rlls, but n<.lt firr
crows. Examples of direct observer eflects on several species. in both ficltl lrnrl lirhoratory studies, are described in Davis and Ballour
Of course. it
1992).
of
presence
trees.
IBreirttist,h, rgss.63J
observer
stittttlp.ittt
( icist ( 197
I)
;tlro111
Veryimportantproblem,forifdatagatlrerirrgisnotclearlyseparated
1971"'rii]
out, it
preference'
IGei'st'
personal
ln truth. research hypotheses are really
of us would like to
most
fldence in our ethological insight
observer bias to
experimentsbyusingablinclprocedure.Themanipulationsaremadebyone
to
experiments'
good overview of the effectiveness of blind
few observers are likely to have the same biases. An accuracy criterion can be established by using an 'expert' observer (e.g. the principal investigator). or a 'calibrating'
of several
observers.
if
we have captured
it
on videotape or film are we afforded the privilege of seeing it again (then only in two
Errort|.recorrlinlimaybeduetopoortechniquesandequipment,mentallapses
have chosen to use a separate
recording.
manipulation and analysis of data' It is
Contputational errttris due to incorrect
theerrorthatresultsifaninappropriatestatisticaltestisuse<l(Chaptersl2-17).
eflect on the results of the research'
All of these observer effects can have a severe
this study. but they may also serve as the
The results may not only be invalid for
basisforanotherethologist.sresearchandcompoundtheproblern.
to
videotape
all their
observations.
it occurs.
Experience is the most inrportant factor in increasing efficiency and accuracy
and is necessary with the following aspects of allethological studies:
to be used
RELIABILITY
and
scale of measurement' states or events'
Selection of the proper behavior unit,
6)'
study's reliability and validity (chapter
sampling method will all affect your
much
how
is'
That
of the measurements'
Retiabitityrefers to the reproducibility
relia'
(inffu-observer
obtain very similar data again
can we rely on our own ability to
replito
studies' shoulcl also be able
bitity)lOther observers, in this sturly or future
reliuhilitl''
we should have good inter-observer
cate our measureflents; that means
Thisis,ofcourse,oftendifficult,sinceskillinobservationdevelopsthroughprac-
cation ethologist)
Hollenbeck(1978)cor-rcludedthatreliabilityctlnsts
accuracy will almost certainly aflect inter-ob,sat't,er rcliuhility (Kazdin, 1982), since
addition.Bell(|g1g)hasarguedthathumansareirrherentlymore.subjective,than
reduce
.objective'. we must guard against these basic human traits if we are to
manipulation
in
controlled
an acceptable level. This bias can be
8.5
ELIABI LITY
;ts
rttttl ltcctt-
racy'However,thisistrueonlyofinter-tlbsct.vcrrclilrhility.Aswltstliscttssctlcltt.licl
lle tt,littlllt,bll
(p.210).aslong,,tsllrcci,titttr(stirhilily)istttltitttltittctl'ltlltrl.rsct.,''et'lr,ill
tt'lItlriltl\ ts so[t'lv il llt('il\lll(' ()l
rnight still hc inttt.t.rrrttlt,.'l'lrc|clir|c. irrl,,r-olrst'rVt'r
llllt't l: r;tlttltll (('lr'rItt't (r) Il.\\t'\t'l
st:rhility (.r. 1,r.r.rsi.n). rrltt'tt'lts il('('lllil( \'
segment several dillerent tirnes at varying intervals. Your perception of the behav-
ior, and the data you record, should not differ whether you see the segment three
times in succession or at two-day intervals. We all question the accuracy of our own
observations and are prone to attempt improvement. However, strive lbr objectivity
and stability; do not redefine behavior units as you proceed, unless you are willing to
start the rcscarch over again. Be careful not to overlay interpretations on your
observatiorls as you record data. This is often very difficult; but every observer must
lrchirvitrntl urtits you hitve selected. However, do not redesign your reseorch in mid\lr((tt)t willrrttrl t'ttt'rf trl t'otr.vidcruliort ttf' tlte consequen('es. Search for and acknowlctlgc wcrrkr)csscs irr yorrr stutly. such us irn inability to idcntif y inciividuals.
I lrr',
ELIABI LITY
(e.g.
data.
individual swans'
to her claim that she could identify some 450
For example, suppose that four observers are collecting instantaneous samples
(every 20 seconds) of behavior of zebra stallions living in small family groups in
central Africa. They are interested in developing a time budget for the following
behaviors: feeding (F), resting (R), grooming (G), walking (W), agonistic (intragroup: A,intergroup: Ar).In order to measure inter-observer reliability they decide
to all collect data for the same l0-minute period (30 samples) on the same zebra stal-
be allowed to collect data. and efforts should be made to increase his or her reliabil-
...thegreatestSourceoferrorsinusingobservationsmadebyothersis
see the same thing'
that no two people who look at the same thing
ILorenz,
1935:93
of newly
sightandhearingmaybeinherited'buttrainirrgwillprovicleanclbserverwithtlre
'percentage agreement'. In another experiment, Hailman tested all the chicks, and
inter-observer reliabilitY
.ErroroJ,apprehettding:Forexample.caneachobserverSeeandhearthe
observer reliabilitY'
haive preconceptlons
observer hias: For example, do one. or all, observers
diff'erent situtain
perform
about what behavior the animal is likely to
tions?
.Errortt,rec,ording:Forexample,iseachobserverrecordingdatainthe
same manner?
Poorinter-observerreliabilityisafrequentprobleminfieldstuclics.wltcrccl.ll)rS
observer ell'ects citrt rtsttitlly bc
of apprehending are difficult to overcorne. The other
experience'
reduced to a minimum through training and
pcriotlicirlly iit ot'tlcl' to ittstrtc
nrcasurcrl
bc
shoulrl
Inter-observer reliahility
llleilstlle
irl tlrc sttrtly its lt wltolc. A sirrlPlc' litsl :tpptrtxilttlttiott
irnrlvalitlity
tltist'lttlttlslltkittl';t slttttplt'ol
trl'itrtcr.-rllrsclvcl'r'clilrlrrlityis;rr'lt'r'lll(t!lt'ttt',t't'('ttlr'lll
ollst,tt.;tlt()ttstt|lttlt.lrv;r!l,,lrrr.tvr.t\illl(lrlr'lt'ttlltllllll'lltr'P('l(t'lll;ll'('\\ltttlr'rtt'lltt'
accrlr-trcy
then another observer tested the same chicks while Hailman was not present. The
results showed perfect rank-order agreement with regard to stimulus orientation;
but the repeated testing had suppressed the response rates.
of inter-observer reliability can be used to measure bias in interexperimenter reliability, as was Hailman's objective (above). However, to measure
Successive tests
If
observers viewing the behavior in these media should not be tested against those
viewing the live behavior. Simply put. inter-observer reliability can be accurately
rneasured only
if everything
:rrrtl Wclzcl.
RELIABI LITY
(intragroup A,, intergroup Ar) Jiom u single zebru stullion (/ocul uninrul)
Same observations
Observer
Instantaneous
observers
sample
1,2,3,4,
1.2,4
ir
.V
"'(
-1
F
F
F
F
,Y
F
F
-x
F
F
F
F
F
10
ll
"Y
-Y
.Y
t2
-Y
t4
l5
Al
Al
A2
A2
A.l
A2
16
A1
Al
A.
Al
Al
Al
l7
-Y
l8
t9
Al
Al
Al
Al
,Y
.Y
20
2t
F
F
22
-Y
F
F
F
26
27
28
29
F
li
F'
t;
\'
24
F
F
25
30
Ttrtltls
t;
J;
t:
t.4
A+B
C+D
A+C
B+D
,Y
13
23
phi:
v[(A+B)--LD-BL
(C+D) (A+C) (B+D)]
lf
Phi:
l.
AD
Observer
w
F
l'lri
*C:
*C:9 B*D:6
s5
\
A *B: l3
C+ D:2
l:{
VrnxDxAaDJ -l
Observer
l( I r)(2)1t1;
3
161;
r7. s
-o
ot{
rr
|,
i
ELIABILITY
Table8,|O.Anagreementmatrix.forobservers]and2inTable8.9
Al
A2
Proportion of total
for observer 2 (P.,)
l3/30 = 0.43
3/30 = 0.10
7130
-)
3/30 = 0.10
3/30 = 0.10
1/30 = 0.03
Behavior
codesl
13 0
030
007
100
000
000
F
R
G
Observer
Al
A2
Proportion of
total lor
= 0.28
(0.93-0.28)
:
rcapRa:
0.65
11_g:g) on:o.go
= 0.23
is 0.93 (see above); however, note that by taking chance agreement into account
kappa is lower. What is an acceptable kappa coefficient? Fleiss (1981) considers a
kappa of 0.60 0.75 as good and >0.75 as excellent, but Bakeman and Gottman
(1986) are inclined to be concerned with a kappa less than 0.7. Bakeman and
Gottman ( 1986) illustrate how to calculate whether a kappa coefficient differs sig-
observer I (Pl)
Notes:
I See Table 8.9 for details of codes'
8.s.2b KaPPa
P.)
Another measure of inter-observer reliability that has been used is the Pearson
product moment correlation coefficient. This will rneasure the correlation between
two sets (e.g. two observers) of interval or ratio data (described in Chapter 8).
However, Hoffman (1987) used this correlation coefficient to measure the interobserver reliability of two observers lor recording number of lunges (nominal data)
and duration of encounters (ratio data) in fruit flies (Drosophila melanogaster)
(Table 8.1 l).
B.s.2d Kendall's coefficient
napPa:11 _
41
cofficient
of
concordance
l4
as a
It
is dis-
fbr use in measuring inter-observer reliability. It can be used when several observers
nal.Asanexample,wewillmeasuretheinter-observerreliabilitybetweenObservers
have ranked behaviors with regard to some parameteq such as frequency, duration
or intensity.
H',-
each behavior.
whcr-c:
/,,
l,
(P, X
/")
R tr
/l\
\[/
tvltt'tt'. /i
(
ltlr clrclr l'rcllltviot (e .f . lr) tt't'ottletl lrv )llst'rr''t'r I' lllt' l)t()l)()ltl()ll
tttt l'
l.l;rl rrrrrrrlrt.r pl lrt'lr;rr rrrt;tl lrt ls t('( (,lrlt'tl llt:rl rrt'lt'lrt'ltltr
(
)lr',('l\('l
llrt..,,rrrr,.;r,,;t1,,rrt. lrill lot
entries:4:0.93
,, _sum of diagonal
n-totul
'
number of entries 30
P.:
;1R,
()l tll('
/i
tttr'rur
srtnt
ltttk
:/('
tt':.
t'lrlr'grl'y:rct'():is tlhscrvcrs
triul
of Kendall's W,vtat
ist ic'
,scored twic'e by
Behavior code
ttt,o obserl,ers
Al
Observer
A)
Observer
Observer 2
o.f' sequenc' e
-1
4*
-)
2.5
2.5
-)
16
23
1.000
0.997
Observer 2
0.991
0.999
fi-
0.992
0.992
Note:
Observer 2
0.993
0.994
Observer
t6
8.5
16.5
Number o.f'lwrye,t
Observer
Notes:
the researcli questions as validly as possible and transmit that information to others
Bailliere Tindall.
As an example, the data from all four observers in Table 8.7 have been treated in
ordinal format by ranking the behaviors in order of frequency of occurrence as
recorded by each observer (Table 8. l2)
:225.7
(l/12)$)1(216-6)
sance observation stage, is that the observer be able to recognize individuals. In par-
ior of animals, it
2251
A necessary prerequisite for many ethological studies, beyond the initial reconnais-
R- N6
Rlz
ticular. longitudinal studies (i.e. studies of individuals or groups over long periods
N:6
_ >R,': g4 :14
(R,-
8.6
of
species. We
there are ollen major differences between populations, social units and individuals.
22s.7
280
tt.6.r Naturalmarks
The calculated coefficient ( W:0.80) indicates relatively low inter-obscrvcr rcliablity between the lbur observers when their data are ratrk ordcl'ccl itccortlittg to ll'c-
quency of occurrence.
Io bc sttrtlying
Reliability (intra- and inter-obscrver)can bc ntcitsttrctl lirt'rtgl'cctttcttl ol'heltrtviclr recorded lor each institntitncrltts stuttltlc. l-r'ct;ttettt'ics. tlttl;tliotts. l;llr'ttt'it's lttttl
pr
sequollccs.ttsittg()llc()l'llltll'col'lltt'tttt'ltsrttt'stl'.'st'lilrt'tl;tlrovt"llvr)tlll('\('ill(ll
iltvrllvCs tt|rtt'r'llItn 0ilt'ollst'tlt't. lt'lttr'lttllr't llt;tl \r)lll lllill()t ()l)l('( ll\('l\ l() illl\\\('l
s1'rccics
have
is
llrt'rt'srrll ol rt;rlrrr;rl rrlrlil;rlrorrs ()r nrulirliorl5 11'.1' lrrtlkt'tr lrrlrrrs. rrrclitrtislic grottrttl
',(ltlllt('1") llottr'rt't. lltr".t'l\Pt", ol ttt,ttl.ttt1,', ittr'|1'11l''',tll\'ltol srtllir'it'tttlV wirle-
,O
-(
,/
2
_/\
Nick
M ETHODS
DATA COLLECTION
,/7
RN
CF
,f< 4)\
/L /r
New
DN
RN
Nip
Moon
-/(
\
NC
N.N
\
)\
Smooth
BF
__I\
cFc I
t\
)\
Sm
LSN
Sm Flag
Nip
the pattern of vibrissa spots, which lie in four to five parallel rows between the upper
,/(
/{
Fig.
ows
,a7
\
\
,/
'-4t*
-\-
population of
bottlenose porpoises. Lines within the fin boundaries represent light pigment
spots or scar tissue (from Wursig and Wursig, 1971)'
The basis for individual identification was the number and position of the vibrissa spots in Rows A and B (Figure 8.7A). Decisions were made whether the spots
in Row A were above or between spots in Row B. This pattern was then transferred
to a schematic version (Figure 8.7C). The spots in Row B were numbered consecutively from anterior to posterior. All the possible positions for spots in Row A
(above and between spots in Row B) were provided in the diagram. With continued
practice Rudnai was able to use this method of individual identification with ease
and confidence. This same method has been used by Patty Moehlman (pers.
commun.) as an aid in identifying individual black-backed jackals (Canis rllesontelas).
Pennycuick and Rudnai (1970) also developed a method to test the reliability of
identifying individual lions in this manner. Their method was based on an estimate
of the probability that two individuals would have markings that could not be distinguished. They began by determining the probability of occurrence of the different patterns in the population studied. Spots in Row A have never been observed in
positions other than I through 13.
Regardless of the physical characteristics selected for use in identifying individuals, photographs of each individual are valuable as a continuing'fleld guide'(Figure
8.8). Pennycuiok
pelage patterns and scars in grey seals (Halichocrus 54r1'us) (Anclcrstltl :ttlcl
Harwood, 1985); wing-tip patterns of kittiwakes (Tinbergen, 1974); spots ort crtclt
(it'ttl'rcr'.
side of the body of bonnethearJ sharks (Sphyruu tihuro\ (Myrbcrg ittltl
1914). Variations in the dorsal fins rll'bottlcllttsc pol'pttiscs ('l'trt"tirtlt't lrrrttttrlrttl
(Figure 8.6) allowc{ Wursig tntl Wtn'sip-(l977) lo itlentil'y 51 irrtlivitltrrrls rltrtitrll
1166llr slrrtly rll'p,rrrrrlt t'prlltosiliott. lltc srttttr'irt,lrvi,lrr:rl t'll;tt;tt'lt'ttrltts
wet'r'ttsr'tl ltv ('ottttot ;ttttl Stttolkt'r (l()S\)
thcir
2l
blown up and the vibrissa-spot patterns were checked against the schematic (Figure
TS
WR
n
Fuzzy
_/'\
Fuzzy's calf
K- n
\o.t
)\
LF
_-_/\
New
It
of identiflcation
ings.
s()r))r'w;lv. Ilrrs gcrrcnrlly rtcccssilirtcs capturc of tlre itnimal. although some technl(lu('\ llrvc lrr't'n tlr'r'elopr'tl lirt'tturrking;rt lr tlisllrncc (c.g. tlye clarts) ancl for selfttt:r r k ttrl' lr1' I lrr' ;tttunlrl.
224
O}T
INDIVIDUALS
225
Row
Row
Row D
\a
c
LEFT
Row A
Row
ffi
RIGHT
Row A
Bow
Fig.
8.7 A Profile ol
for recording the positions of the spots in Row A. B. Schcnralic profilcs. on lhc
form used for recording in the field. The lirll-lircc outliuc is rrsctl to rcconl strclr
imperfections as nicks in thc cars. Thc lion's scr, irl.lprrrrinrirlc lrgc. lrrrrl prirlt'(il
any) arc rccordcd on tltc sirtttc shcct. ('. Sclrcrrrirtic lcl)r'c\cr)lirtiorr ol llrt's1rol
pirtlcnr sltowrt irr A.'l'lrc Posiliorrs irr llow ll rrrt'lrv rlclirrrlr()n (()n\('( ulnr'lt lrllt',1
strrltirrl'. r.villr No I, rrlllrorrl,lr llrr'lol:rl rrrrrrrlrt'r rr r;rrr;rlrlt'(,rtl,r|lr'rl lrorrr
l't'ttlttt rrtr'k lttttl l(tttln,tt l() /())
lrig. li
li
('itt'los Mc.jia with photos of individual giraffes for identification in the field
(ll'orrr Moss. 1975).
Marking individual, nocturnal animals lor observations after dark may pose
special problems. Some animals will habituate to visible lights, natural marks or
marks designed tbr daylight observation can be used (Hill and Clayton, 1985).
Often, however, observations of nocturnal animals require that night-vison devices
money.
The various capture techniques available for the numerous species studied by
ethologists are too numerous to discuss here. but excellent reviews are available.
young (1g75\ provides a general guide to capturing wild animals. The Canadian
Wildlife Service and US Fish and Wildlif'e Service published a manual which
A marker that allows the observer to follow visually the nocturnal movements of
individual small rodents is the betalight. These are sealed glass capsules coated
8.6.2a Capture
includes capture methods for birds (Anonymous, 1977). Techniques for capturing
birds and bats are reviewed by Bub et al. (1991), and techniques for birds and
mammals are reviewed by Day et a/. (1980). The use of drugs in the capture and
restraint of animals was reviewed by Harthoorn (1976).
Some marking techniques require that animals be recaptured lor identification
or remarking. Recapturing using the same technique can be difficult for some
species, especially so for 'trap shy'individuals. For example, our experience trapping
gray jays (Perisorius c,turuclensis) has demonstrated that individuals are diflicult to
capture a second time in Potter traps, but they are relatively easily recaptured using
mist nets. Mech et al. (1984) developed a radio-transmitter collar for wolves that
contained a radio-triggered anesthetic dart which allowed the animal to be easily
recaptured for measurements of the animal or repair to the collar.
Capture. recapture, han<lling and marking have ethical and humane implications
(e.g. Cuthill. 1991; Laurenson and Caro, 1994; Appendices C and D), as well
as
practical implications, such as changes in behavior (see below and Chapter 9).
8.6.2h
Morking
internally with phosphor and filled with tritium gas, which emits low-energy beta
particles causing the phosphor to glow. They can be obtained in disc or tube shapes
ranging in length from approximately 6.5 to 76 mm (Figure 8.9A). Available in a
wide variety of colors, they are being used to a limited extent on small mammals,
especially in conjunction with binoculars or starlight scopes (O.J. Reichman, pers.
Clayton (1985).
Various types of markers lor animals have been developed for dilferent species and
purposes (e.g. dyes, leg bands, ear tags, collars, and radio transmitters, see p. 313).
The following are a few examples of the diversity of techniques employed: Milinski
(1984) marked individual stickleback fish by tying white ancl/or black conical'
plastic cylinders to their first or second dorsal spine. Kovacs (1987) individually
marke<l 201 harp seal pups (Phocu groenlandica) with Roto-tags through thc hind
flipper, and 16l of these pups were also dye-rnarked with inclivicltrally tlistirrct color
patterns. Howard (1988) gluecl numbered tags to thc hcads ol' Attrcl'icittt loittls.
lowiltg l)tctors:
I
'
N rrrrrhcr
111
.,
Elfects the marker might have on resultant behavior, even though some
studies have found no effects; for example, water voles (Leuze, 1980),
of capture.
Ease
lt
nl'
'i'^ k! g-
k1t'
where: N:number of unique combinations available; that is, the number of individuals that can be uniquely marked.
k:
be placed
For cx:rr.ttple. we select six positions where we can put a black mark on a mouse
(thrcc positions along each side), and we decide to mark two positions each time.
'l'hc ntrnrbcr ol'nricc we can individually mark is:
Fig.
,ry
(';
6!
)! 1rr lt!
15
lirr
ge
ncrating indi-
d natural marks
and artific'ial
ntarkers
Type of
mark
Natural
Artificial
Advantages
Disadvantages
Unnecessary to capture
Example
A.
No.
B.
Number or letter
17;
C. Named
for behavioral
'White face'
'Limpy'
characteristic
RG
'Gibraltar'
characteristic
1974\
actually change
Southern, 1983)
M arkers themselves affecting
Potential biases
I 98 1)
'Leakey'
Ethologists have devised many rettionales and clever scherncs firr assigning nunrbcrs
str,rcly
names that were not specific to either sex. It is this potential bias in
making objective
observations which can become a problem when numbers or names which
are par-
;ut()lll('l ltrrtl.;r l(.ln:tl(.. rr,;rs loo slrV lo;11.11a. ttlllrotrglt shc kCpt
l'.llllll' ttt;tlr". lltt,rtl'lr',r',r.'()n ,rll,'r ',,'rr,.,rn. rltt.\\1it\ ittrv;tys l()() t).,t.v()1s
s Data-collection
to stay with any of them. (This bird was inadvertently named Cleopatra
before her character was
known.)
[Tinbergen, l95B;210]
equipment
Although less likely than names, numbers can also create potential biases. We
may have a favorite, or lucky, number which when assigned to an animal will instill a
desire in us to see that animal do well in competition for food or agonistic encounters over a territory or dominance.
of the potential biases which arise when naming and numbering animals and guard
against letting them influence our observations, data recording and interpretation
of results.
The biases inherent in the types of identifiers applied to animals are listed in
sophisticated electronic methods available lbr collecting data, but there can be
inherent problems. For the increased speed and ability to handle quantities of data
experimental design (Chapter 6) and sampling methods (Chapter 8). A good rule-
of-thumb
is: use only equipment w,ith a level of' technology necessary to collec't o conl1
(s
o/' interest in
./brmut .fbr
fficient
data
a small
Chapter l7). requires nothing more than pencil and notebook; the chi-square
test (Chapter l4) used by Sordahl cor.rld also be calculated on a piece of paper using
the data from his field notebook. Likewise, in their field study on the function of
copulatior.t calls in f'emale baboons (Papio t:ynoc'ephalus), O'Connell and Cowlishaw
(
1994) collccted their data using a dictaphone and checksheets. However, collection
ol'litrgc cltnrntities o1'data on several, rapidly occurring behaviors from several indivitluirls cirn rccluirc a data logger or computer; that data should be collected and
sttrt'ctl irr rr lirltturl that cart be analyzed by computer. Several otherfactors to consitlet'u'ltr'tt selcclirtg tlltu-collcction cquipmcnt are illustrated in Table 9.1; the
t('it(l('t rt'ill rtttrlotrlrlerlly bc rthlc to lttltl scvct'itl lttctors ol' thcir own (see also Table 3
tn llolttt. l()/li ,:rtrrl Mlrtlirt lrrrtl ll;rlt's.rtt l()()l)
llltot ttlrrtr;tttrlslollrttl,\( ()l'r('.. \\('t('(lr',t rrrst'tl rtt ('lt:t1rtt't -1.
li
I
fl
I
problems can be overcome with different equipment and others can be overcome
with practice. If you fall asleep during this'thought data collection'you might con-
Characteristic
Computer keyboard
Notebook
Reliability
.?
Equipment
High
Inter-observer
Less
Intra-observer
High
Low
Medium
Speed
Quantity of data
Data feedback
Power
training
Can be reviewed
in the field
Easy, which is
At the first
not alwaYs
notes are recorded. Ad libitum notes are the written descriptions found in typical
field notes (Chapter 4) and are recommended only for reconnaissance-type observations (Chapter 4). However, some sampling methods lend themselves to data collec-
computer access
tion Jbrmal.r that can easily be accomodated with a notebook and pencil. For
example. you might take typical field notes in a descriptive study of social organization of species X but have a format for recording dominant-subordinant interac-
possible
crunched; remote
Battery restricted
when in field
Limits of the
observer
More training
High
Hieh
High
Must be comPuter-
4----7
WO---YR
More dilficult
(IndividualWhite/Orangedominateslndividual
Yellow/Red)
a good characteristic
and these notations would be embedded in your notes where you would more fully
describe the interactions. Data collection formats are a step below data fitrms (dis-
of
Several other types of data-collection equipment are described below' Some
in part
the older, simpler equipment used to streamline data collection are presented
Also,
for their historic value and as a demonstration of the ingenuity of ethologists'
researchers
for
those
a description of that equipment might serve as encouragement
who have more time to locate or construct (or modify) simple, suitable equipment
and comthan they have money to spend on technologically advanced data loggers
relatively
of
advent
the
point
out.
(1993)
Bateson
puters. However, as Martin and
custom-built
for
need
the
inexpensive. portable computers has all but eliminated
equipment. Nevertheless, it is not dilficult (nor is it wise) to use technological
overkill when collecting data.
you need, a1d have the opportunity to use, a data logger or computer fbr data
as a
collection, it is always wise to have a simpler method (e.g. check sheets)available
If
(Whiten lrncl
backup. Although portable computers have become very reliablc
Barton, 1988) remember Murphy's Law: 'lf anything catl g1l wrotlg' it rvill'' Irvcrt
sottlctiltlcs
before you conduct reconnaissance observations (Chaptcr 4)' you cittl
ytrttt'cttttclt: tllis
anticipate problerns by conducting 'imaginary clata collcction' I'trrttt
l.rtv lr:tt'k.
is similar to tlre 'thor.rght expcrinrcnts'tlcso'ibcrl by Sot'cttsctt 1lt)()l).
t'ollt't'ltolt
clsse yptrr cycs. cnvisiorr thc:rninurl. lrrrtl crrvision lltr'l)l()("('ss ol tlrll:t
in small steps. The steps were of equal size and occurred at a set time interval.
This method can be viewed as either utl libitum, sampling with an automatic time
base, or a type of event recorder with flexibility in the type of behavioral observa-
tion to be recorded at each interval. The size of the slit must be designed for the
amount of data to be recorded, the speed at which the paper steps must be in concert
with the data being collected. Too small a slit and steps ocourring too rapidly could
be very fiustrating.
Handwritten notes can also be made directly into a portable computer for
storage and latcr retrieval. Input occurs when the observer writes with a special
stylus directly onto the computer screen. With some systems, such as Apple's
Ncwton irntl Write-T,rp (Linus Technologies. [nc. 1889 Preston White Dr. Reston,
Vn 21091). sol'lwarc cnables the computer to learn the user's handwriting.
I l:rnth.vr ittcn inprrl is thcn cligitized ancl a character-recognition algorithm converts
llrt'u,rillt'rr svrnlrols irrto n S('ll. ()tlrcr systcms (e.g. Casio's ScreenWriter Digital
l)rrr1')rt't'orrls;rtttl slot'r's tltr'rvntinl', 1,, :r gntphic lirrrrtut and clisplays it just as it
\\';r:,\\'rlll('n Ilst'rrl llrt'st'torrrPrrlt'r svslt'rrrslltollrrblytlocsnrllollcritttysignificant
rtrlr,tttl,rl,r' or('r p,lp('r ;ur(l 1rt'trr tl
DATA FORMS
Behavior
0800
\--
powered. hand-held voice data entry device with built in voice recognition capabili-
08 12
also has a 50-key keyboard and bar code reader. However. the capacity of
these pocket-sized recorders varies. 'Voice It' has only a two minute capacity size
(Voice It Technologies, Inc. Fort Collins, CO 80525); 'Voice Organizer' uses 512 KB
ties.
It
uses interchangeable 30
92 DATA FORMS
Data forms. or check sheets. are the next level of organization above ud lihitum data
collection and Trotter's method. They are the minimum data-collection method for
any well-designed study. Hinde (1973:393) cautions that'every check sheet [data
florm]must be designe<lwith an eye both to the problem in hand ancl to the idiosyn-
of the observer.'
Kleiman (1914) clescribed two types of check sheets (data forms) used at the
National Zoological Park. One is a 'time-sample check sheet'which is used for
focal-animal samples of 4-5 minutes taken every hour. The second lbrm is used for
all-occurrence sampling, in which the animal(s) is observed for 30-60 minutes at a
prescribed time each day and the occurrence and duration of selected behaviors
crasies
0900
Fig.
9.1
are
recorded.
The steps cliscussed below for designing data forms are the same as those that
should be used before employing one of the more complex data-collection methods.
Those methods are merely more sophisticated ways of collecting the same data you
would get from a data form. A computer does not do anything (indeed it cannot)
that cannot be done by hand.
Most data lorms are two-dimensional representations of three (or four-) dimensional (or variable) data. Figure 9. l, for example, illustrates three variables (individual, behavior and time) ol the four commonly recorded in behavior studies. The
tourth, spatial relationships, can be treated separately or incorporated on a standarcl data tirrnr. It could be incorporated on the form in Figure 9.1 by merely includ-
ing the cotlc N W with the 08 l2 to indicate that it occurred in the northwest quadrat
rll'thc cnclosurc.
('olrrrrrrrs shoulcl be gntup<,t1and clearly delineated to reduce the tirne it takes the
obscrvcr to lintl tlrc appropriate column. Often behaviors can be grouped according
Io lrrr'l.rcr crrlcgorics ()r'anir.nirls can be grouped according to social units. The
crrrplursis. lrowcvcr. slrotrltl bc orr clrsc ol'r'ccorrling with itn eye to organization for
rl:rl:r llrnslt'r lrtlcr. l'irt r'rrrrnplt'. il tlrt'tl;rlrr rrtr'lo l'rc cttlct'crl into ir conrptrter
sptr';trlsltr't'l or (litl;tlr;tst'. tl tr ltr'lPlrrl 1,, lt;rtt'lltr'rl;tl;t lot ttr ()t,,iuti/('(l so llltl V()u cllll
238
DATA FORMS
can read across rows entering data without having to skip over columns. This,
however, should be of lower priority than ease of getting data accurately onto the
Table
'2 Examples
forms.
Leave both blank column.s and rows and a large column on the right for c'om-
Behavior
ntents. Notes written in the comments column are sometimes the key to later inter-
pretation of enigmatic results. Blank columns and rows provide flexibility for
adding important behavioral units or animals to your data collection. These
columns are probably used more often than not.
Animal
e.2.3 Coding
Coding data increases speed of recording. The shorter the code the more rapidly it
can be recorded and the smaller the space that is necessary for entering the data.
Preening
Flying
Preening
Pr
Pecking
Pe
Edward
Mary
Flash
Red
Green
Blue
should be made to devise a code that is sirnple and easy to recall. Some examples are
Left blue
Right blue
given inTable9.2:
Left green
Specific coding schemes are often designed for particular studies. For example,
Sackett et al. (1973) designed a three-digit three-dimensional coding system for
LG
Right green
RG
However, accuracy and reliability should not be sacrificed for speed; so every effort
recording the behavior of a single monkey (Table 9.3) and a four-digit four-dimen-
Time
sional coding system for recording the social interactions of a focal monkey tested
(5 min. trials) in a group
Spatial
(Coturnix chinensis) behavior. They suggested that the format had the potential to
serve 'as a prototype for a generally usable standard for behavioral coding systems
Ut
315
Quadrat
Southeast quadrat
SE
In pond
On hillside
Next to Edward
IE
your own, although Bakeman and Gottman (1986) argue against adopting
someone else's coding scheme. I also recommend perusing Bakernan and Gottman's
not more difficult. Also, it should be obvious. not cryptic (e.g. Yotsumato
t976).
('lrrptt't
li
9.2.4a Sociometric
matrix
of concentric
tr.l:r1t.r1,.1,,,r,, lrr.lur.r.n
we
?i*
FZE fg;u-illill
.i;
r :E?9=
r?EE:
-o:"
s
?Z
=3i
-. F
+c'L-'r^;
1;=?
;X;t
?
.t.-997.\E
=?
i=gE
(u
?=1S\
:I
#=e ;i1= ll
R'
V=8,r
q:se:EF*
t
H='
.'=r:=F,e.>==:7.i.T?ll
?qi
?Z
Ii*=3
=:1
=7=
:?=
.l==r.
:7.-
'2=7
'-E
?2=
=;-?
=1
i: -' i
e..1.
lbr
-l
i>
*x
'-.i
^,X
(,
',4
ll-NJ =i
1tr'(})l.Jo
v\J:=1
Jn)7^aq)-=
z,
p
oo
PP
IH
^l
5
If
:h-![
,V
4
(\
\\:
r\
oa
6,c
36'
.Do
x+
()
.i
OC
aai
='tl
aD !.
'r
Digit position
r-
,-;:
-1
Interactor behavior
rrnsocial
ID-direction
Passive
Passive
Nonsocial
Explore
Explore
Monkey
Withdraw
Withdraw
Monkey 2
Disturbance-fear
Disturbance-fear
Ro
ck-hu ddle
sel
f-c
la sp
Ro
k-huddl
e - se
Monkey 3
f-cl a sp
Monkey 4
Stereotypy
Stereotypy
Self
Play
Play
Toy
Sex
Sex
Ladder-shelf
Threat-aggression
Threat-aggression
Window
No response2
The four monkeys in the group are arbitmrily labeled from I to 4 as subject ID (SID) codes.
: The no response category for the third-digit interactor behavior Code 9 rcfers to social interactions initiated by the focal subject that
produce no change in behavior of the potential interactor from that occurring befor the initiation.
S,x?,ce. Frcm Sacketr et al.(1973).
C
16
z
-l
oa
o
,1
ETggIc'Esi
po-br=-r
:.D;
:cV,
U
A)
\Ooo-IO\Un5'+lt9O
-J
?
w
(D
+
v
-+
(D
H)
);-
i.
rllJ
X!D
()(D
(9
--rn
rL)
H/-
ll
3,
system
e?
illl a3
h-';
e Il EE
?
3 llll pi
a
: EL
v.
qIt.,
;:En illl -o
i ii
Bql
?.<
ll
tsT
r a llll
do::'lldr-
(D
ll
aH
23ii
=,= -"a-i*
+:
?=*"_ 7 gi
.:
7=_ =: ;s
3i
==
aD
='R*-
Ft
:,F.1
a
?;-6.H
5
a e-1
-40
#fi8'i
rr
'= '-s
^
ET
ll
R;
g
ll
5!?.
i*-=s
P a'r
4(D
;*,
s('
:.t
:I
ii
E;[E
4;;E
N)
t'J
Dr =
:6=x
=i7
e;+p- llll
S a:=X;
a';. E
ag3 ag dql-fl
G
i'u!7ilv
u+
3
a.,
-v
;I7il
(,
ffi eae*-u
odY
AE
6.?P
ll
ll
G';5f
O\ (^ 5
DATA FORMS
Sample
Supplantee
BC
period
A
q)
243
I
2
3
| 2
BC
| 23
A
B/C
C/A
| 2
t 2
D
D
C
C
A/B
C
A check is made in the aPProPriate
box every 6me one individual
supplants another.
Fig.
Supplarrtee
Strpplarrtcr
Sample
Sample 2
Sample 3
in- the
The cocle for the inrliyiduat srrpplanted is entered ser;ue-ntially glrtained'
data are
boxes to the ,igit .rf iL" .r,,pplnri"r; nole that scr;ucrrlial
Nearest neighbor
Sample
ABCD
period
I
2
3
C
A
D
D
C
C
C
C
Time of occurrence
Behaviour
Grooltring
Ilcsting
Agolristic
1002
Animal:
Examplc <tf
1r.t
l)
Fct'rling
0943
(e .1r..
,,trrr111111y,
244
DATA FORMS
Behavior:
Anintal
0830/sE
If
use a data
(NW NE,
0840/N\V
B
hr contrast to all-occurrences sampling. here we are interested in the who, what, and
where of behavior at particular points in time (see Figure 9.9).
0702/\\1/
071s/sw
070?N\1
0717/s\1/
In this type of sampling we might ask: During sequential one-minute samples, what
individuals are engaged in a particular behavior? (see Figure 9.10).
We could reverse the'Behavior'and Animal'labels and ask: During sequential
one-minute samples, what behaviors did the focal animal engage in?
D
9.2.4f Sequence sampling
Anirnirl
0840
0830
0900
C
0702
0702
07r5
0717
Tlrr'tinrcs
<lf <l<.c.rrrrcnccs
;r;r;rro;>ri:rtt,
r1' r)
r;
rr;rrl
r;ttr.
rl,tl,r r,,llt't lr,n lr)nlr l()r
1,,;1,,.,,
rt't..111111,1,
rts
Movement
Behavior:
0800
0801
0802
0803
0804
HS
WF
214
TS
214
-1
Animals
Sample
times
Sample
Time
.\
0520
St
0521
w
w
,t
0526
D
L
0528
x
a check mark
053 I
i[
Y
Y
St
St
D
L
an individull animal is
Performing the behavior during
Lach s,rmPle Period'
Fig.
For many studies in the field, counting and tirning behaviors can be accomplished
using a hand-held mechanical counter and stopwatch (e.g. Carpenter and Grubitz
Sample
initiated
bY TS
TS
HS
WF
IIS
TS
HS
TS
IIS
wlr
wl,
ils
wll
1S
4
5
IS
lls
lts
IS
counter cluring l0 minute scan samples. When several different behaviors are being
measurerl, other types
of multi-channel
bclow).
't's
1961;also see below). For example, Anderson and Harwood (1985) recorded the
of each bull and cow grey seal (Halichoerus grypus) on a multi-key
behavior
bccn trsctl
BABY
Whiskv DATE
6l5nl
NO.
TEllP.
ll'C lvlND
On Mother
On Mother
Missed
Total on & offRI (mothermoves)R2 (mother
- rejects passively)
,i13 (mother pushes, etc,)
F.i
9.1
AI
A2
rf,
Total
off-
Check sheet for mother-infant relations in captive rhesus monkeys Each row rcpresents one half minute. Ticks are placed in the columns if the
activity in question occurred during the half minute except that leaving' and 'approaching' (that is, distance between mother and infant
increases Ircm less than 60 cm to more, or vice versa) are recorded each time they happen. Rr.R,. and R3 are categories of rejection of the
infant by the mother, Ar.A,. and M are categories of acceptance. C, R, and T mean that animal C initiated rough-and-tumble play with
Whisky.'<60 cm only'refers to number of half mins in which infant was off mother and not more than 60 cm from her (from Hinde, 1973,
after Hinde and Spencer-Booth, 1967).
DATA-COLLECTION EQUI
PM
ENT
251
Baseline information
!12.f081
!1.
160r..
t52.
old electromechanical equipment is still available in many laboratories and is suitable for many observational studies. However, this equipment is not readily adaptpower
able to field work since it is bulky and uses 1|Q-volt AC or a 2$-volt DC
I
l0-volt
AC'
from
supply which is normally inverted and transformed
r18.
t L?t 1.
r1454r
9.4 CALCULATORS
Flock geometry
Time
Weather
Strip-chart event recorders can be used to record the occurrence and duration of
events and states. With the time-honored Esterline-Angus 20 chantiel event
move a pen
Location
Habitat
8112i111111.
!1:1ll(1111.
E11i24LLl1lr.
,t?11111116.
:11111r1111.
t112I221111.
:11112t,
1188.
B?L222L7111.
different behaviors was assigned a number (0-9) on the keyboard. He first printed
out baseline inlormation for each sampling session, then entered a behavior for each
5 second scan sample (Chapter 8). A metronome (see below) signaled when to
record a behavior and when to press the return key. which resulted in the row of
numbers being printed onto a paper tape (Figu te 9 .12). Each row of numbers could
Flock number
81112511121.
t?'ri1111111.
r1:,:i111727.
s11.21121211'
and Giles ( 1980) review several activity-recording instruments for wildlife studies'
Ely (1987) used an inexpensive, hand-held, portable, printing calculator (Casio
HRl2) to record the behavior of white-fronted geese (Anser albdrons). Each of 10
Date
Actlvity
An inexpensive hand-held calculator can be used as a counter in the field. but without
behavior. Where
a printout capability (see below), one calculator is required for each
automatic counting of a single type of event (e.g. hops on a perch) is required' an inexpensive calculator can be modified to accept inputs from photoelectric cells, solenoids, microswitches an<] sound-activated switches (Knight et al., 1985). Schemnitz
by depressing the assigned microswitch and holding it down lirr its lottg its tltc
behavior continues (Staddon, 1972). Eisenberg (1963) ttsctl switchcs tltitl lockctl
rtt cottltl lrc
closed when lifted up, cor-rlcl be dcprcssccl into thc ncutrirlo1-rcrt 1'rosiliott.
pushcclclewl-t 11cl rcuraincrlclosctl irs long rrs tlrcy wcrc tlcl'rt'cssctl. Slvilt'llr.'s t'rtlt ltlsrt
hclr.iggcr.ctlhylltt:ttlitttltl(e.g.Week1'1'|()(r.l)'rrlllVtitttt.ts.t.tt..'ittlltt.t.r;lt'tt
Itlt'tllt't's :lltst'ttt't'
series
brrilt-in kcybolrcl (scc Fig. 8.4 in Lehner, 1979). [t was originally designed for use in
sttrtlics ol'llrc sociirl bchirvior ol- squirrel monkeys (at the Max Planck Institute fur
l)syt'lri:rtric irr Mrrrriclr) :rrrrl hrrs sonrc Iimitations for widespread adoption.
llowt'vt'r. rl slrll ;rvrriltrlrlt'. il rrurv lrr' srrilrrblc ruttl srrllicicrtt lirr data collection in
s()ilr('slttrltt's
rrr I t'lrrrr'r l()/()) ;rrt'rr spccitrl typc rll-
STENOGRAPH
Animal
Animal 2
3 s Category A
6 s Category A
3 s Category
1 s Category
T
T
5 s Category B
8 s Category A
T
3 s Category A
3 s Category
3 s Category D
2 s Category A
3 s Category A
Fig.
2 s Category C
1 s Category
4 s Category
5 s Category B
T
3 s Category C
9.14 Sample printout lrom a stenograph machine used to record behavior from two
rats simultaneously. The behaviour has been separated into nine categories, A I
(from Heimstra and Davis, 1962\.
9.6 STENOGRAPH
study where the researcher wants to illustrate the rate of some behavior since the
recorder's output is essentially a graph of cumulative animal reponses across time.
Heimstra and Davis (1962) described their use of a stenograph machine lor recording behaviors simultaneously from two animals. However, the stenograph is adapt-
Wolach et al. (197 5) modified a cassette tape recorder to record responses, converted
able to several additional formats of recording data. It prints several letters as well
as numbers liom 0 to 9. One or more numbers and/or letters can be depressed simul-
the output into a relay closure, and then played the tape back to operate a cumulative recorder.
The event recorders described above are inconvenient to use since the researcher
usually must transcribe the tracings of the chart output into numerical clata. ancl
then enter the data into a calculator or computer for analysis. Data loggcrs itrttl
computers (discussed below) eliminate these steps, making clatit collcctiott ttot ottly
stttrc thc tritnscription in a computer-compatible format, and some can be intea cornputer to provide an instant translation of shorthand and display it
grittctl with
on ir vitlco nronitor. The stenograph is relatively compact, light, and very quiet.
more efficient but often more accLrrate; every aclclitional stcp which lltc t'csertt'cltct'
must perform by hand, fton-r thc raw dirta ttl tlrc uulrlysis. ittlt'otlttccs ltrlrliliotutl
(n
l)avis
( I 962)
rtts p;tiretl irr rt sntir ll woorlcn box. Thcy scparated the behavior
ol ltt'ltrrr"iolrl strrlt's hy tlcl'rrcssing tlrc sanrc key at oneon(l rnlr'rrlrls. t rrt.tl lr\';trt t.lr'r'lrr)nt( nt(.lr()n()nt(.(tlist.rtssr'tl lltlct'itt tlrischirltlcr').
llrr't'tt't'o;111'11 (lur:rli()ns
..('(
l)rrntl tr't'orrlcrl llrc occrrrrcncc ol'lhc bclraviors ol-thc twu rats simultaneously.
Data recorded on a stenograph are limited to the number of different keys available, but conversely are expanded by the user's capacity to depress any number of
keys simultaneously. The stenograph could probably be modified to step one line
automatically at set intervals through a motor drive rather than through the depression of the keys. Data recorded on a stenograph can provide inlormation on: 1. the
OBSRVEO EVENT
SWITCHBOARO
DODE MATRIX
Iffiffi
-)
OV
Start
Row I
Column 5
.5V
SHIFT REGISTER CUTPIJT
fNCOD ER
5,E
bcardt
o
I rmC
Data loggers are used to collect (encode) and temporarily store data which is then
transferred to a microcomputer (or mainframe) for reduction, long-term storage,
organization and analysis (e.g. Morgan and Cordiner, 1994). These processes, illus-
RECORDED gGNAL
frilm
ffiil
ffiilflH
flti
"
fir#-iltTtt-t*1tffit-ffi :;
trated for the Digitorg system in Figure 9.15, are essentially the same for all data
.5V
logger systems, whether the data is recorded on magnetic tape or on computer chips.
DECOOED SIGNAL
In 1913, Sackett
tions such as factory production monitoring and quality control, but which may
Some of those systems are still worth investigating as possible low cost. yet ellective
alterantives to newer data logger systems discussed below. Many of those earlier
data loggers are no longer being manufactured, but they are not extinct. For
example, the Datamyte 900 (Conger and Mcl-eod, 1971, Scott and Masi, 1977;
Torgerson,lgTT: Smith and Begeman, 1980), 801 and 1000 (Gerth et u\.,1982) are
still used by some ethologists. They have been replaced by the DataMyte 3055
(Allen-Bradley Co., Minnetonka, MN), which was designed lor business applica-
trm?
Cotumn 5
p661{916
Ta,PE
Row 8
Fig.9.l5 Information
evcnt
of information processing
Recording Equipment (MORE) Co.. built a data logger which was clesignecl for collection of behavioral data (e.g. Kodric-Brown, 1988). It was replaced by the OS-3
data logger (Observational Systems, Seattle, WA) which is still being usccl to collect
behavioral data but is no longer being manufactured. Other data krggct's wltich ttrity
still be available are the SSR System 7 (Stephenson and Robcrts, 1977; Sctttiotic
Systems Corp., Madison, WI), The Assistant (Hutnitn Tcclttttllogics. lrrc.. St.
Petersburg, FL), and the Polycorrlcr-(Onrnirlltu Itrtcrnrttiorurl lrtc. l.ttg.rtrr. [ ]trrlr)
<'t
ttl. I l(),\.1).
lillitrltilitr:
l),r
1,,,,, ()r
Is it it pr<lvclt systenr?
('ttrr11tt111lt1ltlt' ls
MICROCOMPUTERS
.
'
'
'
'
.
ln ethology, microcomputer-based data collection can occur in at least the following four ways: 1. recording of visual and/or acoustical observation data via
to the system?
phy and videotape analysis later in this chapter); and 4. recording of radiotelemetry
Remember that data loggers are only a t'aster and more efficient way of collecting
and storing data. They will not substitute for a poorly designed study by magically
changing useless data into useful data. They can be no more accurate than the
researchers who use them.
observer input; 2. tbe animal automatically recording its own behavior; 3. recording
(see discussions
of digital photogra-
98 MICROCOMPUTERS
domestic cat. The system allowed him to record when a behavior was performed,
who performed it, and to whom or what it was directed. Godwin (1994) used the
popular for collecting data in enclosure and laboratory settings (Flowers and Leger.
1982). A discussion of the types and specifications of microcomputers, including an
ers to portable laptop, notebook and hand-held computers. One laptop computer
that is designed to be used under harsh conditions in the field is the Bison Itxplorer
(Bison lnstruments, Inc. 5708 W. 36th St. Minneapolis, Mn 55416;). Notebook and
hand-held computers have become increasingly popular for the collection and
short-term storage of behavioral data since they are very compact. lightweight and
have a relatively long battery life and large data storage capacity (Noldus et al.,
A mp h ip r
io
n m e lano pu s).
Hensler et ol. (1986) used a portable computer (TRS-80 Model 100) to record the
entry, they relabeled the microcomputer's keys with adhesive stickers. Giraldeau er
ul. (1994) also used a TRS-80 programmed as an event recorder in their study of foraging behavior in chipmunks. Unwin and Martin , (1987) designed a behavioral data
1989). This large data capacity has enabled many to also be used for limited data
analysis. Competition has caused prices to fall and capabilities to increase. Some
collection system also based on a portable computer (Epson PX-S) and specially
ria listed below (Llnwin and Martin 1987:88 89), which are appropriate when the
researcher ir-rtends to assemble a portable microcomputer based data collection
system by purchasing the computer and writing the software, in contrast to using
cortttttct'ciirlly availuble software - also see Martin and Bateson's (1993: 110 ll2)
manufacturers
Compaq, IBM. NEC, Tandy and Toshiba. Hand-held computers that have been
used for behavioral data collection include: Hewlett-Packard HP4l.7l :rncl 95LX,
Husky Hunter, Psion Organiser and Series 3, Sharp Wizard, atrcl Tantly 102. Ytrtr
should select a computer that can be easily programmed or usecl with lvirillrblc tltrtir
collection soltware and interfircecl with y<tur ttticrocotttptllct- ot' Ittltilll)';rtttc lsce
examples below; alsg Kicras (lt)tl l) gllcrs utltliti6rlrl irtlviccl.
designed software. Their system ('computer event recorder') was based on the crite-
lr)'llrc evrnl
sttpglot'1
plain English.
ICROCOMPUTERS
259
ing software, consider that your research may expand into more complex experirnental designs and sampling rnethods in the future.
and latencies of multiple behaviors. Tones of various pitches and durations could be
Besides using the keyboard or mouse, behavioral data can also be input to a
programmed to signal that the correct key had been pressed or signal the time for a
computer using a bar-code reader. For example, Line et al. (1987) developed a computer/bar-code system lor recording behavioral observations in their studies of
scan sample.
So.ftware
researcher; 2.
obtained from other researchers who wrote the programs; or 3. purchased commercially.
The basic information recorded by data collection software is the occurrence and
were printed with a unique bar code on a plasticized sheet. Behaviors were entered
into the computer by scanning the bar code for the behavior with a light pen; it took
approximately I second to obtain a correct reading.
time of a behavior lor each input by the observer. From this data, the program can
then derive frequencies, durations, latencies and sequences of dilferent behaviors.
As an example, a flow chart of Whiten and Barton's ( 1988) fircal-aninral all-occurrences and scan sample programs is shown in Figure 9.16.
Many programs also allow the observer to record additional ittput lor citclr
behavior, such as who performed it, where it was pcrlirrnrccl rrnrl (o wlrttrtt ot'wltitt i(
was directed (e.g.Mendl, 1988; also scc ovcrvicw tll'corrrrttcrci:rl sol'twltrc lrclorv).
Researchers whrl hitve rlcvclol'rctl tlrcir 0wtt tlltlrt-r'ollt't'tl()il l)r()1, lilrils;ttt'ollr'tt
willirrg loslrirrc tltcttr rvillt r.'ollr';rgrrt's. ltt;rrlrlili()lr. s('v('r;tltllrl;r tollcr'lt()n l)t(,1'tiun\"
wltielr t'lrrt lrt'rrsr'tl tlitr't'llv ot tttorltlit'rl lot ',1r.'r.'',,'r("i(';rt.lt rt,','.1'., ltlttt'lrt't'tt ltttlr
260
M ICROCOM PLITERS
261
START
DISPLAY'prompts' for initial data,
string of data{ypes
e.g.'lD?'
t
1. Key press records start of
a bout: same or different
key records identity of
behaviour assigned to it,
and bout finish time
POINT.SAMPLE PROCEDURE
TONE/DISPLAY: signalling of
correcl entries, as above
F'ig
9.16 Generalized outline of a routine used to record a J0-rllirttttc lircitl ollscr.vlltl()ll ()ll
a loraging baboon illustrates sevcral clptions likcly to bc rclevltttl ltt tllost ttscrs.
An alarm tone signals the epci ol'thc lircal itt .10 tnirttrtcs. ltrttl tltc tlispllrt l)li)tlll)l\
the user to conlirnt thc cntl (irt whiclt 1'toittt rttt ctttl-ol-lirr.'ltl totlc is slot't'tl)ot
poslp()ltc il, ltcrrrritlirrgcrlrrrltlclion ol :r litrrrlrlltlrt t'ttlt\'(ltotll Wltrlt'tt lttrrl
Ilttt'totr. I()lili)
DATA-COLLECTION EQUI
PM
ENT
MICROCOMPUTERS
BEHAVIOR CHRONICLES
EVENTLOG
H arcln'a re
Re
t1
ir e nte n
t.s :
htput:
Keyboard
Input
keys.
The Setup menu is used to configure the subject and behavior files and
record the name of the observer. Observations can be divided into
Keys are pressed and held down while a behavior is occurring; several
keys can be depressed simultaneously.
User can sets timers with auditory or visual signals to cue intervals for
one-zero and instantaneous/scan sampling.
Data recording can be interrupted to add typed notes to the data file.
Output:
from
Output:
statistical packages.
Conduit
Analyses'.
EVENT-PC 3.0
to use for recording rapidly occuring interztctions since you ntust ttsc
the mouse to first click on the initiator's name, then click ort thc
behavior, and then click on the recipient's name. A kcy-drivctt vct'siott
is being written expressly for data collection. Pricc ritngc is tttetlittttt lirt
,Sttttr<'('.
('rispe n
(
n t s'.
l{. Wilson
'ltt'slt'tlrclrl l\l(
fI urdtt,u r t, Re q u i r c m e n t.s :
IBM-PC (or compatible), Apple Macintosh, Commodore 64
Ittptrt:
Kcyboa rcl
is
rvo
iltllrrl lorrrr:rls:
l l'tr'ss ;tttrl ltolrl kt'r' l()t ()n(' lrt.lr;rr ior trl lr lirltc.
' l'tt'rs l\('\'()n(r',rl ..1,uI,lt(l.r1111.;rl t'Itl ol t'ltt.lt ltt.llitvirtt Io
l('( r)t(l
,11
MICROCOMPUTERS
Input:
Output:
Keyboard
Analyses'.
categorY.
l.
Key press lor start/end. A single key press signals the start of a
behavior and the end of the previous behavior if it has been
designated mutually exclusive.
2.
frequencies.
Easy to learn and use; will meet the needs of many researchers
conducting rather'simple', straightforward studies, especially when
of keyboard used.
You can select to record from single (focal animal) or multiple actors.
Modifiers can be used to code the receiver, object, intensity, or
Source'.
Dr James C. Ha
9402224th5w
Edmonds. WA 98020
email: jcha@u.washington.edu
Re
quir e me nt
s'.
Macintosh
Support package lor hand-held computers: several ntoclcls ol' ltittttlheld computers manufacured by Psion, I-lewlctt-Pttckrtrtl, lltrsky
Support packagc litr vitlcolirl'rc trnirlysis: virleo cltsscllc tccottlt't, r'itlt'.r
titrrc-cotlc gcncl'ill()l'ttrrtl relrrle t ( )lrlton;tl: lltllt't'ttttltollt't, t ll;rl;l( l('t
;lt()t.
and others.
,'.('rt('l
A nu l.t',rt'.t''.
lt
ve
jl
AUDIO-TAPE RECORDERS
is not recorded in a computer-compatible form, then these storage and manipulation programs provide a convenient data entry option for later analysis. A short dis-
cussion of software packages for statistical analyses can be found in Chapter 16.
Summary:
Ethologists use audio-tape recorders for three different purposes: l. to record observations verbally described by the researcher 2. to record sounds produced by
animals under study;and 3. to store data in a format compatible for later transfer to
a
see
Source'.
'Ihis method of data collection has several advantages and disadvantages. The most
Authors 1992)
Noldus Information Technology bv
Costerweg
out;2. real time being difficult to measure accurately if the recorder changes speeds,
slightly, at different temperatures; 3. transfer of data from the tape often being difflcult since most observers do not adhere to a strict format when recording the data;
6702 AA Wageningen
The Netherlands
and4. speaking into the microphone may disturb the animals being observed.
At the beginning of each data-collection period you should record the same preliminary data that you record in written field notes (Chapter 4). The lormat for
puter-compatible form) than the electro-mechanical devices which have been used.
Wildhaber et al. (1994) used a microcomputer to control and monitor continuously
their experiment on loraging behavior in bluegills. A passive type of data logging is
recording observations can be the same as written ad libitumfield notes or any of the
other sampling methods (Chapter 8). As with check sheets, if the behavior is
complex or occurs rapidly, some type of coding should be used (discussed earlier in
this chapter). The code must be clearly defined and the sounds of the code words
possible through the use of treadles or light beams, which are recorded by the micro-
present, and is generally more accurate and provides more information (in a com-
on-or-off
Data transfer from audio-tapes can take many forms. You can transfer the data
switch closures, are quite inexpensive to design and simple to program (Symonds
to a check sheet (e.g. Tacha, 1988; also see section 9.2) or, for some studies, a complete sequential transcript may be advisable, such as that used by Hutt and Hutt
(1974) in their study of 'free field' behavior in children (Box 9.2). Data can also be
transf'crecl directly into computer data files using standard data collection software
E.rccl) ordatabuscnrilnagers(Aslttorr-'lhtc's
lirr clirect computer input (see above). Also, some programs are designed
spccilicirlly lirr rccording data from audio-tapes. For example, Noldus Information
'l-ccltrtologics ollcrs an Audio-Tape Analysis Kit
lor use with The Observer 3.0 softwrtt'c wlriclr pnrvitlcs lccurirtc cocling ancl timing of behavioral data from audioclcsignccl
The storage, editing and manipulation of ethological data is no clillcl'e ttl tltart tltitt
of any other kind of data. Most commonly, sprcaclshcct progrittrts (sttclt its l.oltts
t 2 3 orMicrosoft
l)lttt,s't'. Mic'lrrt'irtt's
iu'(.('()lltl)ittilrlt'rvitlrlltt'rlrsklik'srrst'rllrVllrr.'slot;t1,1'/11v;ttttPttl.rltott',olltt;ttt'llrl.tllr
lr1tc.
Arrrlio l:tpt'tt't'ottlt'ts:tvrttl:rlrlt'lor nolt'llrkirrg vlrry in sizc l}om small pocketsl/('(l ttttr'tot;tssr'llt' tr't otrlr't', (lrr'ltl ',ttttltt".) lo l;rr';'r.' r't'e l-to-t'ccl rlccks (cttcltlsttrc
ll
DATA-COLLECTION EQU
268
Box9.2
I PM
ENT
AUDIO-TAPE RECORDERS
9t/.
2t/.
Standing 4 looking bricks, holding wire / / walks 7/8 twirling / / looking bricks
^tt /
L
/:
3'/:
l0lll l/
7224
twirling I I // walks l0/l I to 2 I I bangswall
//
516
II
walks 7 picks brick / / runs screen 15, puts brick in mouth and bangs on screen
63Z',/
// rubbing
screen
24
4
3'/.
21/.
5'/:
4'h
2
3
0
l/ throws brick at / / turns, runs 8, climbs
3'/,
8
4'/:
chair I I
'
524
back of chair, hand in mouth / / looks door / / gets olf chair looking l2 / /
turns. walks l l lo 9 lo,5.
l0
2'/,
li,,,
tdB).
38
bitingjumperwhilewalkingto6to 7//throws hrick to l(r// twirls//u,rrlks
chair looking over side at floor / / looks window / / looks ceiling. leaning over
//
'
'
window holding on to chair / / turns to 0's signal, reaches lbr 0's brick / / sits
(e.g.
3'/.
13
be
stands arm of chair holding door frame / / jumps on seat. turns / / bangs
of the tape (see below). Additional written recorcls of the recording should
also
be
looks at brick / / gets off chair walks 7 I I picks up brick throws at screen / /
4t/.
on window / / turns throws brick I 5 and goes alter it / / picks up brick l5 throws
The firll-trttck recordings are probably of the highest quality; but the half-track
nltlclels illlow yot-t to turn the tape over and record on the second side.
There is some
Itrss trl't;trirlity sirtce only one half of the
'/,,-.inchtape is beilg recorded on each
side.
l(r
Alsrt. l\\'o 1rl'r11.1r't.rs. t.;rt'll t('\l)()n\tltlr. lirr (r1(. itrtittt;tl. t.lttt silttlllillC()lsly
fCCrlftl
lltt'tt .lrrt'rr;rlrr,n'.. ()n('()n t.,rr lr rr,r, l, (( ir.rrrr ,rrrrl l\l;rr krrrl.slr. l()(rl). l,ilt11.-11.,..;,
It't ol1lt't',,rllott lltr'l('( (rtrlttr1,,,l l\\rr,.utrrtll,ur,.,rtr,. lt,tt l\,, (rtt (.,t( lt.,trlr.
ll
270
AUDIO-TAPE RECORDERS
DATA-COLLECTTON EQUTPMENT
271
For many years ethologists used reel-to-reel recorders exclusively since they
generally made higher-quality recordings than cassette recorders, although suitable recordings could be made with the best cassette models (Bradley, l97l).
Now, cassette recorders are gaining increasing use because their capability for
making high-quality recordings is coupled with their compact size. The two
portable reel-to-reel recorders most often used by ethologists for recording
animal sounds (including lootdrumming by kangaroo rats; Randall, 1994) are the
Uher (Figure 9.11) and Nagra (Figure 9.18), although other high-quality
recorders are also used. Sony, Marantz and Uher all make high-quality cassette
recorders.
Some of the reel-to-reel and cassette recorders being used for recording animal
sounds are:
'
Reel-to-reel:
'
Cassette:
WM-D6C (Rothstein
er
a/., 1988)
The above list is by no means exhaustive as to the makes or models of recorders that
are suitable for recording animal sounds. You should check the literature and
consult other ethologists who have made recordings of the same, or similar, sounds
and species you will be recording. Also consult with reliable suppliers of animal
sound recording equipment, such as Saul Minneroff Electronics, [nc. (574
Meacham Ave. Elmont, NY 11003).
Audio tapeshave three important characteristics: l. thit'kness;2. hut'king; and
s
ignal- t o-no
is e
3.
rat io.
Tapes are generally available in three thicknesses: 0.5, 1.0. and 1.5 mm. Traclc-
olfs are involved when you choose the thickness of tape lor your rccorrlings. Thc
thinner the tape, the more stretching that may occur, the nrore tapc you will gct pcr'
reel, and the more chance for print-through, i.e., the tendcncy lirr a rccortlctl sigrrirl
to magnetize the adjacent wound tape (Braclloy 1977). n 1.0 rnrn tu1'rc is rrsrrirlly rr
reasonable com promise.
Backings are gcrtcritlly citlrcr llrc rrcwcr polycslcr plrrslic (Mylrrr )ot tlrr'oltlt't t'r'l
Ittlosc ltcclltlc. Illlycstcr pllrstic is ptcli'r rt'tl, stttt'r' r't'llrtl.)\(' ;l(('l;tlt' lt'ttrls
wt'lrkr'r rrnrl isnrorl'g'v11rnt'losltt'lt'ltttrl'.\\';rl)ull'rrtttl rrttnklttrl,
lo
lrt'
t':rrryirrg
r.lrse.
DATA-COLLECTION EQU
I PM
ENT
AUDIO-TAPE RECORDERS
must match the recorder and the output should be approximately 57 to -53 dB
(Bradley, 1977).
tions are in the frequency range of 2-8 kHz, with wavelengths of 0.03 m to 0.15 m.
Therefore, a parabolic reflector with a width of 0.46 m is sufficient. However, coyote
vocalizations are often around 500 Hz, with a wavelength of 0.61 m; therefore the
parabolic reflector should be at least 0.61 m in diameter in order to make highquality recordings. Parabolic reflectors are more effective than shotgun microphones
when recording over distances that exceed l0-25 m. Several parabolic microphones
are available, such as PBR-330 (Saul
see address
above)
Minnerof Electronics. Shure). Once again check the literature (e.g. the
relerences
Acoustic biotelemetry has been used to transmit animal sounds lrom animals
equipped with microphone/transmitters to receivers and recorders a short distance
away(e.g.Gaultier,1980;MontgomeryandSunquist,l9T4).
AlkonetaL (1989)devel-
oped and tested an acoustic biotelemetry system which transmitted usable sounds
from Indian crested porcupines (Husrix indit'u) for a distance up to I km. They tested
Fig.
Low-noise tapes are superior to normal tapes in their ability to itttpt'ovc lltc
signal-to-noise ratio. Some recorders have a separate scttirtg lirr low-ttoisc (rtpcs.
Mic.ntplrunc.r (mikes) come in two basic clcsigtts: rlylrttttic (tttovittg-coil) or t'ott
denser. Thc coldenscr niikc nuty lrc sttl-rct'irlt'. htrt it is Ilt()lc ('()lllplit'ltlt'tl ;ttttl ,,llt'tt
I.c1.xtit.'
the ability
l2"l'(sr)of thebehaviors
llrrnr l lrc rccortlirtgs and were 93(Yocorre"ct lor recordings of leeding and walking.
rnovirtg.thrcathufli).Overall,theycorrectlyidentified82t
().e.
I l'!:t\
,'r rrrlrrlrrltttl'
or'
AUDIO-TAPE RECORDERS
lerent components. For example, Emlen (1912) modified the recorded songs of
indigo bultings (Passerinu cyanea) and through playback dernonstrated that: l.
species recognition is coded in the note structure, inter-note interval, and note
length; 2. individual recognition is coded in the details of note structure; and 3.
motivation cues are reflected in song length and singing rate' I--lsing a unique
and stored in a computer where it can be stored, modified and manipulated and
then converted back to an analog signal (normal sound) for playback. All of the
newer sound analysis software programs have these capabilities (see section 9.10.3).
The audio-tape recorders discussed above (section 9.2.2) are also suitable for
playback of most animal vocalizations and mechanical sounds. Some of the reel-toreel and cassette recorders being used by ethologists to playback animal sounds are:
'
approach, Simmons (1971) picked up bat cries in two condenser microphones and
played them back to the bat with diflerent delay times, simulating'phantom targets'
at different distances.
playback can also be used to reveal the significance of interspecific sounds. For
example, Cade (lg7 5) showed that female parasitoid flies (Euphcrsiopteryr ochracea)
containilg living larvae were attracted to dead crickets attached to speakers,
through which cricket songs were played.
The ellects of natural (or synthesized) abiotic environmental sounds also can
also be studied by playilg them to animals. For example, Larkin (1917) showed that
tape recordings of thunder" bird calls, and artificial sounds played to migrating
birds through a loudspeaker system slaved to a tracking radar often caused the birds
to turn away from the sound. Heppner (1965) found that high-intensity noise had
no effect on the ability of captive robins (Turdus migratorius) to find earthworms,
llrther supporting the hypothesis that the robins were primarily using visual cues'
Several types of equipment and method can be used in playback studies. Several
older techniques can now be replaced by computer technology.An example of older
technology (that rnay still be suitable for some research) is the puttarn pluybuck I'htrl
was desigled to synthesize human speech for research on the recognitiorl tll'cottsttnants (Denes and Pinson.lgl3).It is essentially the opposite o1'a sottncl spcctl'ograph. A souncl spectrogram pattern is drawn on a piece of paper that is tltcrt t'tttt
through the Pattern Playback, which converts the images drawtr ott tltc l'lltPcl 111111
sound played through a loudspeaker. The Petttern Playback ltits bcctt ttsctl lo scFl'cgate the relative impgrtance ol- cclr-t-tp()ncnls ol'srltttttl itt lt'ltttstltiltirrg rrtlolrrlrtliotl
('()ll\tllll
Likewise, Etllcn (1972)' in his sttrtly ol'irttligo btttttittp s()lll,. tlst'tl lltt'litttt'
tccSrritltrc rll'crrlliryr irrrtl slllicirrl, :rrrtli,, lltpt' itt rrltlr.'t lr) l(':ll lilll|1' 1ltt' ,'ltlt'l ol
lltc itttlil,,p lrttttlitrl,'s rt6lt.s li,r pl:rv'lrlrt'k Sortttrl t,ll;ltltll,r llt;lt'(;lll llott lrt'tltl',1,,t't'
i.g
Reel-to-reel:
'
Cassette:
Like the list of recorders given earlier, this list is not exhaustive as to the makes or
models of recorders that are suitable for playback of animal sounds. You should
check the literature and consult other ethologists who have conducted playback
of
the same, or similar, sounds to those you will be broadcasting. Once again you
should consult with reliable suppliers of playback equipment, such as Saul
Minneroff Electronics, Inc.
bccn uscrl in rcscarch on bats (Fenton, 1970; Kunzand Brock, 1975) and insects
Scc Sirlcs antl Pye (19741ftir a review
(Klcirr. l()55).
width. Another that uses a crystal microphone adjusted for maximum sensitivity at
40kHzis manufactured by Alton Electronics Co., Gainesville, Florida. Paige et al'
(1985) provide a schematic diagram for constructing an inexpensive, hand-held
(Figure 9.208). This provides only a relative measurements and says nothing about
ultrasonic detector.
versus frequency is the section display (Figure 9.20C). This display samples the
9.IO ANALYSIS OF
ANIMAL SOUNDS
available
Several types of sound spectrographs and computer/software systems are
below.
described
briefly
are
tools
for the analysis of animal sounds. Some of these
e.lo.l EquiPment
e.to.ta Kay Sona-GraPh Model7029A
for conThe Kay Sona-Graph Model 1029|(Figure 9.19A) is an electronic device
an
from
input
sound
records
It
display.
visual
a
to
verting tape recorded sound
reproduced
is
then
sound
recorded
audio-tape recorder onto a metallic drum. The
burns a
by a stylus which scans the various frequencies across time and electrically
on the vertical axis
sheet of paper to produce a 'picture'of the sound with frequency
of representing frequency on a
on a linear scale, although
reproduced
is usually
it
Marshall (1917) argued for use of the log scale. The frequency range and duration
spectrogram produced depends on the speed at which you set the
of the sound
a sound
metallic recording drum to spin while recording from the tape' For example'
of
duration
have
a
will
axis
vertical
on
the
spectrogram which displays 20-2000 Hz
several
produce
It
will
9.6 s, and an 80-8000 Hz display will have a duration of 2.4 s.
mechanitypes of display, all of which are useful in the analysis of vocalizations or
Time
horizontal mark at each frequency, inverted from the normal sonagraph (frequency
increasing from the top to the bottom of the paper). Note that the section through
the bark shows a much wider range of frequencies than that through the howl.
Marler and Isaac (1960) describe a device for modifying the sound spectrograph to
make frequency-versus-amplitude sections serially through a syllable at intervals
(1
is represetrtetl hy
l4'5 crtt x
the blackness of the mark. Sound spectrograms are produced on paper
9'20'
Figure
in
32.4 cm.only a portion of which is shown
From the sonagrams above we can see that the coyote's howl bcgittl with thrcc
bcirtg clcirt'ly
bursts of energy over several frequencies, with none ol'the fi'eqtrencics
llcgrttt 111 11 1'r-'l:ldefined;these are essentially introductory'barks'. The howl portiotl
t'cttt;rirtctl lirt
tively low frequeng:y and then rose to approximzrtcly l.(r kllz. wltcl'c it
o11'sllrrrPly.
tltrrppctl
approximately two secgncls, at which point thc l'r'ctltrcrtcy
lrlltt'kttt'ss)' tt't'
Sincc thc dillcrcnce bctwccn intcrrsitics is one ol'rle1',11'1'(rt'l;rtivc
ci,l .sc lltc r,plrlrrrr t'rli:ylttt'lrl rlt'littt'lrlr';tlt';ts ()l ('(lllill llll('ll\llV lll \('\('ll l'l:l(lillt(tll\
detail song development in the song sparrow. These terms are similar to those used
by Rice and Thompson (1968) for indigo bunting vocalizations. Although not
totally satisfactory (Kroodsma, pers. commun.), these terms are applicable to vocalizations of numerous other species and are uselul in sonagram analysis. Temporal
patterns are extremely important in insect sounds. Bentley and Hoy (1972) developed the terminology in Figure 9.218 for their study of the genetic control of
cricket
(Te
The Kay Sona-Graph Model 1029Ahas been used for more than two decades in
ethology, but it is no longer being manufactured (although limited parts are available; Kay Elemetrics Corp.
ment is now being marketed (see below), used 7029A machines may still be
available, and they are satislactory for analyzing sounds in many studies (e.g. Miller
l994,Payne and Payne 1993).
e.tl.th Kay
The Kay DSP Sona-Graph (Figure 9.198) is a workstation that combines a real-time
souncl spectrograph, a computer-based data-acquisition system and a dual channel
I;li'l'rrnlrlyzcr'. Sounrl input is stored digitally for display and analysis, and it can be
tlowrrlo:rtlctl lo lrnollrcr corrrl'rtr(cr lirr storlgc tlr analysis by other computer prof,,liuns (st't'lrt'lorv). l( is l ln('nrr tlrivr'rr svst('nl llrlr( tlisplrrys rlscilltlgrtnrs (wave
lirttttr). ('(rnt(!ut l)o\\'('t sPt'r'lttun',,ur(1 .'1x'r'lt{r|riun\ rrrr lltc vitletl lll()l)il()t'llLtt citn
Fig.9.19B Kay Elemetrics DSP Sona-Graph Model 5500 interface with a microcomputer.
then be printed. It has a history of use in ethological studies (e.g. Brenowitz and Rose,
1994) and is available with several hardware and software options. The newer
CFL 4300
Model
lutlio-trtpc rccoltlcl
second
scglttcttt can be liozen on the display for measurements of frequency and duration.
I Ihitltritous is the trade narre for the Federal Scientific Spectrum Analyzer.It is a
11
Note
comPlex
Trill
Phrase
Phrase
'r_ I
x53-
-r+.
t
I
IJ
I
*{
281
Trill
Note
complex
Phrase
Phrase
'+
{ l'-Syllable
'n'*,fu Ini
tr!!'fufi'
l'* Syllable
1.0 s
kJc
ffi
Et-
F
.;.
E
iFr
F
*
r
Fig.
Pulse
9.21 Terminology used in a study of song development in the song sparrow (from
Kroodsma, l9T7): B. Diagram of structural components and terminology of
Telegryllu,s songs: upper line: T. ot'eonit'u.y; lower line:
t'ommodus.lnterchirp
interval : interval between onset of A-pulses. Intrachirp interval : interval
between onset of B-pulses. Intertrill interval-interval between onset of last Bpulse in one trill and the first pulse of the next trill (from Bentley and Hoy,1972).
frr-*
Fig.
'l
display of the same howl; C. Section display abovc thc norttutl tlrspliry. itrte i'
marked on the horizontal axis in or-rc-sccoutl itttcrvltls. lrrctlttcttcy is tttlttkctl ol'
the vertical irxis ip onc kllZ irrtcrvirls. (Scc tcrl lirt'irrt erlllirlt:tlttttt ol llrt'l!pt's,,1
One advantage of this system is the speed at which spectrograms can be produced. Hopkins et al. (1974) report that a 2.4-second-long spectrogram take
approxittrrrtcly 1.3 minutes to analyze on the Kay SonagraphT02gA and only 9.6
sccotttls ott tho I Ibiquitous. Another advantage is the relative ease with which
scctiott tlisplays c:rn bc proclucecl. Spectrograms produced by the Ubiquitous are
gt;rittir't tluttt lltosc ptrrtltrcctl hy tlre Sonirgnrph: however, this apparently does not
;rlli't'l utlcr
lJ.
('otttottt
()7.1
)
283
redraw the trace and compare lor its accuracy in representing the original spectro-
gram.
Desktop computers, commonly the IBM-PC (and compatibles) and the Apple
Macintosh, are frequently used with specially designed software to store and
Duration measurements are generally made from wide band pass spectrograms.
However, the mark intensity can affect the measurements if they are either under- or
over-burned.
Digitizing tape recordings of animal sounds is accomplished with an analog-todigital (A/D) converter, often a circuit board inserted into the computer where the
All the measurements described above (and many more) can be made more
quickly and accurately with a desktop computer and special software.
sound will be stored. For example, Drosophila courtship songs were digitized using
1994) and a
Canopus Sound Master (Tomaru and Oguma, 1994), and Gerhardt et al. (1994)
used a Soundfx interface board to digitize tree frog calls.
of recorded sounds
can
also be used to compare components of the sounds between and within individual
animals. Hall-Craggs (1979) provides several useful suggestions for basic sound
spectrogram analysis, and Thompson (1979) offers suggestions for preparing sound
spectrograms for publication. The techniques described below involve using hand-
operated mechanical devices (e.g. rulers, calipers, computer stylus) and human
judgement. Although time consuming and generally less accurate than computer
analysis, they may be suitable for some studies.
Frequencies are measured from either a narrow band.filter display on a normal
spectrogram or from a section display. Transparent overlay grids are useful in the
of sound spectrograms
of microcomput-
tively. The operator depresses a button at predetermined points along tltc tt'ltcc, ittttl
the X, Y coordinates are transmitted to the compute r lilr storugc ittttl pt'itllctl rtttl otl
using hardware such as the Unisonic (for IBM-PC and compatibiles), MacRecorder
digitizer, or various analog-to-digital interface boards (see section 9.10.1d); the
maximum length of sound that can be digitized and stored at one time is limited to
the computer's available random access memory (RAM). Once the sound is digitally stored, the soltware can quickly produce spectrographs of frequency, time and
intensity, and oscillographs of time, amplitude and frequency. These spectrographs
and oscillographs can then be printed out or analyzed further. Some software can
make matches between sound segments (e.g. MATCH; Payne and Payne, 1993) and
produce three-dimensional visualizations of sound measurements.
Another important aspect of this bioacoustical software is the ability to manipulate sounds which have been digitized and stored in the microcomputer. Portions of
the sound can be deleted, duplicated, moved, reversed or frequency-altered at the
touch of a key. The modified sound can then be played directly to an animal or fed
back into a tape recorder with a built-in (or peripheral) digital-to-analog converter
(e.g.
Allan and Simmons, 1994; Randall, 1994). Sounds can be created from scratch
using these programs, or even more easily and inexpensively, using any of the large
number of music programs on the market.
Davis ( 1986) describes the Personal Acoustics Lab (PAL), which is a microcomputer based system lor digital signal acquisition, analysis and synthesis. Some of the
commercially available sound analysis soltware packages are listed below:
'
the teletype. Field (1976) usctl an ovcrlayirrg gritl to locitlc coot'tlitutlc s:tttlplt' poitlls
evcry 0.0-5 sccrlntl. Thc grcirlcr tlrc vlrt'ilrliott itt l'tetlttcttt'y ol lltt'sotttltl, lltt'tttolt'
ol'lcrt llrc r'orlrrlirurlt's slrorrltl llt'slrrrrlllt'rl I ltt't'.r.rttltnltlt'st'lr t'ltll lltt'tt lrt'ttst'rl l,r
Itlurcrr. NY l-1ti50
' i'lttt
,\1tt'r't
lt I
rtlt
DATA-COLLECTION EQUI
PM
PHOTOGRAPHY
ENT
GW Instruments
P.O. Box 2145
264 Msgr
record environmentalconditions, lens used, film type, shutter speed, lens opening
(/
stop), filters, and any exposure compensations made. This log may be kept as part
of
O'Brien HwY #8
The techniques of good photography are beyond the scope of this book; com-
Cambridge, MA 02141
plete and useful discussions can be found in Blaker (1976) and Anonymous (1970).
STGNAL (IBM-PC)
Engineering Design
e.ll.l
43 Newton St.
Belmont. MA 02178
SountlEdit v.2.0.3 (Apple Macintosh; can edit frequencies only from 0-11
The most useful still camera for the ethologist is the 35-mm single lens reflex (SLR)
camera. A distinct advantage of the SLR camera is that the image you see in the
viewfinder is the same (93-100'2, accuracy) as the image that is recorded on the film.
The SLR camera is also compact, lightweight and versatile. It accepts
film types
Berkeley, CA94704
SoundEdit Pro (APPle Macintosh)
(see
large variety
of
film. Ideally, an ethologist entering the field in an unfamiliar area should be prepared
with two camerasloadedwithdifferent types of filmdependingupon the proposed use
Still photography
CA 94103
other. Color prints can also be made from the slides, if necessary. It is helpful if both
so
There are a large number of makes and models of 35-mm SLR on the market
today, most of which have their own group of ardent supporters. Nikon and Leica
is very expensive.
PHOTOGRAPHY
research. Pictures shotrlcl
photos should depict the: l. study site; 2. animals studied; 3. cqtriprttctrt ittttl
methodolo gyl4.results of data analysis (tables and figures). ancl 5. yottr itttct'Pt'ctrthe
tion of the results (e.g. models; Chapter l8). As photcls arc takctt it log sltottltl
lrtkt'tt
wrts
thc
wlry
Plloto
kept of photo number, {ate. time. location. suhicct nr:tttcr.
(i.e. what yoll were trying trl tlcpict)irntl whirl itt pitt'licttlltl yott sllottlrl ttttlt'u'ltt'tl
lllilV
you sec t5c tprnsl-lltrcllcv tlr'pl'irrl. ln;rtltlitiott. lo itttPtovt'l'ttltttt'Pltolos, \'()ll
t Maximum
z Automatic
of
l)epllr-ol-licltl prcvicw
Ptr.'r it'rv
grcrrrrits y()u
286
PHOTOGRAPHY
frame
for a
gaskets that resist leakage to moderate depths underwater. A rating
camera
if
the
and
rain
heavy
in
depth of only 3 meters will be worthwhile
is dropped in a stream.
OM-3, Canon Fing fbcus, exposure and flash photography. However, the Olympus
therefore
l. and the pentax K- 1000, have mechanically controlled shutter speeds and
does
however
K-1000,
Pentax
The
rely on batteries only to run the exposure meter.
design
years
of
not accept a motor drive or data back. Electronic cameras, through
Their ability to
and testing, have reached a high level of reliability and performance.
auto-focus, and
self-adjust the exposure in difhcult and contrasty lighting conditions,
However, since
research.
in
tool
imprint data on a photo make them a very valuable
that
recommended
is
it
electronic (automatic) cameras rely on batteries to function,
batteries be replaced yearly and spare batteries be kept on hand.
All of these exposure metering systems will, under normal lighting conditions,
give
you the correct exposure. However, when selecting a camera for use or purchase
determine whether that camera has the system that best meets your needs.
Lenses play an
a lens varies optically and in durability. A very expensive camera will take poorquality photos if a poor-quality lens is used. The 'standard' Iens that is most often
supplied with a 35 mm camera is a 50 mm focal length lens. It is considered to have a
normal perspective (angle-of-view). Any lens that has a focal length longer than 50
mm is a'telephoto'lens, while a lens with a shorter focal length is a'wide angle'lens.
Wide angle lenses are used where a wider perspective is desired (e.g. habitat photos,
photos in tight quarters), and telephoto lens are used to magnify subjects that are
in
The majority of auto-focus cameras have the ability to self-focus accurately
available
focusing
manual
standard
near dark conditions; they will usually have the
choices liom fgll
also. Exposure metering systems in cameras give you a variety of
electronmanual exposures to fully automatic exposures controlled by the camera's
and
systems
metering
exposure
of
types
several
ics. The following list describes
Standard program - the camera sets both shutter speed and lens aperture
with a bias of hand-held shutter speed of l/125 s or above.
Z Wide program - the camera sets both shutter speed and lens aperture
with a bias of smaller aperture over shutter speed lor greater depth-ol'-
field.
Tele program
witlt
Aperature-priority
auto
second. Besides allowing you to take photos very rapidly, a motor drive allows you
Automatic film advances are necessary when cameras are left set up in the field
and are triggered by an animal's activity. For example, Savidge and Seibert (1988)
used an infrared device to trigger a camera that photographed predators when they
visited artifical nests.
Electronic.flashes are helpful when additional illumination is necessary and the
subject is within range of the flash output. For nocturnal animals, this may be the
only means to photograph them in their natural habitat; however, flashes are likely
to alter their behavior. Photographing small animals (e.g. field mice) by natural light
otiert procluccs unsatisfactory photos. The combination of a slower film for quality
rrnrl rt snritll apcrturc lor clepth-of-field lorces you to use a slow shutter speed and a
tripotl lirt'strppot'l. A llirsh will allow thc usc ol'a small aperture lorgreaterdepthol-licltl. lrctlt't tlclrril on low lilllrt srrlrjet'ts. rrtrtl tlrc rrbility to ll'cczc nrovcn-rcnt with a
Ittl'11r.',
slttttlct sPt't'tl.'l
tV
ts
lltt's;rntt'lllrrttl
lrs
llrt'(',lln)cl:t so lllrl il
i.J
oo
oo
-.1
?1?#g
i
EEi Ei EE1BE1E EE1FEi
?11z1it?i11*i
g
iI i;
EE
E
EEEEE
i I E+e Er I E
zt;iica+ +il
--
sI
EEE
rn
o
.l
EE
'
ISO
r-\t
\x 100
T:.-\ Pan
T-\IAX
400
of
Sharpness
enlargement
Very high
Very high
Very high
High
Extremely
Extremely
high
125
Very fine
High
Very
32
Degree
power
fine
P.-:-\ Pan
Resolving
Graininess
Very high
High
Medium
Very high
Moderate
Fine
Medium
Very high
Moderate
Very fine
400
Contrast
Coarse
Low
Very high
Low
Fine
High
Very high
Very high
3200
Medium
Medium
High
Low to Moderate
multi-
coarse
64
T-MAX
P3200
it will
fine
Medium
100
to high
Hi_eh
400
speed
rn
^.)
=,=liTEE,txlEi'gE66EEEIliil1tllatzitz
F:.:l
z
=
z
rn
z
-t
Daylight
ISO
Graininess
power
Sharpness
of
enlargementallowed Suggesteduses
25
Extremely
High
High
Slides2
Resolving
speed
Film
Kt-rdachrome
25
Type of picture
and degree
fine
High
64
Extremely
64
High
High
Slides2
It
High
so
it should be
fine
F..,:-ichrome
100
Extremely
100
Medium
Medium
Slides
Moderate
fine
! r::.-hrtrme 200
Extremely
200r
Medium
Medium
Slides
fine
I - :chr..nre -i0
Extremely
50
High
High
fine
Extremely
High
High
fine
l-..
;;:
ISO
be pushed to -100
1 _-:-:-=,.:.. ::-r:.;:n
Slides2
High
Slides2
High
tili g
additional process.
{Ei q 3q=
E g;rE
x; a1";
?
.
Ft
(D
*'= E
Z3Ei
i c-g g
f 3{
=
1q3
?'
a:
E ='4
e';as.*1
rESg
(J
e,J
(D
o-
::r-lidId
3
si
+fi:io
A;
:i q5;
=E
x=xYa;:l=.
=rD=x(v):fro
3?ii6=)6'=^
rDQ-O-O_-i^a:
E- &
aD!,i.aXA:-!
NJ
UJ
x 3P+E
L-H
-IJ()^;^L
{z9ItsE
= gE-=)
=
xx=ocb_]J
3 #
,v 3
:-+(,
qiFi*
1;= t.a
i?
EsZlirsErir
ii i;it8-ii'ei=q
iii7 5a [=E ;iig ei
11 iliEi Ell ig
i6EEg ;tg sg
*iei:+Es
ia;x }f ;iii:
ie {;Ef
tsi=35:;
is ril;i Egf Ei
o(D
="
=i
of field
Moderate
E;
[=sg liEgE lisF i =t
s
7 tiz,Z|:i : i 1 ! aii 9 i I r =: r i. I i Ei l I
11 i e?iii5g
ii*iig sEcr:
x is #: + iia sE
r J ''. i.;;I
). a a = j o
=
'==-z jE a=''' 7 i t':; oe, i V {= af -#iE fi:
i:fII =
.iE i-!r6I;a;i=1 riE+ii!3;i
i:
i
13
2i5
i
6t
rE
ZlfrE 1(??ti+:
:;?
I 7i:= EE
= i = r sElEi+ryE i1fli;
e1
iaE
=:? +;FE;F,aqsEB?
=fi?iE5ie= E*
gEg5 ,..?iE:Ii=B
;i'gET;i
itr i_._E[;,*g: iEZ i-1ZLE??= +;
?=i
lr
V-L-J
cv--;\:f:.O-O
aD--=
il
\3
o
F,t
(D
x
a
F-t
CD
NJ
il
?
a
vAAA
6-
6
x_M
)
5 0
a 3 5)-{
xFSd;
.LLlXcT
58
r.-B:H
x==? Z
+
i-P56S.
3i.g
d, x f B'
=-rdJ='.D
oj
3aI H
o
:E
+2.
*'
?
= ?
=3
-
B-$
il
9.5-
,, +
:7
PHOTOGRAPHY
DATA-COLLECTION EQUIPMENT
Static electricity caused by rewinding film too rapidly in cold weather will cause
Table 9.lO Reciprocity ancl rec'ontmenclecl f stop correc'tirttts.for 35 rum color Jilms
streaks or dots on the film. Also, X-ray inspection units in airports, despite their
claims, may damage film whether it is new or exposed. X-ray damage is cumulative
Film type
1s
l0s
Kodachrome 25
*% stop
*2
Kodachrome 64
* % stop
* 1 stop
* % stop
N/A
Ektachrome 400
*% stop
* lrl
Fujichrome 50
No change
No change
No chage
*% stop
*% stop
viewing. A cataloging system will organize your photos and may be based on: l.
separate research projects; 2. behavior types; 3. species; or 4. field seasons.
* 1 stop
Computer programs are available that will catalog by numbers and captions, search
fbr specific slides, and print out labels lor slides. Ethologists must develop a system
Ektachrome 100
Ektachrome 200
Fujichrome
100
Fujichrome 400
and may not show up until after additional exposure. Check film through by hand
stops
Prints, negatives and slides should be kept in a cool, dry area where they will be
sale from damage, but where they can be easily retrieved. Store negatives and slides
1rl stops
in archival. plastic pages which can be put into three-ring binders or stored in a file
cabinet. This will protect your original photos and provide for easy access and
N/A
stops
below:
ttl:
7'5
l;
I?
60 Ir
50 l"
tttottllts
Kccp lilrrr lrwlry l'nlnt irrtlrrstri;rl llrtst's. nt()l()t t'rlt;tttsl.;tttrl tltl,rlr ol lllotlrlr;rllr
lirr nt;rlrlt.lrl,rlt', solrt'ttlr, t lt'ltll('l\. ilttrl ttttltlt'tt ()l llllll'll" l)l('\('lll'tlt\t'''
which they find most useful. In addition, attempt to reduce possible losses or
damage in the mail by sending photos properly packaged in separate packages: if
possible. send duplicates instead of original slides and prints instead of negatives.
Another storage medium is provided by digital photograph'!-. As examples,
Kodak's models DCS 420 and DCS 460 (high resolution) combine digital imaging
with a Nikon N90 SLR camera body. They are available in monochrome, color and
infrared models which store the images on removable 170 MB RAM cards. One
card will store from 30 high-resolution images (6 million pixels; DCS 460) to 100
images (DCS 420): by changing storage cards, 300 images can be captured on a
single I hour battery charge. Using appropriate interfaces, the images can be downloaded to Apple Macintosh il, Powerbook. Quadra and IBM-PC (and compatibles) computers. They can then be used in computer displays, made into prints or
slides, or stored in portfolio CDs. Additional information can be obtained frorn:
Digital & Applied Imaging, L&MS. MC 00532, Eastman Kodak Co., PO Box
92894, Rochester,
NY
14692-9939.
llult
rrntl
llult
PHOTOGRAPHY
Table
9.ll
Super 8 mm
l6 mm
l.
2. Lighter equiPment
2.
to same
3.
29s
size
film has essentially disapbasic choices are 16 mm and Super 8 mm; standard 8-mm
9' 11; however, it is basiTable
in
listed
are
each
of
peared. The relative advantages
e.22).
and
In selecting a camera you will be confronted with a trade-off between cost
etc')'
durability'
certain features (e.g. lenses, built-in exposure meter, filming speeds,
of
ment. If
necessary to
mm (wide-angle), 26mm(standard) ,andJ5 mm (telephoto). It may be
Kloot 1964) or 1000 mm'
use a telephoto lens as large as 600 mm (Dan and van der
(26
mm to 75 or 100 mm) is
zoom
a
If the camera will handle only one lens, then
tubes are
very useful. If you are working with insects, a close-up lens and extension
g.fl'l
'
often desirable. Select high-quality lenses with large apertures approachin
thc
confuse
as
to
great
so
is
movie-making
for
available
of
The diversity
neophyte. Selection
filnts
(amount of light necessary for proper exposure) and picture cluality' Illirck-antlwhile color lilltt
white film is cheaper to purchase but more expensive ttl proccss.
bttl ol'tctt
provides an additional dimension which is not only csthctictlly Plcirsittg
lilrrrs tlrrrl
Kotl;tk
ol'
rr
lisl
provitlcs
9.12
necessary in some ethological studics. Tahlc
t'rrtt lrt'
lilttts
slrr't'irtlizctl
nr()t't.
are uselirl lirr lilnting llinrll bclrirvior'. Atltlrtiorrrrl.
(ittttlr"
trtl:
lllttlt't
lirtrrrrl irr Ii.irstrrr,rr K,tlitk's lttr[lit'lrtigtt /( i I , hrtrhtl, 1t1,,'1,11',l.rtltlttt
r''ttl lrt'tl"t'tl ltl "'lt
Its u't'llits llolll olltt't ttt;tttttl;tr'ltll('l\ l(rl ('\:ltttl,11" tttlt;ttt'rlltltrr
junction with infrared lighting (e.g photofloods and infrared filters) to obtain
motion pictures under nocturnal conditions. (Delgado and Delgado 1964).
The.filnring speetlyou choose will depend on the purpose of the filming. Normal
projection speeds for Super 8 mm and l6 mm are l8 and 24 frames/second, respectively. The ellect of accelerated motion is produced by filming a slower speeds (e.g.
2 l0 frames/second), and slow motion is produced with greater filming speeds (e.g.
32-64 frames/second). If you are interested in frame-by-frame analysis (see below)
then the faster you film. the smaller the change in the animal's position from frame
to frame. Faster filming speeds also allow for unsteadiness by the cameraman; but it
means changing film more olten and increased costs in purchasing and processing
the larger amount of film.
Various filming speeds and the authors'rationale for their use can be found in
of frames per second. 2-7 or 48 (EiblEibesfeldt, 1972), l6 (Clayton, 1976. Havkin and Fentress, 1985), l8 (Fleishman,
1988), 22 (Diakow, 1975), 24 (Kruijt, 1964; Dane and Van der Kloot" 196{), 32
(Duncan ancl Wood-Gush, 1gl2),64 (Bekoff, 1917a),128 (Hildebrand, 1965), and
800 ancl 1000 (Grobecker and Pietsch . 1979) have all been used. Time-lapse photog-
PHOTOGRAPHY
Speed
(lSO)
Film
16 mm/
Super
Characteristics
Suggested uses
General outdoor
Black-and-rt:hite
Plus-X
6/8
2.5.
Fig.
of the bower
to a reflector. When the beam is interrupted, a super-8 motion-picture camera
exposes one lranre every two seconds. Birds were also observed from blinds. The
system enabled the researcher to monitor the behavior and identity of bower
owners and visitors at 33 bowers for the -50 day mating season. The researchers
are now using a more sophisticated system based on videocameras. From Borgia
( 1986). Copyright O 1986 by Scientific American, Inc. All rights reserved.
gradation
200
l618
Excellent tonal
gradation
9.23 The monitoring system used in a study of the satin bowerbird. An inlrared
beam, invisible to the bowerbird, is projected through the avenue
photography
Tri-X
3 METERS
Under adverse
lighting conditions
Color
Kodachrome
40
Ceneral outdoor
photography
40
[]ktachrome
Higher speed
Adverse lighting
General outdoor
160
l6
E,ktachrome
1239
Ektachrome
400
High speed
photography
Adverse lighting
high speed
and high-speed
daylight
photography
cartridge. Borgia ( 1986) used an infrared system to trigger a super 8 motion picturc
camera (Figure 9.23) in his study of bowerbird behavior'
Both Super 8 mm and l6 mm films and cameras are available tbr simultitneotts
recording on a sound truc'k. The sound reproduction is generally not of high quality.
but can be useful for recording the observer's commentary durillg lilnling. (iootlquality sound recordings are best made with l6 mm cameras (e.9.. Bolcx Il-16'
Figure 9.22) that will synchronize with a high-quality tape recordcr. sttclt rts tltc
Nagra IV-L.
(Milinski,
onto the underside of a glass table and copied the males'movements onto tracing
paper;from these tracings they measured each r.nale's maximum angular lag and top
speed during their courtship dance. Analyses are generally conducted with either
film editors that have a built-in projection screen (Hutt and Hutt, 1914). an optical
data analyzer (e.g. LW International; Milinski, 1984;Havkin and Fentress, 1985), or
an analyzer-projector (e.g. Lafayette Analyzer; Lafayette Instrument Co.,
Lafayette, Indiana). The latter projects the film onto a large screen (Dane and Van
cler
Kloot.
it should
a time base
lor
A rligitizing tablet can be used to record directly into a computer, data on the
e.t
Ethologists take motittn pictLrrcs lor bitsicrrllV two l)ttl'l)()ses: l. lo ltltvt'rt vtstt;tl
recrtrcl o1'thc hclrirvior lirr illrrslt'trlivc l)lll'l)()ses (ptt'sr'ttltlti()lls;tttrl pttlrlit';tllolls, t'1'
.1.M. l)lryis lr)75): lrrrtl/pr
lrt'ltrtt'tot'.
r>r part of its body. For example, Fleishman ( 1988) digitizerl llre ltc;rtl rrrrtl tlcwlrrl'r 1'rositiort ol-tlispllying /troli,t' lizards lrom Super-8 movie
llttttt's. ( l ltt'sr'siun('l('('llrritlrrt's rrrr'rlt'st'tilretl lirr vitlcotll-lcs in ir lirtcr section.)
It;ttttt'l11'lt;ttttt'lrtt;tlYstslt;tslrr','rtil\('(ll()nt('itsUt('lltt'tttovetttcrtlsrll'lltcl0ngttc
299
of
a cathode-ray-tube gen-
erator which projects an ordered array of rows and columns of spots of light
through the film frame, where the intensity of the light transmitted is measured by a
photocell as one of seven different levels of gray. This information is then transmitted to a digital computer. The computer can be programmed to control the location
of the array of spots of light, their density in the array, and the area covered. The
system has both high speed and high resolution. This system, or a similar one, may
is
In summary, I have not mentioned the vast array of additional equipment (e.g.
light meters, fllters, tripods) that may be necessary for proper filming. These items
should be discussed with your local camera dealer. Likewise, the various techniques
which will improve your motion pictures and their analysis can best be gathered
through discussions, experience and literature (Dewsbury, 1975; Matzkin, 1975:
Wildi,
A nas p la r y r hy nc' h o s)
camera's line of sight are relatively easy to lneasllre; but the perspective tlf depth is
lost in measurements parallel to the line of sight. Dane and Van cler Kloot list tlthcr'
complications and restrictions which are common to sin'rilar types ttl' {rlni atlalvsis:
(l) Birds are olten passing in and out of the field of'vicw ol'thc cttrltcril.
When the final analysis is undertaken, there is always thc cltittlcc lltrtl lttt
action given by a bir<1 outside of' the field is aflecting thosc t'ccol'tlctl ott
film. This problem was minimized by analyzing tliscrctc gnrtrps. ( 2 )
Computing the distance betwecn hiruls. itntl llttts lltc I'cl:rtivc positiott rrl
each incliviclgal llock. is diliicLrlt wltctt ttsittg lt lclcpltoto letls. 1\lWlrt'rr
tcsting lirr u rclirtiorrslrip hctwcctt lltc ttcliotts o['lu'o lrittls. lltt'tt'ts
llr;rt orrr'rs nol rlistittl'stlsllttl1'lltt'1r;ttt tt'ltt, lt ts
:rlwlrVs llrc
llpssilrilrlv
(or films) can be used to simply gain experience with an animal's behavior, even
before reconnaissance observations are made on live animals. By viewing the same
footage several times you learn to anticipate behaviors; you see subtleties in behav-
(Walbott.
1982; Table 9.
to movie film
tcrn.r stonrgc, but films can also deteriorate. When you want to record behavior to be
it
ntnr
A
I
CLUSTER
START
rP'l /7
/-:ey
/7
/P.
/-a9)
END
/r=>
//;:---:*
'r'
/-,3
/'';,-V
/'::^
/=,2)\
r
,'P\
/':=\
''l
/'7
P\
"l /
/-->
/'.9\
/---;=-->*
,-J
Ia
a
/ r-'TP
FLICK CLUSTER
/''+Pl
/P\
/
---->/
/ ,''l_--
rpa
/'-:a>J
l' '
J:-
/'',-'"\
aV "l ,
'--,,1
7.5 cm.
Fig.9.254 Pattern of boa tongue movements in lateral view. Tracings of each frame in
motion pictures of two complete flick clusters are illustrated. Successive pictures
are about 42 ms apart in time. The ends of the protrusion phase (P), the
oscillation phase (O), and the retraction phase (R) are indicated by vertical lines.
The figures should be studied from left to right in each line. (from Ulinski, 1972).
The lightweight, compact, battery-powered VHS-C and 8 mm cassette palnrcorders (Figure 9.27) make videotaping in the field relatively easy. Motor drivcrr
I:ig 9.25B Thc ntovements ol the foot of the bivalve mollusc, Cartliunt e(hinutum,during a
singlc lcap. shown with relerence to the shell as a fixed object. The positions were
titkctt ll'om motion picture of the movcment, the numbers indicating the number
ol' t hc ll'itme corresponding to each position ( I 6 frames/second). Active (frames
l2 lo 2.j)rttttl rccovery (lrames 23 to 50) are shown separately (from Ansell,196l\.
zoom lenses allow the researcher to obtain a broad or locused vicw ol' bclurvior'.
Built-in microphones record environmental sounds (those from thc uninrirls lrc
svslcttt spccilically clcsigned lbr field use. It is an integrated, all weather, compact,
tertl-litttc v'itlco tttortitot', r'cnrotc camera (infrared and visible light sensitive) and
generally not of sufficient quality for analysis) and also allow thc rcsclrrcltct' lo rtt:rke
rr't'ortlirr;:systerrr. llirttcricswillpowertheexternalcamerasystemlorupto20hours
ir
rc rclrrt ive lv
resistant to moisture and light impact. tlicy urc rtot rlcsignctl lirr llrc lt:rtslt t'orttli
tionstowhich manyfielcl cthologists nriglrI cxposc lltcrn. As witlt still('iun('r'irs. v()u
shoulcl chcck thc clr;l:rhililics lirr l)11)l)e r rrst' ltttl tr'sisllur('(' lo ;rlrrrst' lirr ;rttY t:rtrt
cot'tlct' V()u ittt' t'ottsitlt'titt1' ttslt1, l ltt' liit'ltlt lun rs irrr ti rrrrrr t'l,rr..'rl t rrt rrrl vrtlt'rr
virlt'ot:tpt'rl ll ll-i lr
27
I
18
Table 9.13. Relative advantages and disadvantages of videotape and ntovie .film
ethological studies
for
Movie Film
Videotape
17
16
Advantages
l.
Immediate playback
1. Better quality
2.
Reusable
4. Easily duplicated
Disadvantages
l.
I
1
This composite
Fis.9.26 The duckling's drinking response illustrating the bill-lift element.
line drawing is based on frames liom a motion picture lilm (16 frames/second).
The sequence ol numbers corresponds to the frame numbers beginning as the
bill leaves the water (from Clayton, 1976)'
videotrials in their study of mating behavior in water striders; they point out that
taping 'allows the detection and accurate quantification of short-lived behaviour
patterns and continuous monitoring of behaviour of long durations'(p.895)' Data
from videotapes can be recorded on check sheets or input directly into a computer
of a
Videologger,
the second
its itrtcrrrlrl
segment being analyzed. The microcomputer uses thc sigtritls to t'csct
store in rnem6ry tlrc tlnscl tirnc ittttl tlttl'ltliott ol'kcyllt'csscs lot ltttv
clock ancl
t'ltrt lrt'
l.
2. Film
l.
3. Film relatively
expensive
4. Duplicating more
expensive
;rrc available gratis from the authors. The Behavior Chronicles software (see section
(). 10.
lcl) includes a videotape analysis mode in which the computer screen clock is
svrrchronized with the VCR and an icon on the computer screen allows the
r('scarcher to control the VCR with the computer's mouse.
Scvcral programs designed for recording data from videotapes are available comi:rlly. CAME,RA is a system which includes software and a keyboard which the
r('scrrchcr intcrlaces with an IBM-PC; each button on the keyboard generates a
',r,untl with rr unicluc pitch providing the researcher with immediate auditory feedrrrr're
lr;rt'k.
l'ro(iAMMn. l'.(). Ilox 841, 9700 AV Groningen, The Netherlands. PRO( ()l{l)l:lt is:rnollrcrptl)gratrlirrrecorclingbehavioraldatafromvideotape;itwas
r,'r'rr'\r't'tl lrv lrrpp rrrrtl Wrlrlcn ( lt)t).1)irrtcl is:rvailable lrom Jon Tapp and Associates
,
/,r hrrr
l.rrve
t'grtc.
'l'N
l,'. lrtr,r1111'1' lrllcr s lr Vitlt',r'l;ryrt' Atutlvsis Svsl('nt lirt' ttsc lvitlr'l'lrc Ohscrvt:r 3.0 stlli\\,r!(' rl t',;tr;ttl:tltlt'ttt Ilttr'r'rltllt'tt'ttl rrl)ll()ll l,lt, kltl't's
Angle
of
attack
of the
revealed subtle nosing and rooting movements as easily seen vibrations
(1994)
to
Katzir
and
Weihs
snout. Frame-by-frame analysis of videotape allowed
(Figure
demonstrate the hydrodynamic function of bill sweeping in the spoonbill
9.28).
samples of
Time-lapse vicleotaping is often useful to obtain instantaneous/scan
time-lapse
(1987)
used
Grant
over long periods of time. For example,
behavior
a beagle bitch
video-recording to provide a 'continuous' record of the behavior of
has also been used
and her pups over a three-week period. Time-lapse vicleotaping
red jr-rnglein studies of the behavior of calves (Dellmeier et crl..l985), and Burmese
t)('ul)lrcntl cclLtiptnent (a screen digitizer) which records (or allows the user to
r,'t ortl) llrc positiort ol an animal on the video monitor screen and translers that
,l11'rlrzr'tl posilion to a computer. For example, Richardson (1994) recorded the
()l' rnir)nows ll'tltn a videotape and then translerred that data to a computer
rrlrrt lr u;rs rrsctl to cirlculatc all inter-fish distances. Watt and Young (1994) videolr rt ,111,)n
t.rpt'rl tlrrirlrrrirr (wirlcrllcas) in a water tank illuminated with polarized light using a
ilt'til.
tlr'sr't
I ltr' r t,lr',r
tllt'tl llr'lrlrr
STOPWATC H ES
into the computer; these include the Fotoman Digital Camera with IBM-PC and
directions. One camera needed its horizontal and vertical scan directions
reversed for both cameras to produce pictures the same way round and
the same way up. A single video-recorder (National NV8030) was used
to store both images, which were electronically multiplexed on recording
and re-separated on playback. The two images were displayed as red and
green pictures on an RGB monitor, and created an anaglyphic stereo
display when viewed through red/green glasses. When viewed directly,
each animal was represented by a pair of dots, one red and one green.
whose distance apart (disparity) increased steadily if the animal swam
upwards in the tank. Digitizing the position of both red and green dots
enabled us to compute x, y and z coordinates for the animal.
543 J
you
Software used in conjunction with the digitizer cursor or stylus often allows
polar
coordinates;
or
to: l. calibrate your own coordinate system or select Cartesian
infrared (700 to 1000 mm), which was used to observe the nocturnalcourtship of an
irrctiid moth and nocturnal predatory behavior of the Florida mouse (Peromyscus
flrtridunus). Grant (1987) used a low light/infrared sensitive camera (Sanyo) and
and2. choose whether to digitize single points, continuous data stream, or user-
9.I] STOPWATCHES
Slrrl.rwtrtches (Figure 9.29) are a time-honored piece
of equipment in ethological
lor
srritlies. which are still useful today (e.g. Randall. 1994; Yoerg. 1994\. They are used
gait analysis (see Chapter 10), but one specifically designed for that purpose is avail-
43228. Some
of
able
lll'c rl)()l'c
a wand or light pen to record automatically this position in thc cotD;'rttlct'.
(i.c.
lhc
cttlit'c
ll'iunc
Picltttc) t':ttt
accurate and much less expensive. An cntirc singlc
l,('VlSl()NPlrrs
l;r'lrttt,.' (
rrir
ny cthologists' pockets.
rrlt'lrcs in size. but they are generallylighter,less expensive andeasierto use. However,
',r
lro r rg,lr
l'lt'r'trrrrtic tligital stopwatches are easier to read, and many have several funcI r( )ns Ilr;rt lu'c rrscltrl to the ethologist. For example, the Heathkit stopwatch (Figure
')
rr
)())l)rovitlcs livc lirnctions. listecl in Table 9.14, plus two programmable functions
lrtr'lt nri1rll1 t)l()vc trsclirl lirr labrlratttry work.
lr,rls lot rlif il;pl stol',rv:rlchcs clul bc prurchirscrl
lirrn
('lrrlos. (':rlilirrrri:r). Wol:rclt rl ul. (197,5) descr-ibed an econ( )nl( itl nrr'lltorl lor t'onvt'rlntl' lul t'lt't'lrorrit' lr;rrrrllrr'lrl ctrlt'rrllrtor ittltl it tl igilirl stoprr,rlt lr rr rllt tttr't('nr('nlr rrr O l(lrr'r'onrl'.
f,rrrrt'',
l'lt't lt()nr('s.
Slrn
I(' I-O('A]'ION
Table 9. 14. Functions provided by Heathkit Model GB- l20l E digital stopwatch
Function
Illustration
Description
Duration of separate
*totalduration
0throughC
duration of session
Time from one event
to another; latencies; plus total
-->
--->
---> C
0nn
from 0 to C
time
At
Accumulated time
of
a partic-
ffi
A1
nn
AiA. AJAiA. *total
ular behavior;
plus total time of
A2
time
thorugh 1.,
-*totaltime
session
Latencies lor
events
from
*total
single starting
g.I4 METRONOMES
latencies
occurrences of a
behavior; plus total
A',
A.
#
o
*totalduration
At+ A.+ Ar
cluration of all
occLrrrences
'{)
I lr('
r,rrl'('\ rttttl
at the
0.5 to 20 seconds and includes a light-emitting diode providing a visual sigrlal
tnctrotlonrc
an
electrotric
(1970)
designed
set intervals (Figure 9.30). Wiens et ul.
which emits tone pulses through a small earphone at intervals which catt bc vrtrictl
lr')n
from I to 20 seconds. Their metronome was usecl by Dwyer (1975) in his sttrtly ol'
(
time budgets in gadwall ducks (Anus streperut). Reynierse ancl Ttrctts 197-l ) tlcscr ibc
lo olte Pel 10
pcr
scc()ll(l
livc
{hrnt
ol
a metronome which produces pulse rates
lrr,11''1 1n
seconds and can be built gsing thc circuit rliitgt'ltttt tltcy Ptor,ttle. M;rllitt rttttl
Batestln(1993)itlstrprtlvitlcltscltclttlrticlilr'illll('ll.()lt()llle.l..i1'111.,..()'}ll'tr,t.slrr,rr
scltctttltl it's litr t'ollsl l ttt't itl1' yrt11; orr tl t'h"t'l l ()lll(' lll('l l ( )ll()lll('
At
Duration of separate
Metronomes provirJe a time base for field observations. They allow observers to
enter a time point in their notes (e.g. every 10 seconds put a slash). time instantaneous/scan samples (Chapter 8), and provide an electronic signal (audio or visual)
duraat intervals (e.g. one seconcl) which can then be counted in order to determine
tions of behaviors.
An electronic metronome designecl and constructed by Jim Starkey and used in
our studies can be set to beep at I or l0 second intervals through a small earphone.
It is both small and lightweight, which makes it suitable for fieldwork. Lockard
(1g76)describe<1 a metronome which has a pulse rate continuously adjustable f rom
latencies
A+B+C
lrtrl\ ;ut'rt
rrr
lltc ittttttctliitlc study arca (e.g. Figure 11.6). Less accurate determinalrt'nrttle ()\'crlilrscgcogrirphicar0irsif theresearcheriscapableof locating
r11li'111'1'ol
tlr, tt 1)()\tlton on l()l)(),'rirlllric rnrrps l-lrsctl rln lltc lcrririn rtnttrncl them. The Global
l',',111,)ttlnl' S\slt'nt lt;ts ilttlltor't'tl llrt'lrt't'rrrrt'v ol'tlctcrrrrining ll rcscill'chcr's gett-
r'r.tl)llt lrrt ttlton trrrtl lrtolt,lr.rrrr.lr\ lrlr,, rrr;rrlr, llrt. lot.lrlirllt ol' tntohscl.vctl lutitttltls
lltt tr'trl .tttrl tt',t',,rtt,rlrlt ;t( ( ul,tl('
3t0
3ll
250K
10K
Low lmpedance
Earphone
ffi
HIGH IMPEDANCE
EARPHONE (Crystal)
ffi
NE 555 timer
2 C or D cells total 3 volts
lOOO MFD 25 volt capacitor
100 MF D 25 volt capacitor
100.000 ohm resistor
20,OOO ohm potentiometer
adjust for desired period
470 ohm
1C B Cl Cz Fr RZ r93
Note I
2.
(earphonc) and
Fig.9.30 An electronic metronome which provides an auditory signal
1976)'
(from
Lockard'
visual signal (light emitting diode)
A,rernate switchable
rirrree !eleclion
srrlrrlrlute lor R1 + R2
IM
Irt.t.rrr.:rlt.
I lrr.'
glr
ltt'tplt'ol lltt'ottt'
l('('('l\'('1. l\\'()
(()l lll()l(')
lr'
', \l
ltr,,
lr
lrr
rl ( ilil'.lt
Select resistor
and potentiometer
for desired range,
@7_.
approximalely
T -- 1.1 R1C2
R2
ltr lilt,'
l')
'(,
ltottt I Sl:rrkr'V
312
I(' I,()('N'I'IONS
They can also keep you frorn getting lost by clirecting you back to the point where
you started. The receivers vary in capabilities and displays, but most will track
several satellites, update position every second and operate for 4 to 20 hor"rrs on batteries. They can be obtained from sporting goods/outdoor equipment stores. or yoLr
can contact manufacturers clirectly, such as Magellan (960 Overland Court, San
Dimas, CA9l773).
s.ts.z Biotelemetry
lliotelemetry has been used to record remotely information from a wide variety of
lor several clecades. Many additional species have been radio-tracked since
llrlnder and Cochran compiled their list in 1969, and many technological advancerrrcnts harve been made sincc the overviews of Slater (1965), Fryer et al. (1976),and
l.orrg (1917). and the bibliographies by Schladweiler and Ball (1968) were pub-
spccies
lrshcrl; ht>wever. useful basic inlcrrmation on biotelemetry can still be found in these
\( ) tll'ccs.
Iliotclemetry has tbund many unique and valuable applications in animal behavr()r'r'csearch(MucdonaldandAmlaner,
Fig.9..-\2Magellanhand-heldglobtlptlsitioningSystenlreceiVcr(photoctlttt.tcsytll.
Magellan SYstems CorP')'
'lo locirtc an unobserved animal for plotting its movements and calculat-
'lir
9'34'
biotelernetry system illustrated in Figure
(|
AresearchercanstandonthespotthatwasoccLlpieclbytltcirtlittlirllrtttltrsctltc
.n the curth by l.titurlc l..gitrrtrc :r.tl [ 1'l'M
hlrvc. s.rirll
sc'ce r) rvlrir'lt
5() ft.'fhc'cccivc.s
ooor.inirtes with il. ilcc.rilcy t. witlri.
tirrrr'.;rrrtr l,r;rrrrrit'rlispllrvs l.;rrsrsl
r.revlrri.rr,lrrtr
c..r.trir'rrcs.
will tris,lrry l.clrri.rr
(t'1' ll('\l \lt(' rlr'tt' rltsPl;tV I'tt',tttttl)
itr n:rvi1,lttill1'lo lt l)l(.l)l()l'l'tllllll('(l lotltlt()tt
l98l:PriedeandSwift, 1992),butithaspri-
r1
314
I ig 9.34 Diagram
315
lrtrttirrg thc rccciving antennae close to a specific location (e.g. nest; Benedix 1994).
,\lso. rr clrangc in the characteristics of the signal received can often be correlated
rr
iivcrr
zrs
the
lrrl:rlrorr clr'()r's ciln ()ccr.n'duc ttl characteristics of the signal and the environment
rrs
316
311
Benedix, 1994; see Anderka and Angehrn. 1992. lor u review of transtnitter attachtnetit methods). Receiving systerlls can be as simple as a portable antenna and
receiveq tuneable to the frequencies being broadcast by each animal's transmitter.
The researcher obtains a directional fix on the animal by rotating the antenna until
tl-re signal strength is tlre greatest, indicated by a VU meter and/or an audio signal in
earphones.
Decades ago, utttomatic radio-tracking systems were devised which transferecl
time and directional infbrmation into a mainframe computer where it was stored
and plotted by an X I plotter to show an animal's movements and home range
(Cochran et ul.. 196-5). Today, automated biotelemetry systems vary from large,
of the
Fig.
and
(woakes and Butler' 1975); various
1984). and tuftecl ducks and pochards
hea<ls (Woakes
ol.,
()t"i
5 ;.
Ilrolclcnrctrv cc1ui1-rncnt can be developed and/or built by researchers (or technilnrrtt lltc nlrny l-rublished schematic diagrams, or the researcher can purchase
r'tlull)ntr'lll llirttt crtnil-rirnics specializing in the development and manufacture of
r,ttltolr'lt'n)r.'try crlttiprucnt. lirr adclitional information on equipment, applications
r r.ur\)
;r
10
Selected examples
of data
inlormation (Chapter 4). Often, however, researchers find themselves collecting and
rluantilying data in order to provide complete and accurate descriptions of behavior. This chapter provides a few examples of this process.
IO.I
INDIVIDUAL BEHAVIOR
of social behavior.
,r
,uu('t i( (tn(!).
rrrt,111vlg1l
Irlrn r'rlrosctl at l'i0 ll'urncs per second. He studied the film frame by frame with a
/r'rss lkorr Moviscop Viewcr littccl with a 2x magnifying lens. To facilitate more in,lt'1rllr slrrtlv. llrrllock rrlso Pro.jcctctl thc Iilnr onto a solid screen with a 35 mm film,ln1r pto;t't lot. ltc llrcrr tnrc'ctl tlre sct;rrcrrccs irr silhotrcttc lilrru on the screen. These
.rtt.tl\',t". I't'nt't;tlt'rl loolllrll lirt tttttllrs;rntl 1,,rril rlitrl'.t':rrtrs ltlr tltc lttrlttgltortr's vitritttts
1',ttl.' l lrr",t'rlt",t t tpll()llr, (l('l ttt' lt,rttt tlr'lt'l llllllllll'. tyltt'rt t':tt'lt lirtll is tltl :tltrl tlll'tlrC
320
SOCIAL BEHAVIOR
10.2,
32t
SOCIAL BEHAVIOR
lo.2.l Displays
L
R
A display is 'a behavior pattern that has been rnodified in the course of evolution to
convey information' (Wilson, 1975:528; Beer, 1977). Displays are often dramatic,
oo
+
ao
eye-catching behaviors and have attracted the attention of ethologists since the
inception of the discipline. The classical studies of the comparative behavior of the
Anatidae (Heinroth, l9l I ; Lore nz. 1941) were based primarily on displays.
to.2.ta Description of displays
Loa
RO
will feel
8C
DE
ri+
rJ
t----l
I
I
I
I
I
I
Fell
+ I
F---+-l
D--l
are
not certain about, watching again, and thus completing your description
step by step. can you attain a reasonable accuracy and completeness.
t-----]={
t-{
t-l
I Tinbergen,
I 9-i3 : I 3 I J
oroz0toao!oco
Motion Picture frames
Fig.
10.
,k'sr'r'i1"rtion
cHoKING [Figure 10.2]. In this posture. the bird squats an<i bends
lirrward. The tongue bone is usually lowered. the neck is held in an Sbend. and the bill is pointing down. In this position the head makes
rirpid ckrwnward movements, usually however without touching the
ground. Bullock was able to do this at l/80th-second intervals. For example, Figure
l0.l illustrates the footfall formula and gait diagram for the lateral gallop.
Since the movie was taken at 80 frames per second, only 0.75 s is clepictecl in the
gait diagram. From the inlonnation in Figure 10. l, it can be shown that this gait is
gnrund. Thc carpaljoints are often raised, and the wings may even be
r':riscrl ancl spread. and kept stationary lor seconds. A mufflecl.
rlrythrrricul sor.rnd is given which may or may not be in tinie with the
pccking nlovcnrents. The breast is 'heaving'strongly, particularly in large
llrrlls. ()licn thc latcral ventral f-eathers are raised. The bird may be
lrrcirrg rrnolhcr hirri. or l)rce away from it, or take up an intermediate
Cocatre-Zilgien ancl Dclcomyn (1993) have pnrposctl tltc ttsc ol"stttlc tliltg.t'rtttts'ltt
reveal rrorc suitirbly gait trcnrls:rnrl rlilll'r'cnccs ltclrvcett gltits ltt lt glltttt't'. Merrtlcl
)ilt.
n t,;ll
t()n.
ITinbergen, I
959: I 6- I 7 J
llrc usc ol' ll';rrrrr'-hv-l'nrntt' ;ttltlvsis ol lltt' 1';til Prttlt'llls illl(l sl('l)
lerrgtltsol (lrt'llut'r.tot'tl slollr'slr;rrrrls;rtrtl lr'r'l rlttnltl'(lnttl)tttl';ttttl lt'tlt'sltt:tll,rt'rt
(l9ll-S1 tleseribcs
ll,tItt'tttl',r'l ttl (l()"''r)sltttltr'rl llrt't,rrrrlrlrrlrrlrspllrvsol llrt. l1ll)l)v (l.t,lti,stt,.t.t.t, lit.ttlttl l'\ ,'lr',t'l \ tttl' lltt'ttt ttt l,tt,'{' ,rrllr.n unll'. tlt ..rrlr'r rlr'st t rlrtnli ;tttrl t;tr;rrrlil'yirtg
Ittrrtttltt
rrr'
i
322
SOCIAL BEHAVIOR
323
//2
56
456
Fig. 10.2 choking display in black-headed gull (from Tinbcrgen, 1959).
45
various postures and movements, they also studied the occurrence of the black
markings on the males. For ease in description and recording data, they assigned a
number to each of the markings (Figure 10.3.A) and then measured the lrequency of
occurrence of the various patterns in different behavioral contexts (Fig. 10.3B). The
relative variability of displays (e.g. duration) can be determined using the coefficient
245
24
6
0510152025303540
B
I
number of frarnes during which the bow was maintained. Form was meastlred as a
declination of the shoulders relative to standing height on a grid system (Figure
10.4A). Similar techniques were usecl by Hausfater (1977) to stLldy tail carriage in
in
t\,trr'rt1tl11ltt: ltrtrri.tii\.'l'hc
Ir W notittion
1916).
Havkin untl Iicrrtrcss (l9lt-5)rlclirrcirtcrl ttittc eottlltt't zrtl)t.s ott lltc lrotlit's ol woll
ptr;lswlriclt tlrev rrscrl lir;st'9rirr1,.s1oirl ('()nl;l('ls,ltttittl'ttllt't;tt litttts Ilrt'v lllt'tt ltttlt
lvzetl l(r tryrr liltrr l.) 1t('it\urr.llrt.r'llt'r'l ,rl lrorlr, lttltlt ',tt,rttl tolll;ttl llllttt'tttt'ttl,
of
tlr,' prrps.
Tets ( 1965). He divided the vertical component into nine 30o sectors and nlcasttred
(l-igtrrc
the frequency of occurrence of the tail elevations during different displays
10.5). Similar techniques have been used to measure joint angles in thc sttrtly ol'
of
95-51.
In Bekoff's (l9l1a)study, each individual's shoulder height was divided into ten
equal segments to normalize individual differences. Each of the ten segments was
then divided into fourths to increase the resolution of measurement'
Tail position as a component of pelecaniform displays was measurecl by Van
the development
I
I
I
324
SOCIAL BEHAVIOR
F,XAMPLESOFDATACOLLECTIONNNI)DE,SCRIPTION
at
PROXIMAL
ANGLE 2
l-ig. 10.5 Diagram showing the nine 30 degree sectors that were used for frequency
JUNCTURE
thc owl's head movements illustrated in Figure 10.8 would be noted as in Figure
10 9:
In this case we are using the beak position as an index of head position. The beak
stirrted at point 210 and, stopped at point 2/6. This represents two
DISTAL
srrrcment since the coordinates are set at 45" angles. Each block represents 0.2
sccond: the movement thus took L2 seconds.
lionirl notittions and more sophisticated uses. However, be cautioned that many
:trrtlics will not require this intense an analysis in order to answer the research questr()ns. Wcigh the incrcased resolution obtained
r
rrr
rity will nrakc it initially tedious and perhaps introduce errors of recording.
ll or'lrirrr ( 1976) rlcscribecl a three-dimensinal method for quantifying body posi-
lrurr ilirr
Irorr lleil'hl. witltlr. irntl rlcJrth ol'vari<'rus body points are taken from videotape.
plily bow (lirrn llckoll' I()77rr)
Fig. 10.4 A. Coordinates lbr measuring form ol'thc canicl
(cottt'tcsy ol ( i. lllttrsl:tlct
ltltltrlorls
irt
currilgc
tuil
B. Coordil.tcs lor r.ncasuring
I
)
I.r
rr'il
1'.
llt()vc-
326
SOCIAL BEHAVIOR
327
6)
Fig.
10.6 A pair of golden jackals during precopulatory behavior. The superimposed bars
indicate the body parts that were considered as separate limb segments during
study of displays (from Golani,1916).
rela-
tionships have been made on individuals in the same group (e.g. sooty mangabeys;
Gust and Gordon, 1994), different groups of the same species (e.g. vervet monkeys;
Cheney and Seyfarth, 1990), and groups of different species (e.g. horses, deer,
bighorn and pronghorn; Berger, 1985). The concept of one. or more, individuals
(groups) dominating one, or more, other individuals (groups) has been studied lor
many years by ethologists using several procedures.
I 0.2.2
M eas uring
do
re
latio
ns hip s
Typically. determination of dominant-subordinant relationships involvcs ( hc lirllowing (Boyd and Silk. 1983):
t
.'
0
I
r11
lo
between individuars.
irrlil'itlrrlrl A
is
SOCIAL BEHAVIOR
328
329
(>
q
N
co
o
o
.f
c{
o
q
(o
!,7
il l,
ti
o
-Q
jI,il
So
'6
I
ilt/
C)
o.
fl
i(r
(\,
)'"
o
lrl/
ol
ol
lul
T1
lt
EI
(ol
,,J
!\*
eJ
sl
Fig.
10.8
t0
24.00
l()
-16.00
-8.00 0.00
8.00
16.00
24.00 32.00
width
Front-vicw ol' Cal-comp graph of body position for two human subjects (fiom
Trochim. 1976).
--t
6
the owl's head movement in Figure 10.8.
individual is matched with every other individual in the group att ctluitl trttlttbct'ol'
times (e.g. Smith and Hale, 1969); or 2. the researcher rectlrds trittttrltlly occttrittg
interactions in wild or captive groLlps (c.g. ('hcncy irnrl Scyllrrlh. l()()0). soltrt'litttcs
manipulating thc cpvironnrcn( lo cncoul'lp,c crtttllict (e.g. irllt'otlttt'ilt1', rr lirrrilt'tl
'llris scr',rrtl rrrt'llrorl l'('n('rilllv tt'srrlts itt tltllt'tt'tll
rrr.rtlrr,t rll' prcle'r.rctl lilotl).
Itrt,tltr,ts ()l i.l(,1.(.li.rrs llt.lryt,t'rr rltllr.tt.ll ,lt;r,lrt r ontlrnlttltottr ol ttttltVttltt;tl', {t'1'
llr,rnrcks ancl Hunte. 1983). The two methods can provide conflicting data. For
in two of six llocks of chickens studied by Guhl ( 1953), he found correlaI rr,rrs bctwccn numbcr of contests won (method I ) and number of individuals domrrr,rlcrl rn tlrc l)ock (n-rethod 2) were less than 0.50. Data collection in the second
rrirturirl. gnrrrp) contcrt is nrore tinre consuming. but it will generally allow you to
, r.rrrrplc.
r .1111'ql(s) rrr
,l,,lllllf :rrrt'r' lrrvr' vrrrrctl rvitlcly (llckoll. lt)llb, Kaufhrann, 1983). Ivan Chase (pers.
r r,nunun ) lr;rs srrl'1'1'slerl tlurl lltcrc ltt'c lrt lclst tltt'cc tnethttcls of deciding when one
.rrur,rl
l)rlr,u \ \('l urlrrrlrrr'. t rrlt'r lotr lr;rsr'rl rr;lorr ollsr'tt;tliotts ol'tltc itttitttitls'behitvIot ('\,unIl1'. ('lr;rst'(l')S ))rrst'rl llrt'l,rll,r\\nll'( lrl('ulr in ltts sttttly ol'lricnuclty
,rrr .rr
I',t
l,
r1 111,11
lr
SOCIAL BEHAVIOR
EXAMPLESoFDATACoLLECTIONANDDESCRIPTION
One animal was considered to dominate another if she: (l) delivered any
jump ons,
combination of three strong aggressive contact actions (pecks,
and claws) to the other and (2) there was a 30 minute period following
the third action during which the receiver of the actions did not attack
IChase, l9B2:220]
the initiator.
an
Secondly, you can use a binomial approach; that is, in each aggressive interaction
e.g'
fleeing;
or
submission
(based
on
individual is scored as either a winner or loser
it wins
1963). An animal is considered dominant over another individual if
Brown,
significantly more (e.g. binomial test; see chapter l4) than it loses in encounters
with the other individual. Thirdly. Chase has suggested that you could use a combination of the first two methods.
priAnother common criterion for the expression of a dominance relationship is
ority of access to a limited resource (e.g. lbod, shelter, space, estrus female, etc')'
demonstrated through the supplanting of one individual
by another without overt aggression being displayed (see Richards' l0 measures
and
below). Dominance does not always provide priority of access to all valued
resources; hence, there may be dilferent dominant-subordinant relation-
Priority of
access can be
D
D
Winner
10. I ).
C
24
2t
11
t2
5t
t6
3l
13
t4
The dyadic interaction matrix that results provides the basis for generating a
tIominance hierarchy.
Brown (197 5) provided the following list of steps to lollow in the construction of
rr clyadic interaction matrix (dominance matrix):
limited
Observation.r:
an encounter
with D. In most
captive rhesus monkeys and lound that they produced comparable results'
Starting matrix'. Enter the number of wins and loses observed in the
Treutment of'reversals: A win by one individual over another that has won
the majority of encounters with the first is termed a reversal. Rearrange
the order so that only reversals fall below the diagonal, so far as possible;
encounters
llrrcc nurin irlte rnatives, as shown. In the three alternatives not shown. the
a Yielding ground/avoidances
b Cautious aPProaches
c Nonsexual presentations/mountings
d Fear-grins
lo.2.2b Dominance hierarchies
tlctcttrtirttrtp,
The data collectecl on aggrcssive intcrirclions. blsctl ort lltc ct'itcrilr lirr
(lrr'[',1()tll)
is listt'tl
ilr
itrtlivitlrr;rl
l'lrt'lt
nr:rlrix.
lr
irrlo
crrlcrctl
winncr-s rrntl loscr.s. lrc
Irl.tt',t.:rt'ltltxisol'tlrt.nt:trti\.()n(.;t\lslsllrllr'lr'rl
forms of
z Agonistic
: DisPlaYs
means B won
t7
4t
) ---=---=. [i
24
lr,'lttll
rrrtlivirlrrlrls
A. I) lrrrtl l:
SOCIAL BEHAVIOR
332
t33
one' Place
departure from linearity involves two individuals rather than
pro(lowest
relationships
ambiguous
the individuals that are in tlie least
the
minimize
to
tends
procedure
portion of reversals) in linear orcler. This
inclividuals except the alpha, the third-ranking individual (gamma) dominates all
inclividuals except alpha and beta. and so on down the hierarchy. In nonlinear
lricrarchies. there are one or more intransitive (circular) relationships, such as indi-
vidr-ral
Best
r'llly nonlinear. Perfectly linear hierarchies are unidirectional. They can contain
DE
A
D
rutl), but they cannot contain any individuals of equal status or have any circularity
''trclt as: A---B---,C. The nonlinearity is, however, of varying degrees, and some so
r
Irrrcitt'.
BADEWinsLosses
I-utrclau's index oJ' linearity has been discussed by Bekoff (1977b) and Chase
l')71\. The index (ft) is calculated according to the following formula:
,r:(fr;)
59
109
t4
32
14
2l
70
l',
l3
t25
)[,
,-@-2lttlL
rr lrcl'C:
an ordinal scale
The dominance hierarchies described above rank individuals on
Boyd and Silk ( 1983)
(see chapter 8);that is. C ranks above B, and B ranks above A'
cardinal index of domdescribe a more complex, statisticalmethod lbr generating a
paired comparisons' It
inance rank (versus the ordinal heirarchy above) based upon
information on interactions that result in wins. losses ar-rd ties' They
incorporates
.then <lescribe how to evaluate: L whether the rank dilTerences between individuals
hierarchies based on difare significant; and 2. whether dif-ferences in the cardinal
significant'(Boyd and
are
ferent behaviours or the same behaviour at different times
Rtrshcn (1984)
Silk, 1983:45). AIso see the critique of Boyd and Silk's method by
and their reply (Silk and Boyd, 1984)'
l-
r'r( )ul).
V,-l(n-
,,.rsorurblc lirlthough arbitrary) cutoff criterion for'strong', nearly linear hierarI r tt's.
\s rrrt cxutnplc. wc willcalculate the Lanclau index of linearity for the dominance
l r' r iu ('lly ol' l(r-wcck-olcl clomestic-fowl roosters in Figure l0.l2,{.
tt6
\'\'
rloutintrlcrl
lllrrc tlottt irltlcrl
(;
tlorrrirurlcrl
It
rlotnirrrlctl
(l()ttllttitl('(l
W
\
(l()lllllt;ll('(l
Bluc, G. R. W Y
WR,Y
llluc. I{. Y
w.Y
It.(;
ll()ll('
V',
:5
"
Vo,u":3
V,, :3
vR -2
Vrn 2
V\0
334
SOCIAL BEHAVIOR
DESCRIPTION
EXAMPLES OF DATA COLLECTION AND
Vrru":4
ft
335
:3
v^
(r
VR
:2
Vw
:l
h:(0.0s7)(17.s;:
.s
vY -o
The ft value of I is just as we would expect for this perfectly linear hierarchy.
koff ( 1978b) demonstrated an h value of I in litters of coyote pups (Canis latrans)
rrt vzrrious ages. Calculating the index of linearity for the hierarchy in Brown's
('\iunple (above) will generate an h of less than 1.
When individuals are close in rank, that is they supplant each other approxirrrrrlely equally, then assigning clearcut dominance status to one may indicate more
lrrrcarity to the hierarchy than truly exists. However, Landau's index can still be used
rr lrcn individuals are of equal rank by applying the following rule:
l'or individuals of equal rank:
lle
Vo:l
equal rank.
Fig.l0.l2A.Nonlineardominancehierarchyinagroupofl6-week-olddomesticfowl
roosters'B.Linearhierarchyinthesamegroupofroostersat32weeksofage.(A
of linear hierarchy in B; all
B after Murchison, 1935). C. Shorthand diagram
lrrr cxample:
lndividuals D and E of equal rank
and
all those below'
individuals above are assumed to dominate
A
I
B
I
C
\
^:lz,)i[,,-?]'
12
h: nr-n
. \6.25+0.25+0'25+0'25+0'25+6'25)
12
t,:i1(
t")
13.5):
i*
,13's;
0'0s7(
old roosters.
index of linearity lirr the domAs another example, we will calculate the Landau
roosters in Figure l0' I 2t]' By cominance hierarchy of 32-week-old domestic-fowl
you would expect thc ltcirarclty o1'
paring the two diagrams (A,B) in Figure 10.12
of linctrrity'
the 32-week-old roosters to have a higher intlcx
-6
',,
vr:4
Vr:3
vo:1.5
Vu:1.5
h:(0.057)(6.25+2.25+0.25
+ 1+ I +6.25)
:(0.057X17):0.97
Vu:o
II
l3'5):0'77
Thelow/rvalueof0.lTreflectsthehighdegreeofnonlinearityinthel6-week-
il
l)
vo:5
,/
I,'
rr
n
|'
'"
, ,,
Vn:5
l'rr:2'5
l:
I(
2.5
1.,, .l.r
lr ')\
I r l)
/,
(0.0-57)(6.25+ 6.25)
(o 057x I 2..s0)-0.71
SOCIAL BEHAVIOR
l'r'ccluency
Dominance Coelficie
to
3. For each
where:
I(act's frequency)
The winner of an interaction was assigned to the individual with the higher dominance index.
Most dominance indices are some lorm of the ratio of an individual animal's
wins (or other indications of dominance) to the individual's total number of interactions, as shown below.
dominant-subordinant interactions
with
rr
lrcrc:
other
with different opponents, only the total for all opponents. Eden (1987) used
a dominance index (below) in his study of rnagpies which incorporates the WIT
ratio lor encounters with each opponent.
success
,v,lT
l rrr.rl llrc
-+-
l.
or+I
I yri+ I
o^tr)+
)'^lt)
no. of opponents
rr lr( r r.':
(,),\',,
index is essentially the same as that usecl by C'rook and []uttcrlicltl ( lt)70) cxccpt thut
oI
ewes
or trre same
age
llo'ol'olclcr
'\'r)
llo' ol' cwcs ol' tltc sattte age or younger that dominated
the subject
Ilcrgcr' (1971\ rlcvisctl lr 'tlortrittlrrtce eocllit'it'nl' l() nr('irsure tltc rt'lrrtivc tlonri-
Ilt'rtr'otPolrlt'rl lltt'ntrrttlrcr
rro.
(),,
ewes
clclrr rlutconte.
This index varies from 0 to l. If the individual has the samc numhcr ol' intcractions
with each opponent, this yields the same index as the sirlplc ratio ( llll'l'). I:tlcrr's
to
p _n-p
7,:dr: nn
lollowilrg ratio:
they used
N:total
individuals
where:
no. bouts
Pl: -t-
fi:g?I loo)
(i+l)
.r, lr
(Dl\:Y
T:total no. of
Dominance Index
b:total
indi-
vidual a Dominance Index (DI) was calculated using the following formula:
DI: I(act's
331
ol'
I' t'r
| ',"
i,li',,.,,rlrc.
cwcs
( |('iIl ()III('()|||('
SOCIAL BEHAVIOR
interaction with a younger ewe. The ratio (above) was used to rank the ewes in each
/-:
/\AGE/SEX
cohort, then the ranks were divided by the number of ewes in the cohort. This
provided dominance indices from 0.1 I to 1.00.
Changes in dominance between age cohorts of cock red grouse hatched from
age
,
.
soctAL
CLASSES
STATUS,
I
C:*17;
when
17. Moss and Watson added the Cs together from year to year to
7\
,f-1,
RELATIONSHIP
INSTTTL'TtON'S
"ur'
u- -'
STRUCTURE
t.. -t' ,)
_r'
/.rrEcls"
or \-1
,NrenecrtoNs/
rON'
rNTER^crto*s
is one
"
-;il'
:;""^^'
\
)
RELATIONSHIPS
cenieiX
rsycxotocrieu
1975.7 J
IANDI
nrysrouocrcel
r,rntrauEsJ
/\
---\)\
sis
,-\
/\BLOOD
,5
FORCES
N:2N, C:-
't. . *I
\L)
year to year was measured by Moss and Watson (1980) using the following index:
N' x loo-50
c: N+Nr
5J
TYPES
l(t
rr'
rr'r'l
are then integrated into the society's social organization. Hinde and StevensonHinde (1976) have presented these relationships in diagrammatic, but rather
complex, form (Figure 10.13).
of social org'anization at the level of individual behavior, then dyadic interactions. Horvever, a
superficial knowledge of social organization can be gained by looking at relationships and perhaps even structure.
S.A. Altmann (1968) determined the relationships among and within sex age
classes
rlr'rtr
at the
l' ' I ')l''r()tll)
rrll('r'il('tiolts. liltt't'itntl IIerrnkind ( lg]4)measured
the frequency of occurI rrr r' I rl t'ttttllslliP tlisPllt.vs irr llrc guppy (Paot,iliu
rcti(ulata)at different densities of
l' rrr ' lltt't',ttt'l;ttiott bctwcclt 1'rrir rlclrsity ancl courtship interactions
is shown in
I rlrrrr' lO l\
Ilrt ttpt': ol \lltl('ltttt'lirtttttl itt lrrrirn;rl sot'it'lit.s lr;rvc
bccrr cl:rssificrl in cliverse
'' l'\ .'('\('l;ll lrttllt.ts ()ttr',1 lltt'rrr,sl rrst'llrl ()\'(.r:rll t'l;rssrlir.;rliolts.l's.ciitl
'rr',rtilz,rlt.tr,, r,. llrtrl ltt.,P.,st.rl lrt llrr)\\il
[l()/,r) trr l;rlrlt. lO ) ( )llrt.r t.l;rssilicttliott
' lt' ttlt ' lt'tt. lrr't'tl lrl,ltrr'.t'rl l,,t ',;rr'r rlrr p,lrlrtl),, (,1
,tttttrr,rl.,. ,,ttr.lt;ts
l;tilniilr
s ( l()7.1)
SOCIAL BEHAVIOR
::i:
pair
;il
II m
bs
o
o
o
C
2 pairs
O
C)
o
o
of rhesus monkeys.
Probabilities ol various intractions, shown by the figures and the thickness of the
lines, are calculated lrom a hypothetical population with equal representation of
Fig. 10.14 A
S.
classes
30F
)
g
Altmann, 1968).
ur,,,r,
o)
lJ-
tof
,or
3O
l( t'tttlttllt,'ttttttt
ol ,t 'l\lrtt,tl'
'.ot t;ll
o pairs
t-
_t
pa irs
to
20
N umber
of displays
should focus on certain aspects of social interactions at eerch lcvcl irr liigurc I0.13.
rr'lrtlt' I1ilil,r..'t,t',
'ifi,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,i,
t
I
Within the conceptual framework discussed above, how do you go about studying social organization'/ Using the methods and equipment discussed previously,
you should begin at the level of individual behavior and interactions (such as those
discussed in the section 10.2.2 on dominant-subordinate relationships) and build
through relationships to the level of structure. This can be accomplished only
through intensive and extensive observation spread over severitl scusons. One
This can be accomplished by following the cluestionnuire cotnpilctl by Mcllriclc
(1976\ following a committee's discussion rrt'thc inlirrntatiort rtcccssiu'y lo tlcscribc
adequately thc social orgunizatiotr ol' l spccics. Nturtcrorts cstrrblisltctl ctlrologists
cottt rihrtlctl l o ( ltc (l uc:il i()n nir i r c l)r'cl)ir t't'tl by Mt' llr irlc.
Irr ;rrltlrlion. ( )rvt'rr Srrritlt's (l()7.1) rlt'st'nPtrorr ol llrr' sot rlrl ot;,rrtttz:tlr()n ()l lll('
5 pairs
!o
,'\tttttIrill,it\(.tir,'('.l lit.tlrrt.nt.!,rl
,lti
ulr'.1's
\;llton lx'u()(l
ll
rolrr l
.r.lrr.r.r,r)t.r.,1.
111;11!,
llul)l)yt.,urlslrrPrlrr,l:11..,
111
SOCIAL BEHAVIOR
AND DESCRIPTION
EXAMPLES OF DATA COLLECTION
groups
Table 10.2. Types of intraspecific animal
fypes of groups
Examples
Types of grouPs
Examples
5.
l.
Kin grouPs
Clones
Colonial coelenterates
Harems
mountain pass
Whelks on a sheltered ocean rock
Prairiedogs (CYnomYs)
Some primate groups
Hawaiian DrosLtPhila
Many fishes and amPhibians
no provisioning of Young
3. Colonial grouPs
Groups formed by colonial nesting of
pairs or one-male harems; Young
lt
gcluius
tricolor)
sea
birds
4. Survival grou7S
Groups formecl by aggrcgtttion tll'
ratltltlttlly rclatctl. trstta Ily ttottbt'cctl i ttp
Tricolored blackbird
Many
provisioned at nest
t'
tt ttt t ttlt
llv
lrt I t ltt'tr'tl
t
I
HilltopPing butterfl
Spawning groups
to
ridge
animals
2. Mating grouqs
Pairs - monogamous groups of two
t'oritgirtg llocks
Ni1'lrt l()()sls ol'Ncw Worltl hl;rt'kbirtls
ks ;tlltl l't't'st'
rlttrl' ttt;ttttttt;tl"
I t',lt'., lt,"'1"
ll,t, lr,'l,rl l'|lilll[.' rtl \\'llrlll
| )rrt
I lt't
V)
:)
t-{
t
-)
U)
C)
?
F(
()
(1
t+
{J
a0
?1
l-(
ofi
F-{
d
c4
F{
|rl
Fi
lrl
11 Introduction
to statistical
analyses
Alpha-coefficient: Equivalent of an Italian sports car.
Type I error: Making one misteak.
Type II error: Making two misteakz.
INctrman and Streiner
1956J
II I STATISTICAL PRINCIPLES
\
rtt
t i.t I
it'.s
are measures computed from observations in a sample. Statist ical tests are
148
it
is.
INTI{ODUCTION TO STATISTICAL
HYPOTHESIS TESTING
NALYSIS
biological
these nrake these phenomena appear probabilistic. or whether
mechanics
quantum
in
postulated
as
probabilistic,
truly
are
processes
Hr: p"*100
rurd is a nondirectional alternative hypothesis. The alternative hypothesis for the
sccond I/,, is
Hr: p.,<100
statistics.
//,.
in
ethological
lrypothesis is exact or directional determines whether a one-tailed or two-tailed statrslical test is applicable (see below).
we examined the
metht>d is basically a matter of hypothesis testing' Also, when
is our best guess as
design of ethological research I stated that a reseurch hypothesis
the phenomena
to the answer to our resecrrch question. Research hypotheses refer to
ontogeny, or
lunction,
the
causation,
that is. tentative predictions about
Griftin,
a researcher
conduct a statistical test. The statistical test is a procedure whereby
and exhaustive
chooses which one of the {ichotomous set of mutually exclusive
This is
accepted'
be
is
to
one
which
and
hypotheses (11,, and 11,) is to be rejected
(Type
Type
I
and
decision
6one at some predetermined risk of making an iucorrect
II
nondirectional'
Statistical hypotheses are either exact, directional, or inexact,
(i ) given by a
(pc)
vocailizations
of
number
For example. the hypothesis that the rlean
by
population of bobwhite quail each clay is 100 is expressed
H": P':l{)o
and is an exact null hypothesis.
greater than, 100
I
1,,: 1t,'-
Slatistical tests are designed to determine whether you can reject the null hypoth-
tlrt'lttsl //,,
t.'
r t rurt iorl to be). That is, if you are attempting to demonstrate statistically what you
l', lrr'vc to be the case from observatious, your F1, should state what you have
if
,lr'-t'r'VCd.
For example,
lI,,: p">100
11, :
l
,
rr,
( ( )r
p<
100
.Fl,,,
ll,
rec(. ln this particular example we are interested in testing whether the popula-
'n nrcirrr lor thc ttrtlber of quailcalls per day is equal to or greater than 100. That
rl rt rs sigrrilicantly lcss than 100, we will reject the H,,and accept the Il,. Since we
,, rrl('rc\lctl
in only onc side of the distribution, in this case the left-hand side of
,, t ,,rrt'rrssoei;rlcrl
ll.l).
,,rlrr,urt('u"e rvorrltl hrrvc that probability ({).05) of committing a Type I error (see
r, .. I ,,t't l lt )ll
).
ll rrt'rvt'rt'sintplv
l(lll
.rs rrnd
lr,rtrlcl closely approximate the research hypothesis (i.e. what you believe the true
an<1
of nature;
philosopher of
evolution of some aspect of behavior. Karl Popper, a contempory
(l assume he would include
science, has said that in order to be scientific, a theory
1984)' This
research hypotheses) must be testable and falsifiable (Maynard Smith'
(e'g'
zrwareness
animal
concerning
problem has plagued many of the hypotheses
intriguing
very
are
lgl6, lg84a, b); to many ethologists, these hypotheses
pling distribution of anticipated values lor a sample statistic (e.g. mean). If the
sample statistic, generated by the data collected, falls within the sampling distribution of anticipated values, then we fail to reject the null hypothesis.
.
.
Reject
Sample statistic: statistic generated from data that are used to estimate
population parameters (e.g. mean, standard deviation)
Test statistic: statistic computed from data; used to test a statistical
hypothesis (e.g.f , t, F)
Ho
Fig.
I 1.1
hypothesisthatthenumberofquailcallsperdayisequaltoorgreaterthan
(one-tailed test;
see
t
100
text).
From your research question and research hypothesis (Chapter 5) formulate a null hypothesis
z
:
(H)
see
(N)
0.025
0.025
t,
8,9).
Compute the sample statistic and the test statistic. If the test statistic's
value falls in the region of rejection, the IIn is rejected and the fI, is
accepted. Failure to reject the 1/o is not the same as accepting it, although
Reject H,,
Acccpt H
Fig.
Accept Ho
Reject Hn
Accept H,
t
z
you are
It is important to know which type of statistical test (one- or two-tailed)
statistical tables in
conducting in order to obtain the correct values from the
are the same as for oneAppendix A. values in a statistical table for two-tailed tests
the alpha value); that is'
tailed tests with twice the level of significance (i.e. one-half
the tabular values are
then
is
0.05
of significance lor the two-tailed test
if
the level
vice versa'
fbr a one-tailed test with a 0.025level of significance' and
in designing' anaHypothesis-testing procedures are important to the ethologist
not be allowed ttl blind the
lyzing,and interpreting research. However, they should
careful observer or overshadow common sense'
the same as
F1n,
r('\earch dcsign (e.g. behavior units measured, sample size) and our data collection
(, 1,. l)()tcntial observer errors). [f we are convinced that our experiment was valid,
rlrr'n wc itrc mors willing to accept the
110
of committing
l lris conccpt is vcry sirnilar to the judicial concept of 'guilt'. That is, if
r, r li111l :r
.rrrlv ctinsitlcrctl 'innoccnt'. There are several possible reasons for failure to flnd
,'rrrll. orrly ()llc t'c:rs()ll is that thc def'endent is innocent.
1r1
tr'1t'r'l ;t IrrrllltVP()tltesiS.
ffi1'd'
352
NTRODUCTION TO STATISTICAL
POWER OF A TEST
A NA LYSIS
Ho False
Ho True
Decision:
Correct decision
p, : power
Typ. I error
p:a
p:L-
Fail to
Correct decision
Type
reject Ho
P:L-a
Reject Ho
P:
II
error
results
Fig. I 1.3 Possible outcomes from making decisions about the
ol statistical
tests
lor others to accept that researcher's conclusion (e.g. song duration of individuals in
population Xis dift-erent fiom song duration of individuals in population )/). That
is, if the research procedures and statistical test were valid, and the statistical test
was significant at the criterion alpha level we accept as a truth that the song duration
of individuals in population X is significantly different from the song duration of
individuals in population I.
The criterion alpha level for most researchers is 0.05 (significant), but for others
it is 0.01 (highly signiflcant). These alpha levels are used for no other reason than
that it is generally accepted that they represent a reasonable risk of making a Type I
crror. Generally, values that are greater than 0.05 are not considered to be statistically significant (Sokal and Rohll 1969:161).
(from[lowell.l992).CopyrightedbyWadsworthPublishingCompany.
Distribution
assuming H1 is true
Distriburion
assuming Hg is true
The alpha level selected is for a single, independent, statistical test of a hypothesis. When
100
Fig.
It
Il'a
trscd
to determine the alpha level to be applied to each test (Bakeman and Gottman,
re86).
.
.
cr is the
Type I error: Rejection of the I1,, when it is true. The probability
risk of making ATYPe I error'
making a
Type II error: Failure to reject the t1,, when it is false' The risk of
TyPe
II error
I
(
()r example,
if the researcher
of 0.05 for
the
is designated as B'
Type I and
to the true state of the world (Figure 11.3). The probability of rnaking
Type
II
l'4'
I lrc 1'rowcr
fttcl,t
lltt'ls SPt't'rlit';tllllrlr
othct's lllllY ()l'tttlty Itol sltltre. l'vell lllottl'lt oPittiotts lttt';tlso
ttrlll lt\'Polll('sl5 illl(l
l
;t
l('l('(
ltr
ltt't
rr'\('illt
;r
li)r
k.vt,ls 11tt.1,1.11,.,.1111,;11.1.r.Plt.rl t.trlt.il;t
ol-a test is the probability of rejecting the null hypothesis when it is false
.rrrtl lhc irltcrnativc hypothesis is true; that is, the probability that you will make a
r.rcct
t)( )\\'cr I
,,rtlt'r to
II
[3. llcrncnrhcr that you should state your hypotheses in such a way that in
strPlrorI y()ur rcscarch hypothesis you must reject the null hypothesis.
In( r('ils('(l l)()\\'e r ol' rr lcst irtcrcuscs thc ;rnrhlbility of your rejecting the null hypothis cot'r'ccl. Iirr cxut-nplc. if yor,r believe that male
r',,l.llrslr sPr'rlrl tlrllr'rr'rrt ;rnrourrts ol lrnrc irr slr:rtlctl lrrrtl strrtlit itrcits (rcscarch
lrt Pollrr'sts). \orr llrt'rr sllrlt' \'r,ttt lt\1tolltr",r". ttt sttclt ir \r'irV llutl yrltt cxltct to I't'ject
t
NTRODUCTION TO STATISTICA L
POWER OF A TEST
A NALYSIS
Ho : &.nua":&sunlight
Ht
"
p2:rfiadfi of population
a:
furnua"*Psunlight
You then collect data by making numerous sample observations on several rangoldfish is
domly selected male golfish by recording the length of time that the each
you
compute
can
in the shaded and in the sunlit area (see Chapters 6,7,8). From this
p5: u'- uu
Qr1 ..2
where: a...
Y2
'rl - --.-:o:/211_
p1
in
your statistical test will determine whether you will reject the null hypothesis' if
in
time
of
amounts
fact it is flalse; that is, these male goldfish actually spent different
Table
Howell, 1 992):
ll.l
The alpha level you have chosen (i.e. the probability of a Type I error).
Size
The size of the difference between the two populations you want to detect
relative to the amount of the variability in the populations. This is called
to be detected
Small
0.20
'effect size'(ES).
Medium
0.50
Large
0.80
r
z Calculate, or set, the eJJbct size (ES). Effect
Tlie power of a statistical test, for any given level ol significance, can be increased
rrr
and alPha.
IIS
Pt-
lLo
of the test
as a
11.1) which Welkowitz et al. (1976) describe as arbitrary but reasonCalculate delta (see below).
Increase tlte sample size. Still (1982) cautions that increasing the sample
size may be done too hastily resulting in more animals being used than is
using the appropriate formulas (see below). When the data are not
readily available, ES can be set using the conventional vaiues (Table
able.
of the dilference
power for various statistical tests can be found in numerous texts, including Cohen
(1988), Glantz (lgg2). Kraemer and Thiemann (1987) andZar (1984)'
Delta: ESVN
if
Matched-sample r-test
(Glantz,
(if valid)
rallrcr than a nonparametric test (see power-efficiency in Chapter l2).
Sclcct irn cxpe rimortal design that more precisely measures treatment
clll'cls irntl hus u snraller error elfect (Chapter 6). Still (1982) suggests
irrnlirls lo rrrrrlltllc lrt';rlrrtt'rrl', nrir\ rt'srrll irt rtrotr'strllL'r'irrg llt:rtt exposnr,' nr( )r (' rtr(ltt t,ltt,tl', lo',ttr1,lr'
I t (',ll
tn('nl"
NTRODUCTION TO STATISTICA L
POWER OF A TEST
A NA LYSIS
0.25
0.01
0.05
0.005
0.10
0.05
0.0
0.10'
0.05
0.25
0.0
0.005
0.02
0.01
Delta
0.10
0.02
0.01
3.2
0.02
0.01
-1.-1
0.0s
0.02
0.01
0.94
0.89
0.81
0.73
0.96
0.91
0.83
0.77
0.1
0.10'
0.05
0.2
0.1I'
0.05
0.02
0.01
3.4
0.96
0.93
0.86
0.80
0.3
0.121
0.06
0.03
0.01
1.5
0.97
0.94
0.88
0.82
0.4
0.1
0.07
0.03
0.01
.1.6
0.97
0.95
0.90
0.85
0.02
3.1
0.98
0.96
0.92
0.87
31
0.5
0.14
0.08
0.03
0.6
0.16
0.09
0.04
0.02
3.8
0.98
0.91
0.93
0.89
0.1
0.18
0.1
0.05
0.03
.1.9
0.99
0.97
0.94
0.91
0.8
0.2r
0.13
0.06
0.04
-1.0
0.99
0.98
0.95
0.92
0.05
.1. I
0.99
0.98
0.96
0.94
0.99
0.99
0.97
0.95
0.9
0.23
0.15
0.08
1.0
0.26
0.
l7
0.09
0.06
+.2
l.l
0.30
0.20
0.11
0.07
-i.3
0.99
0.98
0.96
0.99
0.98
0.97
0.99
l
0.99
0.97
0.99
0.98
0.99
0.98
0.99
0.99
0.99
0.99
1.2
0.33
0.22
0.13
0.08
1.4
t.3
0.37
0.26
0.15
0.
l0
t.5
l6
t.4
0.40
0.29
0.l8
0.12
1.5
0.44
0.32
0.20
0.14
1.6
0.48
0.36
0.23
0.16
0.19
1.1
0.52
0.40
0.21
1.8
0.56
0.44
0.30
0.22
1.9
0.60
0.48
0.33
0.25
2.0
0.64
0.52
0.31
0.28
2.1
0.68
0.56
0.41
0.32
2.2
0.71
0.s9
0.45
0.35
2.3
0.74
0.63
0.49
0.39
2.4
0.71
0.61
0.53
0.43
2.5
0.80
0.7 |
0.57
0.41
0.74
0.6I
0.5I
2.6
0.83
2.7
0.85
0.17
0.65
0.5
2.8
0.88
tiO
0.6t{
2.9
0.90
0.ti.1
o1)
0 (rl
1.0
0 9l
0 /\
tt
0()\
0 ss
(i ti /
{)
o/0
[1
l8
l9
i0
rl
'1 )
'
0.99
0.99
2
' l lrc
'l
It
5()
(r(r
3s8
SAMPLE STATISTICS
data on the male fighting fish, there is no clear mode since 3.7, 4.4 and 4.5 all
occurred twice (see listing below). But if we had made 100 measurements on each
For example, the measurements for the 25 male fighting fish above would
arranged as follows:
reflect both the populaSample data from a population show characteristics that
sampling methods
tion,s properties and the sampling methods used. Proper
2.5
3.3
) J.
z 3.8
s 4.1
s 4.2
t
q
6 J./
populations can
(Chapters 6 and 8) must be selected so that a valid measure of the
will be based to
4.4
rr 4.4
tz 4.5
*tt 4.5 Median
ru 4.7
ts 5.6
16 5.8
n 5.9
to
1.6
z 2.4
be made.
be
18 6.6
te 6.9
20 7.6
2t 7.7
22 8.6
23 9.5
z+
10.8
zs
ll.l
With 25 measurements, the median value will be the 13th measurement; in thrs case
in 25 male siamese
EXAMPLE: We measure the duration of fighting a mirror image
fighting fish (Betta sPlendens).
rl is 4.5.
In order to plot the frequency distribution, the measurements are placed into
cryual intervals. For example, we can place the 25 measurements into one-second
Duration in seconds:
5.6
3.3
2.5
4.1
4.1
4.4
4.5
6.6
7.6
The difference between the sample median and sample mean in the above fre-
distribution (see Figure I 1.5) demonstrates that the sample data are not norrrrally distributed. That is, sample data are normally distributed when their
lrcrluency distribution is the same on either side of the mean (see below).
lue ncy
n.7.3 Skewness
11.7.2 SamPle mean, mode and median
We compute
())
the sample mean (,f,) for the data above by surnming
the sample
(Ar)'
measurements (x,) and dividing by the sample size
- Ir,
x:
r
142.5
:t''
Wlrcn sarnple data are not normally distributed, they are skewed, either positively
(llrc curvc tailing olf to the right toward higher values) or negatively (the curve
t:rrlirtg oll'towar,-l krwer values) (see Figure 11.6). See Chapter 12for a further dis( ussi()n trrrrl u
II.1.t
Loc:tliorr
I),rl;r s;rnrplc tlrslrilruliorrs rnlrv lrt' ;rlrkc rrr lirrrrr brrl nriry rlil)cr in location. For
r'\.unplr'. lltt'ltvr)(ut\('\ut l't1,q;rr'll/.ut'lr,rlltskctvt'tl llrlsitivcly:ttttl lutvctltcsante
r,rtt,tlrtltlt lrttl rltllt't ttt lltt'tt l,r( ,rlton utt lltr",, ,rl,',,1 ntr';rsut('nt('nls.
SAMPLE STATISTICS
TableIl.3The25tlurcttionsofmirror.fightingb.|'the
to the
fighting.{ish organized according
secontl
one
w'ithin
of'tlurations
number of occ'urrenc'es
intervals.from0 to l2 s
mctle siamese
Interval (s)
No. occurrences
0-l
t-2
2-3
31
4-5
5-6
6-l
7-8
8-9
-10
I
l1-12
l0-l
l:ig. I 1.7 Illustration of two data distributions that have the same form (i.e. same positive
skewed distribution and same variability) but differ in location (i.e. their means
differ).
t.7.s Variability
occurTences
):rtu samples
lurvc the same location, but may differ in variability. That is, the frequency
Number of
I
0
5lU
Duration (s)
fightingfishbrokenintoonesecondintervals(datalromT.rblcll.]).
\\'lrr'rr nrciu)s rrc conrparccl. it is also important to know how much variability there
r', rrr
llrt'rrrip,irr;rl nlclrsurcr)rcnts (.r,) ll'onr which thr>se means were derived.The stun-
'l,tt,l rlt'vittlittrt (tl is rr rrre:rsrrrc ol'lltlrl vluilrhility lrbtltrt thc nrean and is represented
I't llrt' lor tttrrl r'
c
.9
(!
q,
l0
20
30
-o
50
40
o
o
o)
-o
E
f
t_
l2(x,-xl' o'
s:{-j-t
[-=]
Procedure:
(-r,- x
-ls
-2s
l:ig.
ll.9
+2s
Frequencydistribution of anorntullydistributedsampleolmeasurements
(observations) and the percentage
mean a ls and 2.r.
*12
*1s
ol
sDividethesumofthesquareddeviationsbythesamplesizeminusone,
The sample ntean confidence interval (O is computed by dividing the standard
,leviation of the sample mean (s) by the square root of the number of measurements
X.t,- x )'
N-1
o Take the square root of the number
t,V) and multiplying by a factor (r) based on the confldence level (probability level)
ls\
(':
\ - +' rl'\vlu/
Thestandarddeviationcanbeusedtoreflectthedistributionofthedata'Ifthe
'l'hc valr.rc ol'.s/V,N is also referred to as the standard error of the mean (sr"):
Slr. :
'
.f
\N
Ilrcrelirrc thc conlidence interval (C) can also be calculated by multiplying the
,l.rrrtllrrrl crlol' ol' tltc rtrcirn by r:
interval
sirrcc
it
('
is
tttr"lttt lit's
'vt'li't'l
'11st,r)
(tll) ,\'
()(
)",,
364
4.6
5.3
'
3.1
6.4
5.3
4.7
4.8
5.0
l0
4.4
:
7:
Total
l0
ll.5
l:ig.
t
J
--ilffi
5 observations
t'7
.10 Ordering of the data from Table I I .5 to obtain an initial indication of normality
(i.e. nunrber ernd range of observations olt either side of the mean).
II
l)XAMPLE:
I
48.0
!r--{l
1/-l
4.8
as in Table
as
in Table
1.5.
:6.36 _0.71
9
t:t/0.11
Bout No.
3.1
I hc square
Table
1.6
irbore.f,
4.7
4.6
4.4
4.4
4.4
4 observations
4.8 = .[
(s)
Duration
Bout No.
Range
6.4
5.3
5.3
5.0
Table
365
:0.84
(n,-R
(r,-T)'
\Ve cun
ll
10.
-0.2
0.04
0.5
0.25
-1
-0.4
0. 16
t.7
2.89
1.6
2.56
4
5
0.5
0.25
-0.1
0.01
0.0
0.(x)
0.2
l0
-0.4
Total:)'(.r
0.04
ol'the r.ncan. Nevertheless, we can observe how our data are being distribrrtt'tI w,illr rcgurl to tlte standard deviation as in Figure I1.1l.
lo tlclirtc tltc conf iclcncc limits for the mean we begin by calculating the standard
r I tl)t
0. 16
-Tf
lur l, bcing I .6 and I .7, respectively. However, we do not know if the data are really
:6.36
0li4
O.)7
'/("t r)
"(,)({l
'/l
to{rl
366
NTRODUCTION TO STATISTIC'A
SAMPLE STATISTICS
NNALYSIS
*ls
-ls
l-
oseo
all
Use
of
Then we are confident at the 95'Z,level that the population mean lies between:
4)g J-.6!
4.g
+0'61,5.41
Duration (s)
5.7
3.2
Table I 1.4.
5.41 i.e.
II.5)
Bout No.
of the standard deviation to illustrate the variability in the data lrom the
4.19 and
all observations
Fig. I I .l
l0
(Table
or
obser'ations
96Vo
6.48
5.64
4.8
3.96
3.12
-l
7.5
6.9
3.4
4.9
7.7
6.9
3.8
l0
4.5
Total 54.5
7 = 5.4
sampies ol clata. For example, is the variation in song-bout duration lor male B different from that for male A, measured previously? We now must calculate the stan-
A:
X:4.8
361
s:
| .72
I:ven after adjusting lor the difl-erences in means, the CV's demonstrate that male
It's song duration is much more variable than male As song duration.
s:0.84
By comparing the ten bouts for each individual we can see that the durations fbr
male B are more variable, an<l our sample statistic (s:1.12 versus 0.84) bears this
out. However. the mean fbr male B (5.4 seconds) is also larger than that lor male A
an{ may contribute to the larger variation. That is, it is possible to have greater variation aroulcl larger means than arrouttd smaller means. This is called the floor e./l'ett:
since zero is the bottom limit on durations, a smaller mean is closer to this limit. The
Significant difl'erences between CVs can be determined using the test statistic C
r I );1vyIips and Daw,kins, 1973):
t-
(cvr-cv:)
v(Scv,r+Sr",r.l)
CV
V2N
converse is the geilinS4 e.//bt't,where there is an upper limit to the data. We therelore
generate the sample statistic coeffit'ient of'vuriatiorz (CV) that expresses thc standarcl
cleviation as a percentage of the mean. The greater the CV the greater the variability
I lrr' Ptrrbrtbility itssociated with the test statistic C is obtained from the table for the
,lr',ltibtrliott lirt'I ('flblc A,5). LJsing this method we can test lor a siglificant differ-
in the data.
cv:iX xlo0
0.84
o. l 7s'
l(x) l 7.s'
Male A:
CV * 1, x t00
M;rle ll.
('vs lirr
(,
(o 175 0 l llt)
\. (St'v,'lSt'v,')
to
Sr\,'
(l){}lr)y (}lX}l
Scv'l:
,-L
0.3
I 82
- *
: 0.ry, :(0.07
20
0.006
o.oll
t2 Selection
test
)2:0.005
1.86
of 2.26(9
Since 1.86 is less than the tabular value
dt
of a statistical
in the duration
there is no signiflcant difference in variability
of
songs between
Males A and B.
I 986 J
ST:
X
'-
of variation
*0.01.r-
measuresaredilficulttoformulate(Bekoff.|97]b).
Statistical tests are used to test hypotheses about one or more samples of data. The
rcsults of these tests will also add to our current knowledge about the scientiflc
(lr.rcstions you are investigating, whether they result in rejection
sis
l,v your experimental design and scale of measurement, therefore, the type of statis-
'luble
,lt'sigrts section in Cliapter 6. Many statistical analysis computer programs lead the
r('scirrchcr through a step-by-step decision-making process
of
1r i;rlc tcst. Also, several statistics textbooks provide tables and charts that assist in
,r'lr'r'lrrrg statistical tests, including Glantz (1992). Krauth (1988), Meyer (1916),
liolrson (1971). Sicgcl (1956), Siegel and Castellan (1988). and Sokal and Rohlf
questionswhichwill
lr, lP rlirccl yort lo tltc ltcrtincnt tcsts.
r't
Iltl(' Vl:ltStlS
I'n l{AMlr
I t.s ts
tl I i l':u':uttclrir'
!r'sls
I lr,'tr'.rlt'|,'",',,rllf
l,rlll ,t','.ltllllrllillt.
tlr,rl r,tnnol
.tlrt,r\',
ttt,rrlr'l
lltt' tt',r'ol
D.l.
T.tble
uncl
of measurement
Nonparametric
Parametric
i r:erimental
designs
Ratio or
interval
Nomimal
Ordinal
'Yr/
Binomial test
Mann WhitneY
.\.- .
- I
Student's r-test
.-1"
,.
-,\:
{,r-test
.\..
One-wayanalysis Kruskal-Wallisone-wayANOVA
of
variancs
(ANOVA)
Scales
Nonparametric
Parametric
Ratio or
-,
:1
ll
interval
of measurement
Ordinal
Nomimal
Mann-Whitney Li-test
Kolmogorov-Smirnov two sample test
Wald-Wol low itz run s test
...
,;trtlrlr'
ersus .8,
Student's r-test
Two-way ANOVA
Nonparametric
Parametric
Erperimental designs
lI
Ratio or
interval
of measurement
Nomimal
Ordinal
be
ot
from the
t-)':. t ttt'iuble
;.1
3 ,\.
3. \:
McNemar's test
A.
Paired r-test
Sign test
.\:r
Walsh test
----=
ranks test
r::
Correlation
a^,,,,,
measures:
Pearson's
Product
SPearman's rho
moment correla-
tion
coefficient
=-===i==?=i;
i..ii?1?i=
Kendall's tau
Friedman's two-way
ANOVA
Cochran's Q test
/.'t o' 5
a
or93!
- r:i
$ AgigiSAiEieE*rf$3 eAii$
-Ea
*
;i'iii +r;rs=ii:SairEei;BEgii El
i ii1-;-E;
riE *Airi
5:e:iii
1 t i = ? &zi e
'-',
ai;iE*iEF=,
liii?
33E
lEaaiiisi-+iE+?$*E3Hs ii
1 1=+iE sil
;E?:i ?*ei i:i#iPlfi;i; ;i
; iaEi ,Fis ca;lE itti Ei.F+r*i3lt ri
I iiii Et? A[iAi
Ecsi
iiEE *;r;Ens lz
a?ii
!i,;!
I; i?.i
FiE
iEeEe.. ia
g;;
=+; 5 *aa i+:iA?Ei[;+i
;+E+
sE
?
Lll
-J
v
o
ln
C
U)
z
z
a
a
-l
tri
a
-l
(A
EE
\)
1 Sample
rI
Ordinal
315
It,v-.t,)i
ful:
,N
- 1, 2
Nominal
MI:'t-RI('TESTS
3. 4
therefore:
i,l
I(.r-.r.)r
-1/
Lyl ---
r- -t;r
I{
L[.:
'1/
I(.r -.r.;l
M.:..
UN
:
Ratio, lnterval
3,ormore, f
lndependent
Samples
Ordinal-
I
I
25
10
Nominal-
SK:
Completely
Randomized
Design
Batio, lnterval
OrdinalNominal
1---+Samples
Ordinal
ordinai-
Variance of
VSK
Nominal
21
,27 ,28
16, 17 ,22,23
- 18
Ratio, lnterual- 29
3, or more,
Matched
Samples
Fig. l2.l
l , Onc
Ordinal
Nominal
19
20
(
sittnplc rtrls tcst, 2. Kolrnogorov Srttit ttov ( )ttt' slrlttlllc lt'st; l. )rte srttllPlt'
(r.
I
clri-srltllrr.c tcst;-1. l]irrorttitrllcst:5. M:ttttt Wlttllrt'r I li'51.
+ 1.96 then skewness is significantly different from zero at the 0.05 level.
test f or significant kurtosis (i.e. KUR ditfers significantly f,rom zero) we calcu-
ll Z>
'lir
Ordinal
6N(N-l)
(N-2)(1i + l Xl/+3)
7SK
13
Ratio, lnterval
SK:VSK:
26
- 14, 15
Nominal
test for significant skewness (i.e. SK differs significantly lrom zero) we calcuof SK, then calculate the Z value.
11,12
Ratio, lnterval
more,------|lndependent I
Samples I
TLr
26
J--
3, or
M1
8, 9
Nominal
M2
KUR:i4
- 11
,'
5, 6, 7
Ratio' lnterval
2 lndependent
24
M,
M)V
( ltt st;tllttt'
K,l.t.l,.trrt Sttttttt,rr, lurts;ttttplt'lt",l / \\"rlrl \\'oll,tttlz ttlttrlt'rl'li
oll('
\\'l\
\V'rllr.,
rrr"l
l"
ll)
ol
lt\o
lr"'l
'rl
lt"'l.r)
'
l)lolr,llt"tt
)',,,,,111,".'. r'l ltl
Vuriance ol'
,/,
l)vsK
KUR:VKUR-4(r/2(t/- 3xt/+5)
KUR
\/VKTIR
A N( )vA: I I . ('hi-stluirrc tcst ol inclependence (2X2); 12, Fisher's exact test; r3,
Kt'rtrl;tll's cocllicictt( ol'cottcorrlancc; 14. Chi-square test of independence (rXk);
I \. ( orrlirrlt'ntv t'ocllicicrrt. 16. SiIrr tcst: 17. Wilcrtxon n-ratched-pairs signed_
r,rrrIrlr'rl.lX.N,ltNr.rrrrrr's(r..sl.l(). lirir'rlrninl'slwr)-uttf,AN()VA;2(),Cochrirn'se_
lr"'l 'I l\',tt',ott"ItotltrtItttotttr'trl(r)ttr'lirlrorr1,,,.'11;.r.'rrl:]2,Spc:tt'nlut'srhtt: 23,
kt rrrl,rll., l,rrr '.1 Strrrlr.rrt ,, r lt.,.l ', ( )rrr. rr.r\ ,,\N( )\i\..)(r. lu,o-w,irV AN()VA:
',/ l',rtt,,l/
Table
12.2.
oJ' skew-ness
4(,V:- I )VSK
' : 4(99)0.4720)
VKIIR: _]
and
(N-3XN+5)
186.912
7(15)
105
1.7801
kurtosis
Song duration
(s)
(x-r)3
(.r-x)'
(.r-.r)'
z: Vvrun-Vt.zsor
5UR _ -1.1888_-1.1888:_0.891
- r.3342 v'w/
Z of -0.891
is
4.7000
0.6400
0.s 120
0.4096
5.1000
1.4400
1.7280
2.0736
3.2000
0.4900
-0.3430
0.2401
4.2000
0.0900
0.0270
0.0081
3.7000
0.0400
-0.0080
0.0016
0.0400
0.0080
0.0016
4.1000
0.3600
0.2160
rrre
4.5000
0.t296
3.6000
0.0900
-0.0270
0.0081
2.9000
1.0000
- 1.0000
1.0000
3.0000
0.8100
-0.1290
0.6561
39.0000
5.0000
0.3840
4.5284
If Z>t
t2.t.tb F-max
variance of Pop.
0'0384 :o.lo86
M1
on"o:
o.50(o.7o7l)
MrlM,
__
3)
.7
421:9.55
largest variance
smallest
_0.68_ l
'23
variance 0.55
,
Obtain the tabular value of Flrom Table A4. Two diflerent degrees of
(cll'-
,_ SK - 0.1086 -0.1086-0.158
--Vvst<{o.qzo 0.6870
I ).
fr(, o.45ll(
Ktll{ it,: I os'
5r2:(0
f reedotn are needed. Those across the top of the table refer to the sample
which had the larger variance; those on the side are for the sample with
540:(\.4120
8(11X13) tr44
significantly skewed.
Test for significant kurtosis:
tr:5 oz:(0.822):9.63
3:
Calculate F':
t:.._
2)(N+ l XN+
Determine the variance for each sample population by squaring the standard deviation:
variance of Pop.
VSK: (N-
Procedure:
6(10x9)
of variance
l\rpulation A and Population B. The F-max test assumes that the data are normally
rlistributed, but it is robust and valid even when this assumption is violated slightly.
1)
significantly different. From the example in Chapter 13 on p. 382 we can deterrnine whether there is a significant difference in song-duration variability between
6N(N-
--n
thc vlrriirnccs of'the samples; that is, the song durations do not vary sig-
I l.i:'i
li
;u(' s()nr('lttttt's lr:rtrslottrrt'rl rrr ,,trlr'r lo 111,'l,'1 llrt' ;tssrrrrtPtitllts rll' plitt'iunctric
,l,tlt'-ltt,tl tt".l'' (rlt'.t tt'.'.t'tl ,tlrort'; I lt,'t,' ,rtt' lltt('(' ttl;tl()t t(';tsotts lilt ttsittl, tlltlit
It.ttt',lrrIttt.tltr)il',ilrIlr('.ilr.rlr',t ,,,1 \.ilr.lrrrr {l'.il1,. l'tt,}it
I ).rl:r
378
within samples'
Nonparametric statistical tests are distribution-free tests which do not demand thirt
Kirk
drawn.
tsiegal, t9-t6..1l
Since there are lewer constraints on nonparametric tests, they are usually lcss
powerful when used to analyze data where parametric tests are applicable (howcvcr
Blair and Higgins, 1985). Therefore, researchers often proceed with paranrctrie
without having necessarily satisfied the four criteria listed above (p. 373).
This is supportable, in part. by the fact that some parametric tests are robust;
that is, they can be used with reasonable validity even when some ol the parametric
model assumptions are violated. For example, Student's /-test can be used even
when there is considerable deviation from normality and/or homogeneity of varianoe, except in an independent-samples design with unequal numbers of scores;
however, analysis of variance is highly sensitive to the kurtosis of a population
( Govindarajulu, 197 6).
Overall, there are several factors which should be considered when selecting
tretween parametric and nonparametric tests. Gibbons (1993) has compiled a list
which serves as the basis for a safe (yet sometimes conservative) guideline.
According to Gibbons (1993) (Jse a nonparafiTetric statistic'al test then uny o./'tha
see
tests
z
r
is given by:
ments are skewed to the right. The transformed measurement
some
of
rtnk rttlwrt.
tlistrr'
norrrrnldislrihuti,, (e.g.Shcrryt'ltrl..l98l:Mc.tll. lgltl{)'cs1'rcciirllVtvltctrtlre
\,r
.r;tlt'slttt'\
shapes of'the distributions from which the samples are drawn are
blrti.n al-,-rcirsrrr.cnrurts
+ The
,r,,':log,,,(x,rf l)
r -':log,u('t,r)
If
ts
is birrorrriirl.'l'lrc lnrnslirt'tttctl tttt'ltsttte tttt'ttt
r,,
I'irt'tt lt\
ll
tests
will
ttt'lr'sls.lltt'tttt)t('l)()\\'('tlttllr,,tr;)iu;rttl('lttt
(/;rr. l')S.l)
lt'rl',ltt'r'otttt'tt'l;tlirt'lrlllltt':ttttctt'ictcsts
nonparametric tests (Welkowitz et al., 1916). Given that the data meet the criteria
fbr use of parametric test, then fbr a given difference between population rleans, a
given alpha level and a specified power, power-eflficiency is a ratio expressed as a
percent as lollows:
Power-efficiency of nonparametric
Where:
{:sample
P
t.rt:9x
100"1,
N,,t,
as
powerful
parametric test.
For example. if the parametric test requires a sample size of 80 and the nonparametric test requires a sample size of 100 to make it as powerful as the parametric
test, then the power-efficiency is:
Power-efficiency of nonparametric
In this
test:
Jqx
100
the
rl'the
sEo-rri:-:
l, 1
//'t'-*t:-\
-
{ \1,r,
1\
l,r,
rs
itt l)opttlittiort
IJ.
(see below; we
382
Sample
Ponulation
SamPle
PoPulatiort B
0.8
4.8
5.1
1.2
1.44
6.4
-1./
-0.1
0.49
5.3
4.2
0.3
0.09
3'l
3.1
-0.2
0.04
5.0
4.1
0.2
0.04
4.4
4.5
0.6
0.36
5.2
3.6
-0.3
0.09
4.9
2.9
4.7
3.0
-0.9
Total:49.0
39.0
3.9
sr:
(-t,-X)'
0.09
0.81
Total:ffi: f(.r,- X )r
9
0.01
2.25
sE--:
/tn'*tu':
'A'B
NB
0.16
3.24
Vt
V/Vo
tO
0.01
0.25
sr-\A rR
- :0.35x2:0.10;
0.09
significant.
1.0)
0.00
0.04
Total= 6.14-X
\,-.\'r)
!1"I {)':94:o.u,
9
N-l
,^:,/[
1.00
1.0
N-t
Sample: PoPulation A
(,.,-X)
0.3
-0.1
1.5
0.4
- 1.8
0.1
-0.5
0.3
0.0
-0.2
0.64
Ir.r,-xrr
' !_ : 5.00 :0.55
$,-*)
(x,- x )'
4.1
4.9
3ul
Sample: Population B:
5.2
Mean:X:
lZEl) I)l:S l( ; N
!''i
l'l:vo
rund is based on a
oa:0 8]
gcrrcity ol' variirnr.:c bctween Populations A and B, and 2. the data from Population
We should check
tlrc norrrr:rlitv ol'llrc riatit in Population A belore we proceed, but we also krtow that
tlre l-test is srrllicicrrlly nrbrrst so llrat lhcsc r.rssunrptions can be violated to a reason;rlrlr.'t'xlr'rrl u'illrorrt ;rllt'c'tirrp'llrc vrrlitlity ol'lhc tcst. Also. all the lirctors in the
l( )r
(';r
lt ul;rlt'rl ( rtlro1
1'
1.
(x^-x,)l(
/t
PA RA M
,ffi)
| x,sB2)
(s)
Population samples
// ro, rot
4.9-3.9 |
! \ l0+ l0/
Row totals
(r)
/r
lo-
xo.7l )+(
ro+
lo-
ro, -
4.7
3.9
5.1
18.9
5.1
4.2
5.9
20.0
6.4
3.2
3.9
4.8
18.3
5.3
4.2
3.1
'oV(^ l
5.2
17.8
3.1
_t.
3.6
4.9
15.3
5.0
4.1
4.1
5.3
18.5
4.4
4.5
3.2
5.4
t7.5
16.6
VL r8
(1.0\(2.24t 2.24i-:2-84
2.24
i-- ;
v0.62
0.]e
l(6.12+s.4 \
V\ r8 )
3.6
3.0
4.8
2.9
2.7
5.2
15.7
4.7
3.0
2.9
5.5
l6.l
39.0
34.6
52.1
Table 13.2
Sum
Source of variation
df
Mean
square
lletween samples
(columns)
BSSS
BSMS
Within samples
WSSS
WSMS
lirtal
TSS
applied to a wide variety of experimental designs; see Meddis (1973) for a clear and
concise overview. The one-way ANOVA described in the example below is fbr thc
completely randomized design. We will once again use the hypothetical clata orr
song duration that we used in the examples above; however, wc will expantl our
hypothesis and samples from Populations A and B to include two nlorc popr.rlirtions
C and D (Table 13.1).
of
squares
114.7:GT
(rows)
of variance (ANOVA)
5.2
4.9
Column totals(r):{9.9
We then obtain the tabular value for I from Table A,5 for l8 degrees of freedom
(dl) and a significance level of P:0.05. Since our calculated I of 2.84 is larger than
the tabular r value of 2.101, we conclude that the data are from two distinctly different populations. That is, song duration in Population A is statistically greater than it
is in Population B; this agrees with our comparison using the standard error of the
One-way analysis
5.2
4.8
/r roo i
/f rqrto.os r +r2y1o.s6)
l:
xo.s6)
tr
//:total
5.lr t4.lJr1(r.4r...
-5.5r
ll.0-l
17 0-l I
'/()li
.)
.10.()(r
10.25
,,,,
I iI I
number of measurements:40
('alculutc thc sum of squares of the measurements (),r,r2); that is, square
circh ol'thc inclividual measurements and sum them.
)'\,,
Complete the analysis ol variance (Tahlc 13.2) hclow by nrlkirrg llrc r':rlculations in Steps 2 13. I{csults irrc lorrtttl irr 'ljrble I l.l
whcre:
174'12
:763
CT:GT':
N
40
ISS )r
( I
1,)li'l
'(,
r'',1
BSSS:''
'
n(,
both conditions (treatments) or they could be meersurements paired by some characteristic (e.g. litter, time, location).
-CT
+ t s2r + t te7l9
a)!4
_ t 63
Calculate:
: 20.36
It:
- l-o* 7115'',
!
V N-I
WSSS:TSS-BSSS
:35.21-20.36:14.85
Where:
df:Number of
samples (columns)-
1:3
ll Calculate each mean square (MS) by dividing the sum of squares by the
il
Table 13.3
corresponding df
Between samples mean square
Within
20.36
Sum
(BSMS):
-:6.78
y!:O.orrt
samples mean square (WSMS):
'36
Source of variation
l3
Fof
13.2
l'lrt.1l:rirt.,l I tr'sl rs rrst'tl lo tt'sl lirr sil,tttltt:rnl rltllt'r('lt(("' lrr'lttt't'tt ltto tr'l;tlt'tl ot
ttt;tlt llt'tl ";tttr1,l,"' llr."'t'
Within-samples
20.36
6.78
36
14.85
0.4t
39
35.21
16.44
(rows)
Total
16.445
Compare the calculated Fvalue to the tabular value (Table A6) using the
between-samples df (3), the within-samples df (36)and the appropriate
alpha level. The tabular value for P:0.05 is 2.87 (extrapolated lrom 2.92
and 2.84). Since our calculated
Mean
square
(columns)
t?TPlgnl4! :
r: q:l:ttn
Within-samples MS
of
squares
Between-samples
Between-samples
dr
(Table
l3'4)' similar to that recorded by Reid (1987) lor Ipswich sparrows (pas.serculus
princcp.r). our research question is whether time spent singing is
greater than time spent fbraging in a habitat with an abundant food supply. We
t'itttcloltlly selccted l0 individual males from a population of l8 and took focal,rundwiL'hcn,si,s
PA RA M
388
Table
hy ten male
13.4. H1-pothetical dota on time ,spent singing ancl.fctroging
monarch butterflies
songbirds
Singing
Individual
Foraging
pz
105
152
47
2209
97
202
r05
11025
ll5
117
95
233
120
105
l5
87
215
188
G
H
103
176
89
260
t12
131
l9
109
139
30
| 032
| 190
Totals:
Time since
138
t-)
t7l
788(rD)
985
1986
last mating
Number
0/
Number
/0
(days)
tested
Mated
tested
Matctl
0{<
\')
396
JJ
489
30
49
57
36
3r
19044
88
65
36
56
52
56
27
30
40
63
42
40
5329
29
48
32
44
2924r
36r
l9
31
38
29
2l
62
27
30
24
42
225
35344
103
900
682(;D2)
Note: + Virgins.
38
6:IoNl0
-788:7g.g
t-
between two sets of paired data. The data must be either interval or ratio.
78.8
roqlL
-ro-r
/fro: osz-
Vl l0
:il1rr]
78.8
ry7{Y__U)W)_
r:____
' V[4,2x'-(>x)']
[Atrr
j]Y)21
Where:
3.162
_ 78.8 _78.8:3.66
67 .97 21.5
3.162
2'262' Silcc ttttr citlcttThe tabular / value (Table A5) for df:9 and P:0'05 is
//,,' irtrtl cottcltrtlc tltit(
the
reject
we
lated f (3.66) is larger than the tabular value,
singirrg.
trrttl
there is a significant difference between time spcnt lirraging
itt ttl:tlc
As another example, oberhauser (1988) sttrtlictl tttittittg slt'ltlcp,it's
rtl'tttltlcs tttltlctl itl l')s(t tlt:rtt
monarch butterflies ancl lilLrnrl thirt ir lowcr'1'rcrccrrl:rgc
() ()ll)' ;l tt.sttll sltr' ;tlttilltttt.tl lrr lttl
in 1985 (Trrhlc 13..5; |llrir.ctl l l.l' (ll. l.i. /,
lrr, lltt'ttttltllrt't .l
ttttttstrtlly t.rl.l srrnunt.r. Nolt. llutl llrr'nr('ir\lnr'rttt'ttl\ itl('l);lttt'rl
l/:
Xf:
X:
l:
.\'r
)"'
sunr
l'lrc nrn1,,t'ol'
r'is
I lrr., r',.r
l\\,'
rt';';rr,llt".', rtl lltr",tf,n ol r ll r t', l,rt1',', llr.rtr r llr,'rr \r)u r('l('( I llrr.'//, ;rtttl tottt'ltttlt'
llr,rl llrr'l\\l t,tt t,tlrl,'', ( \ ) l,rt, ,t1'tttlt, ,rrrll\ ,,'t t''l,tl, rl
PA
390
tests
tI
:Vtt
:
-!t!1? [L?2!I
- I 0rz'l t t ot :s 3s'94) -
I 0( I 7 87. 60)
V{
0(
oio-os)
l7 876.00- l8 472.80
ro zoo'so- ro oioi+L(-rs 3se'40-
79'021
Nonparametric statistical tests are the most commonly used statistical tests in ethological research. They are simple tests that can easily be calculated by hand or with a
-32 041'00)l
hand-held calculator. This means they can be used reliably while you are in the field
access to a computer.
without
;t'2#: -o'e8
Table 13.6
Total time (min.;
Male
Singing
Foragtng
(n
(v)
XY
,n
231.04
r0.5
15.2
159.6t)
9.7
195.94
94.09
408.04
20.2
I 1.5
tr.1
134.55
t32.2s
136.89
90.25
542.89
l)
9.5
23.3
221.35
12.0
10.5
126.00
144.00
21.5
239.2s
10.3
11.6
181.28
106.09
309.16
8.9
26.0
231.40
19.21
676.00
11.2
13. I
146.12
125.44
171 .61
13.9
I 51.51
193.21
10.9
I 18.81
03.2
179.0
I 076.08
I535.94
Sums:
()x')
(;n
787.60
()xr)
GXN
One variable
l1.l.lq
One sample
(f l'l
S,
S,.,
,rl
-r,:
_Y1
s6.25
8.7
l.t.l.l
I 10.25
15.69
110.25
12.
.Y,,
Slrrrplc sc(lr.rctrcc: A A B B B A B B B B A A B A
The calculated coefficient
of -0.98
trrir.
slrcrrr
ar- na c.rrcl.titlrr irrtr c.rtclrrrrc thrrt lirrrc
clt tlt lv. ttel'ltt ively t'ot.t t'l;ttt'tl'
lir*r,irr,
I
'
St'r
Sr't1ttt'nlt;tl,rs1lr,'I
It'lt'Pltr)n('\\
t't
r'n('('
)l l tlo lrr'lrlrvirlrs
A. l|
).
ol ttr;rlt't,\)iut(ll('nlitlt'(ll)st;rrlingsg'lcrclrctl irlrtng:r
il('
1 St'rIl('nlr.rlurrlt'r
,'l ',1r,', 1,1 \ l.urrlr rrrr , tllt lrr,'tl rrl,rl rr lt'r'tl lrtttth
NON PARAM
or separated in
want to determine whether the two items are clustered
chance' The two non-random
the sequence more than would be expected by
extremes,for the example above, would be:
ln any
case we
Table 14.1. Numbers of ./bmale grasshopper,\ thut hucl rutt given response chirps to
males that subsequently mated or did not mute
Trials which ended with:
BBBB
Non-randomly clusten:r/: A A A A A A B B B B
q
Non-randomly separared:B A A EA
Example:
Ho: The sheep
q4E4E4B
Mating
No mating
ll
23
in2h
bunk'
(A) and cows (B) are randomly distributed along the feed
response stridulation
Sourc'e: From
AABBBABBBBAABA,,-,
T 2 3 4 Ti'7'-'
14.
Determine:
Q-D2
No:number of A items:6
Nu:number of B items:8
Response
number of runs
Mating
No mating
23
t7
t7
totheisvalueinTableA8,orrisgreaterthanorequaltothevaluein
'fotals
34
34
Table A8,.
than
Q-q2
-6
36
2.1
+6
36
2.1 18
l8
12
Expected
randomlY distributed'
One samPle c'hi-stluare te'\t
(E):total
each category
of response:
ll +23:34
3412:17
if they had
an equal
f :2:4.236
.t ('orrpare the calculated I to the the value in Table ,{9 with a degree of
ll'ccclonr ol' I (df:no. categories- I ). If the calculated f is greater than or
. 2
\x.,-: -[(observed-exPetttq]-0'5]1
exPected
Calculate chi-square,
F10
'l'ltc ('llculatcd
f'enlalc gritsshoppcrs
For example, Butlin et al. (1935) measured whether
ttl tl]alcs strhsctltrctrtly
(Chorthippus brunnneus) that did not give respc-rnse chirps
mated (Table 14.1).
lo
I ('otttplt'tt'tltt'( l:rlrlt' I I ))
( )lr.'r'l tr',1 ( t )) t'' tltt'tl,tl'l ll(llll l 'rlrlt' I I
ll
(o-D
ot-
ltt ',(ltlitt('lt'rl;tlrort'
lltt'l)lll()lttt,rl
l,r'lr\r'r'r
lcst
l'1r1y1l
394
ON PA RAM ETR
IC STATISTICA L I. I,STS
replacement fbr the chi-square test when any o1'the expected tiequencies are (5.
The binomial test determines the probability of obtaining ,r events (the smallest
observed value), or fewer, in one category and l/-"r events in the other category, out
of
category and
l/-.r
of
total of Iy'events.
Experimental half
395
(ue,\
l.
;N
Control half
l1
20
where:
N! means the factorial of
l/
P:expected proportion of r
Q:l-
is the
__ N!_ :
: o,'omial
.r! (I/-r)! (T)
coerficient
Al) or by
As an example, Hews (1988) tested the alarm reaction of toad (Bu.fo boreas)
larvae to chemical cues released from predation by a waterbug on conspecific and
heterospecific larvae. The data in Table 14.3 below are only fbr the tests with preda-
tion on a conspecific larva in the experimental half of the test tank. The 20 larvae
could choose the half of the tank where the predation was occurring (experimental
half) or the other half (control hal0.
We will use an expected probability of 0.50 in eacl-t half of the tank. That is,
P:0.5
and
abilities.
/ A/\
1(-t):\,
N:20
-r:smallest number of larvae choosing half of tank:3
,('):(T)Pxe'r-'
:(
/,('
I
i()ll
).
Thereft>re.0.001 is tltc problrbility ol'lrirvirrg exrtcllv lltt'cc lrtt'r'rtc t'lloosc tlte t'rpt'tintcntirl lurll'ol'llrc llrrrk. il'tlte c\[rr'('t!'11 rtrrrnlrt't is l0 (lr;tst'tl ()ll iln t't1tt;tltltsltilrtt
I
r,il
l0\
1t(0)
140x0.5r)(0.5r7)
'
Q: I -P:0.5
:(l
)r'Q'
.l)
t
,,i"''s",10'5r{);: l(l)(9.53'):9.53
0.(x)l+l.gl
ir
i
396
t4.l.tb
Ar
Az
xt
r
-trz
xzt
,\,I -1
-Y^.
t7
xzz
l,:
i:
.r^
_Y.
lil
Mann-Whitne1, U test
The Mann-Whitney [/ test is the nonparametric counterpart of Student's l-test lor
independent samples. Whereas tl-re r-test determines significant differences between
means, the Mann-Whitney U test uses the medians to test for a significant difference in the location
;N
rs 95"1, as powerf
(Mood, 1954).
This test can be used when the data are, at least, ordinal. For large samples, the
Mann-Whitney U Test is more powerful than the Kolmogorov-Smirnov Test; for
Ranks
Population A
Population B
sample
Population A
Population B
sample
sample
sample
4.7
8.t
l0
5.3
t5
4.2
t2
3.6
6.7
5.1
9.5
4.0
ll
t3
l6
2.7
4.1
r.8
3.8
7.8
t4
1.3
1.4
Sum
of the ranks
: ?": 68
very small samples, the Kolmogorov-Smirnov Test is more powertul (Siegel and
Castellan, 1988). If the samples are correlated (paired or matched), use the
Wilcoxon matched-pairs signed-rank test. The use of both the Mann-Whitney U
test and the Wilcoxon matched-pairs signed-rank test on independent and paired
where:
(J
mockingbirds.
As an example, we will use samples of song durations from two populations in
which the variances are obviously ditferent; that is, an F-max test would be expected
these
r:
(7
x9 ) +1(7
%:trrN.
4
-_
Ur:
-,68
63 + 28
1l1p1- 23
68
23
40
N.:9
in Table
Al0.
Llr:23
Procedure:
Ur:40
Rank the data (Table 14.4) using both samples. The smallest measurement gets rank no.1.
{',
,NrN,
' ,'
I ,ry.(,ry.
ll)
(f;
in our cxanrplc
ol'thc
'[.lrcrc is
a sigrlilicant difference if either of the observed
values (u, or ur) is
r'tlttttl ltt ttr lr't't' lltutr lhc tabular vetlue.
Hence, in our example the song durations are
rr,t 5;ig11ilit'lrrrtly tlillcrent between the two populations.
This you would suspect,
'tttt't' lllct'c is cl).t1gl1 v'ariubility in Sample B to overlap the values
in Sample A; we
( iur scc tlrrs bcltcr.itr gr.irphic
litrm (Figure l4.l).
It, t f 1 1
1.1,,
1.,,
t,,\'
t t t i t. t t t t
t. I lt.r t
.t, t t t
I t I t,
I t,,s,
398
10
399
o.f
Herd A
Herd B
43
24
62
3l
Song Duration
47
IJ
35
ll
Population
14.
l9
69
1-
AB
Fig.
8l
29
64
Graph of hypothetical data on song duration from two populations of songbirds.
if
l8
l8
21
89
43
67
tl
59
ratio, they are analyzed as an ordinal scale, which means that resolution is lost.
Therefore, a parametric statistical test (Student's l-test) wor-rld normally be used if
65
t2
28
the criteria (section l2.l.l) are met; however, when the sample size is small the
Kolmogorov-Smirnov test is96"l' as powerful as Student's l-test (Dixon, 1954).
I
Small suntples The procedure below is used when the number of measurements is
':25 in both
the
duration of leeding bouts are significantly dilferent between two sn-rall herds of deer
lrorn dilferent habitats but with the same sex and age composition (Table 14.5).
Procedure:
1J:rnaximum [q,-^t,,]
with ratio data. the scale of measurements must be divided into intervals.
An interval should be selected such that no single interval contains more
than two to three ffreasurements. Each sarriple is then arrangcd in orcler ol'
llrc litrgest
l)
Calculate the ratios of the cumulative freqr-rencies til thc lolrrl rrurnbcr ol'
measurernents in each sample.
/,:
(llcxl A)
(I
lctrl lf t
,\
t;llto ol ( untrrl;rltrt'ltr'tIrt'rrt \ lo
//
0 9l
(r
0.333:0.583
cst st:rlisric-0.-5t{3X I 2X
2:
g3.95
''
rrr
vitlue of.
ll,'r,l ll
L TI:STS
NON PARAMETRIC STATISTICA
Interval
(no. minutes)
Rearranged
Cumulative
measurements
frequencies
Herd A
Herd B
Herd A
Herd B
Ratios
(s,,,)
Herd
(s,,)
Herd B
Rejected during
By ejection
By desertion
0.000
0.000
0-4
Day I
l0
0.000
0.000
5-9
Day 2
0.166
0.000
Day
2t
t4
0.250
0.250
Day 4
2t
18
0.411
Day
l0-14
I 1,12
15-19
18
20-24
25-29
30-34
17, I 8,
l9
21,24
0.250
25
20
28,29
0.250
0.583
Day 6
29
23
3l
0.250
0.667
Day
3l
24
0.250
0.750
_1
31
24
t0
0.333
0.833
0.333
0.916
il
ll
0.333
0.916
1l
0.411
0.916
ll
0.583
0.916
t2
0.750
1.000
l0
l0
l2
l2
0.833
1.000
('ompare the calculated test statistic to the tabular value (Table Al2) for the appro-
0.833
1.000
1.000
lrriate values of m, n and level of significance. The tabular value for nt:12, n:12 at
/':0.05 is 72. Since our calculated value of 83.95 is larger than the tabular value of
1.000
35-39
35
40_/.4
43
47
43
4549
50-54
s5-59
59
60-64
62,64
67,69
65-69
7
65
t-\
70-74
5-19
80-84
8l
ll
t2
0.916
85-89
89
l2
l2
1.000
m:12
Totals:
n--12
Total rejected:
D:0.916-0.333:0.583
Test statistic
F1o
0.583
x l2x l2:83.95
B.
trrblc and procedures are necessary depending on whether you are conducting a one-
S,,,
and
S,,.
D:maximum 1S,,,-S,,
Test statistic:
Dxmxn
rr';ts
tt,;)
lrcv nrclrstrrcrl
t hc nunrber
'l lrr rrscrrlch tlucstitln wirs whcther the distribution of times to reject the model
AswestatedatthebeginningofthisexampleoLlr(]uCSti()llwllswlrctltcr.tllct.cislr
.r'the rlcc'i. thcsc tw. rrc.trs' rlre'clir'e'
significant duration in the t-eeding b.uts
tlrr'
r-rcrwccrr rrrc ri'ctrirrg trrrrrri.rrs irr
.ur H,, is that thcrc is .. sig.iricurt triflL.r.c,cc
\'l
\O
lttttl
'lr)
't'.c llr'gcs I ttltsttlttlt' tlil'li'rcrlt'e is ;rt llrt' ittlt'trltls .l 'l\
twtr lrerrls.
tttittttlt's (lltt's;ttltt';ts il
,'l'l's lry
rlr'se
l'tot't'rltltt':
)t'lt'r trrrrrr'llrr't rrrnrrl,rlrrr' lrr'r1ttt'rrr'r('\ iul(l t;rlios lilt'clrcIt 1'rct'itltl, tts irt
l;rlrlt' l,l
li
402
.I.I]S
I.S
1,S
I(
403
;N
than the tabular value (5.99), we lail to rcject our hypothesis that the nests
Sntirrutv tt:o santple test.fbr large
Table 14.8. Calcttlations .fbr the Kolmogttrov
14.7
,samples using thc data.fiont Table
ence betweefl S,,,and S,,. Since we are testing whether there is a significant
Ratios of cumulative
frequencies to total
Ejection
within
Ejection
(S,,,)
ence.
Desertion (S,,)
0.322
2 days
l0
l4
0.166
ll
0.451
0.458
3 days
2l
l4
0.677
0.583
4 days
ZI
18
0.611
0.750
5 days
25
20
0.806
0.833
6 days
29
23
0.935
0.958
7 days
3l
24
1.000
r.000
I day
D:maximum 1S,,,-S,,
D:0.322-
0.
166:0.
166
ru
Total
critical value of
24:n
3l:tn
rejected:
will
D:
.-16 /f '"
*t
V \mxn/
:trrlt:-,;)
:(1.36)v0.0739
:0.370
would be:
D:maxirnum (S,,-S,,,)
is at 4 days where
The largest dill'erence in the predicted direction
: 0'677'
S,, : 0.750 and S,,,
Wull Wollowit:
D:0.150-0.671:0'073
rForalargesample,one-tailecltest.achi-squarevalueisnowcalculatedas
follows:
- tttXn
/\i:4D: tltl
tt
:4(0.07_t r.
:,1(o.oo5)
3l x24
,,
(I
l.ike the Marnn Whitney U test and the Kolmogorov-Smirnov test this test is used
to tcsl thc 11,, that that there is no significant difference between two indepenclent
srrrnplcs. It wrll re'ject F1,, if the two samples difler significantly in either lorm or locatirrrt. lt is appttxiniately J5'Y' as powerful as Student's l-test for sample sizes of
rr1'rpnrxinrirtcly 20 (Srnith. 1953). Since it is less powerful than the Mann Whitney L/
It'st lrrrtl llrc Kolrnog()rov Smirnov test, the primary advantage of this test is its simlrlrcity.
n2O
3.53) -0.21
11'1
t,trltlr'r'rl,t II1rr'II,rlrlt'
1,1
tr,
Feeder Type B
sample
sample
(;N
dent measurements when using chi-square has bcen emphasized by many authors,
including Kramer and Schmidhammer (1992). Whether the chi-square is a good-
16
ll
The application of chi-square with two samples is described below; its use with
three, or more, samples will be discussed later in this chapter. It is used with nominal
data and compares observed frequencies with frequencies that would be expected in
l8
15
t2
t1
13
10
15
t4
Procedure:
Runs:
Number of runs
less
rnore often:
'
'
'
'
Parental choice:
Maternal, 35
Paternal,12
Total47
Procedure:
('):4
2 obtain the tabular value from Table A8 r. If the observed value is equal
or
to
0'05 level'
thanthetabular value, then the //o is rejected at the
(o-Ef
ti
ference between
ll
t'lri-stluru'c lcsls whct'c lltc rlcgrcc ol'll'ecrlonr is I (e.9. Parker, 1979). This
is ol'tcrr rccor)mlcnclcd
lt
i'.s
t1
tut
rt'
gt tt t tl t t t"s't - r t l - I i
t"t
t'
I tt' t )'\(
tt)
)I
t'
tt'tl)
l r pr't lr't l
{l
',1'
406
Table
(o-
(O)
Maternal
35
23.5
5.63
Paternal
t2
23.5
5.63
Total
47
47
Srturce ;
n.26
'n:
i,
N,- Ntlttlbcl-rll'
re
\rl
\'
N,P2
- -:
N.
pl1
'ry'
r
I
il
vt
0.4-s
0.
l-i.s
-0.63s)+0.635(r -0.6.rs)l
22
3' 103
i1
22(.41)+22(.86\':0.635
22+22
0.41-0.86
N,
,ryr/'r Lry,/',
l'
/l o.o.rs1r
Pr P:
nt*rr t -rrrl
Percetltage of
/\y'r
the percent-
rtt -
where:
N tPt+
2l- ,, Pt-l):
Lll t tl pl p(l ll Nr -t
Calculate:
P,
44
Nr:22 Pr:0.86
Vt
of l\t'| Percentlges
{L
22
(fed intact. live honeybees) and control toads (t-ed dead honeybees, with stinging
apparatus removed) ate droneflies (honeybee mimic) in different proportions (Table
I 1.26 is larger
1/, '
22
l6
N,:22 P-0.41
significa.t dirlerence
This test is used to determine whether-there is a
samples (or treatments)'
ages (proportions) of a response in two
fl
(14'Y,,)
For example, Brower and Brower (1962) determined whether experimental toads
(59"1,)
0.05 level.
of
than the tabular value (3.84) we reject the H,,
paternal
and
the maternal
a unifbrm distribution of choices between
parent
that the larval cichlids chose the maternal
7,
28
If Z:-+1.96
./,
19
(86"1,)
4.tt).
Test
Total
of
toads
l3
Totals
lated x2
Control
Rejected dronefly
l4' l '2b)'
square 2x2 testof indepenclence in section
figures calculated in Step 2
the
summing
by
value
obtain the chi-square
Experimental
toads
(41"/,')
Ate dronefly
ExPected (E)
Observed
Response
Response
E\2
Choice
l4.ll.
401
(
l)r ll)( )r I r(
No'
)n\
;r t t'
V I)t'( ilrt'll (l)('t\ (()nunun ) t,llr'r', llrc loll,'rvin1, ,",rtlirln wltctt ttsittg this test:
l;rLr'llrt',,rrr;rllt'r ,,1 llrt' lrr,, r,rltt,",7r o1 | /,,nr(l trrrtlltllr, rl ltr tltr'stttttllct' ,N. il'thc
Itorlrrt I r', ', llt,'tr llr,' t,tltu,,rtt lr, tnlr tlrl lr'rl ,t, ,r / r:tlttt' tl ttol. lltt'sl;rtistit'
(;N
variance
Habitat A
Habitat B
Habitat C
sample
sample
sample
Habitat A
4.4
6.9
9.2
3.4
7.1
8.1
l0
6.1
5.2
8.3
t7
t2
t4
3.8
4.3
7.2
ll
4.1
8.2
9.1
13
8.9
t6
l5
Ru:43
Rc:85
5.0
RA :25
Habitat B
Habitat C
When 0'365
cannot be interpreted. In the example above, p:0.635 and 1 -p:0-365'
is
is multiplied by the smaller N (22) the product is 8.03' Since 8'03
erly interpret
3.103 as a
Z value.
I4.l.tc
ry
Nj
(43)r:369.80 (81)t:
Q5\2
56
Do4.r7
R,2
11.
I n x R,2\
,
H--t
\N(N+ I ) Ni,,l-3(N+l)
whe re:
N:total
number of measnrements
12 x(1678.14)l-ltr7+l;:11.79
u II .^ .'-lTrl)
ll7(
l
I
Rank all the measurements from the three populations us ollc gr()tlp
beginning with rank I for the smallest measuret.llent. Il'tics occttt'
lltc tllc:tlt
between two or more meilsurcntcnts. lrssigrt cltclt tttcttstll'clllcllt
Wltcn lltctc irt'c tlu'cc srrnr;-tlcs antl thc nurlber of measurements in each
ol tltcs;rrnlrlcsis'5.('()nll):rt't'llrt'r-'rrlcrrl:rlcrl //tollrcvalueinTableAll.
Wlti'tt lltt'tt':rtt'lltrt't'()r nl(|tr,'s;rtttltlt's rrrrtl '5 nlelstu'ctttcttls itt citCh
ll lttl
lte t'lri-st1rr:tt'c
410
df:3 - I :2
;N
4n
Tabular i0115..:5.99
Habitat A
and Habitat B.
Since our calculated H ( I L78) is larger than the tabular chi-square value
110
un:fr:r
5t6:4.2
ur:ff:0315:8.6
N: l7
No:6 N*:5
t
| ''
,:u#,':tr:#,
k:3
n,tu r\
to: It
on s):3'oo5
V
This test can be used to determine which pairs of samples differ significantly when
the null hypothesis is rejected by the Kruskal Wallis one-way analysis of variance
test.
:t.44
Procedure:
from Habitats
.',: Ru-Fn
SE
Where:
C and perhaps
find out.
-R^
R^:j
^No
n.-:&
nN*
that would
where:
sF:
/f
rutru+ t11
L tz
I \l
t,ro*our/-l
Compare the calculated Q to the vuluc in Tahle A 1.5 lirr thc tlcsirctl lcvcl
of significancc ancl wherc /i is thc totirl rtrrrrrbcr ol'sirrrrplcs. ll'tlrt't';rlctt-
latctl
(1974).
where:
N:total number ol
be
s;-rccics
tlitllt sltowtr irr 'lirblc 14. l't lirrn (r0 nrrlcs lntl thcn ASSLrffle a
uniform expecled distrihttlion h.v;rssillltirrg ct;rr;rl lrrrrulrt.r.s (.)0) lo r..trt.lr tr.cc sl-rccics.
lllt'ttutttlrcr ol
rlt.l,l(.t"s
ol lrt.t.tl,ln
412
of
.I.IlSTS
(;N
trees
samples
No. males
observed singing
Tree
oJ'
Expected lrequencY
(-B) based
on equal
Q_D)
E
Species
distribution
38
20
16.2
10
20
5.0
t2
20
3-2
Tables
60
60
independent variable
Al
Al
Bl
A2
xzt
-r 2l
xtz
xzz
x 22
,,,
;,,
r2n
-rr
:24.4
that the
exceeds the tabular values even at alpha level 0.001. Therefore, we conclude
male songbirds do not sing equally from all three tree species.
14.1.2
Table 14.16. The priority rcttios.fbr obtaining./bod relative to the hatching order
v'ithin sibling cuttle egret dyuds
TWO VARIABLES
Priority ratio
Elder sib
Hutching order
are used. Therefore, for one sample of two indepenclent variables, the appropriate
'
'
All of
Younger sib
525
362
t2
(53e)
(348)
99
40
3-4
(8 5)
(s4)
-fotals
624
402
887
t39
1026
lYttlt,:
I'he observed (o) measures are the upper figure in each cell. The Expected
values are provided lor each cell (in parentheses)
Totals
(t)
lrtr,\t' ,t'tttttltlt'.s' As ittt cxanrple, Fujioka (1985) studied sibling competition in the
rtlllr' r'1lrt't ( lilrlrttlt'rr,s'ilrii). 1'hc priority nrlios tirr obtaining food relative to the
Irtlr'lttttl', ortlt'r uitlrirr srlrlirrl, tlvlrtls \\,('t(.ntelsrrrcrl (-l'itblc 14.16). The priclrity ratio
rr,ts lltt'pt'tt'r'nl;t1't'ol lttttr'()n('\rl) olrllrrncrl lirrxl 111,r111 llre plrrcnl pl'ior ttl the other
t
)
tlttlc
This test is uscrl ttl rlctcrprirlc lhc rlcgrcc ol'ttssocilttiott lttttolll: nl('irstllr'.s itt tw'o
ll ts
rltt
tltltlt'
ol
;rrrulltr't
()l
lll()lt'slttttplt':'
t\\'()
llll(l
vlrtiltlllc
pCtttlcttt slttttgtles ol'tlttc
lr1'1,1'1'11
',ttrrtrll,t,r'r
rt1',11
ON PARAM ETR
COMPLETELY RANDOMIZEI)
IC STATISTICA L I.I:S-IS
values, and
Continuity when calculating the chi-square value lor each cell. The correction
t"tuf
order l-2):
For example, for the upper left cell (elder sibxhatching
x62!:
887
Expected:- W26
lQ!ryrw9spglrq qil'
expected
Once again, there is controversy over the necessitity of this correction, including
9!..rved- exPected )2
x.,-.
-1
expected
.
fig
(f):
Calculate chi-square
Expected:--C*rA
l)llsl(;
recommendations that
it not
Sokal and Rohlf, 1981) or not used at all (e.g. Howell, 1992).If the researcher wishes
(O- Dz
Cell
of
Elderx 1-2
0.363
Elderx3-4
2.305
l-2
YoungerX3 4
0.563
chi-square test it can be used when one, or more, expected values are less than 5. We
3.629
YoungerX
f
3 Compare
format as above:
:6.86
the calculated
)(No' columns
- I ):
Al
A.
Row totals
Bl
RT,
B2
RT,
CT
CT
Column totals
Hu of no association is rejected'
(see Everitt'
have investigated the validity of this recommendation
(van Hoof' 1982)' The
acceptable
be
may
0.5
as
gested that expected values as small
8,.,,) is:
format tbr two samples of two variables (Ar.rand
Al
A2
Row totals
P-
'ilrc probability can be calculated using a hand-held calculator or the factorial table
('l'irhle Al). The probability should be <0.05 to reject the null hypothesis of a
r
Bl
B.
Colum
otals
A+C
B+D
A+B
C+D
(.ll) /l(')'N
,
x t t I /l)(('l /))( I I ('x/lr /))
:r
rtrlortt tlistribution.
A scconrl nrcthocl
l' rrrrtilog(/'(')
rrltr'tr'
/
('
(1,,1'll I ,! t lo1'll
l, ,1'
,r I
,!) llt(
i'l'!
NON PARAM
Table
l4.ll.
q
The e.ffect
oJ"
rearing condition
d'
Parental choice
Rearing condition
Maternal Paternal
Totals
Predators Present
23
l0
JJ
Predators Absent
t2
l4
Totals
35
l2
47
diagonal cell as d.
becomes
As an example, Vives (1988) studied parent choice by larval cichlids that were
reared under two treatments: f . in the presence of predators of fry, and 2. in the
absence of predators of fry. Later, the free-swimming fry were placed in an aquarium where they could choose to stay in close proximity to their mother, father or
neither. The data in Table 14.17 are for the young that chose one of the parents.
P:antilog
(31 .1
8.
680)
59.4 I
3l .l 59
37 .9 52
hypothesis of
I4
being reared with, or without, predators of fry had no effect on which parent the
larval cichlids chose.
For a test of significance of a one-tailed test, we must obtain the total probability
for the observed values plus the probability for all the more extreme values (as in the
Keeping the marginal totals fixed, reduce the smallest value by I. adjusting the other values in the cells accordingly, and calculate thc ncw proba-
is 0.
Acld thesc probahilitcs togcthcr to ohtrrin lhc tollrl prrrblrbility lirr tlrt'
onc-lirilctl lcst. Mtrltiplv tlris probrrhility lry.) to olrl:rirr llrt';rrolr:rlrililv lirr
Ir lu,,o l:rilt'tl t(.st (Si(.,'(.1. l()\(r; Sok;rl;rrrrl l(olrll l,tHl)
table, b
c,.
p,:
,o.d ,(p)
DC
At
Bt Jrr
82 xn
B..Jr:
;,,
.,,,,
Ke ndul l's
t, o
qffic ient
of
onc, o
rdance
of
19 turnstone
measures; he then determined the correlalir. .r,r..g thc rrrks ror the difrerent measures (Table l4.
rg).
Tir illtrslt'itlc tltc ttse tll' Kenclall's coelficient
of concordance we,ll reconstruct the
lltblc rts il'.rtly :'icvcll lcrrilorics ( rl 7) hlrtl
been ranked using only three measures:
tttttttlrt't lttttl tlt'ttsi(y ,1'cltit.tt.rrritls. ;rrrtl
l.ttrtt.t'tlcnsity (T.ble 14.l9).
rrrtntllt.t st,ls
ol
r;rrrk
rrrl,s
l)l:SI(iN
COMPLETELY RANDOMIZED
418
419
Larid
s
w-_
MP
Chironomid
Chironomid
Lurus
Sternu
no.
density
density
density
density
Y4
YI
Y4
where:
S:sum of
squares
R-
N1
Y2
Y5
Y3
Y2
Y4
Y1
Y1
Y1
Y3
Y3
Y3
Y4
Y5
Y5
Y6
Y2
Y3
Y6
Y5
Y5
Y6
Y4
Y6
o1
Y6
Y2
o2
o6
o3
T2
o1
o2
N1
o4
T1
T2
o5
o5
o1
Y2
o4
T1
N2
YI
o4
TI
N2
N1
NI
o6
o6
TI
o1
N3
o6
o3
o3
Y7
N3
NI
T2
o7
o4
O3
o2
o5
o2
o5
N2
N3
N3
ol
TI
o6
o7
T2
N2
o1
o4
T2
o3
o1
o2
o5
Y7
N3
Y1
Y7
:I(Ri- R,lN'
:
MP:
IR,lN:8417:l2l
(
II
tD2 + O
12)2
+ ... (21
tZlt -- rrO
is,
if
the
lt
l2K-(N'-,Y): I 29(313-ll:252
s : 134 :0.53
I4'-MP
252
The value of 0.53 reflects the degree of agreement between the three mea-
o1
sures
of territory quality.
of
W can be determined by
comparing the value of S to the tabular value (Table A l6) at the appropriate level of significance. Since the calculated S of 134 is smaller than
N2
Y7
of
157.
n'
,l11,,
the three measures of territory quality are independent. That is, in order
to show a significant association the l/,, must be rejected (i.e. the calcuNote:
of concordance:
The rankings are essentially the same by Kendall's coefhcient
W:0.698,
Source:
sqLrare villue, as
Tindall'
From whitfield (1986). Copyrighted by Bailliere
Table 14.lg.
U,se
of
territories
three ntensures to rctnk the quulity o.f seven turnstonc
r'-,s1
I
tll'--
Territort'
Y1
Y2
Y3
Y4
Chironomid number
Chironomid densitY
-1
Luru,r density
3157
5461
1451
ll
()
()
()
/r
I
rrr
Wlrrllrt'ltl
( l()S(r)
Y5
Y6
Y7
:K(N-l)w
,)K(//)(l/+
l/-
follows:
I)
('lri
()
l(,
ll
I lrrr lt'rl r\ lr\('(l lo tlr'lt'r trrirtt'ulrt'llrcr lltt'tc is;r sil'nilir';rttl rrssocittlitln betwccn mea',ur('\tnlt\o1;ltrtlrlt's.trtlltr'.rrtrr1,l,",ol ()n('r;ttt:tlrlt'lrttrl/'slttttltlcsrll'lltcrtthCr. Itis
r,tlr ttl,rlr'rl ttt lltt'',,lnr(' \\.1\ ,r', \\,r',,1,".r trl',',1 pr('\ l()rt',1\ lot lltt' .) ' .) ('lti-st1tIil'c lc:;l
,'l tn,l,'lr('n(lr'n( r' r'\r ('lrl llt,tl llt, t, t.,r l,rty,, t trtttrrl,i t ,'l r r'll',
males and
song types shoretl between replacen'tettt
(i
14.2
l'>A I
l{S
Previous owner
Other males
276
117
62
ll
37
54
Neighbors
15
B2
At
trr t
Xtz
Xlu
Block,s
Bl
A2
J:r
xzz
Notes:
uo,':6'57, P:0'4'
comparisons between replacement
Figures given in the table are the numbers of
(N:26), other males breeding in
males (N:26),previous owners of the territory
varies from year to year'
the same yeaf as the previous owner (the number
range:|7-28),andneighborsofthepreviousmales(variesftom2tol.
,r-ltI
I
z
Each
-r
t.l
individual.
Individuals are blocked across (e.g. block B,) according to some characteristic such as sex, age, litter, place or time.
**ss--4.1+-0.31
I
z
different treatments),4,.
of either
rcpeuted meusures designs in which there are two samples; hence, the matched pairs.
(Table 14.20).
Sign test
r
z
Procedure review:
(CT) and grand total (GT)'
Calculate the row totals (RT), column totals
Calculate the expected values for each cell:
RTXCT
Expected: GT
Cell
p:
(o-
E\:
'fhe sign test is used when the measurements in the two samples are matched (i.e.
blocked or paired). It tests for significant differences in form or location between
lhc two sanrples'measurements. The sign test can be considered a first-approximation tcst whiclr is less powerful than the Wilcoxon matched-pairs signed-rank test
sincc it tlocs not take into account the magnitude of the difference in the paired
nrclsrrrcnrcrrts. It is95"/,' as powerful as the paired /-test when the sample size is
.\s;rnollrr'l r'rlrnrplt'.\\('\\rlltt'.r',l,rl.r',tnttl;rt lollrost'tt't't'otttpttt'ctl willttltcstitn,l;rtrlr'tror ol llrr'tltllt'tr'ttr r'ltr'ltrr'r'tt lltr'nrr',rn', ,',rt ltt't ttt lltts t'lt;tPlt't ( l'rrllle l-1.]l).
422
L'I
Bout No.
Age (v)
Sign
sample
4.6
4.1
5.3
5.1
4.4
3.2
3.1
4.2
6.4
3.1
5.3
4.1
4.7
4.5
4.8
3.6
5.0
2.9
+
+
+
+
+
10
4.4
3.0
+
+
I c' o
ro n mat
ch
tl-pai rs
Sound-enriched Sound-impoverished
Differences
Rank
8.2
6.2
-2.0
l.t
4.3
-2.8
1.5
5.4
-2.1
6.8
1.3
7.8
7.9
8.1
l.l
6.9
2.0
-4.9
1.4
8.0
0.6
5.5
0.1
1.0
the standard error of the difference between the means that we used on similar data.
tr4/ i I c o
^r,,^
/r\;f f
tscoreeachpairofmeasurementsasaplus(+)ifthenreasuretnenttn
the
Table 14.21).
of obtaining L or f.ewer
s().p
tcsl rir'sigririclrrrt tri|ri'r'e rrt't's be rrvce ,
tlrt'
:r tr'st r.r srl,rrrrrr';rrrt rrrrti'tt'rrt.lr.rr't't'rr
Prprrlrrri.rrs is l. rrlirize
(
r.
trr
t c lt e
d- p u i r s
s ig
ne tl- r u n k
tes
of its
use
see
Slotow cr
1993).
lltt'tl'tl't
)ttt'"ttt ll ttlt';lstllt't''
were
nrrtchcrl uccording to age, lour to each age group, and randomly assigned to one of
lwo Ir'catnrcnts: I. maintained in a sound-enriched environment: and 2. maintained
sountl-inr1'roverisltccl environment. After they had been in tlie treatment conditions lirr tu,o wccks wc nrclsr.u'crl thcir song durations when placed individually in
,ur olrst. rvlrlion trrorrr ('l.rrblc l-l.ll)
rrr rr
VisualinspectiontlftlreclatitsttggcststhirtstltrgtlttrittitlrllilrllrlllttllttittrrAis
(lrtt;lli()ll\
lltt'r;ttt;tlrtltll
nt u
counterpart of the paired samples /-test (above). Mood (1954) concluded that this
tcst is 95"/uas powerful as the paired /-test, but Blair and Higgins (1985) demon-
,11. (
(e.g.95,,/u:0.05),weconcludethatthedilferenceitrstlttgtlttrlttitltt
rw.
small even fbr normal distributions. and overall the Wilcoxon test is more of,ten the
of the
This test. like the sign test (above). is used when the measurements in the two
samples are matched (i.e. blocked or paired). It tests for significant dilferences in
Iocations (medians) of the two samples'measurements. lt is the nonparametric
strated that the power advantages of the paired / test over the Wilcoxon test are
rrrrrrt tlrc
Wi
Procedure:
PoPulation B
sample
th
423
see text )
Population
l'A I ItS
I:l)
I:STS
l'to1'1'11111r'
(r iplrt
t'tllttrltlt
Rank the scores (ignoring the signs). The lowest score gets rank no. I
On Perch
r:
less
t,A I t{S
After l5 min.
Calculate
l:t)
Off
Perch
frequent sign.
T:l*2:3
On perch +
A: 19
B:
Off perch
Cl:5
D:l
Calculate the
f:
a
()
()I
!
0.
17
Tabular T,.,ur:4
If
O- ll2
r:' [(B-Bi-
i"is
less
ence between the two samples and conclude that the type
:(L_- j)-_1ll
of sound envi-
t7
t2t
___5
22
McNemar's test
The McNemar test is a variation of the chi-square test used to determine the direction and extent of change in pairs of repeated measures (e.g. the same individuals
+5
{
are measured before and after treatment). For example, Tokarz (1985) used
McNemar's test to analyze data on whether male brown anoles (Anolis sagrei)
perched higher or lower in their cage, before and after encounters with larger and
smaller males.
Procedure:
-)
and Cell C
(-
to +)
Alter
+
0)
1r
()
B
D
rc p c tt I ed
tttc
individual
tt,t ttt.t,,t).
snritllcr rttitlcs ol'tlrc lltit's. lt sltows tlte tttttttllt't ol'tltttlt's ott ( i )ot oll'
( )tlre perclr.lrr'lorr'tlrc lt'st ;rrrtl I5 nun ;rll('r t('nlovttlol lltr'P;ttlittott
lrt'l rvt't'tt I ltr' I rt ( | lll;l l('\
(.
2.
ON PA RAM ETR
f,
c.)
aaa
a c-a
'i9o
.'Xcs
a 4
a
o
aaa
0.)
IC STATISTICA L'l'lrS'l'S
a
o
ao
a
oo
aa
aaa
a
o
spec'ies
o
a
a
a
a
a
Independcnt
variable
X-axis
Fig. 14.2 Scattergrams
Activity units
(flights/5 min.)
Individual
A
l2
14
D
of hypothetical data illustrating: (1) no correlation; (2) low positive
correlation; (3) perfect positive correlation; and (4) perfect negative correlation.
Song frequency
(songs/min.)
-1
r8
l6
t5
ll
l3
Figure 14.2 illustrates how the data are plotted with the dependent variable on
the Y-axis and the independent variable on the X-axis. The examples illustrate: l. no
correlation; 2. low positive correlation: 3. perlect positive correlation: and 4. perfect
negative correlation.
The two correlations described below Kendall's tau and Spearman's rho, are
both used with ordinal, interval or ratio data. Both correlations generally have the
same power to detect an association (Siegel, 1956). However, if there are no tied
ranks Spearman's rho is the prelerred statistic sir-rce it uses both the direction and
the difference in magnitude of the ranks. If there are severaltied ranks use Kendall's
tau (Nonnan and Str-einer, 1986). Both Kendall's tau and Spearman's rho are
approximately 9l(Zr as powerful as Pearson's product moment correlation coefficient (Hotelling and Pabst, 1936).
th
i' ro
(J
lix
al0
ll.l.l)
sltrrt.llill' 't .,
',,1t'ty,1
20
So11;'
I rl I I
('(lll('tt( \'
itllrl
s1r11l
lictltrcrrt.,y.
(SCC
428
NON PARAMETR
IC STATISTIC A L I. I:STS
X variable
Activity units
Individual
Table 14.25. DiJ/brent'es betn,een lha runks ol tlrc tncu.\urenents in Tuble 14.24./br
culculution o.f' Speurntan's rho (see te,rt )
X variable
), variable
lndividual
rank
rank
-1
variable
Song frequencY
Rank
oJ
429
d?
Rank
z
t2
l4
l8
t6
F'
F
G
15
ll
13
assigned X and Y
Rank the measurements for each variable, arbitrarily
(Table 14.24).
ll N-2 \
I:rho ll /v - I
either
measurements within a variable are equal, then
been
have
would
that
ranks
assign to each of them the average of the
tau (below)' especially
assigned had they not been equal, or use Kendall's
If two or more
V\l-rhc,f
Compare the calsulated 'r'with the tabular value (Table .{5), where:
df: N -2.|f the calculated r is larger than the tabular /, at the appropriate
if
P value. then the Huof no correlation is rejected. Although some statisticians have recommended always converting rlio to 'r', Siegel and
Castellan
l9 whenever
ly' is less
than 50.
6(>d2l
-1r_1U
where:
,d2
Procedure:
: 6:
determinewhetheritisastatisticallysignificantcorrelation.
,.:
Total
z-r'ho V'N-
lirr
6(6) :,_19:l_o.l07:0.89
_ _,_
t- l+t-l-'P,:
336
il :
is >1.64.
lrrrr I rkc SPr'ru lnlul s rlto. Kcrttltrll's tlrrr rlctcrrnines the tendenc:y of two
r.utI r,trlt'ts ol rlrrl;t lo llt':rtntl.rt hr'trtllrll's llru rs l)r('lr'rrctl wltctt thcrc ttrc several
hr'tttltrll':
When N<50:
('()llrl)ltl.cllrcclrlt'rrltrtr.'tl tllo(0s())r"itlrtltt'lltlrttl:tt
r;llttt'(llrlrlt'Il())lol
Irr'rI tltttks
430
ON PARAM ETR
Tuble
Table 14.26. Arrongement o.f'the runk'; ffutm
(st'c
te'tt )
t4.24 for c'alculutiort of' Kenclall's tau
Column I
Activity units
(flights/5
Individual
iorts
Song lrequencY
(songshnin')
two measures
Spearman's rho in order to compare the
Column 2
min.)
of association' Although
Individual
F'
S:2(
l9)-
Kendall's tag will yield a lower coeffithey are consideletl to be equally powerful,
dztta, because they have difl-erent
cient valge than Spearman's rho, on the same
underlying scales.
Calculate tau:
Procedure:
quel]cyranks(Table|4.21).Donotcountties.Forexample,belowindi.
vidual A there are five individuals (B' G' C' F
ranks'
larger activity unit ranks aucl song frequency
(Figure
14.3)arlcl lirr each
scattergram
Another method is to use the
largcr x ancl Y
have
which
inclividual count the uumber of individr'rals
right antl rtbttvc in thc
variable measurements (i.e. those incliviclr-rals to thc
+ Calculate
,s:2,s
If
19
17
tAU:
stltl
N(N
- r)/2 t0 - tll2
:0.8
2t
if
there
As predicted the tau of 0.81 is smaller than tlre rho of 0.89 calculated
itbove on the sarne clata.
Compare the calcr-rlated tau to the tabr-rlar value (Table A20). If the calcu-
4, of no significant correlation is rejected. Since our calculated tau (0.81) is larger than the tabular
lated value is more than the tabular value then the
tau (0.63), we reject tlie I1,, of no significant correlation and conclude that
thcrc is a significant positive correlatior-r between activity and f requency of
s()ng. The size
431
rr is 1'rosit
,Arr irrvcrsc
is,
ol course,
a measLrre
of the strength
S:
,ry(N
-)
\r\
lr
l)
li
432
NONPARAMETRICSTATISTICAI-'ll:S'l'S
where:
64 Add
X= thenumber of measurements
lx(x-l
the
IY:
Dice's:
2u : 2(4) :o.go
U 2(4)+2
f,:
2a*
N(N- ll-
Yule's:
-l(,o
T':
W:X/
l0A Obtain
I
lA
N(N-l)_p
2 -K._
eA Calculate
Jttrt'tt rd'.;'.
u4:
a* U 4+2
trZ:
where:
V:TrxT,
M7
:
N9
s
5
above.
:0.78
The diflerent values these coefficients yield from the same data reflect
Frog
:067
Calculate tau:
tau:
M* U:J 1-2:9
- _>[x( x-ll1
nl_
Ta-
433
M:a*d:4*3:7
U: b* t: I -11:2
R,:
1A Calculate
lltS
Frog B
vocalizes'l
vocalizes?
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
Yes
Ntr
Ntr
Ntr
Yt's
Yt's
Ncr
researcher's concept
each
t
:
r
Frog B
Change in variable
Neitlier interpretations I or
2 are
l.
Frog A
434
"'
435
blocked
Sumple,s
A1
ltS
tt britl,v./rutm.fbur habitat,y
I'>A I
Au
Habitat A
r:r
-Y::
\.
Habitat B
Habitat C
Habitat D
10.2
6.5
Sunrise
6.7
8.6
Noon
3.4
4.3
6.5
2.5
Sunset
6.3
8.3
9.9
7.1
_1t
Table 14.29. Ruks of'eot'h rov'o.f nl(osltcments in Tuble 14.28 /br t'alculution
Friedman's lw'o-\ruy unulltsis of variunc'e (,see tert )
o.f'
Habitat A
Habitat B
Habitat C
Habitat D
Sunrise
Noon
Sunset
-)
-5
R*:9
t2
Rr:4
R^
R.:
(Table 14.28).
\
y::( / . ^ll-- x266 I-gtst:53.20-45:8.10
"t
\12(5) I
Procedure:
(blocks) separately (Table 14'29)'
Rank the measurefilents for each row
and provides a more powerThis minimizes the between-row differences
fultestofthebetween-column(sample;habitat)differences.
Calculateeachoftlreranksums(i.e.columntotals;R.,,Table14.29).
Calculate each of the R.r}s'
Rn':25 Rot:81
Rr't:144
df:N- l:2
tabular 1, ,,.1:5.99
R,rr: l6
Sirrce our calculate<l y,2 (8.20) is larger than the tabular valne (5.99), we
re'icct the l/,,
l:25+
81
+ 144+ 16--266
the different
t2
"
|-3At
tv+ l)
l'rrble
.)/i,'
(ltt'tltttl" ()l([('t.sVslt'ttt*lts
li:nutnbCt'ol t'tlws" tlt'lltc ltttttlllct'ol titttt's
ttsctl
of variance with
lt()t)s.
where:
,l
Compare the calculated X,2 to the tabular value (Table ,{9) lor
'
\,
l^
r,',',,,t",
.'r.'r5 ) ll-l
I t/'( \ I lr
l) )\))
itrl '' l
,/(
5)
replica-
436
431
:154.88- 135.00:19.88
(in saL'ttncls) o/ birtls /rom.fitttr
Table 14.30. IIl,potltetit,al clata on song, duratiort
unctlysis of
periocrs iilustrutirtg Friedtncrn's ru'o-lr'(/I'
hcrbitcrts bktcketr i,to trtree tinte
var iant' e
w' i t
re P
Ii
tabular 1,,,r2:15.51
Since ourcalculated X,r (19.88) is larger than the tabular varlue (15.51), we reject
t'trt i ons
the H,, that there is no significant dif'ference in song duration between birds in the
Sunrise
Noon
Sunset
four habitats.
Habitat D
Habitat A
Habitat B
Habitat C
6.1
8.6
10.2
6.5
6.4
6.9
8.4
5.8
5.5
1.0
9.8
5.9
3.4
4.8
4.6
2..5
2.7
4.1
1.5
0.5
4.r
3.9
7.4
2.9
6.3
8.3
9.9
1.1
5.8
1.0
l.l
6.1
4.9
6.6
8.1
6.7
of
te,st This
in
Friedman's
of
two-way analysis
Procedure:
Calculate 4:
lR, - Rrl
q:1,;,wt)l
JL 6
Where:
surns
Tablel4.3l.Rankso/-eac'hrott'tt.f'ttte(tsttren'tentsinTablel4'30lbrculculationof'
x.ith replic'tttiotts (see te.rt
Frieclnlun,,s l||'()-|l,uy antth,,si,y o.f,vttriutrce
Sunrise
Noon
n:the
Habitat A
Habitat B
Habitat C
Habitat D
-l
-1
.,
a
J
(l ) R, :
Ro: l4
Ro:26
R,rl:676
R,':35
R( ):1225
-)
Sunset
Rn':196
/1,,
1l'
,'
,15
125
of variance (above),
I
p-3
l2 (2) RB:9
clf':r
(3)
u.3
"
11 ,
I v6
('
/1
I '.1(-l)
I
I
1.86
R,r:5
14.29)
(4) Rr:4
N ON PA
438
.f
I:SI-S
Table 14.32. Hltpothetic:'al data on the number ol'trial.; in n'hiclt eac'h tf'.five.juvenile
(oyotes lruw'led in response to eat'lt ofthree trcutments (see terl./or explunation)
Al
A,
A-
:I1CT,z+CTrr.
. . . RT,,2)
df:2
SS,.r:22:* 122+22
:494+144+4:632
SS*.,.
22
. . CT,,2)
l1
K--)
Column
totals (CT)
439
:11RT,:+RTr.
-)
Treatments (samples)
lndividuals
I,A I It
12
7: 1
72
82
+72
:49+49+49+64+49:260
(k- r)(kxss(.r)-c11
Q::
Compare the calculated 4 to the tabular value (Table A.2l ) fbr p comparisons. Since our calculatecl 17 (2.86) is larger than the tabular q at P:0.05
(2.21). we reject the I1,,of no significant diff-erence between the two
(txGT)-ssRr
i
_t[3(632)- l2e6]:
(ix36) _ 260'
t52:7'894
Cochran's Q-rest
of
lll
r200
It
eto
i1l
(1,), adults of their pack (1,), and adults of a distant pack (1.,). We gave eacl.r
juvenile coyote 5 trials of each treatment (Ar r) when it was etlone attcl tneasured
wlretlrer it howled in response, or not (Table 14.32).
mates
ti
Procedure:
Calculate Q:
GT]l
l[lL
r)^_lk- (Axcr)
v-SS,.,
|
xss(
lii
ir
"
wlrcrc:
l,,l
RATES OF BEHAVIOR
1s
More complex problems associated with the analysis of rutes o.f behavior were
addressed by Altmann and Altmann (l9ll). They identified the lollowing questions
that commonly arise when dealing with rates o1'behavior:
What are the expected values of these frequencies if the mean rate of
behavior is independent of class?
sampling(Chapter8);however,AltmannandWagner(1970)describedamethod,
when
fbr estimating rates from one-zero samples
based on the Poisson distribution,
(also see Chapter 8)'
the sample period duration is small
+ What
of behavior per class when the rates are unknown but are
assumed to be constant or independent of class. and the population composition is
a. The expected frequency
,)UM
[r-
N:total number of
In order to illustrate the use of the formula we will use the hypothetical data on
the number of threats in a herd of 50 deer in Table 15. L See Altmann and Altmann
(1977) for an additional example.
We can determine the expected frequency
as
lirllows:
N:100
M:50
late
lll,:
lollows:
I
-5
"M5050
'I lrcrclirrc. tlrc cx1'rcctcrl I'r-crlLrcncv ol'thrcats in adult males is 30 compared to the
p.ttc..ctl ucts
Gaioni and Evans ( lgg4) arguecl that temporally
lilte :
lct'ttts ol' 1'rr\ltir'tl' tltllte t lltlttt t''\lPt'lili()ll
ctlmlnunicatitln) shotrlrl hc tlcsclihctl itt
tltst'tr'lt'
(l()SJ)ltt'Pttt'tl trttt llt;tl lot rtt ts \('l'l('l'"ll('(l ittlo
Itorvcvct'. Millcl lrrrtl llllriell
lrottls. l('lx'titi(rll lill(' is tltt' lrt'tlt'l lltt';lslllt'
of all
to provide an overall estimate of repperiods, and these localized rates are averaged
as
tionally used.
Gottlieb ( 1978).
continuous
independence?
at a
measure of rate for behaviors that occur
sample period. This provicles a valid
events are the same or very similar)'
steady rate (i.e. the periods between successive
will not occur at a steady rate and better
For most behaviors. however, the events
ol'li0.
l lris c;rrr lrc rlortc lirr lrll :rgc clitsscs. ancl then a clti-square
It'st r';rrr lrc tontlttt'lt'rl lo rlt'lt't nulr(' \\ltr'lltt't tlrt'rlil'li'rertccs ltclwectt tltc ohscrvcd
,rnrl
l1
Table
15.1.
oI
RATES OF BEHAVIOR
SIIQUENCES
o/-50 deer
Hypothetic'uldata on the nuntbey ttf'threut's in a herd
Immatures
Total
males
females
15
20
15
50
80
l5
100
Number of individuals
Observed threats
r2)]
:263+314+278:915
Adult
Adult
443
:r
Eu
2,t,t't7.,
ii>:i ;,
: 26s1263 te t s) :
Itl
Therefore, the expected frequency of threats in adult males in this changing pop-
ulation is 75 compared with the observed number of 210. Once again we could make
the same calculations for the adult females and immatures, and then use a chisquare test to determine
if
s.
ur:*t*'L:
u L;21t1t11;1
Eu
:2,2f fl
:the hypothetical
ri
members of class x
where:
E,,:expectedfrequencyofbehaviorrllormembersofclassr
N
2/
fr,,
study
2Ff ,, :total
Lambda,:
x)
2,2,tyt,,:totalsampletimeforallindividualsofallclassesfortheentire
study
(time in sample period oneXnumber of individuals in all
classes)*(timeinsampleperiocltwoXnumberofindividualsin
+ . . (time in final sample period x number of indiall classes)
'
viduals in all classes)
Asanillustration,wewillusethehypotheticaldatairtTablel5.2(seeAltmann
determine the expected freand Altmann. lgJJ, for another example).we can
of changing cort]position as
quency of threats in adult males in this population
lollows:
N
2l
:260
r,,, :[(5x l0)+(
''- -50 +
in the entire
study
individuals in
.y)+ . . . (time in final sample periodXnumber of
=ltimeinsampleperiodoneXnumberofindividualsinclass
't)+(timeinsampleperiodtwoXnumberofindividualsinclass
class
l(r5 I
IIx
l5)+14x l2)l
4l{ 261
.)o)
2/ lrr,
Eu
:0.80x263:210
Therelore, the hypothetical expected frequency of threats for adult males during
the entire sample period (20 hours, Table 15.2) is 210. The total number of males
observed was 37, so that the mean rate per individual was 21 0137
:5.7
l0-hour sample. This hypothetical mean rate can then be compared to the observed
nrcirn rate in this sample or from observations gathered later from the same or a diflcrcnt population.
llrt'
;rssrrrrrptiorr
pr'rrotl
'
80
100:0.80
:(5x l0)+(1 1 x l5)+(4x12):263
ol
fr-
444
()l
SI:QLIENCES
ANALYSIS OF SEQUENCES
Table 15.2. HypothetiL'al cluta on the nutnber of'tltrcut,s itt u lterd of mule tleer
Adult
Adult
males
females
Immatures
l3
4l
60
l8
l3
t5
Number of individuals
l5
20
l5
50
80
l5
100
Sumplapariod2
Suntple periocl
Totals
(5 lt )
Number of individuals
Observed number of tlireats
Sarrtplc period
t0
Golani (1976)developed
3 (4 h)
12
l6
12
40
70
t4
85
1e82).
(llh)
Number of individuals
1,2 and 3)
210
42
260
be designated by the
sr-rffix '-case'.
1977;
en_
((iotani, tgl6')
The temporal relationships between two, or more, behaviors (from thc srrnrc or tlill
ferent individuals) are often complex and dilficult to analyzc. Firr cxirntplc. in s()nre
bird species the malc ancl Icnralc ol'a Puir sirrg scpiu'lrt('l)()rlions ol'lr tlrrcl. citlrcr
sinrultancously (poly1'rlrorticlrlly)or srtcccssivelv (rrttliplr,'rr;rlll ) lloueve t. llrt' lt'rrt
r',r;tttlt'tort l;rtrl
382 J
Michener, 1980) are somewhat complex extensions of the fbrmulae lbr individual
rates of behavior, discussed above, and will not be described here.
r If only d,ring
I Miclrcnt,r, l9B0:
tl"re
dure'.
tance of choosing the correct denomiuator for the lormulae (i.e. the number of indi-
lnteract.
als never occupy the same space. Michener ( 1980) goes on to point out the impor-
445
(around).
'fltcsc p.clixcs
itrtcl sttllixes cun then be combinecl
to descr-ibe the various temporal
t'clrrliorrslril)s
sll()wn in lrrblc
1.5..1.
z;tli.tl
I
.l
sr'tltl('ll('('s
.l
lrt'lt;tr t,t;11
,r.,
;r
,l;rrrlr.l.
,,,\ ,\('(l
1, r11,,11 .,
irr
rlcscl-rbc rlrc
l;rt't.t,l,.trilrg
Table
15.3. vocabulary
,f
p ends just
belore q starts
(contiguous)
..',
starts before
(i'
p ends after q
started but before
17
ended
ll
prevene
with
p ends after
17
ended
ll
L_l
17
started
p ends together
invade
convade
encase
pridure
condure
concede
entdure
postdure
excede
-- slilrts together
rrith
17
ll
supervene
rctrntinguous)
5,,:ri'..'. Adapted from Golani (1976)'
i >
=1
t =-;Ei]a
lie;E,'
: =9 P<
? a 66-:3
H 9E
X*?^1:;f1?3a
ii=--'=
2
a
,rl
rn
i[Ei':IgE,*
Eir
Efi;i;$r
iEiE
ea*
ii uss
s=E iiiaiEa*iraE :iiE
=Ei iE
,eg'E
;=;'
EiiiE
iF ii=: i 16iiiEiAei; ii
=1
t.
iqigsi;Ei#i-E;5=
iaiii
;r
iili
,= :-iii z3 iia; s: "-ii ?ia;ii4l; ii i+q;:
1E
;3#ie
ia
:1
ilittirfa.slelirSl
==1 Ei?uF.* it *a ei *1Ee[5;1i iiStlili
il +i;-$BEE;E; iE;.! E;
i=
=t
=ii"|',"l
C
an
o
an
ANALYSIS OF'SEQUENCES
oI"SITQUENCES
RATES OF BEHAVIOR & ANALYSIS
be stationary (see below). Markov chain analysis should take into account the
of occurrence of sequences based on the frequency of occur-
expected fiequency
100'2,
(stochasticsequence;common) A
Kinematicgraphs(Chapterl8)canbegeneratedwhichshowtheconditional
This is a useful procedure when sequenprobabilities of several different behaviors'
tial eflects are strong'
Thereareseveralexplanationslorwhyonebehaviorisoftenfoundtofollow
particular
morelikelytheyaretooccurtogether.Anextremeexampleofthisisahypothetical
four sequences
behaviors, A and B' only the
animal which is capable of only two
shown below.
1 A-A
2 4-------+B
3 B-=-B
4 B-----'A
B U4 314
w 314 0
P0v4
by the
sequences is determined not only
The trequency of occurrence of these
observer's criteimpossible combinations ancl the
size of the repertoire, but also by
difficult to
and encl of a sequence' It is also otlen
rion for determining the beginning
determinewhetherabehaviorwasrepeatedlA--_.-A)orwhetheritwassimplya
single occurrence (A)'
l/8
314
l/8
Note that Markov chains are referred to in 'orders' rather than dyads. triads, etc.
(Table 15.4).
DYad 6--->S
Triad A------'B---'C
Tetrad A--'-+B-----)g---+P
What constitutes a sufficient sumple size lor analyzing Markov chains? Fagen
ancl Yor"rng ( I978)provided the following'rule-of-thumb'(based on simulations run
by I'agcn) Ibr analyses of first-order Markov chains (Table 15.4):
I'or': /l:number of individual behaviors for which sequences will be
ntclsurecl
Ilrrrr: l/(r:
lcvcltll.prtrlllrlrilitvptcltlct.tltlttlelt:tttec.ltlsrr.tlrt'lr'rt.|()l|)l(,lr:tlrtlttVisltsstttttt.tlt.'
tlrc t.rrrrI
0/i'
slrrrrPlc sizr'
strllit'tr'nl \iuttPlr'
s171'
ol
450
c'hains
(N:25
Definition
ANALYSIS OF SEQUENCES
SIQtJENCE'S
(A.8,()
first-order (B'--C)
particular
second-ord er (A-'-
B-
C)
preceding behaviors
5.2.1
Locate
130
80
73
435
l5
l0
30
30
-1
-:r
l0
l0
Signal
Threat
Contact
Retreat
25
Signal
13
85
20
28
Threat
l8
20
Contact
Retreat
-l
ow' ne r s
l5
that appear to difll-er greatly between the two samples. For example. Reichert (1984)
rrieasured transition frequencies of agonistic behaviors in spiders tliat owned poor-
t7
30
32
Observed occrlrrences
Following behavior
B
20
9
19
behavior
29
Row totals
Transition matrix
34
te
should be sufficient. In our example, R:3 and 10 Rr:90; therefbre, since our
sample size of 97 is larger than I0R2, it should be sufficient.
The matrix of observed frequencies can initially be inspected lor cells which
show large frequencies. For example, Lemon and Chatfield (1971) contructed a
transition matrix of preceding and lollowing song types for cardinals (Richntondena
t'urdinuli,s); their initial inspection of the matrix showed that switches between
certain song types occurred very frequently. Two matrices, each from a dillerent
value of the independent variable, or treatment, can be initially examined for cells
LI n s Lrp p I e me n
of
Column t otals
Retreat
25
Contact
preceding behaviors
occurrences' It should be
contillgency table since the events
note{ that the trausition matrix is 1ot a trtte
Preceding
Threat
Locate
of occurrence
Signal
Supplementetl ov,ners
Transition matrices
frequencies
Locate
particular
'r'immediately
behavior is depentlent on the
nth-order(...X-Y-Z)
t'ontests
34
()l
(' I t i -.tt
1 ttt
t't'
I t'.t I
,,\ltt'r r'rlrrnrrnll' llrt' olrscrrcrl lr('(lur'n( \ lt;rttsili()n nlirtrir (1t. -150) lirr llrrgc dill'er('n( ('\ lrr'tst't'rr r't'll:. lllr't'\lrt't lt'rl lrr'rlll('lr( \ ttlrlt tr rs r'onslt ttr'lr'tl lrv r';tlt'ttlltlirrg lhc
('\lx'( tr'rl ltt'r1rlt'ttr \ lrrl r',lr lr,,'ll,r, r illrlttll'1il lllt'lr)l llllll;l
expected frequency:
olr Sl:QUENCES
ANALYSIS OF SEQUENCES
g ancl
u,re
ol
Transition matrix
Initial tactic
used
Searching
Expected occurrences
Following behavior
A
Searching
ow totarls
53
(s3.5)
Preceding
behavior
12.3
10.4
12.3
35
0.5
9.0
r0.5
30
tt.2
9.6
t1.2
32
34
9l
Column t tals
29
34
Waiting
36
(35.s)
Waiting
39
(38.4)
25
(2s.5)
:0.03,
Sourc.e:
tlf: l, Ns).
I
I
This provides a first approximation look at the data. The researcher can then
t,:*#oos;: toa
proceed with a chi-square test fbr the entire matrix (e.g. Lemon and Chatfield l97l),
of the matrix
important cells (e.g. 2X2 matrrx) and conduct a chi-square test (e.9. Stokes, I962).
Some transition matrices will contain sequences
if
size may be
above, we decided that the sample size of 80 approached a sufficient sample, but we
also notice that the expected frequency lor the BB sequence is only 9.0. Bakeman
and Gottman (1986) developed a fbrmula fbr calculating sample size based on
expected frequencies; their formula was derived from a calculation suggested by
Siegel (1956). The minimum number of sequences that need to recorcled (l/,i) is
AA
3.22
AB
8.86
determined by:
AC
0.88
I}A
0.21
ar
rv'$-P(
l- pl
(Observed
Cell
li
ty ol lhc
lc
us t / r( ( l t t ( n
t sc(l tlr)ncc
( '(
'
r)
o (l()
J
.1
02
-lt
.)
.)(
o ')I
()0
l'
expected)2
2.77
ll('
('n
('B
Expected
BI]
where:
P:
The individual cells in both tables cAn now be searched lor those where the
observed frequently is much larger or smaller than the expected frequency. For
example, the observed frequency of the A-----B transition in our example (20), is
segments
(/,
.'
ri
,0
454
oI
ANALYSIS OF SEQUENCES
SITQtJENCES
of occurrence of dilferent
ties
ThetabularValueforffor4dfatP=0.05isg.4g.Sinceourcalculatedvalueof
observed are significantly
Cruner"sPhi
.:-^r..-.
a matrix of any slze ls
association between cells in
of
measure
convenient
Another
0 to I and is calcuto a coefficient that varies from
cramer,s phi. lt converts the I
latecl as follows (2ar,1984)"
/.
'(: lY
<0.
l5.2.lc
selves and each other at various lag steps. Lags are the number ol event, or timeuuit, steps between sequential behaviors. An overview of the method was given by
i:28.50
/zs.so:0.54
Q:./ \, ql
above' was
not
signilicant' the phi value does
also be calculated as
association' Cramer's phi can
reflect a very high clegree of
1979):
follows (Howell, 1992; Castellan'
/r 4. l
@,:ilntr-r,l
where:k:thesmallerofthenunrberorrowsorthenumberofcolumns
/t
Sackett (1914. 1978, 1979) developed a method called lug sequenriul onulysrs for
measuring the frequency with which selected behaviors precede or fbllow then-r-
45-5
/r:3'
therefore:
l:n *
@,:JIrrtr-r)]-""
zs
so
IBukamun, 1978:71J
For example, in the fbllowing seqLlence of four behaviors (A,B,C,D) we have designated behavior A as the t'rilcrion hehuv'ior and exarnine the behaviors that occur at
Lag:123
A B A C B D A B D
Ilchitviorseqlrence:
ltt
cycles
l;rl
ltClutv-
r,rr .,\ r', l/lO l) ll) \\i ,,lt lt',( llrr,,'1)(,',tlt()n,,,,1 .\ lr llrt'st't1u(.1)('('(intlit'lrtetl lty
ol:
ANALYSIS OF SEQUENCES
STTQUENCES
itself at
arrows) to determine the conditionalprobabilities Ibr behavior A following
position'
first
in
the
A
lags I .2 antl3; the three lags in the example are for
Using all three positions of A in the example, it can be seen that A never followed
itself at lag l, so the conditional probability of A following itself at lag I is zero.
condiBehavior A followed itself at lag 2 one out of the three possible times. so the
at
itself
lollowed
A
Behavior
tional probability for A fbllowing A at lag 2rs'/,:0.33.
From
is
%:0'33'
lag 3 one out the 3 possible times, so that conditional probability
of folthis very simple example, we would suggest that A has a greater probability
how
(
illustrate
1978)
Notarius
and
Gottman
l.
lag
at
lowing itself at lags 2 or 3 than
Loser
AI
AI
lags.
Lag sequential apalysis can be used with intra-individual (above) or inter-individual sequences. For exarnple, Sackett (1914) applied lag-sequential analysis to
sequential data from a crab-eating macaque mother and her infant'
More complete discussions of Lag sequential analysis can be found in Bakeman
an<l Gottman (1986). Gottman and Bakemal (1979), Gottman and Notarius
programs lor
( 1978). Gottman ancl Roy ( 1990), and Sacketl (1979.1980). Computer
(1979) and
et
ol'
Sackett
by
provided
conclucting lag sequential analyses are
Bakeman (ELAG Program; 1983).
l-34
l2
066
A2
Winner
A3
can be
the standard deviation of the expected probability (based on a large sample)
signot
lag
is
each
used to test rhe null hypothesis thar the conditional probability at
lt,iurv
A4
A5
tz4
A6
011
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
43
40
61
158
58
l0
l6
t4
l0
2t
2t
Tindall.
15.2.2a
Sociometric nmtrices
A sociometric rnatrix
is a special type
sociometric matrix
inter-individual
5.2.t
MultivaYiate analYses
An example
shown below.
of a hypothetical
Sociometric matrix
Observed frequencies
Receiver's behavior
1s.2.2
Inter-individual sequences
'll':rrrsrrrittcr''s
llcllrvior'
('olttttttt
Row totals
-)
l8
21
48
I}
24
35
66
('
l()
l()
,54
t(r
t.l
lol ,rl',
(r
li
(rli
()I
SLQUENCES
ANALYSIS OF SEQUENCES
459
Once again we can use a chi-square test to analyze lbr significantly large correla-
o'*'':'
tions between the transmitter's behavior and the receiver's behavior. In inter-individual matrices there is no problern involved with measurements lound along the
diagonal; however, stationarity can again be a problem, as it is in all continger-rcy
tables. Bekolf (1977b) listed the following five conditions in which social-behavior
data are often collected and which" generally, do not satisfy the assumption of stationarity:
t
z Lumping data lor ditferent individuals (see Chatfield, l9l3)
: Developmental studies; individuals forming social relations and percep-
,r:a
_v___-,:dyad
)1+,f=-=+1,:tfiad
p,:probability
of
p,..,
:probability of
a. For ecluiprobable
where:
lV
between a transmitter's behavior and a receiver's behavior are only that; associa-
behavior sequence:
::
o,'
b'
For non-equiprobubremonads,
rf,>
& Srnotherman,
1987).
I
:
r
t Wltcttlltt'llvrl.()l
fP,
log, p,
ili;!T;ll,
(
ii
';
','
tly.tls:
1,,,,
il\t'l;t1'1'lltr{('ll.r,rl\
-)/'
1,,1,
1'
,r ,f
1.1lrr
lrrtt, lll(.,(,\ltl,vlttl
(v_____.'.1,;
460
ANALYSIS OF SEQLIENCES
46t
(n)
dvttd,s./ronl o sequen(,e
by u 'Bug,r Bunn,y'
ul,so
thot
tlpe
Vocalization
(monads) n: P
-P,
log, P
2t
0.4128
1l
0.3s03
13
0.3826
il
0.3503
lt
0.3503
0.2435
0. r858
0.3r27
0.3t27
log, P,:3.1726
n:P
AA
0.0664
0.n29
-7
0.2686
7
AF
AJ
{,,
r.
0.2686
0.0664
1
-1
0.t5t8
BC
0.2161
BH
BI
CA
0.0664
0.2161
a3n7
CC
0.0664
CE
0.0664
CF
0.0664
CJ
0.0664
DB
0.0664
0.2161
DC
DG
DH
0.1t29
.,
I]
0.Isl8
Irl:
0.2161
0.0664
t1
l:ll
IA
0.2t61
0.0664
tl
l,
ll)
0.0664
1,,
(;,4
(;l
il\
0.l.s |8
t.t
,
-P.., Iog: P,
AB
AD
Determine the P.., logz P,., fbr each of the individual dyads (,r,,t')with
their respective probabilities (P,., ) and then sum them to calculate (..,
euc,lt
probubilir.y
(,see te.ut./itr./urrher
e.rplunution )
AE
bits:
.fitr
ir,s
Vocalization
r00
-IP.
P.r)
dyads
0.2161
Uncertainty:
./urther
explunation )
types
oc,c'urr.ecl
(l (l(r(r.l
o I\lti
ll(l(,(r
l) I ii ,ti
1i
tl
ANALYSIS O}.SEQUENCES
462
463
OI-' SEQUENCES
RATES OF BEHAVIOR & ANALYSIS
If
Reduc'tion in uncertainty (T )
a behavior (-),) is contingent, in part, upon the immediately preceding behavior (x)
then:
Vocalization
dyads
fr:
HC
HI
IA
-)
0.1 129
IE
IF
0.1518
0.1 858
JB
0.1129
JG
0.1 129
JH
0.0664
P r.,
U,U)<U(n
0. I 129
0.1518
U,CY)
From the 'Bugs Bunny'exanlple above, the decrease in uncertainty about vocalization y that is derived by hearing vocalization -r is:
I(.,,,,'): 3'17 26
100
U
U,t,-
198
bits: (.,.'r
b.
|'641
2: |'5254
z Uncertainty.
rs
knov'n:
: U r(!)-
U,(l):averageuncertaintyofpredictingbehavior(-r)whenthe
known'
antecedent behavior 0') is
: {'''''t- {'l
'
{"' ';',:dffii:iliff[ilJ],,1:::':'havior-u
calculated above'
these two variables were
{,.,(-r')
Fromthe,BugsBunny,exampleabove,theaverageuncertaintyinpredicting
:4'8
198
3' 17
the two
of predicting a behavior (r') when
U,,..(y):average uncertainty
are known'
antecedent behaviors (lu,x)
{,,.r,,)-
The objective ol
U,.,,.,(J')
that is derived bv
vocalization(x)whentlreantecedentvocalization(y)iskrrownis:
U,Li')
U,,.r(-y)
t()r'circh order of approxirnation. This varied from zero fbr the zero-order of
,rpproximation (all beliaviors equiprobable) to over 0.9 lor his lourth order of
:rpl.rroxinurtion (tctrad). Since a behavior of the rhesus monkey is almost completely
,lt'tcr.nrinctl by thc three preceding behzrvioral events, Altmann chose to go no
Irrrllrcr'.
(.r.,')
unitswhichmustbeincludedinaSequence(e.g.dyads,triatls.ctc.)irrtlt.tlcrttl
perhaps <0.10'-I-htrs' tlrc tlil'tl't'tow levcl.
acceptatty
reduce the uncertainty to an
tltotlcls rvill piVt'rr
uncertitinty yicltlctl by sttcccssivc
of
metlsures
the
ence between
lrrrttlttttt .l
ittlirtlttlt
lncilsLlrca't'crrccrcirscitrrrtrccrrlri.ty(.r-c().\'('r's('lvtlrr.'t'rtrr
(.()lll(.\
\()()ll lltt'llrrr .,1 tlttttttttsltittl' tt.lttttts
titlrr) yic[tlerl lly tltltl ttttltlel. Ilttu,cvt't..
.llrl'lrtl\ lilt "ttt ( (""'l\t'ttlt"lt'l''
('l llltttr\ tlt't t(';l\('\ (lrrll
itrl() Pl;tv lllt(l lll('tlll(
(S)
llrt'slt'rr'olvPV ulrlcx is rrsctl t() ('()nll)irt'c lltc contli(itlnrtl uncertainties for monads,
,lr;rtls;rnrl lrr;rtls(r'lrlr'rrlrrlt'rl lrlro\t')rrrllrllrr'ir tttlrrirnrrrttpossiblcvitlttcs.Thestcreo-
ItPt,
11111r'r
464
16
For monads:
s,: l-
Ut'l
max
where: max
e,l
{,r:equiprobable
U"':logz
1/
Forthe.BugsBunny,exampleabove,thestereotypyindexforthemonads(Table
Multivariate analyses treat several variables and compare two or more groups. They
can be used for: l. initial data exploration and hypothesis development; 2. classification (grouping according to similarities); and 3. limited hypothesis testing.
These techniques are useful in helping to clarify results through illustrative
visual representations, such as dendrograms and three-dimensional diagrams.
15.8) is:
6ax U1,r:log,l0:3322
e:t-\
Multivariate analyses
3.1126 :r-0.955:0'045
3.322
However, they should be used to express results, not to impress readers. In addition,
For dYads:
S,(J'):,
the researcher should fit the method of analysis to the animal and the problern
under investigation, not the animal to the method (Aspey and Blankenship, 1977;
U,.,(-t')
Bekoff. L977b:Tinbergen, I 95 I ).
This section is a brief overview which explores selected multivariate analysis
techniques by: l. explaining what they will do fbr you in terms of how they treat
n.,o* U,(,r.)
where: max
The
follows:
10
max (..,
' .
(A
J) can be given
in
yr-rur data; 2.
JJ). Therefore:
Srreath and Sokal (1973), and Sparling and Williarns (1978). Keep in mind that,
overall, 'multivariate analyses are powerful diagnostic tools: (l) for uncovering
homogeneous subgroups from naturally-selected heterogeneous samples; and (2)
lirr identifying relationships among multiple variables when the underlying source.
or biological basis, or individual variation is unknown'(Aspey and Blankenship,
r:log' I00:6'644
max U'(Y)
6'644
- 3'322: 3'327
l 6!?:l
S,Lt'):t- t.t , -o'496:o'504
It)l7:77\.
For triads:
I6I
s,,.r(),):, -;#;'"a{5
f/,,'.'.' )-max
where: max U,,.,(-l'):max
('''t
in cthology can
bc
analysis
the use of intbrmation
(1977)'
Ad<litional ciiscussions of
(1992). Grier ancr Burk (1992),,^ir,*r.
in Drickamer antr vessey
Notc'
rbund
Hoof
Wilson (le7s)'
Van
1':*11^..:n<l
Losey (1978), Steinberg Osl|)'
ttl ctlrtlltlgiclrl
clf informatitln analysis
applicability
and
utility
the
that
liirgctt
however,
irclutlirrg llck.ri'(1976) :r.tl
question.a hy s..re cthol.gists.
clata has been
(19711.
the methodologies for this use (Table 16. I ). For more extensive coverage see Aspey
rrnd Blankenship (1977,1978), Manly (1986), Maxwell (1911), Morgan er ul. (1976),
MATRIC-ES
M:rny cthokrgical data are gathered, or can be organized, into matrices in which
\i'vcl'rl inrlividtutls or behaviors are being studied (Figure l6.l). These data may be
rr rtlcly virriablc. be scalecl in arbitrary units, and frequently include interacting vari.rlrlcs (Aspcy rrntl lllarikenship, l91l\.lnitial visual inspection of these matrices is
,,llr'n eonl'rrsirrg. llrirt is whe rc rnullivariatc analyses come into play.
I lrt' rrsc ol'sir rnrrltiv:rrilrlc tcclrttitlrrcs (/l-llctor itrtulysis, p-tuctor analysis. prin, tlrill t'orrrPont'rrl lrrr;rllsis. t'lrrslr'r lilr;rlVsis. tlisCtitttirriutt litttctitltt itnitlysis. and tnulIrrlrrrrt'nsrorr;rlst:rllrry')rrr llrt';rrr.rlr''t'- ol rlrrlrr l,,rrrtrl lr ttt;rllict's likc tltosc in lrigtrre
It' lrrrlllrt'.lr,,r'rr'.',r'.1 ll,'trr'\r'r llr,',r1,g,ltt,rltlrt,,l (ltt".r';ttt:tl\rt'sisttot t'esltit'(crl lo
(ltt,.,t'rlt'.r rr',',,',t lrtt( ttt.tt 1,,' 1,,,1 l,',rtt,tl\ , .ur\ r lttr'l.tltolt ttt,tlttt Nr'rt'tlltt'lt'ss.
T,ible
\1-:'.rl\
multivariute analyses
Procedure references
Multivariate
analysis
Example references
Principal
Huntingford
components
analYsis
Discriminant
analysis
Cluster analYsis
Factor anall'sis
(I
reproductive behavior
976) three-spined-stickleback
Seal ( I 964)
program
Cooley and Lohnes (1971) Fortran
program
Overall and Klett (1912) computer
(1978)
Frey and Pimental
Pimentel and FreY (1978)
program'
Cooley and Lohnes (1971) Fortran
BMD Program
Nie et al. (1915) SPSS Program
Pimentel and FreY (1978)
DeGhett (1978)
Fruchter (1954)
ComreY (1973)
\l.iltiraritte
.:rt,tlr sis
Example references
Procedure relerences
\lultidinrensional
scaling
Cluster
anall'sis
968)
\l ultidimensional
scaling
Kruskal (1964)
Shephard et al. (1972) computer program
Wiepkema
Cluster analysis
DeGhett (1978)
scaling
Principal
components
analysis
S.-.' Figure
6.1
Golani
(1 973)
Spence
Huntingford
sticklebacks
978)
(197
6, 1982)
GROUPING INDIVIDUALS
M L] LTI VAR IATE AN ALYSES
468
(1961) labeled his three major extracted lactors as'aggressive, flight, and sexual
tendencies'.
Following Behavior
lndividual
Behavior
1 2 3 "'
1 2 3"
23
.9
1iz
<iL
-a
a
>J
;>J
Eo
t,) 3
.9
!o
rotation account for maximum possible variance among the observed behaviors.
Cooley and Lohnes ( 1971 ) provide a FORTRAN program listing lor Varimax rotation. Giles and Huntinglord (1984) use principal components analysis to describe
the anti-predator responses of sticklebacks to a model heron or a live pike.
'l
o
E 2
p^
)
io
o)
o- n
are behaving in a similar way, then Qf actor analysis can be applied to the data in Matrix A. The analysis extracts individ-
Fig.l6.lThreetypicalmatricesinwhichethologicaldatacirnbeorganized:A.Different
B' Irrteractic'rns between individuals:
inclividutls:
behaviors performecl by rJiflerent
sequences'
C. Inter- or intra-individual behavior
the objectives of
analysis shoul<J be matched to
the characteristics of the particular
they allow
of these multivariate methorjs is that
selected
graphical displays (Rohlf' 1968)'
visualization of the variables through
examPles will be Provided'
I(.1.2
GROU PIN G
E'HAVIOR
'factors'basecl on their
into a smaller number of
Figure
factors
A. this analysis extracts the behavior-related
ties. when applied to Matrix
varialnce'
fbr a large percentage of the total
16.1)
which account
Forexarnple,Aspey(|971c)recorcledtheoccurrenceof20ditferentbehaviors
in40individualspiders.HeuseclR-factoranalysistoextracttburbehaviorlor
20 different behaviors) which accounted
related factors (groups from the
after
then descriptively labeled the tttctors
14.3,,/uof the total variance. Aspey
labelecl
of the
linkcd witlt
composite behavio.s was significantly
tcrs in 32 individuals (Matrix Type A). Q-factor analysis extracted three factors
(groups of individuals) which accounted lor 80.2"/u of the burrowers. Burrowing
characteristics, interpreted relative to ef-ficiency, were examined and the three
r11)ups were labeled 'inefhcient burrowers'. 'efficient burrowers'and 'intermediate
..y
.tltct'
sl:tlctl
tlrc three extracted factors illustrates their location into three distinct groups
t
lrigure 16.?).
t N'l or
470
GROUPING INDIVIDUALS
4tt
o
o
.$
|{
87
}\
9
6
100
t.z
Indlvidual Doe Deer
/C
u*,
on,
v"7
nuo'tt
16.2 Factor loadings for Aplt'siu burrowing behavior projected onto coordinate axes
corresponding to the three factors extracted by Q-factor analysis. The origin falls
in the center of the tliree-dimensional space. Factor I (large circles) represents
'inelficient burrowers'. Factor II (small stippled circles), 'eflicient burrowers'; and
Factor III (triangles), 'intermediate burrowers'(lrom Aspey and Blankenship.
1976\.
i
attributes
of the method. Their paper lormed the basis lor the discussion which
follows.
In conducting a single-level cluster analysis, let us assume that wc warrt lo tlclcr'mine the relative association anlong intlividr.rals in a hcrrl ol'cight utlLrlt rloc tlccr irr rr
wildlif-e prcscrvc. Wc rlbscrvc lhcrrt lirt'ir lrlllrl ol'5(X) ltotrt's lrtrrl rccortl (ltc lrtttorut( o(
tirtrc tlrirt irrtlivitlrurls lrre closer tlurrr li)ur nr('l('ts llrrolrl,ll tr.",rr s;unplirty' ('\'r'rv
tttittttlt' l';tt'lt,)((tltl('ll(('(rl
:ttt;tssot'i;tltt)lt l\,r'.''tlllr('(l l(l lt'Itt'it'tll ()ll('lllllltll('{)l
B'vuEBGE
A lrriti:tltlerrtllirl'r.rtttt lirt.;tss.t'i;rti.rs i, rr
lrvp.llrcticirl hcrcl of eighr adult
cloc
tlt'r'r. ll. I irr;rl rlt.rrrlrol,r;rrrr l,rr llrt.lrssot.ilrlrolll
i11 ,\.
MU
472
Table
16.2.
GROUPING INDIVIDTJALS
LTIVARIATE ANALYSES
Hypotltetic'nl ussocitttion
claru
deer' Dut?
Jbr u hertl o/ aight adult doe
doe der
in Tuble 16.2
t)
Table 16.3. Similarities.lbr the us.sot'iution,; irt tlta hyytthctit'ul herd of'eight udult
A
B
2l
18
30
l6
38
22
l1
ll
ll
G
H
3t
67
48
4l
47
31
21
17
151
348
Total hours
3l
2l
l0
48
22
28
3l
30
25
23
34
191
202
203
208
168
53
45
15
5l
t17
44
27
59
74
109
6l
30
46
34
69
122
87
74
9l
61
1l
69
56
50
82
61
76
t29
247
observed
lor a discussion
association (see section 8.3 on sampling
assumption). The procedure is as follows:
ordertodetermineassociations'However,itisstilldifficulttoseemuch
Hierarchialcluster
pattern of associations from the data in the table'
of
the associations'
presentation
visual
analysis will provide a better
(associations)
similarities
of
table
The next step is to generate a triangular
of time'
periods
total
each deer was seen for different
similarity
0.053 X I 000
53
Next. we search the table for the range of similarities. The highest is 129
for H*G, and the lowest is 27 for E+B. The vertical axis of our dendrogram should include this range, so for convenience we will set up a vertical scale of from 0 to 150; note that the scale increases from top to bottom
(Figure 16.3A).
of association
observed, which they derived from Dice's coelficient
coefficient of assoCole's
same as
( 1945). Note that this is essentially the
wemustfirstnormalizethedatatoadjustforthosedifferences.
Morganetul.(|g16)describeamethodfornormalizingdatafortime
SimilaritY:;:.,
where:
/l irl'l'rrblc l(r'l
Thcrclilrc. thc sirlril:rrity lirr intlivitltrirls "l rttltl
Sirrrilrrritv
,l r ll r()l r .)0.) o 0s l
We then begin
is'
lo1'1'11',..',.
',,ttttt'lt'tr'l llr,'.1'.'.,r(l,tllr,ltl',lttr'r'ttl.ttt,l(,t.'tlrllrttrlttpl'tltplt,lX'('itttsC
LJ
DESCRIBING DIFFERENCES
G+H (Figure
M,N(i INDIVIDUALS
16.3A).
(Fighters)
s It can be seen that we did not use over half of the ordinate in our dendrogram and that the ordering of individuals on the abscissa makes interpre-
o)
(Siners)
o_
o
o
of the associations. We can easily see the relative 'strength' of the various individual
be used in a visual inspection
E
.g
o
o':p.
Principal component
lt2
behavior. Gadagkar and Joshi (1983) used principal components analysis and hier-
ls
It
lt,
e
r
S
il
analysis in ethology.
t7
,
t0,
5,
AMONG INDIVIDUALS
Once the individuals in Matrix A have been grouped by Q-factor analysis. we might
want to know more about the differences among individuals and about the parameters (components) of their behavior that are most important in distinguishing dif-
ilh
lr.
67-
r
S
B.
2-
ferences.
20.
t9-
t5-
illa g
t6-
e
r
318-
t3-
o8
o.7
lirrrrrl,rr rly
415
416
I.J
417
I
.9
2.O
lJ.
'Pl r ,-l
1.0
+J
o
Prihcipal-ComPonent
sss
(59% Vorionce)
O .D
.9 -1
o
C,
o
!
o
o
o
CL
o
o6
,68
-.i
(s)'
CLi
'o>
tr-o
A,T
Fig.l6.5PrincipalComponentsanalysisof32burrowingApll,sittbrasiliunushowirrgtwo
extractedsubgroups.Tlrefirstprincrpalcomponent(shadedareaortright)
generally corresponded to individuals
accor.rnted for 59"/uof the variallce ancl
whichhaclhigherFactorl(approach/signal)andFactorll(vigorouspursuit)and
for 12.2i, ol tlre variance
Tlre second prirrcipal Component accounted
values.
correspottrJedtoindiviclualswitlrlowFactorllvaluesandhigliFactorlll
1978)'
(run/retreat) values (from Aspey and Blankenship'
Pimentel (1978)'
Dudzinski and Norris ( 1970) and Frey and
4.O
50
OF INDIVIDUALS
I65 DISCRIMINATING AMONG GROUPS
OR BE,HAVIORS
groLlps
analysis to tliscrintittrtlc
Aspey (1911c) used multiple stepwise discriminant
(schi:.t'.su .nt.s';i1tt',t) which Q-l'rrct.t
further between three groups of 40 spiclers
l,bclctl .s'n.r,i'ir,t'.'rutcrurctlirt(c" rrrrtl
analysis rrad extractecr and Aspey h^d
.Sub.rclir.r,tc.. rrr his irrrirlysis.ll scrl,clrcc tlI trisc'i.rir*rrrt.tgtrlrti().s \vlrs r'()llll)ttt('(l
*';rs lrtlrlt'rl l. llrr'r'r[.illl.t irl t';tt lt slt'p'
in lt stcPwisc lrtil*lret.s. tr*tr ().(.\'lr.ilrr)tr'
;rnrl a onc-way analysis of variance F-statistic was then used to determine which
rrrriirhlc (i.c.. bchavior) should join the function next. The variable added is the one
rnrrking llrc grcatcst rcduction in the error sum of squares'(Aspey and Blankenship
were then plotted (Figure 16.6). The first discriminant funclr()n (rrbscissir)sc1'raratccl thc'tlominant'and'subordinate'spiders, but it took the
\r'('()r)(l tlrseritttirtlrrtt ltutclion (ot'tlinittc) to scparatc out the 'intermediate' group
Itrrttt tlt,.'olltt't Iu'o L'tottlts. lltt'tlll('('pl()tll)s \\'cl'c crrcirclccl ip the figufe fOr added
t llrttlr'.
Irr r'orrlr;r',1 lo ,,\'.;rt'1 ', ( l',/ /r l rr'.t' ,,1 unrllrPlr' '.lt'1111 rsr' tlisr'r'itttiltlttrl ltttltlysis.
llr'lrrrll t t,tl (lt)i ',)tt',r'rl lttt,'.rt ,lt',t ttnun,rrl .ul,rlt',r', lo,r',\('\s lltr'llt\()ll()lilit'tt'ltt-
418
MULTIVARIATE ANALYSES
ln
trprt-tatrors ,ris
-60
'29
NctEnglond conlds
Yolrcs
(/upu)
Ne
w Englond
conids
measure-
ments.
c
orolcs
(l olrans
(Dz)
In contrast to the other multivariate analyses discussed in this section, discriminant analysis can be used to test hypotheses (Sparling and Williams, 1978).
16.6
l'o's7
Multivariate analyses are only one method for analyzing sequences of behavior
Chapter l5).
Jroyorcs
(see
,,,\
\,,,,
\t
\l
(Slater,
1973), factor analysis assurnes that the measured variables (e.g. behaviors) do not
depend causally on each other (Blalock, 1961), but rather that there are underlying
\t
)ou*
Fig.l6.TTlreresultsofabehavioraltaxonomystudyonintantcoyotes(Canislatrans\
wolves((,.tupus)andNewEnglarrdcanids(easterncoyotes).Therelative
frequenciesofoccurrenceofsocialplayandagonisticbeliaviorwereusedas
Top: Linear discriminant values of
behavioralcharacters (Bekott. et ul"-,1975).
knownC.lupusandC-.latranslitterscastonalupus--latr(lnrjdiscriminantaxis'
NewEnglandcanidsareprojectedontothistheytallbetweenlupusandlatrans,
units based
onpairwiseanalysesoflupus'latran'sandNewEnglandcanids'Notetheclose
relationshipbelweencoyotesandNcwEnglandcanidsarrdthatbothfall
from wolves' This is an example of the
approximately the same distances
an area wlrere these
of multivariate analysis of behavior to taxonot]ry,
trpplication
analysesarecommonlyusedonmorphologicaldata(fromJardineandSibson,
l97l: Srreath and Sokal' 1973)'
: IgILtgt'1I99!*U9t'1
grand total
Calculating transition freqr"rencies on this basis provided a ratio which indicated relative frecluency with which each of the behaviors preceded or followed the other, but
it also inclr-rdecl transitions between a given behavior and itself which may be impossiblc or clilllcult to interpret. Slater and Ollasc'rn (1972) discuss these dilficulties and
tionsl-ripsamonginfantwolves,coyotes,and.NewEnglanclCanids.(Silverand
(e'g'
lr'rr
cle
(l()70) lilrclor
of common
(l t1'tttt' l{'
li1
tive side of the sexual factor. The length of each vector represents the amount of the
common variance of the behavior accounted for by the factors.
The use of factor analysis in ethological studies in general has been questioned
by several investigators (Andrew, 1912: Morgan et al., 1976; and Maurus and
Pruscha, 1973). Factor analysis often makes more assumptions than some other
rnultivariate analyses (e.g.cluster analysis) (Morgan et ul., 1976; Sparling and
Williams, 1978). Once causal lactors have been extracted, some researchers quesFig.l6.8Vectorcliagramofthebelraviorofthemalebitterling(Rhotleustlmarus).
flickering; FL:fleeing; HB:head
CHF:chafing; CHS:chasing; FF:fin
: quivering;
:
:jerking; LE leading; QU
DP: head-down posture; ;11
beat (from Wiepkema'
TU:turning
SK:skimming; SN:snapping;
butting;
1961)'
For
represents the extent of their correlation'
The angle between any two vectofs
accordis represented by an angle determined
vectors of unit length, the correlation
ing to the following formula:
thesame(lirrFigurel6.g).Ifthereisnocorrelation(r:0.00)thetwtlvecttlrswill
the anglc will hc
Inthevectorcliagram(Figr-rrcl6'8)itcanhcscctltltltttlrcllchlrvi()l.SCltlSl(.1
ar.trn.thrccrrxcs.-flrcsct.rcclrxcs:r'ct'cclrrrsrrl 'lrt'rrrs
Irp,.P,r.cssir,,t'l'lrr'lot:l is f lrc positivt'sitlt'ol'lltt'ttolll('l)lt'rlttt
lrstlrt',.sitivt'sitlt'.1'tltt'
ttrt'l:tr tot \ is tltt'post
tion what they really mean. Slater (1973 145) concludes that '[t is doubtful whether
the extraction of lactors which are themselves of complex causation advanced
tutrderstanding'. However,
it
llcnerate hypotheses and experiments that truly will advance our understanding.
lirr example, Aspey and Blankenship's (1976) experimental study of Aplysiu gls,N
out of factor analysis of groups and advanced our understanding of the function of
lrurrowing and its relationship to reproduction behavior.
Sltort and Horn ( 1984) make the following lour points which will serve as cauti()ns to ethologists using factor analysis:
t
:
r
.t
( )rtc
tnlrtr
lrirr1.r.
Lisr"rally
it is unwise to
use
LJ
1966)' of
previouslyusedtheanalysistonreasuresequentialbehaviorinmice.
(1961) data' using multidimenMorgan et al. (1916) reanalyzerl Wiepkema,s
uation.
above'
consult Shepard (1980) and the references
In short,
to generate and to
test hypotheses; however, avoid methodological overkill. As Fagen and Young
(1978:114) suggested'The future may well belong to those who can use simple
methods effectively to test a theoretical hypothesis, or who are prepared to construct original models of behavior should no simple technique be available'.
use the best methods and equipment available both
16.7
SUMMARY
aged.Howeveqpoorlycollectedandinvaliddatacannotbelar-rrrderedinactlmpttter.
it by wrapping it in complex attitlyscs' tyirtg
although some researchers will try to sell
itwithacomputerandpresentingitwithcomplicateddiagrams.
lltt' tt'st':tlt'llet's
l) Thc tlirtrrhcrt syrtt;llottt tltis is ttlltttili'stt'tl ttt
statisticaI tests. The database manager (otten in the form of a spreadsheet) is usually
relatively rudimentary and is meant to handle data entered directly lrom the keyboard, and to provide a method of perlbrming manipulations on the data, such as
transformations (e.g. iirc-sine, log). It is recommended that any reasonably large set
of the data belore testing. Larger packages, particularly those custom written lor microcomputers, may have much better graphic abilitics. Generally, presentation-quality graphics must be prepared
in
specialized
lrinally. all of these statistical packages contain a set of statistical tests and
rrranipulations. The important criterion is that the package perform the tests you
rrcctl ('l ablc I 2. I ). A complete package, like those listed below, contain at least the
lirllowing crrtcgorics of statistics: descriptive, nonparametric, simple regression, tIr'sts, ,rrrrrrlysis ol' var-iar-rce, and multivariate analyses. Multivariate analyses may
MULTIVARIATE ANALYSES
orientation and
time: circular statistics and
17 Spattal
analyses'
torming last-rninute data manipulations or'quick-and-dirty'graphical
packknown
The
best
B)'
(Appenclix
Statistics software comes in several types
versions'
computer
ages are those which have been modified from mainframe
spatral patterns
often uses comSoftware in this category is generally well-known and tested, and
These promands which are familiar to users of the software in mainlrame versions'
BMDP-PC
(SPSS
Inc')"
grams include SIS-PC (SAS Institute, Inc.), SPSS/PC+
(BMDP Statistical Software, Inc.). Programs written expressly for microcomputers
inclu<le the most popular statistics package, systat
(Systat,Inc.)'
magazines and
Reviews ol these programs are oflen published by conrputer
perform a
programs
weeklies (e.g. PC Week). Generally, the mainframe-based
memoryare
but
variety of statistical tests. are well tested and familiar,
Circular statistics are used to analyze data points that are distributed on a circle,
designed
hungry and non-intuitive to use. PC-based progfams are more efficiently
are often
lor microcomputer hardware and for non-statistically-minded users' They
are less
and
tests.
statistical
of
but are less complete in their repertoire
less expensive,
As examples, these data points may represent angular degrees from magnetic
north taken by homing pigeons when they disappear from sight, or the periods of
activity for gerbils during a 24-hour period. The calculations described below will
they can also be easily applied to points in time using the same methods (Table
423). Readers who wish to pursue circular statistics beyond this cursory introduc-
locate a
STAT). The user must decide what statistical tests are required, and
price,
compatibility,
tests,
package which provides the best combination of required
larger
easy to use'
and ease-of-use. Sy.stat (Systat, Inc.), while not inexpensive, is complete,
well on microcomputers. check for academic site license versions of
and works
many of these programs at your home institution'
only be applied to examples of directional data, but the reader will recognize how
Delerntine v'ltetlrcr llte ungulur diret'tions (or tintes) nteasured are ran-
distribution, then the tests will also determine whether the sample directions are significantly clustered about the mean direction.
whether:
signifit'antly./rom a spec'ified
ncl/ttr
time,s
SS
I ltr' t ltt ',(|lt;rIr' lt",l r'rttt lrr' tt.',',I lilt ttillilllr,rI tl,rl.r ',rrclr ;ts llrr' ttrnttlrr'r' tll' tlbsct'vltllt}ll', 111',('l'lltr'lll',,rl,l r llr lr' {r' 1' {) l'O' l'l'
'Il) ,rrrrl 'll" \(,1)" or lrt,lu't't'il
Ol l)lltI:('l-IONS
0000 or 2400 h
OBSERVER
DIRECTION
Fig. 17.3 Directions can be divided into quadrants and equal divisions of quadrants for
analysis with Chi-square. Orientation of the quadrants is dependent upon the
research questiott, such as whether distraction displays are given primarily in the
quadrant including the nest or in quadrants away Irom the nest (see text for
explanation).
DIRECTION
Fig. l7.l
TIME
North and East, East and South, South and West, and West and North). If you have
interval data, such as angular degrees (or hours and minutes) then the Rayleigh and
Ztests are more powerf ul. When there is an expected direction such as would occur
when homing pigeons are clock-shifted (i.e. photoperiod altered), then the
L/
test is
t7.t.t
the directions (angular
ffiffi,
' degrees)nr"randomlY
distributed?
This test (described in Chapter l4) can easily be applied to circulzrr data. It tests
whether the sample of directions (angular degrees, times) diflers significantly from
METHOOS :
Less Powerful:
Ch'i-square Goodness-of -Fi t Test
More Powerfu l
RaYl
randomness. It is not as powerful as the Rayleigh test or V test if you have interval
dtrta (e.g. degrees fiom magnetic north), since that data is reduced to nominaldata
eiqh Test
RandomlY
Can qo no
,/
in this test.
Dlstrjbuted
Procedure:
Dividc tlie compass (or clock) into equal sectors (e.g. Figure 17.3). The
rrrrnrhcr ol sectors and their orientation relative to direction is not
further.
HETHOD:
siqni f icantlY
dif
fcretrt
olr',1'; t ;tltottr
CIRCULAR STATISTICS
488
Table
17
Expected
25"1,
12.5"1,
25
12.5
25
text )
@-D2lE
Sector
Expected
12.5
1.92
t2.5
20
0.00
t2.5
12.5
(25'/,,i) 20.25
(25,1,) 20.25
(25"1,) 20.25
(25'N,) 20.25
t4
12.5
12.5
25
f :2(O- D2lE:
or
Sourc'e: Data
( att'cty'
8l
t:5.94
Sector
>
s If
0.24
Expected
(50,'1,) 21.5
t4
2.61
(50"1,)
29
2.6t
your data are angular degrees from magnetic north (or time) then also
21.5
43
^):5.22
of
14
avocets and 5 stilts were directional, especially whether they would lead an observer
l0
20 m
nrost researchers.
colored-banded, displaying birds in a circle with him at the center. F-or analysis, he
divided the circle into lour equalquadrants with one of them subtended by an angle
of 45o on either side of a line from him to the nest (Figure 17.3). He observed 8l clis-
rr
IicirnI Iy
rlilll'l'cnt.
I lris
rr
plays were in the quadrant away from the nest. the direction of'all dislnrciiorr tlisplays was not significantly different from random.
by
The calculated clii-square value of 5.94 is smaller than the tabulitr vulLtc (3 dl.
alpha level:0.05) of 7.81. This means that although most of the clistrlctiott dis-
if not invalid,
rr i
traction displays from the l9 birds. The observed and expectecl (based ort a uniflorn.t
ncst (cluaclrant
Ey:
3.78
18
,.r:r(oALE
29
489
Sector
ot, t)llrrr(,.t.tONS
Ittol'1'111111''
( 'trlt'rrl;rl('llt(.\lltn
,'\
'I t:ur
)',rrrr.
1r1. 11.,,.,1
ol
rlt.1,1t.r.r
pl
li1lr.,.
490
Alpha level
N
0.0s
0.01
0.001
30
2.91
4.50
6.62
50
2.98
4.54
6.14
100
2.99
4.57
6.82
200
2.99
4.59
6.81
2.99
4.60
6.89
c2)
Z:RzlN
+
R'
R:V(sr+
Zto
17
'4'
+0.2156
-0.9613
88
+0.9994
+0.0349
t44
+ t).5875
-0.8090
328
+0.8480
290
-0.5299
-0.9391
-0.4067
tt4
+0.9135
180
0.0000
128
+0.7880
t52
+0.4695
108
+0.9511
178
+0.0349
-0.469s
Totals:
R:V(s2+ c\:t
Z
Asanexample'Icollecteddataonthedirectionalorientationabilitiesofl3stu-
+0.0698
+0.9976
When the sample directiops are nonrancantly clustered about the mean directiorr'
mean direction and cletermine whether
dom, you can go on to calculate the sample
direction (e'g'home)'
it is significantly rJifferent from the predicted
10
Cosine
86
208
cues
when they were deprived of normal visual
dents in my ethological methods class
to a
van
in a
postion). They were blindfolded ancl transported
Sine
164
the directions are nonIf the calculated Z is greater than the tabular Zu,then
directions appear to be unimodal' then
random. If the distribution of the sample
proves that the sample directions are signifisignificance in the Rayleigh test also
491
Table 17.5. Direc'tions l3 blind/bldecl stutlcnl,s poitttctl to intlit'ate the direction to the
Colorudo State Univer,rity camplts a.f'ter huvittg bacn driyen approximately l0 niles
z Calculate
Ol l)llLl:("1'IONS
R2 I
S: +4.078
47 .67 7 I 13
+0.3420
L0000
-0.6157
-0.8829
-0.3090
-0.9994
-0.8829
C: -
5.512
6.904
3.661
Since the calculated Z of 3.661 is larger than 2,,,,(2.97) we reject the I/n that the
and
to provicle data lor the students to analyze
campus. The exercise was conducted
use
to
ability
their
the methods' It was not a valid test of
Able'
field (see Baker, 1980' 1987; Gould ancl
other cues, such as the earth's magnetic
stttclctlts
were not coverecl' and some tll'tlic
1981); for example, the van windows
rt cttc ttr
its
srlll
afterngotr
the
the heat from
sitting next to the windows reported using
still
w'ile
v.rr
trrc
inclivicrually red fr..r
westerly direction. The stude'ts were
the
'l hcv
t7.1.3 V test
Whctr tlte rc is art expected direction, the Ztest is prelerable to the Rayleigh test since
it
is rttorc powcr'f'ul. For example, when homing pigeons are clock-shifted 6 hours
lrrtc. llteir crpcctcrl tlisappcirrance direction upon release is 90" clockwise lrom the
'l'lrc I 'tcst lvill lcrrrl to sigtrilicance only if there is sufficient clustering lrl,,tttttl lltr' ptr'rlir'lr'tl tlitt't'ltott Ilr)\\'('vcr'. tlrc l'1cst shoulcl t>nly be ttsed to test
Ior r;rtttl.rnrnt'ss. ll rl,'t's rrol lt",l rrlrt'llrcr llrt's;rrrrplt'rrrclrrrtlircctirlrt rlevitttcssignifi(:tttll\ ltotttlltr'Ptr',1t,lt',1rlttr'rltrrtt lltt'rlttttrlt'ttr't'tttlt'trltlsltottltlltettsctllirrlltlrt
1' )l
l)llll)(r"t'(ll,rl"t ltt'lt'l lt)lil,('{",(r ltr,tt |
Itorrrc tlirect rort.
492
CIRCI]LAR STATISTICS
Procedure:
cos(O-
r:
0,,)
Using Table A23 we find that the angle whose sine approximates +0.5912
and whose cosine approximates -0.8077 is 143.5". This concurs with our
rz.
previous calculation.
':J(i)(')
Compare the calculated a to the tabular value lr,, (Table A24). tf the calcuand
laled uzu,, then the sample directions are not randomly distributed
Vt:
R cos(@-
143.5"- I 96o:
Irtrr t
": J(;)(
(<D):
(see Tuble
r7-r
: *0'3 I 4
cos: C/l/: - 5.5721 13 : - 0.429
+ 4.01 8l 13
slnlcos: -0.7319
UsingTableA23wefincJthat l4Sohasatitngcrttol'0.7.516rttttl l'1'1"Ititsrt
ol -(\.7265.
ol'
O'71 l() is
()lll tlrt'll
rtpptori-
rvt'ill)l)l()\tttlltlt'lltt'
.5"
'
lz
zo+ 0.3922
l:.,/ i.r+ ):
(4.204\:
I .648
llt,'ltt"l ttt,'llrt'tl
Lr
Ilirylcigh test.
A23)
where:
tangent
307
with the tabular rr,, (Table A24). Since the calu,,of 1.647 we reject the l/,, that
thc sample directions are random. This concurs with the results from the
(sinlcos)
sin: S/N:
culated
52.5"
:6.904 (0.6090):4.204
Fir.st methotl:
lD:arcfan
0,,)
For example, since there was a predicted direction (Colorado State University
above' we
campus) for the data on the students used in the Rayleigh test example
randomcould have usecl the v test as a more powerful test. Even though the ^f1,, of
data to
same
the
to
test
V
|he
apply
we'll
test,
ness was rejected using the Rayleigh
to
direction
predicted
the
around
determine whether there is sulficient clustering
RIN
Sine
use
:6.9AU13:0.531I
z Calculate
491
Calculate Zr.
Vt:
Ilrt'torrlirlt'nt't'inlcrrlrl is
lil
111'11'l
ttttttr'
lt,",;ttttplr'
lll(',llr rlttr'r
l tll11
1,,rt1,rtl,rt rlt';'tr'r"')
CIRCULAR STATISTICS
Procedure:
the arithmetic
The mean of the sample directions cannot be determined by taking
if you assign
even
three),
than
mean of the angles (especially if the sample is larger
examples)'
for
1981,
degrees to angles between 180" and 360' (see Batschelet,
r:RlN
z
minus
5, the
ar ctan
f si
n-elco si ne
specified direction.
CIN
: If the predicted
sine:sine :S/N
Mean cosine:Eosine
S
Al
Nto determine
Calculate:
Mean
From Figures
and
First method:
Calculate the length of the mean vcctor (r'). This was calculated above
As an example, we will test whether the Sample mean angle for the l3 blindfolded students (see example in Rayleigh and Ztests above) is significantly different
from the predicted direction (Colorado State University campus).
whose
Simply stated, the sample mean direction is the angle in Table A23
cosine.
mean
tangent equals the mean sine divided by the
Second method:
:143.5o -r 44"
:99.5" to
r:
degrees) are not significantly different. That is, the mean angle
z Calculate:
of the
173 DIFFERENCE
l'hcsc tcsts arc used to determine whether there is a significant diflerence between
thtlse cltlThe sample mean angle is the angle whose sine and cosine cqual
culated in Step 2 above. Use Table A23'
llrc slttnprlc mciln directions (or times) of two, or more, groups of animals, such as a
t'orrlrol gr'()up ancl one, or more, treatment group(s).
r7.
17.2.2 Confidence
r.r
interval
187.5"
the sample mean angle, we reject the H,,that the two directions (angular
RIN
496
C' I
RC' L]
LA R STATISTICS
Procedure:
Plot all the sample directions, fbr both groups, on a circle or list thern all
in order, indicating which group each direction belongs to.
Determine the total number of runs (i) in the two samples. If the same
direction (angular degrees) occurs in both samples (ties), their positions
of
smaller sample. You may have to extrapolate the probability lor your cal-
culated fi.
As an example, we will use the data fiom the 13 blindfolded students that we used
Blindfolded
in the Rayleigh and Ztests. We will test whether the directions the students pointed
with the blindfolds on differed significantly frorn the directions pointed after the
86
blindfolds had been removed. Table 17.6 shows the angular degrees from magnetic
88
Not blindlolded
Runs
106
ll0
108
112
lt4
two samples are the same (i.e. drawn from the same circular population).
r28
17.3.2
132
140
This is also a test lor whether two samples of directions (angular degrees) are signil'-
142
144
degrees) resulting
icantly dillerent. However, this test uses the interval scale of measurement (angular'
in a more powerful test than the two sample runs test described
152
above.
164
n0
Procedure:
178
t78
S,:sum ol the
sines
lor Sarnple I
S":sum of the
sines
fbr Sample
180
182
2
188
C,
R,:V{S,r+ ('rr)
t,
Lltrivcr^sit.v
r0
194
198
l0E
)()(
II
ll) '
I
)l-i
tl
It
491
LAR STATISTICS
CIRCI.J
498
z Calculate
DIFFERENCES IN SAMPLT:
s:s,*S,
C,
R.:V(E,+c.,)
Obtain the value g.
a.
,:(4rt4r)
N.
b. Calculate
-N
N:;
c. From Table ,{26 obtain
an estimatecl value
of
vector length and mean sample size (calculated above) instead of r and
n, respectively.
d.
Calculate g:
g:l+:
"8k
1,t
Angular degrees
Sine
Cosine
ll0
+0.9391
194
-0.2419
n2
+0.9272
140
+0.6428
-0.3420
-0.9703
-0.3746
-0.7660
302
-0.8480
+0.5299
t42
+0.6157
-0.7880
106
+0.9613
-0.27 s6
r98
-0.3093
-0.951
132
+0.7431
-0.6691
F:t!(N -2)'N.
178
+0.0349
-0.9994
-0.0349
-0.91)94
170
+0.17.16
-0.984ri
188
-0.1392
Sums: S.: *3.465
- 0.9903
(',: - 8..st3
I
(Rr+Rr)
Compare the calculated F with the tabular value (Table ,46) where: df: I
(for the numerator) and N -2 (for the denominator). Note that all the
tabular values lbr this test are in the first column of the table. If the calculated Fis larger than the tabular Fthen the two sample mean directions
S,
..
V( + 3.4(r-5r+
Wc trou' r'trlctrlirIc
and C,.
t4.078 Cr-
/l
9.2-s4
llllt.)(,
-5.572
3.,58
l: thcrclirrc, rclcr-
Sr:
R,:V1S,2+('r2)
R,:V(.!,r+(',r)
182
R'+R2-R..
'
49e
{:N,+N,
Cr: C r*
Mln N t)il{t:(,'IION
'
',
lt
5OO
CIR('ULAR STATISTICS
:\-
5.572)+
R.:V{S.2+
8.581
): -
q')
V(so.896 + 200.307
R, + Rr) _
):t/
of
Lsl .203
R,,Rr'..Rk
z Calculate
26
R.:VE'+c'
:13
From Table A26. using r and N instead of r and n. respectively, we obtain an esti1.50.
s We then calculate
a1
-')
c'
+ R.)
tr: l*
"8[
0.r28
(24)^
' '9 _ ^:(30) (0.013):0.39
where the
df:
I and
).
742
(N
N:Nrlk
- ^ (6.904+9.254)- 16.037
l'25 ()6-2)
26-(6.90 4+g.254)
:t.25
+Rr)
(R,+R")-R
_ (R,+R,...
li.
g.
'ff.-(Rr
r:l-
:l*0.25:1.25
o We then calculate
'
+Nk
{:S,+Sr...*So
C,:Cr*Cr.. . +Ck
-:0.621
g:l+ -):l+
"8kt2
{:N,+l/r...
26
of
ck
.q.
: 16.158
mated value of k
C| Cr.
6.031
6.904+9.254
N.
_N26
':
,\22
.501
S,,sr...sk
t4.l 53),]
-_
14. I 53
MtAN r)tt(I(,.t.tON
: V[( +7 .5412 + ( :
DIFF'ERENCES IN SAMpt_t:
A, (r.,rl
-l
r-2:26-2:24.
rlrtl
smaller than the tabular value (4.26) we fail to rejcct thc 1r',,o1't.to significant difference between the directions pointed r,vhcn blindlirldcrl :rrttl nol
blindfblded.
Ix:R,-/(
l: '-,,(N,
(( I tt //..- \ /(,
Tlris tcst is rrsetl lrl tlr'lt'trrrirrt'u'ltclltt't llrt's:ttrrplc nr('inr rlttt't lr()lrs lro1v1 llnt'r'.,,t
nt()r'('. I'l()ul)s ;il(' st1,1111tt ltttll\ rltllt'tt'ttl l'r,'t t't rl tlr, ',,rn(' \\ir\ ir', lt,1 llt,'
W;tlsorr \\'rllt,ttrr', l\\r)',,tlnl)l('l(",1 rtlt,,\,' ('\( ('lrl llt /, ,,ttrt1,l,'.
.,,1tr;r1r,1111,;1tt
rlitr.r.lir>tts
:
SPATIAL PATTERNS
CIRCULAR STATISTICS
animals(intra-orinterspecific).Forexample,Lockie(1966)loundthatwhenthe
of film,
Chapter 9.
(1984) was interested in the association ol-intlivitlual ycllow baboons with different
groups of individuals (defined spatially) within thcr r.r.roving troop. He used instantaneous samples of focal animals to record tlrc unrr>unt of tirle they spent in each part
diagram).
When associations between individuals are based on distances, the researcher
must decide on a criterion distance between individuals in which the probability of
their interacting greatly increases and beyond which they commonly approach one
Animal-animalspatialrelationshipscaninvolveintra-orinterspecificassociationsthe
the research question can require
between individuals or groups. Additionally,
or
between known individuals over time'
measurement of distanoes or associations
simultanesampled
being
of the group
spatial relationships among all members
artifical deer. They took photographs from different observer viewing angles of dif'f-erent herd sizes with the animals oriented in different directions (facing away or
perpendicular to the line of sight); then observers diagrammed the animals' locations from the photographs. Larger herds, lower viewing angles, and perpendicular
orientation of the animals produced greater discrepancies between observer perccived and actual animal locations.
ously.
ofsamplingmethodemployed.Themethodsbasicallyinvolvetwodifl-erentproce-two
recording when (frequency and/or duratiou)
<lures: l. determine associations by
defineci by the rcsearcher): or 2'
or more individuals are together (operationally
a.d determi.e t.e actr-ral (.r rcl,tivc)
locate the postio, of all animals periodically
u.tl
procedure is olten used i. fickl st.irics
distances between inclivicluals. The first
Enclosures or small field study sites are often gridded to improve the observer's
:rccuracy in determining animal locations. For example, Vastrade ( 1987) studied the
spacing behavior
1.25
th
generallyinvolvesall-occurrencesorfocal-animalsan-rpling.Thcscctltttll)r()cc(lIlI.c
etrclosure stuclie s atrcl uscs sclttt sittttplittg'
is more common in laboratory or
Polllott:tl lo lltt' stzt' ol lltt' t1u;r,lrtl.' tt'l:tlir.' l,r lltr' sizc rll' lltc itttintitls. since an
,urtnr:tl ts tct,rtrlt'rl r,ttlV rts lrctn;, ltt(",r'tll tlt ir l);rt ltt'ttl;tl 1,t itl. t('lt,ttt'(llcss ol'its itctttitl
(cl''
rlistuttcc i'rctrvcctt itttli\ititrrtls
when the first pr.ceclure is usccl, thc critclion
ti.rt. tlcg.rcrttls,rr
cttt.r.
lr()',rlr(ril ilr llt.rl I'tttl l't1'rttr' I / I rllil',ll,llt , lriltr ,r l;rt1,,'l'il(l sYSl('nr nr,llV nol cl.'l1t';U
rt'llr'r I tlt.',t, lrr,rl rlt',(,tll((', I'r'l\\', tr ,ltrtln,ll lrr,lrrr,lrr.rl',.\ ;ttr,l ll;ttr'ttt il(ll()nltnt'
504
SPATIAL PATTERNS
CIR('LJLAR STATISTICS
#A
#c
qua<lrats as are individuals C ancl D. Although data analysis would treat these pairs
of individuals as being at eqr-raldistances from each other, in lact A and B are rnttch
closer together than C and D. The opposite problem is illustratecl by pairs of indi-
viduals E and F, and G and H, which are actually the sarne distance ttpart br,rt separated by one and two quadrats. respectively. lf the grid on the lelt wits tlivitlccl inttr
an 8x8 format, then grid columns 2 and 3 would be halved, separatillg intlivitltrtrls
C and D by two quadrats, but leaving A and B in adjoining quaclrtrts: this wottltl
more accurately reflect their true clistances. However. smttller clttitclrltts tloti't ltlwltvs
improve resolution uncl accuracy sincc it ttt:ty bc tlillictrlt ttt tlclct'lttiltc rt'lticlr
lll l)illt.llvlltt'stz.'ol
lhrtttl,tttlsttltttttlt'tl
llt,',pt,t,lt,tl.'tt'l,rllrr'lolllt'\l/('
lrrrirrr;rlslrtttl lltt'\t/('ol
rfE
\,
50.5
h
H
trl- tlre animal. To control fbr this potential problem. Burgess (1979) compared the
sllatial behavior of rhesus monkeys. neon tetras. communal and solitary spiders,
cockroaches and gnats by observing them in gridded open-field arenas, scaled to the
Ittlittral's size. FIe scan sampled the animals' locations by photographing them at
irr
tcrvals.
,'\ttttttltl" t'lltt lrt';tr't ttt;tlt'l\ 1,,,,11,',1 ttr llrr' l;rlrr,1;11()t\'. r'lt('l()sut'cs, ()t'snlitll sttrtly
,ll(';l',. Itt lrlrllllll' ot \ltlr',)l,tlllttl'ltull
rlrrr'r ll\ ,llr,rrr'(,,r ;r lrrl'lr rit'u'itt1':tttp,lc)lttttl
(',lr
llt,'tt rllytlttllllr
lt,tttttrt,rl', l,r ,tlt,,n lt,,ltt.t ,.r t, r'1 rrl 1 1,1,.,,t111r11g1,,, l,irt r'f;tlt1llt'.
SPATIAL PATTERNS
CIRC'ULAR STATISTICS
of
members
species
of association).
reom flow
ish
There are several formulas available for calculating indices of 'aggregation', 'cohe-
conlrol gole
sis in
There are two basic approaches to nearest neighbor analysis: L select an individ-
ual at random and measure the distance between it and its nearest ncighbor (true
nearest neighbor technique): and 2. select a point and measure the distance to the
density per
Mankovich and Banks ( 1982) Llsed time-lapse photography and computerized film
digitization to analyze the position and social orientation of five female dornestic
lowl in a flock. (See Chapter 9 for aclditional discussions of the use of films and
videotapes lor spatial analyses.)
Analysis of location data frorn animals in a gridded areii can be based on distances (quadrats) between known individuals or overall spatial paltterns between all
members of the group. Aspey (1977a.b) has written computer programs in BASI('
for computing inter-individual distances within a gridded rectangular areil
(RECDIS) and a gridded circular area (CIRDIS). Strickltn ct ul. (1971) describecl ir
FORTRAN program which analyzes relative distances between individual anittlttls
within a gridded enclosure (square, circular, or rectangular) ancl also cottsidcrs citclt
animerl's angle of orientation on a 360" scale. This allows the calctrlatiort ol'itrtgttlitt'
relationships and a determination of the angles any two indivicltrals wottltl ltitvc ltr
turn in order to be facing each other. Ludwig and Reynolds (l9t{tt) tlcsct'ibc cotttputer programs in BASIC for scvcral typcs ol'spit(iitl prtttcl'll ttttitlysis. sttt'll rls
pa ired-t; tuttl
1c.1'.
1'.r
llrpe),ltttitttllllot';tliotttl;tlltt';tllllt'ttst'rllr';ttt;tl\zt'ltlr'"'1t'tlt'tltt'l;tltottsltt|s'rllrll
where:
i:mean
unit urro:*:
O!--
When second, third, . . . nth nearest neighbors are measured, the fbllowing statistic
('lhompson, 1956) can be calculated, which is distributed as a I with 2lldegrees of
ll'ceclom:
;
trrnl
Sr l
a'rt
//
Soutltwood (1966) can be consulted for more detail on basic nearest neighbor
,rrutlysis. Ripley (1979) described the complication of edge effects caused by
rrclrcst neighbor analyses being applied in small areas. Donnelly (1978) pror itlctl firrmulae to correct for edge effects, and DeGhett (pers. commun.)
,lesct'ibccl methods lor dealing with both the effects of edges and small
nrrrrrbu's. Stapunian et ul. (1982) suggested using sampling grids where edge
,'lli'els irrc a prroblem.
t -..t.
th
S('\'('tirl
..lssttt'iuliott indicts
tt.t,t'ot ittlitttt irttlitt'.t trsctl to ntcirsut'c't ltc li'cr1 trcnCy of aSSOCiatiOn betWeen
rrr,lrrtrltrtlsn'r'tr'tr't'icttr'rl lrr'(':rirts;rrrrl Sr'lrrr'rr1rt'r (l()l'i7)irrrrl (]insbcrgandYoung
(l')')tI l'()ur (()nlnlonlvu'.t'tlrtt.lt,("',u('Irt".r'trlt'rl lrt'l,,s.lirllrlrr'rrrgtltctcrntitttllogy
,rl ( .ult.,.ut(lSt lrrr,r;,t'r 1l()li/l
CI RCT]
508
u,;
o t'
LAR STATISTICS
SPATIAL PATTERNS
ia t io rt incl e x:
509
r
Qt.,*n)12
+r,,n)j
rn:total
where:
This association index is also known as Cole's, Dice's, Sorenson's and the coherence association index. It is the association index most commonly used by etholo-
gists (Cairns and Schwager, 1987). As an example, Penzhorn (1984) used this index
in separate groups
ic'
e-x:e i glt t as
c'
ia
Iio
Lott and Minta (1983) derived this index to measure associations betwccrr
irrrlr
vidualAmerican bison.
n i nde x'.
The Half-weight, simple ratio and square root indices are allthe
samc whcrr lr.tlr
individuals (A and B) are seen during every observation period; the
twicc-werlrlrr
and simple ratio indices are identical if A and B are never observetl in
-7,
TiT,+Tb
where:
{:x:number
seprrr;rrr.
).
of
observed
in
Iirr.cxrrrrr,lt..
Festa-Bianchet (1991) measured the association of kin in her
stucly ol'billlr.rrr
sheep sociality. She recorded group composition (which could
ilclrrrlc cw(.ri;rr(l
the
of A
trr(
7:(n_l)lN_l)
-Y
-r+-y
where:
N:
As an example, Clutton-Brock r,/ ul. (1982) used this index to n-rcitsurc thc asst'rci-
ations between individual red deer. Poole ( 1989) used the firllowing nrodilication ol'
the simple ratio index to measure associations between pairs of'scxuitlly itctivc nritlc
Association
ic
-fltc
in separate groups
age and
unu).
inclex:(l)t+ t)t)
I'
rrl
g11)r.rp rrs
lrr.r.\,t.;,lrr;,
ll
'I'
st.t.rr
t )r,,,
lr/r
whcrc:
tt';rs st't'tt
t"'l'r llt'r,,t
1,,', ,,1',,',",1,t1,1t',lr,,l r
SPATIAL PATTERNS
CI RCT-]LAR STATISTICS
seen together
tions. The nun-rber of valid sightings when mother and offspring were
signedmatched-pairs
Wilcoxon
(E")
with
was compared to the expected number
ranks tests.
Mitani et al. (1991) calculatecl expected rates, durations and proportions of total
developed
time of associations between individual orang-utans by adapting models
chance was calby waser (1982). The average duration of associations expected by
culated as:
angle ol turns, lelt- and right-handedness, and the statistical significance ol-clrirrrgt's
in these parameters. (Similar systems using films or videotapes, digitizing, antl corn
puter storage and analysis are described in Chapter 9.)
sex class
of individuals
in associaAn estimate of the expected proportion of the time each individual spent
tion with conspecifics was calculated as:
P",o:4.93412P,
species
ranges of other individuals (or groups, Figure 17.6) and may, or may n()1. cont;urr
estimators
Ginsburg and Young (lgg2) suggest that several maximum likelihood
choose
if
researchers
that
recommend
they
may be needed for each stu<iy. Further,
index,
ratio
simple
the
use
not to use maximum likelihood estirnators, they should
the rnost accurate of the indices described above'
A final caution on the analysis of animal-animal spatial relationships is pronot
vided by Bekoff and corcoran (1975). They stress the importance ol knowing
Home ranges and territories are calculated liom successive locutiorrs ol'rrrrlrr
spatial relationships
erttt
The procedures 6escribed above lirr mcasuring arrinrirl irttittrtl sPittill P:t(lct'tts
irr
tlrt'lltlr0til
Ir'lrrltottsltiPs
sprrli;tl
cnvinrrurrcrrl
also be r-rsed in stuclics ol'aninrirl
svslr'tll rrl lllt' lit'lrl
tary. c,cltlsr.lr-cs ()r. licltl. l,ilr crrurrple. Wct'rlt'rr ( l()()\) ttst'rl ;t 1'llrl
hl('('l('l\()l)('t
("t't'
tl','rttit'
I
lrt'liltr )
I. ,rr.lrs1t.r.. sllltlr:rl lllrllt.uls tll lt('(' sl)lltt()\\\
r,l
uals,
(b) capture-recapture, (c) radioactive material. (d)dyes for urirrc antl lcccs.
1r'1 1rlr,,
rrr
rea.
The ohservation-trrea curve method (Figurre 17.[3)wirs tlcvclopctl lrv ( )tlunr inr(l
Kucnzlcr'(19-55) to assist in clctcrnrining thc nunrbcr tll'obscrvlrtiorrs (lot:rlrorr',)
r)ccessilry lo tlelcrrttinc tlrc lcrrilory sizcs ol'scvcrirl birrl spccics.
ll
slrrilc pt incrplc lrs lltc ctttr,'t's ufi('(l l() t'orrstrrrcl lrtt cllttlgt'rttil:rtttl lrsscss llrr'tr'llt'r
11.4.2 Animal--environment
;r
territory, an area defended against members of the same species and occ:rsiorr;rllr
other species. The designation of territories is olten the result of linding contil'rr.rrr'.
and non-overlapping home ranges, suggesting that the entire honre nurg('\ iu('
mutually exclusive and are thus assumed to be territories (e.g. wcirscls" Lot l' rt'
1e66).
system different than that in Figure 17.-5. IIc uscd photosensors in a 50x50 l' )
grid to detect the position of fish relative to ollirctory gradients in a large tank. An
on-line computer then analyzed the Xancl Ycoordinate positions of the fislr. llrc
time of occurrence of a change in position. velocity of movement, distance covcr'('(1,
where:
where:
(1969), in his laboratory study of fish cr)vir'()nr))crrt spirtial relationships, used a gritl
size (('ltrtqltt'r
.l).tlrlrt
is.
lilrrI
(l'rl'rttt'
itt lttr'lr ristlr.'tl lrl llrr.'lrtttl tlt't tt',1',t", ',,r llt,tl :rn :r\\nll)l()lit't'ttlrr'tt'srtllr
,t'lt't lr'rl lltt'()n('l)('lt't'ttl lr'tr'l otr llrr'
I / li) ()rltttn rrttrl httt'ttzlt't ( l()'r',f,rllrtlt,tttlt
',r.'r'\\.r',,1r'lt'tttttn('(l I lrt' l',, lr't,^l t', llr,rl
( ut\(';t', llrt'p()rrl ;rl ttlrt. lt lltr'lt'tttlr,r\
lr()lltl r,tt lltt' ( lll\r' trlt,'tr' r',tr lr ,trl,ltlt,,tt,rl ,,1',, r\.rlloll It,,rltt.,", 1,",', llt,ttt ,t
I
SPATIAL PATTERNS
CIR('T]LAR STATISTICS
O
o
co
NEST SITE
MALES
il "lo o-rr--*;p-rp
:ol_O'E! tr E Et 0,o
El o c El;o;o \
li.itric
;l 9io io,
=t,oiojr.p
ololol
/
ololcl
si?i
o1
I
rnilo
ii ol o ie
el:
rloi.l. ol0
olol.,o!!
slccping cllffs
Slccping eliffs
-.-- l,lorlhcrn limit o{ ronling b}, S
--- t{orthcm 6 southcrn llmit of
ronging by C
-.- Sosthorn llmit ol ronging bv N
f] lreo oI orartop bctu/con group!
It
t'ltttg.cs
(ltotlt I)t'\'ott
of
observations neces-
to rcitch thc l'Z,level varied with the species and the stage of the nesting cycle.
Srurtlcrson ( 19(r(r) suggested that live-trapping mammals would probably provide
lnstrllicicnt tlitlit to apply the observation-area curve method, but that radiotelemesru'y
'rrlrl Il;rll
lt)('r)
Ptobirhlv worrltl.
Pltrr.
CI RCTILAR STATISTICS
514
Wood
SPATIAL PATTERNS
Pewee
nearly continuous data by rapidly scan sanrpling inc'lividual locations (sec ('lrrrptcr
- 1--o/
/o
/o
e).
o;o
ts*
interval.
Most small mammal trapping designs used to determine home rilngcs rrrrtl lt.rrr
tories are grids similar to that in Figure 17.9, but with more traps. I lowcve r. I .r.k rt.
(1966) placed his traps near leatures in the environment likely to bc l'r't't1rrt'rrlt'rl l,\
weasels (Mustela nivalis) and stoats (M. erminea).
With capture recapture methods, the animal is indivi<tually ntarkctl (( 'lr;rptt.r li I
on the first capture, and its location recorcJed lor that and subsecprcrrI r.rrplrrrt.s I lr,.
t
L.
r,l
its home range;that is, it willbe trappcd whcrcvcr it gor.s givcn llrt. l.,ll,,rr
ing conditions:
100 ft
(a) The grid being as large as (or lurgcr tharr ) ils h.rrrc r';rrrr,(..
(b) On cncountering a trap thc plnrbability ol'ca1-rtruc lrcirrp lrrl,lr
t2
fl
Ee
o
{6
l:ltch itninritl hils rtn ct; trrtlclurncc 0l'lrcing crrPlrrrerl ul)()n (.n(.()uill(.rilrl,
(
rr2030ro!oCo706090
Number of observations
Fig.
,l
t'rt 1t.
17.8
trettcyol'cit1'ttttrcrttitpitrticuliu'tr':rpsitcrcllet.lstlrt, lrt.r1rrr.rrt1.l
l),)l\1,r,1
Ittr'lltur l)
SPATIAL PATTERNS
CIR('I]LAR STATISTICS
516
Observed range length. Tltc tlistrrncc lrctwccn tlre two most widely sepa-
aa
Adjusted range length. The lirrthcst tlistlncc Acr'oss the home range calculated by the boundary strip nrcthod is nreasr"rred (e.g. Figure 17.98).
Another method which does not incorporate unoccupied grid cells, or traps
bo
where the animal was not caught. has been recr.xnmended by Waser and Wiley
(1979). Getty (1981)and Lair (1987). Stickel (1954) concluded that the boundary
ca
strip method and the adjusted range length provide closer estimates of the true
"O..
home range than the other methods. Stickel also lound that trap spacing altered the
apparent size of the home range even when trap visitations are random and biologi-
d.
ea
model.
true home range and are often disregarded in delineating the home range using the
O./ /.-4
,/
'o
o
a
An individual animal's behavioral response to a trap reflects its own unique predispositions and responses to experience (Chapter 2). Balph (1968) observed the
belravioral responses of uinta ground squirrels (Citellus urnrutus) to live traps. He
IoLrnd that the trap was initially an attractant which could be enhanced by baiting;
Iroweveq because of the con{iguration of the trap there was an equal probability of
cirpture on the first encounter whether the trap was baited or not. Capture appeared
o
F'ig. 17.9
tnclltotl).
Irr irrlL'r-rrssociirtittns between sex ancl age groups in a population of Microtus penntvlvttrtit'rr.s'.llc cornl'xu'cd tlic number
(see
tlucctl a conf'lict between tlie tendencies to approach and avoid the trap on subsetltrcnt cncounters. and recaptures were influenced by the relative strengths of these
tcnrlcttcics in tlill'erent individuals (Figure 17.l0).
sex and
;u,r.'t:rlt'gorics lo lltirt cxpcctcd tkrrn thcir rclative frequency in the population. FIe
ust'rl lr clri-stlurrrc lcsl to rlclu'rnirrc wltclhcr lhcy wcrc liruncl together more fre-
t;rrt'rrllv or
lr.'ss l'r t't;rrt'rrll.v tlrrur exPcclerl lrrrtl irrli'l'r'ctl lllt'lrction ancl avclidance,
ltit'lv Slltrlt'(l()i(r)r'lrrlrot;tlt'tl ltttlltt't ott ( it'l/'s l)r()('('(lut'e.
Itt,ltr r,ltt;rl'.;rrr'ollr'rrt:rpltn('(l nrott'llrrn ()n( (' ttt llrr'rtnrt'llitl). l)('tl)itlts t'cllcctilt| ,l (1t.,It,,;rr rt I tr )n,llr' il ,r' il| | lr(}'.t' l)( )t I t()n', r )l tl', lt, '111,' t,rtr1,1' I lltt ttt'( I t) l()) r'ltlt'tt-
r('\l)('(
518
C]
I R.C I.J LA
SPATIAL PATTERNS
R STATI ST ICS
519
Columns
Atz
34
1.
2c
trv
4
o
1X 0=O
2x 2:4
3X
.o o
fi) @@
o. o
4.
aa
\t
xx
(v)
[il
illt
o(o
r,,
f!
sr
o
x
tJl
il
:T
Times Captured
6:
18
t 4X 4=16
o
5o
o(Y)
XX
2tr
9J
ci
:3.
.E
aa
5X O=0
38
: Total
(o
il
Total = 4O
Column total
' = Column center of activity
Total no.. captures
captures - 49
,r,/= 3.3
1 2 34
I a
(E
.E
c
{tt
2o
3 ._.
c,
4o
ol
_ al r _1_'
+
ol oao
38
Row total
i-::---:::
flgvv Center
Total no. = -12 =:r,l =
Of aCtiVity
Gaptures
5o
57
trig.
l7.lI
Times Captured
!6
ol
trrrcs within the grid, taking into account the number of captures at each trap site
.E
15
lrigure
17. I I ).
This can be obtained by weighting the rows and columns of the trap
C;
1357
13
Times Captured
Fig.
17.10 Distribution
rr
tvt'tt'
520
SPATIAL PATTERNS
CI R('LILAR STATISTICS
the three methods using data from red squirrels and lbund that the harmonic mean
was the only method that generated a center of activity which coincided with the
behavioral lbcal center whenever the latter could be identified by direct observa-
tion.
The center of activity does not necessarily reflect the location of anything specific (e.g. the animal's nest or burrow), but the distance between centers of activity
Ibr residents of adjacent territories. or home ralnges, might be used to infer their relative avoidance throughout the year (see Clark and Evans' 1954).
Koeppl et ul. (1975) suggested that the center of activity might better be called
the 'center of lamiliarity', based on Ruff's ( 1969) correlation of uinta ground squirrels'(Spcnnophilus urntutus) heart rates with their locations in their home ranges.
Koeppl and his colleagues also demonstrated how confidence ellipses can be calcr-rlated around the center of activity in elliptical home ranges and then used to cleterrnine the probability of finding the resident at any given location. Weeden (1965)
r-rsecl the relative number of visitations to the different quadrats in the tree sparrow's
Software packages are available lbr home range calcr.rlatit>ns ot't ttlicrocotttpttters. McPcrul is a menu-driven software package for analyzing atrinlitl locittiott tlittit
on IBM-PCs and compatibles; it calculates horne rangcs r.rsing thc cottvcx 1'rolygolt,
concave polygon. 95'2, ellipse. fcluricr and harnrottic tttcittt tttclltotls. Mcl'ltltl is;rvrril('e ttle t'. Nltliotlttl Zoololit'ltl
able from Michael Stuwc. Conscrvirtion itntl llcscrtt't'lt
Park, Frttnt Rtlyll. VA l2(r10. ll'iltltrttli is 1 prrt'kit1r' ,,, tt()lll)irtrttllt'ltit'llotttr' lilll,'('
itrlrlyscs lilr tlrc Altltlt' M;rt'inloslt. Atutlvst'r ttt, lrttlt' ,tttllll,lll()ll lltllot'r)ll('litll(tll.
tlr rl t. tlVrr;rt1it' ilrlt'r it( l to1. 1,1(l r'r'll ;tll;tl\',t', lllu\ r'lllt'lll , 1,,,11 1', )ll ,lll;llt'"t.' ;ttl.l
521
static interaction. Wildtruk 2 will huvc irrltliliorrrl rrrr:rlyscs including habitat preflerence and harmonic mean.
tr':
2P,
(P^+
PBI
where:
ranges
ual. Smith and Dobson (1994) describe a method fbr calculating asymmetrical
weighted overlap values between neighboring individuals. including a computer
program written lor Statistical Analysis Soltware (SAS Institute, Cary, NC) which
will calculate those values.
The method(s) selected for sampling animal locations and describing or calculating the home range (or territory) should be based on a knowledge of the species'
behavior. As examples: l. How easily can they be observed (nocturnal'J dense vege-
tation?), and what is the relative size of their suspected home range (e.g. m,.
hectetres, kmr)'l Will these conditions require the use of racliotelemetry'?, 2. How
rapidly and continuously do you sllspect they move throu-qhout their home range'/
I low does this affbct your choice of sampling intervals (Swihart and Slade, 1985)?
San-rpling rtrethods will be limited by constraints on your time, equipment and
rrbilities. artcl detern-rination of home range will be limited by the quality and quan-
tity ol'thc anintal location data. For example, based on simulations, Bekoff
and
Mcch ( l9tt4) suggest that fieldworkers should ascertain 100 to 200 animal locations
irt ot'rlct'to cstitttittc rcliahly ltome range area (also see White and Garrott, 1990).
l{cscrtt'cltct's sltoulcl cortstantly assess the validity of both their sampling and
lr()nrc nu)ltc tlctcrttrinrrtiort rnctlrods. I-irr cxanrple, Jones ancl Sherman ( 1983) comprttetl tlre ltottte rilnp,es ol-rttclrtlow volcs rrsirrg: l. grirl trappinu (capture-recapture)
;rttrl
lrrt';rlirlrr tl:rllr:;rrrtl
t".ltllt:llt'1,,1
rl.tl,r
tt r'r
,111
t' lr',r'rl
l.
scr,'cl'lrl
lll(ll\ttltt,rl', lt,,tttt't.tltl'('ttltr'lltr't
tltc s:ulc
,'tt(l lt:tl)|rll1| ot t;rrlirllClCtttCtl'y
VIS
18
Interpretation a nd
present atton
of results
$x
ot,
EO
bE
}E
oo
r-O
oo,
s6
Etr
J:
zb
CL
loo
200
300
I8.l
uselul in presenting your results to other people, but also help you interpret the
results and see relationships that were not apparent in the tabular data (Wolff and
Parsons, 1983). Increased insight into interpretation and new hypotheses are often
the result
of data analysis.
Diflerent visual presentations of the same data sometimes allow you to recognize
subtleties in relationships which were previously hidden; Tufte (1983) illustrates
numerous ways to display quantitative information visually.
The dendrogram, described previously for cluster analysis (Chapter 17), is obvitool. others which are useful are described below.
or.rsly a valuable
There are several types o1'graphic lormats which have proven valuable in interpreting resr"rlts. Thc simple scatter diagram (scattergram) is generally used to graph cor-
rclittion data. The interpretation of the graph is dependent on the location and
tlistribution ol'the points relative to the axes (Chapter 14).
lirr
lo lltelr tlcrrsrlv
NS
further inspection.
18.2
EPRESENTATIo
Fig.
it
eO
gP
Discovery consists in seeing what everybody else has seen and thinking
what nobody else has thought. [Albert Szent-Gyorgy]
'Science'interprets. That means that a number of minds agree that in a
given phenomenon there is something that occurs with regularity, can be
reproduced, and can be traced back to recognizable causes, something,
indeed, that can be 'interpreted'. [Eigen and Winkler, 1981:21]
UAL
rrr lltt.rrrrrtl
r(",(',r,lr
1rr,r;r't I lr1'slrrtlVrrrl'
l't.CtltrCItCy 1t0ly-
524
VISUAL REPRESENTATIONS
52.s
100
80
s
o
0)
a
o
,/
60
o
a
E,
40
O-
,(
lrJ
2
o
o-
20
\
o
1-4
5-8
9-12
13-16
17-20
21-24
'.'
\ \
0)
,z
.to
o
c,
=
z6
N-32
25-28
bJ
=4
trig. 18.2 Mean scores made in testing, 24 hours alter the imprinting experience, by
ducklings which had been given the imprinting experience at cliflerent ages (from
Hess, 1962).
fiequency distribution. Points should generally not be connected if the distribution is not continuous or if the sample points are distantly separated. Connection
oLls
<qto20
(,PRX2PR' (5PR'
(,OPR'
POPULAT'ON S'ZE
irnplies that the line between the points is a reasonable representation of the missing
data.
Hess (1962, 1972). in his studies
of irnprinting,
model (decoy) lor a limited period early in life and later tested then-r lbr the imprinting response (Figure 18.2). The frequency polygon shows that the highest percentage
of positive
at l3-16
Frequency polygons are sometimes used with discontinuous cluta to sliow rclative changes from one condition to another, while the identity ol'scvcral intlivicluals
etre maintained. Figure lti.3 shows the nrcln nunrbcr ol'
courtship displays lor I I rnale guppies (futet'iliu raticuluta) at dill'crcnl 1'roprrlrrliorr
llurttr.tu
rurtrur.t') as
lrt'lrvcctt
densities. As the population clensity increasecl bcyontl two pairs. thc nrcrrn rrurrrl'rcr'
ancl
l{crrnkirrtl,
tttlrnrre r'(l"rrrr
I 974).
Scvct'ttl I't'cr;tte ttcy l)()lYr'()tts t'rttt lrr't'otttllittr'rl nrlo:r ',rrl'l(' 1,rlrIl; ltr slrott t'lr;n),'t'r
itt sevt'ltltlt'pt'ntlt'nl r';tnlrlrlt':; tt'llrttvt'l() iur rrrlr'pt'1111r'nl \.lrr,rlrl,' I t1'rttr' li"i .l rllrrs
rr.
<ll.
itfrlr,_
rrt,lr.
VISUAL REPRESENTATION
526
521
o
UJ
cr
5
o
roo
o
o
&.
t80
U
ao
i60
(,
o
iao
rn
=
o20
F
IE
co
o
u
Fig.
9,,t0 .n.12 13-14 15,16 t7.r8 19-20 21-22 23-24 25-26 27-28 29-30 31-32 33-34 35-36 37-38 39-4
AGE OF INFANTS (DAYS AFTER BIRTH}
18.4
of l4 per two-day
variable are illustrated, the standard error of the mean (Figure 18.6A;generally pre-
their responses to male and control facial chemicals were not significantly different
(Figure 18.64.).
I rr:
18.68).
Itr,, rlttll('tt',ton,tl tr'r lot rlt,tl't;tnl', iilt' rrllt'rr r',r'rl lo slllr',lr,rlt' llrt' tlrtt't lrorr,rl
tr".ltotl'.("t ,tl ttt,ltr t,lrt,tl .tttttrr.rl', ttr ol('nl,llrr)n '.lu(lr( , l ,,l , r.rtrrllt', I r1'rrr,' lli li
528
VISUAL REPRESENTATIONS
529
RIGHTING ON SURFACE
=
o
a
(o
PIVOTING
=f,
::]:)':;;:^[JT
P VOT NG
O)
'-C
(o
c
o
O
U)
lz
(J
o
-o
lo
c(o
0)
female
male
control
100
c(o
80
.=
E
(little or
60
o)
O)
(!
c
o
o
ighting)
40
0)
.]I]IVPING (ACROSS
o-
CLIFF)
[.
20
9<d
B
Fig.
18.6
I
ll
AGE IN
9=d
I rr' lli
13
15
t7
DAYS
I97-5).
530
VISUAL REPRESENTATIONS
INTERPRETATIONANDPRESE,NTATIONOFRESULTS
53r
DOWN-UP
GRUNT-WHISTLE
l-1l'
J
l--
,/
Fig.
vector
8.9 Orientations,
present. Thc cllstance between concentric circles is one foot; a swittttttittp'. lcrrl
measures slightly less from
1975).
during selected
and positions of the male green-winged teal relative to the |-emale
courtship displays (Figure 18.9).
transitions
Kinemattic graphs (often called flow diagrams) are useful to illustrate
the use of
in
detail'
between behaviors (see Figure 8.3)' Sustare (1978) discussed'
Figure
various systems diagrams including information networks (e'g' sociogram
and kinematic
10.14), association diagrams (Figure 18.12), state-space diagrams
the sexual
show
to
graph
kinematic
graphs. Halliday (1975) used two types of
includes
l8'10
[-igure
behavior sequence in the smooth newt (i"r'irurus vulguri.r).
reatlcr to'visualdrawings of the male and female, which increases the ability ot-the
ize,the sequence through the orientation of the two
sexes.
Figure
l8.ll
(
t'olttPttlct'Ptotlttt'transitions in percentirgcs. Malalirnt arrtl lwcctlic l()t'il)tlcst't'ibc
lll('tlttttllrt't ol
t'itt'lt'illl(l
lt
lts
tli'pir'lt'rl
is
tion rtl'kinctqgr.:rlrs in which clrclr stlrtc
lrt'lrt't't'tt
li.cs l.rctwcerr r.ircles irrrlit.lrtirrl tlrr.rrr;rl,rriltrrlr'rrl llrt'lt,ill'.tlt(tll lttrlrltlttltly
lltt'slttlt's.
('rtlccptual modcls
erre a
nteans
ip wlrich the beliavior(s) ol- interest occurs (see tlie t.noclcl cliscttssctl itt ('ll;r1rlt'r .'1
'l'[cy 1ll1lw y9u to lit togetl-rcr pieces of infi>rmtttiotr abottt it bcliitviol'lllsYsl('lrr (('I'
rcprocluctivc bclurvior) in an attclrpt to undcrstettttl bcttct'tllcir ciltlscli lttttl lttttt
liprrs lrrrtl illustratc thc irrtcrrclltionships bctwectt bcltitvitlrs. Motlcls ttt.e l't'ltt't;tll\
ltypollrcticll irnrl tcutporlry. bcitrg chitngetl as Ilcw t'csttlts c()lllc lirrtlr. l'itt t'rrttttPlt',
rrrl('l
li:rc;crrtls(l()76)1tnr1'rosctlllttotlcl(l;igtrrclti.l2)tocxplititltltcoccttt't't'll('t'()l
tttotlt'l
l'rtrrkt'
lltt'
rrrPti'u'r. bclurvior tlrrrirrg lltc irrcrrbirlion itt lrcrrirtg gtrlls. llitcrctttls
rrrlp'svslr.rrrs'.'srrlrsyslclts'. ittttl 'ttcls'wlrrt'lr ltt'tt'l;ttt's to'l irlllctgctr's ( I()\0)t':ttltt't
Sotttr'llltt,',,,,11t,
1rrrnr('lrl',.ltttl
ttt,', lt,ttrt.tll.
r,lll
lrt
tt',,'.1 'l',,lll,llo1'lt',
u1
WAVE AND
WHIP
STATI C
DISPLAY
lrig. I ti.l
Halliday, 1975).
RETREAT
D IS
PLAY
rttctaphors to help visualize, and often better understand, behavioral processes. For
('xample, Lorenz's original (1950), and revised (1981), psycho-hydraulic model ol'
rrrotivation has appeared to some to be analogous to a flush toilet (e.g. Goodenough
t't u\.,1993); however, it served as the basis for much early theorizing about innate
;rrtitrral behavior. For example, discussing Lorenz's early models, Thorpe (1919)
te
EE
SPERMATOPHORE
TRAN
SF
ER
+\rFF
ie'6
CREEP &
FOLLOW
Some of his models were obviously analogous only - but the very
of 'analogy'is its imperfections which challenges rethinking.
One did not suppose them to be'true'but they were valuable in being
OUIVER
essence
TOUCH TAIL
highly suggestive.
DEPOSITION
Fig.
18.10
It:t'u'c
I
BRAKE &
TOUCH TAIL
PUSH BACK
IThorpe, I979:I03J
Irkcwisc. giultc theory models, such as Prisoner's Dilernma (e.g. Axelrod, 1984),
sct'vetl its a usclirl rnetaphors (Sigmund. 1993) for envisioning animal conflict
+\ETrTi3il,
fl
q
tlrtecl:
trurlc
rt
rrrlrlt.llrr,,, ll(.tltrll69-
r{,tll('\(';il( lt
( rrg1t1'1rl tt,tlttt,,,l,'l',,,11,'nlr',t,11,,7,1 ,',lt, lrtt'nrttrlr'/r rrlttrlt,tt,.,.tlrt(.,.,1(.(ltttttt;tlltr.
VISUAL REPRESENTATIoN
External
Environmental
Variables
(EEV)
i
I
I
Fig. 18.13
I
I
principal social system variables (PSSV) and social dynamics (changes in PSSV
over time)). The dotted arrow takes note of the lact that EEVs also affect SP. but
c
t
on a slower (evolutionary) time scale than the effects on PSSVs, which may
of an individual through learning (from Crook et al..
matical terms to enable tests of their validity; that is, they should result in lalsifiable
lrypotheses (e.g. Drickamer and Vessey, 1982). Predictive models are built from data
sets. Generally, the larger and more accurate the data set, the more accurate the
rnodel; however, Gauoh (1993) has argued that a model can be more accurate than the
tlata used to build it since the model amplifles hiddern patterns and discards noise.
Predictive models can be rather general, such as Regelmann's (1984) model for
Itow competing individuals should distribute themselves between food resource
pittches, or they can be more specific such as Altmann's (1980) mathematical model
cxpressing the relationship
of
(letili).
corollirry on lhc input lor incubation. This input is fed
llrrottlllt rt tutil (/). rtcccssrrly to crplain tlrc inhibition o['settling and building
rvlrt'rt li'erlllttk ttutlcltcs c\l)c('tiur('v. Ilrc cllt'ct ol'll'ctlhlck tliscrcpancy on Iy'
(:rrrtl /). /:,:rrtrl /'. trtn lrt'tr';rrl llorrr llrc iur()\\'s.'l lrc rrlrin syslcnls rnutually
\tllrPll'1''()ll(';lll()llrt't. /'rrlltrlttl'ltl lrr01q111:tstttlt'tIrrPliVr'llr'ltlt'"'i0ttt tlurlttglt
rlt.'tttlrtlrtll()r(|l \';tttrl / /'trrtr lrr':rtlrr'rrlr'rlrlrrt'rllYlr\t'rlt'ltrlrlslirrrttll likcrltrsl
l.llll ol lr,ll,t"llr"' / (.ttl.tl',,,1,1'',lttttttl,tlt'rl lrr rlr',ltttl',ur,t", ollrt'l tlr;rtt rlr.litit.ttl
l,',',11,,r, l. lr,'ur llr,', lrrlr lr (lrntrr ll,t, r, n,l,, l,lit')
lrrr clle'r'cncc copy or
incubation ol a herring gull. The {ixccl actiort pitttcrns ut'c itt tltc t'igltt coltrltttt
and superimposed control systcnrs tll'first lrrrtl sccorttl otrlct'ltt'c t'elltesr'ttlerl icll
ol thcnr (IV=inctrbtrtiort syslctu. /i cscrrllt'\y\l('nr. /' ptt't'ttttt1, s\sl('ltt I I ltt' l;rr1't'
vcrticttl ilt't()ws trl)t'esct)l olit'nl;tlion t otnltottr'ttl', tr tllt tr'1':tttl lo lltr' ttr'sl
Itrt'rrlrlrlirrl,is llrt't'orrsrlrrrrlrlorv rrr'l I t't'rll,,r, l. ',lrnrrtl,rltotl ltr,ttt llt,'t lttlt lt.,tllt't
lrt'ttt1'ptor't'rsr'tl rrt //'. llorrs l() it uilll (( / I ult,'t,'tl t. r,rtlrl),ttt'rl trtllt ('\lx'( l,tlt( \.
tii
VISUAL REPRESENTATION
RANK
1970
The type of visual representation employed and its value in interpreting results are
limited only by the ingenuity of the researcher. Simplicity in illustrations is generally
1971
420
022
a virtue worth pursuing. For example, Bercovitch (1988) used a pie-chart to illus-
06o
trate the percentages of the different types of consort change-overs (e.g. feed, fight)
in adult male baboons. Patterson (1917) used a simple diagram which clearly
o2o
530
two-year observation period (Figure 18.14). The positional and relative extent of
the changes in rank order are obvious and conducive to further interpretation.
Hutt and Hutt (1910) followed up on a suggestion by Altmann (1965) and
012
013
behavioral sequences. The model was first developed by Chomsky (1957) for the
study of psycholinguistics. The model consists of the sequential partitioning of a
sentence into its constituent parts based on its explicit meaning. The result is a tree
diagram of sequentially smaller clusters of words that together carry the meaning of
the sentence. This hierarchical model, discussed by R.Dawkins (1976a) and
023
432
message.
This difficulty is illustrated by applying the analysis to the sentence'We fed her
dog bones', which can have two meanings; hence it can be diagrammed in two ways
(Figure 18. 16).
530
383
013
/
/..
,//
015
010
572
613
380
019
321
330
007
624
017
523 /
_y
If one's
'lit stttttttt:tt'ize, rrll ol' tltr'sr' lt't'ltttirlttr.'s ol \ lsurrl tt'1111",1'111,r1ro11 (lrrrrl ollrt'rs rrol
tlist'ttsst'tl)t':ttt;ttrltttlltt'tttlt'tPtt'l;rll()n ()l r(",ull'. llr,'\ ',lr,,rrl,ll,, , \,unnl('(ltrol orrl\
017
As Dale (1976) states, the ambiguity does not arise from a difference in words or
440
015
in their ordet but rather from a dillerence in their constituent structure. Do we have
suggests that
563
005
531
546
408
395
053
il1
518
023
425
399
018
057
I rr ll'i l.l
ol
11111;1t,ltt,tl
l'.tllr
t ,iltt
l'r'r)
1,,11 1,,
lrr/{l(rl,r.,lrr.rl
model'l Does your interpretation help you to tlcvclopr nr:w models and generate new
hypotheses? At this point it is again importunt to consider what other research has
SSSeq
,/l\
/t\ /\ t
Prep
lnt
Wa
ASS
/\
Dr
lnt
Bi
lnt
Bw
Aoo Bw
Pre
shown.
Co
Co
Wa
,/\
gE_iw
species. You may discover that your results have a bearing on a general concept or
current theoretical issues. The importance of results are often unforeseen when a
study begins, but become apparent as the study proceeds and finally come to light as
qi
P.
sequence
We
-.Aed
know where you began, and you think you know what your results mean. Even
lhough your results were seemingly conclusive, your study could have been better.
I{e-evaluate the economics, efficiency and validity of your methods. Did you
plctccl.
hor
dog boner
-4r
her dog
-,A't.
her
Yrru've now reached the point where you can re-evaluate the entire study. You
sclect the proper species, study area, behavioral units, data-collection method,
rrnalytical tests, etc.'J Re-evaluate your study at each phase of the ethological
lpproach (Chapter l). You should improve your methods with each study, but
tltis can only come through a critical re-evaluation of each study as it is com-
I8.4 RE-EVALUATION
dog
III
dog
to understand better the particular bchavior stutliccl. but itlso to pttt it irt pcrspcctive
relative to the various lcvcls ot'bchuvior (('ht1'rte r' | ).
Art'lltt'
bones
secl l(lr tltltcr hchitviors. itrrrl spccics illr(l ttnrlt't olltt't t'ttt it()lllllr'lllill t'olltlilitrtts'.'
Arc tlre l'csrtltst'otlsistt'lll witlr;r ('()ll('('l)lttltlttt"rlt'l .'t r'tlrt;ll'lt'l.t ttrt'lll il l)lt'rltt ltr''t"
\irrr rtt:ry wunt to rcvisc or restatc your hypotheses whether your results were posilivc or ncglrtivc. Tcsting rcvisccl hypotheses can help reinlorce positive results and
rsolrrlc llrc sotrrcc ol'ncgutivc resulls. Ytru might choose to isolate additional vari,rlrles ol tcsl tlrc cxlcrrurl virlirlity ol'yotrr rcsults on othcr spccies.
Wlrt'tlteryott terisr'.r'eslltlc.()t !('neI'lltcItcwltypotltc:.ics.y()r.rilrcIl()wbackatthe
l,r'l'itutinl'ol lltt'r'lltolo1,i1';11:tllPto;rclt t'vt'lr'(('lr;tPlt't I). r't'rrtly lo bcgitt irgitin. This
Ittnt'yt)lt ;tI('ilt()l('('\l)('tl('n(('(1.;rttrl. lr()Pt'lrrlly. trtsr'r
Sltr';rklttr ,'' ,rn r'\olttttottltt\ lrtttl,rl,t:.1 . I ( ) Wtl'-,rtt ollr'rr'tl tlrt' lirlltrtvittB
ttr',t1'lrl
Love the animals for themselves first, thell strain for general
explanations, and, with good fortune, discoveries will follow.
APPENDIX A
lf
don't, the love and the pleasure will have been enou gh. Jwilson,
they
1994.
191
For ethologists, having had the pleasure of observing animals and learnedwhat they
do is generally exceeclingly rewarding without having yet fully understood vthv.
tables
t7
0l
1l
22
36
424
5
6
7
8
9
l0
Ir
2
rI
14
t.5
r6
ll
I ti
()
l
)0 I
120
720
5040
40320
362 880
3 628 800
39916800
479001 600
6?.27 020800
87 t78 29t200
l
-1
I tlttr
(x
)l{ I 76
6-10 (x x )